Technical Documentation 810

Technical Documentation
N0363
To navigate please use bookmarks.
Date: 20.01.2012
Product Specification
MU order no. 36608 SC order no. stock Sales Company
Decanter
Machine no. Description
Including: Motor power supply
EE1 VFD Starter Y/D Starter

50 Hz 400 V
EE3 Flowmeter mag inductive 440 V
60 Hz
EE4 Flex hose for feed pipe Other voltage
EE5 Liquid outlet downwards
EE7 Adapter for solids outlet Language of

manuals
Quantity Item no Description

Additionals
Separator
Basic Separator S01, Type AFPX 810XGV-14CG Article number 881264-04-01
Including:
EE1 Starter Not included Motor power supply
EE2 Control system EE2 Starter and control VNPX 810 50 Hz 400 V
EE3 Local valve panel Automatic CIP 60 Hz 440 V
EE4 Operating water system Other voltage
EE5 Valve/Fitting Automatic CIP
EE7 Flow meter for 20 m³/h
Language of Spanish
EE8 Pump unit for sludge tank
manuals
EE10 Pump unit for oil - on request
EE11 Pump unit for stick water for AFPX407 and UVPC510 - on request
EE12 Pump unit for feed - on request
Quantity Item no Description

Additionals
Comments
Componentlist N0363 (EE2, EE3, EE4, EE5, EE7)
Item number * Name Description Qty Supplier Goods receiver

9611416304 AIR-ACTUATOR LKLA Ø85 25-63.5/NW25-50 NO 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9611416304 AIR-ACTUATOR LKLA Ø85 25-63.5/NW25-50 NO 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9611416470 BRACKET FOR LKLA Ø85 FOR LKB VALVES 25-63.5/NW25-50 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9611416470 BRACKET FOR LKLA Ø85 FOR LKB VALVES 25-63.5/NW25-50 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9611444500 BUTTERFLY VALVE LKB INCH W/W 25 EPDM 304 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9611444510 BUTTERFLY VALVE LKB INCH W/W 38 EPDM 304 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9612047501 BRACKET WITH HANDLE 1.1 FOR LKB-VALVES 25-63.5/NW25-50 1 41708 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
9612141403 SIGHT GLASS IN-LINE, 51 LKGG-1, EN1.4301, 51.6X1.55, EPDM, WELD, INCH TUBES 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9612141403 SIGHT GLASS IN-LINE, 51 LKGG-1, EN1.4301, 51.6X1.55, EPDM, WELD, INCH TUBES 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9612220001 NON-RETURN VALVE LKC-2 ISO W 25 EPDM 304 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9612510702 INDICATION F. LKLA Ø85 KPL. WITH MICRO SWITCH OFF ISE65-N82 NO 1 41708 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
9612628149 LKB-ISO-W/W-25-304L-EPDM W/HANDLE-2 POS. 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9612628339 LKB ISO WELDING ENDS 25 EPDM 304 LKLA ø85 NC 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9613320004 UNIQUE SSV 51/2 INCH 210 WELDED-WELDED 0.8/BLASTED HNBR CHANGE OVER NC 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9613323462 UNIQUE SSV 51/2 INCH 300 WELDED 0.8/BLASTED HNBR SHUT OFF NO 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9614063109 LKC-2 ISO W51 FPM 304 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680124472 MEMBRANE SAMPLE VALVE TYPE P FOR 1" PIPE,MAN,CLIP ON, EPDM, 6 BAR 1 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680124472 MEMBRANE SAMPLE VALVE TYPE P FOR 1" PIPE,MAN,CLIP ON, EPDM, 6 BAR 1 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680154172 SOLENOID VALVE 6213, 3/4'', 3/4'', EPDM, BSP, 2013 1 12213 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680154172 SOLENOID VALVE 6213, 3/4'', 3/4'', EPDM, BSP, 2013 1 12213 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680155670 FILTER KLINGER: KP-4758, 3/4" BSP, 110MM, AISI316 1 12002 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680155670 FILTER KLINGER: KP-4758, 3/4" BSP, 110MM, AISI316 1 12002 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680155674 LEVEL SWITCH E&H: LIQUIPHANT T, 1 1/2" CLAMP, 24VDC, FTL20H-0TCJ2B 1 15604 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
9680155674 LEVEL SWITCH E&H: LIQUIPHANT T, 1 1/2" CLAMP, 24VDC, FTL20H-0TCJ2B 1 15604 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
9680155685 NEEDLE VALVE UNIVALVE: NEEDLE VALVE, UNI-35462-01-020, 3/4" BSP 2 13075 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680158425 FLOW TRANSMITTER E&H: PROMAG 10H50-1F0A1AA0A5AA 2" ISO CLAMP 24VDC 4-20mA 1 15604 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
9680158991 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER E&H: TR45-BB5G1S2HG4000 30MM 1 1/2" CLAMP 0-120DEGC 1 15604 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
9680158991 TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER E&H: TR45-BB5G1S2HG4000 30MM 1 1/2" CLAMP 0-120DEGC 1 15604 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
9680159686 EE7-X AFPX FLOW MTR 20 M3/H 1 CHANGE
9680161722 EE4-P14 SOFT WATER PIPING TO B04 1 16936
9680161733 EE4-P15 SOFT WATER PIPING B04 TO S01 1 16936
9680161738 EE4-X AFPX810 OPERATING WATER SYSTEM 1 16936 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
9680161744 EE5-P13 HW PIPING TO S01 1 16936
9680161749 EE5-P12 CW PIPING TO S01 1 16936
9680162052 EE5-P11 CIP OUTLET PIPING 1 16936
9680162054 EE5-P10 CIP PIPING TO S01 & B10 1 16936
9680162055 EE5-P09 CIP INLET PIPING 1 16936
9680162056 EE5-P08 STICK WATER PIPING 1 16936
9680162061 EE5-P03 FAT PIPING -S01 TO B10 1 16936

9680162063 EE5-P02 PRODUCT FEED PIPING 1 16936
9680162065 EE5-X AFPX810 VALVE + FITTING AUTO CIP 1 16936 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
9680162178 EE3 AFPX810 LOCAL VALVE PANEL AUTOMATIC CIP, DWG: 9680016260 1 12183
9680162179 EE3-X AFPX810 LOCAL VALVE PANL AUTOMATIC CIP, DWG: 9680016260 1 12183 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
9680162297 EE2-X AFPX810 CONTROL SYSTEM AND STARTER, 400V/50HZ, AUTO CIP, DWG: 9680016260 1 12183 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
9680162298 EE2 AFPX810 CONTROL SYSTEM AND STARTER, 400V/50HZ, AUTO CIP, DWG: 9680016260 1 12183
9680162300 FREQUENCY CONV. FOR AFPX 810LS 1 CHANGE
TE10B20201 SANIMIDGET 360° F.WELDING 1 1 41708 Alfa Laval Copenhagen A/S
190603 SEAL RING SMS 38 NBR 1 41708 TEMP CUSTOMER FOR ALL SUPPLY ORDERS
190613 NUT SMS 25 SB 304 OMLØBER 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
190616 NUT SMS 51 SB 304 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
190616 NUT SMS 51 SB 304 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
190683 BEND 90 ISO 25, R=1XD, T=1.2 EN1.4307, OD/ID: SB, WELD, ISO 2037 4 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
190704 LINER ISO 25 SMS, EN1.4307 WELD, SB, ISO 2037 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
190711 MALE PART ISO 25 SMS, EN1.4307 WELD, SB, THREAD: ROUND TYPE, ISO 2037 2 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
190716 MALE PART ISO 76.1 SMS, WELD EN1.4307, SB, THREAD: ROUND TYPE, ISO 2037 2 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
191652 TEE ISO 25, T=1.2, EN1.4404 WELD, OD/ID: POLISHED, ISO 2037 2 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
211053 A13MHM-1 1/2-S Single Hinge Clamp, 1" & 1.5" 1 41708 TEMP CUSTOMER FOR ALL SUPPLY ORDERS
211054 A13MHM-2"-S Single Hinge Clamp 2" 304. 2 41708 TEMP CUSTOMER FOR ALL SUPPLY ORDERS
3131708952 REDUCER ISO 51/25 CONCEN. EN1.4404, T=1.2, WELD, OD/ID: SB, ISO 2037 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
3131708956 REDUCER ISO 76.1/51 CONCEN. EN1.4404, T=1.6, WELD, OD/ID: SB, ISO 2037 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
3131902101 BEND 90 ISO 38, R=1XD, T=1.2 EN1.4307, OD/ID:SB, WELD, ISO 2037 3 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
3180190391 TEE ISO 38/25, SHORT OUTLET/ REDUCED, EN1.4404, T=1.2, OD/ID: POLISHED 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
3180190392 TEE ISO 51/25, T=1.2, SHORT OUTLET/REDUCED, EN1.4404, OD/ID: POLISHED 2 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
61312034 OPERATING WATER TANK W/SUPPORT 1 11811 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
6133545325 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR Ø25 MM 1 11627 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
6133545376 FLEXIBLE CONNECTOR Ø76MM 1 11627 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9611300382 UNION COMPL. ISO 25 SMS, WELD EN1.4307, SB, NBR, THREAD: ROUND, ISO 2037 2 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9611300663 BEND 45 ISO 51, WELD, EN1.4307 (51X1.2), OD/ID:SB, ISO 2037 2 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9611310201 CLAMP FERRULE ISO 38, EN1.4307 WELD, SB, ISO 2852 1 41708 TEMP CUSTOMER FOR ALL SUPPLY ORDERS
9611310201 CLAMP FERRULE ISO 38, EN1.4307 WELD, SB, ISO 2852 1 41708 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9639110143 RUBBER WATER TUBE, RIBBED 1" 6 BAR 4 12105 TEMP CUSTOMER FOR ALL SUPPLY ORDERS
9680113061 HOSE CLAMP TYPE MC 25 1" SS 2 12120 TEMP CUSTOMER FOR ALL SUPPLY ORDERS
9680123425 MALE PART 3/4"RG L=40 EN1.4404 2 15178 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680124381 HANDLE, MSV EN1.4408 1 17038 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680124381 HANDLE, MSV EN1.4408 1 17038 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680126084 SLANGEBÅND 30 - 40MM 6 12190 TEMP CUSTOMER FOR ALL SUPPLY ORDERS
9680156420 SOCKET REDUCED DAMSTAHL: SOCKET REDUCED, 2"-1 1/4", 24153 1 13046 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
9680156422 SOCKET REDUCED DAMSTAHL: SOCKET REDUCED, 1 1/4"-3/4", 24085 1 13046 EH. Mejerimontage ApS
Instruction book
High Speed Separator
AFPX 810XGV-14CG/74CG
Product No. 881264-04-01/3

Book No. 593308-02 Rev. 2
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00
Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2010 July 01

Original instructions
This publication or any part there of may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
2
593308-02
Contents
1 Read This First .............................................................. .9
2 Safety Instructions .................................................. .11

2.1 Warning signs in text ............................................. 16
2.2 Environmental issues ............................................ 17
2.3 Requirements of personnel.................................. 18
3 Basic Principles Of Separation ....................... .19

3.1 Separation By Gravity............................................ 19
3.2 Centrifugal Separation .......................................... 20
3.3 Temperatures ........................................................... 20
4 Design ............................................................................... .21

4.1 Overview .................................................................... 21
4.1.1 Mechanical power transmission .................................... 22
4.1.2 Motor ............................................................................. 23
4.1.3 Process main parts........................................................ 24
4.1.4 Operating water module compact (OWMC) ................. 27
4.1.5 Cyclone ......................................................................... 33
4.1.6 Flushing ......................................................................... 34
4.2 Sensors....................................................................... 35
4.2.1 Check points ................................................................. 36
4.3 Separating Function ............................................... 38
4.3.1 Normal separation ......................................................... 38
4.3.2 Sediment discharge cycle............................................. 41
4.4 Factors influencing the separation result ...... 45
4.4.1 Viscosity and density..................................................... 45
4.4.2 Interface position ........................................................... 45
4.4.3 Size and shape of sediment particles ........................... 47
4.4.4 Sediment content .......................................................... 47
4.4.5 Throughput .................................................................... 47
4.4.6 Properties of the sediment ............................................ 47
4.4.7 Disc stack ...................................................................... 47
4.4.8 Counter pressure regulation .......................................... 48
4.4.9 Sediment discharge frequency ..................................... 48
4.5 Sediment discharge interval ............................... 49
4.5.1 Different sediment discharge volumes.......................... 49
4.5.2 Time interval .................................................................. 49
5 Operating Instructions.......................................... .51

5.1 Operating routine .................................................... 51
5.1.1 Before first start ............................................................. 51
5.1.2 Selection of gravity disc ................................................ 53
5.1.3 Ready for start ............................................................... 56
593308-02
5.1.4 Start ............................................................................... 58
5.1.5 Running ......................................................................... 60
5.1.6 Normal stop ................................................................... 63
5.1.7 Emergency stop ............................................................ 64
5.2 CIP (Cleaning In Place).......................................... 65
6 Service, Dismantling, Assembly ..................... .67

6.1 Periodic Maintenance ............................................ 67
6.1.1 Maintenance intervals.................................................... 67
6.1.2 Maintenance procedures............................................... 67
6.1.3 Tightening of screws...................................................... 68
6.1.4 Service kits .................................................................... 68
6.1.5 Cleaning ........................................................................ 68
6.2 Maintenance Log ..................................................... 69
6.3 Dismantling ............................................................... 72
6.3.1 Introduction.................................................................... 72
6.3.2 Tools............................................................................... 73
6.3.3 Frame hood and outlet device....................................... 74
6.3.4 Bowl (purifier) ................................................................ 76
6.3.5 Bowl (concentrator) ....................................................... 77
6.3.6 Driving device vertical ................................................... 89
6.3.7 Horizontal driving device ............................................... 98
6.3.8 ....................................................................................... 99
6.4 Actions Before Assembly ................................... 105
6.4.1 Cleaning .................................................................... 105
6.4.2 Inspection for corrosion ............................................. 106
6.4.3 Inspection for cracks ................................................. 107
6.4.4 Inspection for erosion ................................................ 108
6.4.5 Exchange of frame feet ............................................... 111
6.4.6 Bowl spindle taper and bowl body nave taper............ 113
6.4.7 Lock ring: wear and damage ...................................... 114
6.4.8 Guide surfaces ............................................................ 116
6.4.9 Lock ring; priming
(non-food applications only) ........................................ 119
6.4.10 Cyclone; seal rings ...................................................... 121
6.4.11 Lubrication of bowl parts ............................................. 122
6.4.12 Bowl hood seal ring ..................................................... 123
6.4.13 Distributor insert .......................................................... 124
6.4.14 Wear liner in sliding bowl bottom................................. 125
6.5 Common maintenance directions .................... 126
6.5.1 Ball and roller bearings................................................ 126
6.6 Assembly .................................................................. 130
6.6.1 Driving device horizontal ............................................. 130
6.6.2 Driving device vertical ................................................. 139
6.6.3 Bowl ............................................................................. 151
6.6.4 In- and outlet and frame hood ..................................... 168
593308-02
6.7 Actions after assembly ....................................... 172
6.7.1 Control of machine plates and safety labels .............. 172
6.8 Oil Change ............................................................... 176
6.8.1 When changing oil....................................................... 176
6.8.2 Oil change procedure ................................................. 178
6.8.3 Lubrication chart, general ........................................... 179
6.8.4 Recommended lubricants ........................................... 181
6.8.5 Recommended lubricating oils ................................... 185
6.8.6 Recommended oil brands ........................................... 186
6.9 Lifting instructions ............................................... 188
6.9.1 Lifting the separator .................................................... 188
6.9.2 Lifting the bowl ............................................................ 190
6.9.3 Other parts .................................................................. 191
6.10 Operating water module (OWMC) ................... 192
6.10.1 Dismantling (MS-service) ............................................ 193
6.10.2 Assembly (MS-service) .............................................. 195
6.10.3 Air tank ....................................................................... 196
7 Fault Finding ...............................................................197

7.1 Mechanical functions .......................................... 197
7.1.1 Smell............................................................................ 197
7.1.2 Noise ........................................................................... 197
7.1.3 Separator vibrates ....................................................... 198
7.1.4 Starting power too high ............................................... 198
7.1.5 Starting power too low ................................................. 199
7.1.6 Speed too low.............................................................. 199
7.1.7 Starting time too long .................................................. 199
7.1.8 Water in worm gear housing........................................ 199
7.2 Separating functions............................................ 200
7.2.1 Unsatisfactory separation result .................................. 200
7.2.2 Outgoing heavy phase contains light phase............... 200
7.2.3 Light phase discharges through heavy phase
outlet (broken liquid seal) ............................................ 201
7.2.4 Unsatisfactory sediment discharge............................. 201
7.2.5 Bowl fails to open for sediment discharge .................. 201
7.2.6 Bowl opens accidentally during operation .................. 202
7.2.7 Liquid flows through the bowl casing drain
and/or sediment outlet................................................. 202
7.2.8 Too much process liquid in sediment.......................... 202
7.2.9 High pressure in heavy phase liquid outlet ................. 203
7.2.10 Air intermingles with the cleaned liquid ...................... 203
7.2.11 Bowl clogged with sediment ....................................... 203
7.2.12 Sediment in frame parts .............................................. 203
7.2.13 OWMC related faults ................................................... 204
593308-02
8 Technical Reference ........................................... .205
8.1 Product description .............................................. 205
8.1.1 Directives and standards ............................................ 206
8.2 Technical data ....................................................... 207
8.3 Connection List ...................................................... 208
8.4 Interface Description ........................................... 211
8.4.1 Scope .......................................................................... 211
8.4.2 References................................................................... 211
8.4.3 Definitions .................................................................... 212
8.4.4 Goal ............................................................................. 212
8.4.5 Description of separator modes .................................. 213
8.4.6 Handling of connection interfaces............................... 214
8.5 Quality requirements ........................................... 227
8.5.1 Operating Water .......................................................... 227
8.5.2 Compressed Air........................................................... 228
8.6 Drawings .................................................................. 229
8.6.1 Basic size drawing ...................................................... 229
8.6.2 Foundation drawing ..................................................... 232
8.6.3 Interconnection diagram ............................................. 233
8.7 Electric motor......................................................... 234
8.7.1 Motor drive data .......................................................... 236
8.8 Guidelines for frequency converter drives ... 238
8.9 Dimensioning of a frequency converter......... 242
8.9.1 Dimensioning and programming of a
frequency converter .................................................... 242
8.9.2 Selecting the motor with correct voltage
and frequency for a variable frequency drive ............. 242
8.9.3 Dimensioning of a frequency converter for
an actual application ................................................... 245
8.9.4 Programming the frequency converter........................ 246
8.9.5 Braking methods ......................................................... 247
8.10 Monitoring kit ......................................................... 250
8.10.1 Inductive sensor (for speed) ....................................... 251
8.10.2 Vibration sensor ........................................................... 252
8.10.3 Pressure transmitter..................................................... 253
8.10.4 Temperature sensor ..................................................... 254
8.10.5 Cover interlocking switch ............................................ 255
8.11 Paring disc characteristics................................ 257
593308-02
9 Installation ...................................................................259
9.1 Introduction ............................................................ 259
9.1.1 Storage and transport of goods .................................. 260
9.1.2 Planning of installation................................................. 262
9.1.3 Foundations ................................................................. 267
9.1.4 Protection and storage of goods ................................. 268
9.1.5 Maintenance service ................................................... 269
9.1.6 Connections to surrounding equipment ...................... 270
9.2 Storage at out of operation ............................... 271
9.3 Before start-up ....................................................... 271
593308-02
INSTRUCTION BOOK
8
593308-02
INSTRUCTION BOOK 1 READ THIS FIRST
1 Read This First

This manual is designed for operators,
maintenance personnel and service engineers
working with the Alfa Laval AFPX 810XGV-
14CG/74CG separator.
If the separator has been delivered and

installed by Alfa Laval as a part of a
processing system, this manual should be
viewed as part of the System Documentation.
Study carefully all instructions in any
System Documentation.
In addition to this Separator Manual a

Spare Parts Catalogue, SPC is supplied.
The Separator Manual consists of:
Safety Instructions
Pay special attention to the safety instructions
for the separator. Accidents causing damage to
equipment and/or serious injury to persons or
personnel can result if the safety instructions
are not followed.
Basic Principles of Separation

This chapter describes the purpose of separation
and separation principles.
Design and function

This chapter contains a description of the
separator.
Operating Instructions
This chapter contains operating instructions for
the separator only.
593308-02 9
INSTRUCTION BOOK 1 READ THIS FIRST
Service, Dismantling, Assembly

This chapter gives instructions for the
maintenance procedures. It also contains step-
by-step instructions for dismantling and
assembly of the separator for service and
repair.
Fault Finding
Refer to this chapter if the separator functions
abnormally.
If the separator has been installed as a part of a
processing system, always refer to the trouble-
tracing instructions, in the System
Documentation.
Technical Reference
This chapter contains technical data
concerning the separator and drawings.
Installation
This chapter contains specifications and
recommendations concerning separator
installation.
NOTE
A complete reading of this manual by personnel in

contact with the machine is essential to safety.
Do not allow personnel to clean, assemble, operate
or maintain the separator until they have read and
fully understood this manual.
Ensure that all personnel who operate and service
the separator are well-trained and knowledgeable
concerning the machine and the work to be carried
out.
10
593308-02
2 Safety Instructions
The centrifuge includes parts that rotate at

high speed. This means that:
• Kinetic energy is high
• Great forces are generated
G 0 0 10 42 1
• Stopping time is long
Manufacturing tolerances are extremely fine.

Rotating parts are carefully balanced to reduce
undesired vibrations that can cause a
breakdown. Material properties have been
considered carefully during design to withstand
stress and fatigue.
The separator is designed and supplied for a
specific separation duty (type of liquid,
rotational speed, temperature, density etc.) and
must not be used for any other purpose.
Incorrect operation and maintenance can result
in unbalance due to build-up of sediment,
reduction of material strength, etc., that
subsequently could lead to serious damage and/
or injury.
The following basic safety instructions
therefore apply:
• Use the separator only for the purpose and
parameter range specified by Alfa Laval.
• Strictly follow the instructions for installation,
operation and maintenance.
• Ensure that personnel are competent and
have sufficient knowledge of maintenance
and operation, especially concerning
emergency stopping procedures.
S0151211
• Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts and

the special tools supplied.
11
2 SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Disintegration hazards
• When power cables are connected,

always check direction of motor rotation.
If incorrect, vital rotating parts could
unscrew.
S0 15 12 F 1
• If excessive vibration occurs, stop
separator and keep bowl filled with
liquid during rundown.
S0 15 12 N1
• Use the separator only for the purpose
and parameter range specified by
Alfa Laval.
S0 15 1 2P1
• Check that the gear ratio is correct for
power frequency used. If incorrect,
subsequent overspeed may result in a
S01 5 12 L1
serious break down.
• Since the separator is equipped with a
frequency controlled motor, it is
extremely important to ensure that the
motor speed does not exceed the
allowed maximum speed. A serious
break down may be the consequence.
• Wear on the large lock ring thread must

not exceed safety limit. φ-mark on lock
ring must not pass opposite φ-mark by
more than specified distance.
S01512G1
12
• Welding or heating of parts that rotate

can seriously affect material strength.
S0 15 12 4 1
• Inspect regularly for corrosion and
erosion damage. Inspect frequently if
process liquid is corrosive or erosive.
S0 15 12 H1
Crush hazards
• Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

instructions.
S01 5 12 M1
Do not work under a hanging load.
S0 15 12 Y1
Skin irritation hazards
• When using chemical cleaning agents,

make sure you follow the general rules
and suppliers recommendation
regarding ventilation, personnel
S01 5 12 D1
protection etc.
• Use of lubricants in various situations.
13
Cut hazards
• Sharp edges on bowl discs and threads

can cause cuts.
S01 5 12 B 1
Flying objects
• Risk for accidental release of snap rings

and springs when dismantling and
assembly.
S0 15 1 2C1
Entrapment hazards
• Make sure that rotating parts have come

to a complete standstill before starting
any dismantling work.
S 01 51 2O 1
• To avoid accidental start, switch off and

lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
S0 15 12 6 1
Assemble the machine completely

before start. All covers and guards must
be in place.
14
Electrical hazard
• Follow local regulations for electrical

installation and earthing (grounding).
• To avoid accidental start, switch off and
S01 51 2 71
lock power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
Noise hazards
• Use ear protection in noisy

environments.
S0 15 12 9 1
Burn hazards
• Lubrication oil and various machine

surfaces can be hot and cause burns.
S 0 1 51 2A 1
Health hazard
• Risk for unhealthy dust when handling

friction blocks/pads. Use a dust mask to
make sure not to inhale any dust.
S01512V1
15
2.1 Warning signs in text

Pay attention to the safety instructions in this
manual. Below are definitions of the three
grades of warning signs used in the text where
there is a risk for injury to personnel.
GE R
! DAN
DANGER indicates an imminently

hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
ING
WARN
!
WARNING indicates a potentially

could result in death or serious injury.
ON
CAUTI
!
CAUTION indicates a potentially

may result in minor or moderate injury.
NOTE
NOTE indicates a potentially hazardous

situation which, if not avoided, may result
in property damage.
16
2.2 Environmental issues
Unpacking
Packing material consists of wood, plastics,
cardboard boxes and in some cases metal
straps.
Wood and cardboard boxes can be reused,
recycled or used for energy recovery.
Plastics should be recycled or burnt at a
licensed waste incineration plant.
Metal straps should be sent for material
recycling.
Maintenance
During maintenance oil and wear parts in the
machine are replaced.
Oil must be taken care of in agreement with
local regulations.
Rubber and plastics should be burnt at a
licensed waste incineration plant. If not
available they should be disposed to a suitable
licensed land fill site.
Bearings and other metal parts should be sent
to a licensed handler for material recycling.
Seal rings should be disposed to a licensed land
fill site. Check your local regulations.
Worn out or defected electronic parts should be
sent to a licensed handler for material
recycling.
17
2.3 Requirements of
personnel
Only skilled or instructed persons are
allowed to operate the machine, e.g. operating
and maintenance staff.
• Skilled person: A person with technical
knowledge or sufficient experience to enable
him or her to perceive risks and to avoid
hazards which electricity/mechanics can
create.
• Instructed person: A person adequately
advised or supervised by a skilled person to
enable him or her to perceive risks and to
avoid hazards which electricity/mechanics
can create.
In some cases special skilled personnel may
need to be hired, like electricians and others. In
some of these cases the personnel has to be
certified according to local regulations with
experience of similar types of work.
18
INSTRUCTION BOOK 3 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF SEPARATION
3 Basic Principles Of Separation

The purpose of separation can be to
• free a liquid of solid particles,

• separate two mutually insoluble liquids
with different densities while removing
any solids present at the same time,
• separate and concentrate solid particles
from a liquid.
3.1 Separation By Gravity

A liquid mixture in a stationary bowl will clear
slowly as the heavy particles in the liquid
mixture sink to the bottom under the influence
of gravity.
A lighter liquid rises while a heavier liquid and
solids sink.
G 08 70 11 1
Continuous separation and sedimentation can be
achieved in a settling tank having outlets
arranged according to the difference in density of
the liquids.
Heavier particles in the liquid mixture will settle Gravity
and form a sediment layer on the tank bottom.
Lighter
liquid
Heavier
liquid Sediment layer of
heavier particles
G 0 87 02 1 1
593308-02 19
INSTRUCTION BOOK 3 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF SEPARATION
3.2 Centrifugal Separation

In a rapidly rotating bowl, the force of gravity
is replaced by centrifugal force, which is many Lighter liquid
times greater. Heavier liquid
Separation and sedimentation is continuous

and takes place very quickly.
The centrifugal force in the separator bowl can
achieve in a few seconds that which takes many
hours in a tank under influence of gravity.
The separation efficiency is influenced by
changes in the oil viscosity, separating
temperatures and in throughput.
G 0 87 03 1 1
Centrifugal force
3.3 Temperatures
For some types of process liquids a high
separating temperature will normally
increase the separation capacity. The
temperature influences oil viscosity and
density and should be kept constant
throughout the separation.
Viscosity Density difference

Viscosity is a fluids resistance against movement. Density is mass per volume unit. The greater the density
Low viscosity facilitates separation. Viscosity can be difference between the two liquids, the easier the
reduced by heating. separation. The density difference can be increased by
heating.
Low density difference

G 0 88 6 01 1
G 08 85 91 1
High density difference.

High viscosity Low viscosity
20
593308-02
INSTRUCTION BOOK 4 DESIGN
4 Design
201
221
220
OWMC
G 1 0 08 98 1
Motor
4.1 Overview An operating water module, abbreviated

OWMC, initiates the sludge discharges for the
The separator comprises a processing part and separator. With the OWMC the discharge
a driving part. It is driven by an electric motor. volumes can be regulated.
The motor is flanged to the frame.
The inlet for the liquid to separate and the
The bottom part of the separator contains the separated liquid outlets are shown with
horizontal driving device, driving shaft with a connection numbers in the illustration
flexible coupling, a worm gear and a vertical (201, 220 & 221). The separator is also
driving device. provided with connections for supply of
operating liquid, flushing liquid and cooling/
The bottom part also contains an oil bath for
heating liquid. The connections are further
the worm gear.
described in chapter ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on
The upper part of the separator contains the page 208 and ‘‘8.6.1 Basic size drawing” on
processing parts, the bowl and the in- and page 229.
outlet device.
The liquid fed to the separator is cleaned from
sediment inside the bowl.
The bowl is fitted on the upper part of the
vertical spindle and rotates at high speed. The
bowl also contains the discharge mechanism
which empties sediment from the bowl.
593308-02 21
4.1.1 Mechanical power

transmission
G 0 67 74 Q 1
The motor rotates the bowl via the flexible
coupling and the worm gear.
The worm gear has a ratio which increases the
bowl speed several times compared with the
motor speed. For correct ratio see chapter ‘‘8.2
Technical data” on page 207.
To reduce bearing wear and the transmission of
bowl vibrations to the frame and foundation,
the top bearing of the bowl spindle is mounted
in a bearing support with rubber buffers.
The worm wheel runs in a lubricating oil bath.
The bearings on the spindle and the worm
wheel shaft are lubricated by the oil splash
produced by the rotating worm wheel.
To keep the oil temperature low, a cooling coil is
installed in the worm gear housing.
22
593308-02
4 DESIGN INSTRUCTION BOOK
4.1.2 Motor
Frequency drive motor

The separator is direct driven by the motor, and
for this reason the motor must be able to
endure long run-up times. For this purpose this
separator is equipped with a frequency drive
motor, see ‘‘8.7 Electric motor” on page 234.
This motor is similar to a standard three phase
motor. The long running up time is, however,
controlled by a frequency converter, see ‘‘8.8
Guidelines for frequency converter drives” on
page 238.
23
593308-02
4.1.3 Process main parts
Inlet bend
Unseparated liquid inlet 201
Inlet pipe
Nut
Clarified liquid outlet

221 Discharge cover
Paring disc Paring chamber cover
Height adjusting rings

Paring chamber lower
220 Small lock ring

Gravity disc
Bowl hood with neck
Insert
Wing Insert Disc stack
Large lock ring
Sediment space Bowl body
Sediment port
Center screw
Distributor Sliding bowl bottom
Valve plug Drain channel
Distributing cone
Operating slide
Nozzle
Operating ring
Hydraulic ring G 1 02 56 1 1
24
593308-02
In- and outlet device

The in- and outlet device consists of the
following parts:
• The inlet (201). This comprises the pipe
bend and the inlet pipe which is welded to
the paring disc. The pipe from this disc
extends into the middle of the bowl.
• The heavy phase outlet (221). This
comprises the paring chamber and the
paring disc which continuously pumps the
separated liquid out of the bowl.
The paring disc serves as a stationary
discharge pump. The paring disc dips radially
into the rotating liquid which then is pared out.
To prevent aeration of the separated liquid it is
important that the paring disc is covered to a
certain extent, which is regulated by the back
pressure of the liquid outlet.
The in- and outlet device is held together by a
G0631031
nut at the top of the inlet pipe.
The discharge cover is fastened to the separator
Paring disc (discharge pump) for light phase liquid
frame hood. Height adjusting rings determine
the height position of the paring disc in the
paring chamber. Correct height adjustment
ensures that sufficient clearance between the
stationary and the rotating parts is
maintained.
25
593308-02
Separator bowl
The separator bowl with its sediment discharge
mechanism is built-up as follows:
The bowl body and bowl hood are held together
by the large lock ring. Inside the bowl are the
distributing cone, the distributor, the disc stack
and the top disc. The disc stack is kept
compressed by the bowl hood. The sliding bowl
bottom forms an internal separate bottom in
the bowl.
The bowl top is covered by the paring chamber
cover which is tightened to the bowl hood by
the small lock ring.
Inside the distributor the center screw is fitted
which accelerates the liquid fed into the bowl to
the bowl speed.
The sediment space is the space between the
sliding bowl bottom and the bowl hood in the
bowl periphery. It is kept closed by the sliding
bowl bottom which seals against a seal ring in
the bowl hood.
Sediment discharge mechanism
At intervals decided by the operator, the sliding
bowl bottom drops to empty the sediment from
the bowl.
The sediment discharge mechanism, which
controls the sliding bowl bottom, comprises the
operating slide and the operating liquid device
consisting of an operating ring; hydraulic ring
and a control paring disc. Passive parts are the
nozzle and the drain valve plugs. The operating
liquid device supplies discharge and make-up
water to the discharge mechanism.
The discharge liquid is injected by the
operating water module (OWMC), which is
further described next.
A closer description of the sediment discharge
mechanism can be found in ‘‘4.3.2 Sediment
discharge cycle” on page 41.
26
593308-02
4.1.4 Operating water module

compact (OWMC)
Purpose
The separator bowl can be emptied from solids
by two different sediment discharge volumes
determined by the duration of the increased
operating liquid flow from the Operating Water
Module Compact (OWMC), i.e. the time the
bowl is open. The two discharge volumes may
be regarded as small and large respectively.
Design
1. Check valve
2. Two-step adapter
3. Water cylinder
4. Piston
5. Servo valve
6. Air reservoir
7. Silencer
8. Needle valve
375. Inlet of discharge and make-up liquid to OWMC
506a. Air supply into air reservoir

506b. Signal air, small discharge
506c. Signal air, large discharge
A. Outlet of discharge and make-up liquid from

OWMC to bowl
The OWMC is designed as a stainless steel

construction consisting of an air reservoir (6), a
water cylinder (3) with piston (4) and a servo
valve (5). The module is equipped with
connections for air supply (506a) and signal air
(506b and c).
The OWMC is also equipped with a needle
valve (8) for regulating of air flow for the small
G 0 87 79 4 1
discharge and a silencer (7).
27
593308-02
The OWMC gives a two-step flow which implies

that the liquid flows into a one channel system
in two steps, see the illustration below. The
first step creates a high liquid flow which
triggers a sediment discharge and the second
step (with a lower flow) will allow the bowl to
close while closing (make-up) liquid is added to
the bowl. The flow between the two steps is
very low.
Flow
Discharge water
Closing water
Time
Working principle
Introduction
The OWMC is working as an integrated part of
the operating water system in this separator. It
creates an instant increase in the liquid flow to
the separator discharge mechanism which will
initiate the sediment discharge. A complete
sediment discharge cycle is described in section
‘‘4.3.2 Sediment discharge cycle” on page 41.
G0878411
Compressed air from the control air system

(506) is reduced in an air pressure regulator
(11). From the regulator the air is supplied 4. Piston
5. Servo valve
directly into the air reservoir (6) via connection
6. Air reservoir
(506a). 7. Silencer
The signal air (connections 506b and c) is 8. Needle valve
controlled by solenoid valves (10), see the 10. Solenoid valve
illustration. When signal air is supplied to the 11. Air filter regulator with pressure indicator
servo valve (5), the piston inside the valve is 12. Control cabinet in safe area
moved to one side and air is supplied into the
reservoir under the piston (4). The piston (4) 506. Pressurized air inlet (~7 bar)
moves upwards and presses the liquid inside 506a. Air supply into air reservoir
506b. Signal air, small discharge
the water cylinder into the operating liquid 506c. Signal air, large discharge
system in the bowl bottom.
28
593308-02
Initiating a large sediment discharge

A
When the solenoid valve for a large discharge
activates inlet (506c), air is fed into the left side
of the servo valve (5) during a period of about 5
seconds. The piston inside the valve moves to
the right and the supply air (506a) in the air
reservoir (6) flows up into the space under the
piston (4) which then moves the piston
upwards. The movement of the piston increases
1
the flow of liquid (A) to the bowl discharge
mechanism in order to open the bowl. The
check valve (1) ensures that no water flows
back to the liquid supply system.
The air reservoir (6) acts as a buffer in order to
supply sufficient of air to the cylinder under the
piston during the sediment discharge cycle.
4
506c
5
506a 6
G 0 87 85 9 1
Operating liquid is supplied into the separator bowl
29
593308-02
When the solenoid valve for the signal air

(506c) is deactivated, the piston in the servo
valve (5) moves to its neutral position and air
in the cylinder under the piston (4) is drained
by the servo valve out through the silencer (7). 375
The operating liquid supply from the liquid
supply system (375) presses the piston (4) back 1
to its original bottom position.
506a 6
G 08 78 5A 1
7
Operating liquid is supplied into the OWMC from the
liquid supply system (375)
30
593308-02
Initiating a small discharge

When the solenoid valve for a small discharge
activates inlet (506b), air is fed into the right
side of the servo valve (5) during a period of
about 5 seconds. The piston inside the valve
moves to the left and air is supplied into the
cylinder below the piston (4) via the valve. The
air flow is reduced when it passes the needle
valve (8).
A reduced air flow will result in a lower flow of
operating liquid into the bowl. This liquid is
continuously drained from the bowl. Because of
the lower flow, a larger amount of operating
liquid will be drained out from the bowl before
sufficient volume of the liquid has been built up
to create a sediment discharge. This implies
that the time the bowl is open for a sediment
discharge is shorter which will give a smaller
amount of discharged sediment i.e. small
discharge.
G 0 87 85 C1
Operating liquid is supplied into the centrifuge bowl

with a lower flow
31
593308-02
Settings
Start to set the large discharge volume.
Proceed in following way:
1 Set the air pressure regulator (11) to 200 kPa
(2 bar).
2 Initiate a discharge by opening solenoid
valve for air supply inlet (506c).
3 Measure the discharged volume.
4 Adjust the discharged volume by altering the
pressure of the compressed air. A higher
pressure gives a larger volume. The air
pressure can be regulated between
2 - 6 bar.
G0878411
Continue with the small discharge in following
way:
1 Open the needle valve (8) 3 turns.
2 Initiate a discharge by opening solenoid
valve for air supply inlet (506b).
3 Measure the discharged volume.
The recommended volume for a small
discharge is the sediment space volume of
the bowl given in ‘‘8.2 Technical data” on
page 207.
4 Adjust the discharged volume by regulating
the needle valve. A more open valve (anti-
clockwise) gives a larger volume.
NOTE
Do not adjust the air pressure to change the

volume for the small discharge. If doing so, the
volumes for both large and small discharges
will be changed.
The needle valve only sets the ratio between the
large and small discharges.
NOTE
The separator bowl must not be discharged

with a too small volume as this leads to build-up
of sediment in the sediment space as well as in
the disc stack resulting in an impaired
separation efficiency.
32
593308-02
4.1.5 Cyclone
When accumulated sediment in the bowl is
discharged, it leaves the bowl at high speed. To
prevent reaction forces on the separator this
speed must be reduced before the sediment
leaves the separator. This is done in the outlet
821
821b
a
821
cyclone where the sediment will rotate while its
c
speed is gradually reduced by the wall friction
until its speed is low enough to be discharged
by gravity by outlet 222.
When the sediment is suddenly discharged into
the cyclone there will be a positive gas pressure
shock in the cyclone and a corresponding
negative pressure shock in bowl enclosure
because a certain volume of material is
suddenly moved from one region to another.
After the discharge the pressure will be
222
equalized by back flow of gas from the cyclone
to the bowl enclosure. This back flow will
contain some sediment that might cause build
up of sediment deposits on the surfaces in the
bowl cover. A part of the pressure shock will
G 0 96 4 6L 1
also go out by the connection 222 into the
external sediment receiving system where it
can damage the system or spread aerosols to
the surroundings.
The cyclone is equipped with blocked
connections (821a, 821b, 821c) at the top.
Connection 821b can be used for ventilation of
the cyclone which will reduce the pressure
chock at a sediment discharge. Connection 821c
could be used for mounting a spray ball or
turbine in such applications where the
properties of the sediment is such that it will
stick to the walls of the cyclone and needs to be
flushed out. Connection 821a could be used for
mounting a level probe in the cyclone to give an
alarm if the sediment accumulates in the
cyclone because the cyclone outlet or the
receiving system outside the separator is
blocked or full. If the cyclone is full and the
discharged sediment can not leave the bowl
enclosure then the rotating bowl can hit the
discharged sediment which will cause the
separator to stop by overload and/or vibration
that might damage the equipment.
33
593308-02
4.1.6 Flushing
To avoid sediment deposits inside the bowl
enclosure, the separator is equipped with
several flushing possibilities. By the bowl
rotation the liquid is thrown to the inside of the
frame hood which then will be cleaned.
A nozzle is placed in the sediment channel
(connection 304) to clean this channel.
How to use the flushing possibilities depends
on the process and the properties of the
product. In many cases no flushing at all is
needed. In other cases it is only done at CIP
(cleaning in place) and in some cases both at
production and CIP.
Normally flushing is done in connection with
discharges. A typical sequence is that a few
seconds flush is given to wet the surfaces just
before the discharge. When the main part of the
discharged sediment has drained from the 304
cyclone a new flush is done to remove the final
part of the sediment. Possibly another flush can
be done after a new draining period. If the
G 0 96 46 M 1
separator is supervised by a control system
which controls the flushing the timers ought to
be adjustable so the flushing can be adapted to
suit the actual requirements.
When making a flush it could be possible to
feed flushing liquid to all flushing connections
at the same time. To minimize the flushing
liquid consumption and dilution of the
discharged sediment it is however of advantage
if the different flushing points could be
controlled individually.
34
593308-02
4.2 Sensors
Speed sensor Vibration sensor
The proximity speed sensor is of inductive type, giving a The vibration sensor is of accelerometer type.
number of pulses per revolution of the spindle shaft. The When any of the two limit values is exceeded appropriate
number of pulses is stated in chapter Connection List. The countermeasures should be undertaken. The two levels are
bowl speed may also be calculated from the gear ratio and warning for unacceptable vibrations and safety stop
the r/minute of the motor shaft. respectively in case of extreme unbalance. The vibration
During normal operation the speed is allowed to vary within levels are further described in chapter Interface Description.
speed limits described in chapter Interface Description.
Cover interlocking switch (option)
Temperature sensor (option)
The cover of the separator is equipped with an interlocking
Temperature sensors is mounted to check the temperature in switch. When cover is closed the interlocking circuit in the
the neck bearing and the oil bath. control system is closed which makes it possible to start the
separator.
Pressure transmitter
For technical references see page 253.
Temperature
sensor
see page
254
Cover interlocking switch, See page 255
Speed sensor, see page 251
Pressure
transmitter
see page
253
Vibration
sensor
See page
252
G 0 87 00 7 1
Temperature sensor, see page 254
35
593308-02
4.2.1 Check points
Speed sensor
• Check that the electrical cables and
connections are not damaged.
• Check the clearance, 2 + 0,5 mm according
to the drawing.
• Check that the sensor and its bracket are
well attached. The tightening torque of the
nuts fixing the sensor in the bracket are 50
Nm.
Vibration sensor
• Check that the sensor is well attached to the
frame. If the sensor has to be tightened:
– check that the contact surfaces on the
sensor and separator frame are clean.
– Tighten torque when mounting the sensor:
35 Nm.
Temperature sensors
Pressure transmitter
36
593308-02
Cover interlocking kit

• Check that the screws fixing the switch to the
frame are tightened.
• When the button is pushed, check that the
brown and blue wires are short-circuited and
the two black wires are open circuit.
Check also the reverse when the button not

pressed.
See the illustration for exact measurement

when the button is operated. C
Contact closed D
Contact open
G 06 36 4D 1
For technical references see ‘‘8.10 Monitoring
kit” on page 250 and ‘‘8.10.5 Cover interlocking
switch” on page 255.
37
593308-02
4.3 Separating Function
4.3.1 Normal separation
D2
D1
D3
G0503721
Centrifugal force Bowl parts
Process liquid D1 D1 Diameter of inner outlet
Heavy liquid phase D2 D2 Diameter of outer outlet (same as

hole diameter of gravity disc)
Light liquid phase D3 D3 Diameter of interface.
Sediment (solids)
38
593308-02
Bowl
Unseparated liquid is fed into the bowl through

the inlet pipe and is forced via the distributor
towards the periphery of the bowl.
When the liquid reaches slots in the base of the
distributor, it will rise through the channels
formed by the disc stack where it is evenly
distributed and divided among the interspaces
between the bowl discs, where the liquid
phases are separated from each other by action
of the centrifugal force.
The heavy phase and any sediment move along
the underside of the bowl discs towards the
periphery of the bowl, where the sediment
accumulates in the sediment space. The heavy
phase proceeds along the upper side of the top
disc towards the neck of the bowl hood and
leaves the bowl via the gravity disc - the outer
way (dark coloured in the illustration on
previous page).
The light phase moves along the upper side of
the bowl discs towards the bowl centre and
leaves the bowl via the hole in the top disc neck
- the inner way (light coloured in the
illustration on previous page).
Gravity disc
The characteristic part of the purifier bowl
(which has two liquid outlets) is the gravity S0 1 24 91 1
disc. The disc determines the interface position

in a purifier bowl (see below).
Gravity disc
How to choose the correct gravity disc is
described in ‘‘5.1.2 Selection of gravity disc’’.
39
593308-02
Position of interface
An interface (1) must be formed between the
light and heavy phases in the bowl. In order to
achieve optimum separation, the interface
must be maintained in the correct position,
which is between the disc stack and the outer
edge of the top disc. If the interface moves
outside the outer edge of the top disc the liquid
seal will break and light phase will be
discharged with the heavy phase. An interface
G 00 47 0 31
positioned inside the disc stack will cause bad
separation results.
The position of the interface is adjusted by Interface position (1)
altering the pressure balance of the liquid
phases inside the separator. That is done by
exchanging the gravity disc. For this purpose a
number of gravity discs with various hole
diameters are delivered with the separator.
40
593308-02
4.3.2 Sediment discharge cycle
The illustrations in this description of a sediment discharge cycle are of a general nature and
do not necessarily correspond exactly to the actual bowl
.
R1
R2
10
11
12
20
19
13
G 09 6 48 E 1
375 R3
S01240C1
S0124051
Operating liquid (375) Sediment
Closed bowl (normal operation) The operating liquid exerts an upward pressure
Discharge of the solids takes place through a on the sliding bowl bottom (12) exceeding the
number of slots or ports (11) in the bowl counter-acting downward pressure from the
wall. Between discharges, these ports are process liquid, because the underside of the
closed by a large valve slide, the so-called sliding bowl bottom has a larger pressure surface
sliding bowl bottom (12), which constitutes (radius R1) than its upper side (radius R2).
an inner bottom in the separating space. The
Operating liquid (375) is supplied at the
sliding bowl bottom is forced upwards
underside of the bowl through a paring disc
against a seal ring (10) by the liquid force
device. Leakage or evaporation of operating
acting on its underside.
liquid is made up for automatically by the paring
The operating slide (13) is pressed upwards disc, which maintains a constant operating
by the hydraulic force and the valve plugs liquid level (radius R3) as its pumping effect
(19) then cover the drain channels (20). counter balances the static pressure from the
supply. During a sediment ejection, this feed of
During rotation, the pressure of the liquid
operating liquid continues even during the
increases with the distance from the axis of
ejection cycle described in the following
rotation because of the centrifugal force.
illustrations.
41
593308-02
12
20
19
13
G 0 96 48 F1
18 375 R3
Bowl opens for discharge

Pressurized operating liquid injected by the
OWMC is now supplied at a higher rate of flow
for a number of seconds (see ‘‘4.1.4 Operating
water module compact (OWMC)” on page 27 for
a further description). The liquid flows to the
chamber (radius R3) and through a channel up
to the upper side of the operating slide (13).
When the liquid flows out towards the
operating slide periphery it is throttled by a
nozzle (18).
The operating liquid pressure on the upper side
of the operating slide (before the nozzle)
overcomes the hydraulic force and the
operating slide is pressed downwards. The
valve plugs (19) open and the closing liquid
drains out via the drain channels (20) as
illustrated on next page.
42
593308-02
11
12
20
19
13
G 09 64 8G 1
18 375 R3
When the valve plugs (19) are opened, the

operating liquid pressure on the underside of
the sliding bowl bottom (12) is reduced. The
sliding bowl bottom is pressed downwards,
thereby uncovering the sediment ports (11) in
the bowl wall through which the sediment
discharges.
43
593308-02
12
20
19
13
G 09 64 8H 1
18 375
Bowl closes after discharge

After that the injection of operating liquid by
the OWMC has ended and most of the liquid
has been drained from the upper side of the
operating slide (13) via the nozzle (18), the
forces directed upwards on the operating slide
from the hydraulic force move the operating
slide upwards.
The drain channels (20) are closed by the drain
valve plugs (19) and the increasing force from
the operating liquid presses the sliding bowl
bottom (12) upwards. The bowl closes and the
sediment discharge has been accomplished.
The remaining opening water above the
operating slide leaves the separator.
44
593308-02
4.4 Factors influencing

the separation result
4.4.1 Viscosity and density

See ‘‘3.3 Temperatures” on page 20.
4.4.2 Interface position
A. Correct interface position
B. Wrong interface position - broken liquid seal
C. Wrong interface position - bad separation
G 00 11 72 1
45
593308-02
Factors influencing the interface position
1. Density differences and throughput

Phases with small density differences, as well
as high throughput, will position the liquid
interface closer to the bowl periphery than if
the phases have great density differences.
A. Small density differences/high throughput
G 0 0 11 83 1
B. Great density differences/low throughput
2. Gravity disc
To compensate for the above factors the
interface is adjusted to a correct position by
altering the outlet for the heavy phase, i.e.
exchanging the gravity disc. Changing to a
gravity disc with larger hole diameter will
move the interface towards the bowl periphery
whereas a disc with smaller hole diameter will
move the interface closer to the bowl centre.
A. Gravity disc with large hole diameter
G 00 11 9 21
B. Gravity disc with small hole diameter
3. Excessive back pressure

Excessively high back pressure in the light
phase outlet prevents the light phase from
being pumped out. The interface position will
move outwards towards the bowl periphery.
The effect is a wrong interface position, which
may cause broken liquid seal.
G 0 01 20 21
A. Excessive back pressure

B. Normal back pressure
46
593308-02
4.4.3 Size and shape of sediment

particles
The round and smooth sediment particle (A) is x
more easily separated out than the irregular A
one (B).
Rough treatment, for instance in pumps, may B
cause a splitting of the particles resulting in
slower separation. Larger particles (1) are more
easily separated out than smaller ones (2) even
if they have the same density.
y
4.4.4 Sediment content
G0613321
An increased quantity of sediment in a process 2 1
liquid will influence the separating result 1. Large particle
through the optimum transporting capacity of 2. Small particle
the disc set. An increased sediment content can A. Smooth particle
B. Irregular particle
be compensated by reducing the throughput in x. Throughput
order to restore the optimum separating y. Particle size
efficiency.
4.4.5 Throughput
The throughput depends on the separating
ability and the sediment space volume of the
bowl relative to the concentration, particle size,
density and viscosity of the process liquid.
The throughput also depends on the counter
pressure in the outlet for separated liquid. see
‘‘4.4.8 Counter pressure regulation” on page 48.
4.4.6 Properties of the sediment

G0677541
Some types of sediment can through adhesion

form deposits in the bowl, thereby reducing the The sediment space in separator bowl
separating efficiency. In such cases the cleaning
procedure after separation must be adjusted.
4.4.7 Disc stack

A neglected disc stack – containing deformed
discs or discs coated with deposits – will impair
the separating result.
47
593308-02
4.4.8 Counter pressure regulation

The correct counter pressure is dependent on
the throughput of the process liquid. See
chapter Technical data in the Installation
Manual for required counter pressure
compared with the throughput.
G0677631
For best result keep the counter pressure as
high as possible without leakage from the
distributor occurs. It is important to set correct counter pressure
Be careful not to select too high counter

pressure, otherwise there will be a risk of
leakage from the distributor (unseparated
process liquid) into the paring chamber
(separated liquid) or from the paring chamber
into the frame hood.
Too low counter pressure is, however,
unfavourable too if you want to prevent air
from intermingling with the treated liquid (via
the paring chamber).
4.4.9 Sediment discharge frequency

If ejecting the sediment unnecessary often the
separating result will be impaired because of a
more disturbed liquid flow through the bowl
and a too fluid sediment (higher content of
process liquid).
48
593308-02
4.5 Sediment discharge

interval
4.5.1 Different sediment discharge

volumes
The separator is of a controlled partial-
discharge type. The bowl of the separator can
be emptied from solids by two different
sediment discharge volumes determined by the
duration of the increased operating liquid flow
from the operating water module (OWMC), i.e.
the time the bowl is being open.
The volume of the sediment discharge has to be
chosen in accordance with the process condition
and the prevailing process flow. The following
exemplifies the difference between two
different sediment discharge volumes.
G0830811
• A normal sediment discharge is represented
by the volume (X). This discharge may be
regarded as “small” and should as a rule be Small discharge volume
used in order to avoid loss of process liquid.
• A sediment discharge used during e.g. a
stand by program is represented by the
volume (Y). This discharge may be regarded
as “large” and is used for obtaining a large
discharge volume from the separator bowl.
The operating water module (OWMC) is
described in ‘‘4.1.4 Operating water module
compact (OWMC)” on page 27.
G0830821
Large discharge volume
4.5.2 Time interval

The appropriate time to be chosen between
sediment discharges depends on local
conditions because many factors influence
accumulation and hardening of sediment
between discharges. However, keep the
discharge interval within the min. and max.
time stated in chapter ‘‘8.2 Technical data’’.
49
593308-02
Long intervals between sediment discharges

can cause accumulation and compaction of
sediment. The sediment may then break-up
unevenly on discharge and cause the bowl to
become unbalanced. If such unbalance is too
large, there is risk of serious separator damage
and injury to personnel.
ING
WARN
!
Disintegration Hazards
Ensure that correct discharge intervals and
cleaning procedures are used.
Unbalance due to improper discharge of
solids may lead to solids accumulation and
unbalance which may lead to contact between
rotating and non-rotating parts.
If the solids content of the process liquid

expressed in per cent by volume of wet
sediment is known or can be established (for
instance in a test-tube centrifuge), the formula
below can serve as a guidance for the selection
of sediment ejection intervals.
t = Theoretic maximum time in minutes

between two ejections.
p = Percent by volume of wet sediment in the
process liquid.
Q = Throughput in litres/hour. G0697931
V = The sediment volume (in litres or dm3) 1. Total sediment space volume
which may be allowed to accumulate in V. Allowed sediment volume
the bowl without impairing the
separating result or without packing too
firmly. As a rule, “V” should be maximum
three quarters of the sediment space
volume, calculated from the outer edge of
the top disc. The sediment space volume
can be found in chapter ‘‘8.2 Technical
data’’.
50
593308-02
INSTRUCTION BOOK 5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
5 Operating Instructions
These operating instructions describe routine
procedures to follow before and during the
start, running and stopping sequences of the
separator.
If system documentation is available, always

follow the operating instructions therein. If
there is no system documentation, the
instructions below are to be followed.
5.1 Operating routine
5.1.1 Before first start

Technical demands for connections and logical
limitations for the separator is described in the
following documents include in chapter ‘‘8
Technical Reference” on page 205:
– Technical data
– Basic size drawing
– Connection list
– Interface description
– Foundation drawing
593308-02 51
Before first start the following check points

shall be checked:
• Ensure the machine is installed correctly and
that feed-lines and drains have been flushed
clean.
• Fill oil in the gear housing. Fill up to slightly
above the middle of the sight glass. Use the
correct grade of oil.
Oil volume: approx. 12,5 litres.

Suitable oil brands can be found in chapter
‘‘6.8.4 Recommended lubricants” on page
181
G0262011
• After the separator has been started, the
discharge volumes at sediment ejections Fill oil in the gear housing
has to be set. This is described in chapter
‘‘ Settings” on page 32.
52
593308-02
5 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS INSTRUCTION BOOK
5.1.2 Selection of gravity disc

The separator is delivered with a set of gravity
discs.
How to replace a gravity disc is described in the
Service & Maintenance Manual.
The diameter of a gravity disc sets the position
of the light-heavy liquid interface in the
separator. The separation efficiency can be
optimized by selection of the correct diameter
G 07 57 9 31
for each process.
When selecting a gravity disc the general rule Fit correct gravity disc
is to use the disc having a hole making the light
phase as clean as possible.
When the light phase is wanted more free from
the heavy one, the interface should be placed
nearer the bowl periphery.
For a more detailed description of the interface
position, see ‘‘Interface position” on page 45.
Calculation for correct size of gravity disc:

If the specific gravities of both light and heavy
phases are known the hydrostatic balance can
be expressed as follows:
2 2
s1 D3 – D2
---- = -----------------------
-
s2 D3 – D1
2 2
s1 = Specific gravity of light phase
s2 = Specific gravity of heavy phase
D1 = Diameter of the inner outlet.

For this separator it is decided by the
inner diameter in the top disc neck.
D2 = Diameter of the outer outlet, which is
the same as the hole diameter of the
gravity disc.
G 0 5 03 74 1
D3 = Diameter of the interface, which for a

purifier is about the same as the outer Calculate the correct hydrostatic balance in the bowl
diameter of the disc stack.
53
593308-02
When D2 is the only unknown parameter, the

formula will be as follows:
2 s 2 2
D2 = D 3 – ----1 ⋅ ( D 3 – D 1 )
s2
Known values for this separator are:

D1 = 86 mm
D3 = 281 mm
Use the above known values plus the two
values of the specific gravities (s1 & s2) and
calculate the hole diameter (D2) of the gravity
disc. If the quotient of the densities s1 and s2 is
known, preferably use the table below. Choose
the disc that has the diameter closest to the
calculated.
Density Suitable
quotient gravity disc
(s1/s2) (D2)
0,94 107
0,93 111
0,92 115
0,91 119
0,89 122
0,88 127
0,86 132
0,84 136
NOTE
If actual density quotient is outside the range given

in the table above, contact your Alfa Laval
representative how to modify or replace the level
ring to get an other measure of D1.
54
593308-02
If not calculating the gravity disc size,

practice the following general rule:
1 Fit a gravity disc of middle size.
2 Run the separator.
3 Observe the heavy phase content in the light
phase by taking a sample.
– If too much heavy phase in the sample,
stop the separator and fit the next larger
gravity disc.
4 Repeat steps 1-3 above until having the
gravity disc with a hole diameter giving the
most clean light phase.
NOTE
A too large hole diameter will result in light phase

losses through the heavy phase outlet.
If the liquid seal brokens, the light phase will be

discharged through the heavy phase outlet.
55
593308-02
5.1.3 Ready for start

To achieve the best separation results the bowl
should be in a clean condition.
1 Check that the bolts of the frame hood are
fully tightened.
2 Check that all inlet and outlet connections
have been correctly made and properly
tightened.
S0009821
ON
CAUTI
! Check for leakages (not admitted)
Burn and corrosive hazards

Make sure that hose connections and flange
couplings are properly assembled and
tightened.
Escaping hot and/or corrosive liquid can
cause skin injuries.
56
593308-02
3 Check that the oil level is slightly above

middle of the sight glass.
Be aware of that a very small quantity of oil

may remain at the bottom edge of the sight
glass even when the gear housing is
emptied for oil.
G0262011
Fill if necessary. See chapter ‘‘6.8.6
Recommended oil brands” on page 186.
Check the oil level
NOTE
During running, the oil level should be slightly

below the middle of the sight glass.
Too much or too little oil can damage the
separating bearings.
4 Check that the frequency converter is set to

parameters corresponding to the Bowl
speed synchronous specified in ‘‘8.2
Technical data” on page 207
ON
CAUTI
!
Disintegration Hazard
This machine must not be operated with
higher bowl speed than max. allowed speed;
6250 r/minute.
57
593308-02
5.1.4 Start
1 Start the separator and check the direction of rotation
a Open cooling supplies (409)
b Start the separator
c Check the direction of rotation of the

bowl by checking that the direction ING
WARN
of the motor fan corresponds to the !
arrow on the plate fixed on the
motor.
Disintegration hazard
When power cables have been connected,
S00 68 8 21
always check direction of rotation. If
incorrect, vital rotating parts could unscrew.
d Check the separator for vibration.

Some vibration can occur for short
periods during the starting cycle,
when the separator passes through
its critical speeds. This is normal
and passes without danger. Try to
learn the vibration characteristics of
the critical speed pattern.
In the trouble-tracing chapter

‘‘7.1.3 Separator vibrates” on page
198, a number of causes are
described that can create vibration.
S0 05 56 11
ING
WARN
!
When excessive vibration occurs, keep bowl filled and stop
separator.
The cause of the vibration must be identified and rectified
before the separator is restarted. Excessive vibration may be
due to incorrect assembly or insufficient cleaning of the bowl.
58
593308-02
2 Check that the separator has reached full speed
a Check, if possible, the current

drawn by the motor starter to ensure
ING
that the separator has reached full WARN
speed. !
The time to reach full speed may not
exceed the limit given in chapter
When the separator is equipped with
‘‘8.2 Technical data” on page 207.
a frequency controlled motor, it is
extremely important to ensure that
the motor speed does not exceed the
allowed maximum speed. A serious
break down may be the
consequence.
Frequency drive motor

During start the ammeter will increase
to about the rated motor current. At full
speed the ammeter decrease to an
idling value.
b When the bowl speed exceeds
3500 r/min close the bowl by
supplying make-up liquid, (375).
59
593308-02
5.1.5 Running
1 Open outlet and the process liquid feed
a Make sure that the outlets for the separated

liquids (220 & 221) are fully open. 201
221
NOTE
Correct flows, pressures etc. for the

connections mentioned below can be
220
found in chapter ‘‘8 Technical
Reference” on page 205.
b When the process liquid conditions are correct,

open the process liquid feed (201) and adjust to a
suitable throughput. This must not exceed the
flow permissible and must be suited to the
G 10 08 98 1
separability of the process liquid.
A limitation for the throughput can sometimes be

the amount of sediment in the feed. The time
between two discharges must be at least one
minute.
c Adjust the counter pressure. For further

information, see ‘‘4.4.8 Counter pressure
regulation” on page 48.
ING
WARN
!
Ensure that correct discharge
intervals and cleaning procedures
are used.
Unbalance due to improper
discharge of solids may lead to
solids accumulation and unbalance
which may lead to contact between
rotating and non-rotating parts.
60
593308-02
2 Daily condition checks

The following steps should be carried out daily:
a Check all pipe and
hose connections
ING
for leakage. WARN
!

Make sure that hose connections and flange
S0 00 98 2 1
couplings are not leaking.
Escaping hot and/or corrosive liquid can
cause skin injuries.
b Check that flows and pressures are sufficient for

following connections:
- Process liquid inlet (201)

NOTE
- Process liquid outlets for light and heavy
phases (220 & 221) Correct flows, pressures etc. for the
- Operating liquid (375) connections mentioned can be found
- Cooling liquid (409 & 410) in chapter ‘‘8 Technical Reference’’.
c Check the separator for noise and

vibration.
ING
WARN
!
When excessive vibration occurs, keep bowl
filled and stop separator.
The cause of the vibration must be identified
and rectified before the separator is restarted.
S0 05 5 61 1
d Check the oil level in gear housing.
Fill if necessary. See chapter ‘‘6.8.4
Recommended lubricants” on page 181 for a
list of recommended oils.
NOTE
G 0 26 2 01 1

During running the oil level should
be slightly below the middle of the
sight glass.
Too much or too little oil can damage
the separator bearings.
e Check the electric motor for overheating.
61
593308-02
3 Cleaning (before stop)
NOTE
Clean the separator by a CIP

procedure or manually as described
below before stopping it. An example
of a CIP procedure can be found in
“CIP (Cleaning In Place)” on page 65.
a Replace the feed of process liquid with water.
b Open the flushing liquid.
c Empty the separator bowl totally from solids

before stopping it. If not cleaning by CIP, a
manual cleaning has to be done before next
start.
Discharge repeatedly until solids no longer

remains in the bowl. The bowl must be filled
with liquid during the discharges.
62
593308-02
5.1.6 Normal stop
1 Stopping the separator
a Empty the separator bowl totally from solids

before stopping it. If not, a manual cleaning
has to be done before next startup.
Discharge repeatedly until solids no longer is
remained in the bowl. The bowl must be filled
with liquid during the discharges.
b After the discharges and flushing, supply

liquid to the bowl and stop the separator with
the bowl filled.
ING
WARN
!
The bowl must always be filled with liquid
during the run-down period to prevent
excessive vibration if there is uneven sludge
accumulation in the bowl.
Never discharge the separator during the run-

down period.
c Shut off:
- Flushing liquid (304)

- Operating liquid (375)
d When the bowl has stopped rotating:
- Close the air supply

- Switch off the power supply.
63
593308-02
5.1.7 Emergency stop
1 Stopping the separator
a If the separator begins to vibrate excessively

during operation, stop it immediately by
switching off the separator motor, e.g. by
pushing the safety stop button.
Keep the bowl filled during the run-down to

minimize the excessive vibration.
S0 00 99 1 1
b Evacuate the room. The separator may be
hazardous when passing its critical speeds
during the run-down.
ING
WARN CAUTI
ON
! !
Disintegration hazards Disintegration hazards
Do not discharge an excessive After a safety stop the cause of the
vibrating separator. fault must be identified.
Out-of-balance vibration can become If all parts have been checked and
worse if only part of the sediment is the cause remains unclear, contact
discharged. Alfa Laval for advice.
64
593308-02
5.2 CIP (Cleaning In Place)
Main principles of a CIP program

CIP is used to keep the separator clean and
thereby preventing heavy displacement,
clogging of disc stack and to avoid micro-
biological infection. The use of CIP together
with repeated sediment discharges prolongs
the intervals between manual cleaning of the
separator.
No general rules can be given for frequency and
type of CIP to be used as this depends on the
properties of the product to be separated. The
CIP frequency also depends on the
requirements of the cleaning result regarding
micro-organisms.
The CIP liquids to be used is also dependent on
product properties and cleaning requirements.
65
593308-02
Example of a CIP program:

Alfa Laval ref. 561814, rev. 0
Media Tempera- Reason Time No. of Notes

ture period discharges
(minutes) per period
1.Water Cold Primary 5 5 Used water usually

flushing passes to drain
2.Water Hot / 70 °C Thermolysi 5 5 Used water normally

s of yeast either passes to drain
(before or after heat
recovery) or is
recirculated
3.Lye 70 - 80 °C Dissolving 30 - 60 6 - 12 The lye is normally

(NaOH) protein recirculated
1 - 2% deposits
4.Water Hot / 70 °C Flushing 5-10 3-5 Return as for 2 above
5.Nitric 70 °C Dissolving 5-10 3-5 If soft water is used, acid

acid ≈ 1% inorganic washing is only required
deposits a few times a year. In this
(primarily case the return can pass
calcium to drain.
salts) If hard water is used,
acid washing will
perhaps be required at
every CIP. In this case a
recirculating system
should be used.
6.Water Hot / Flushing 10 5 Return as for 2 above

90 - 95 °C and
sterilizing
66
593308-02
INSTRUCTION BOOK 6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY
6 Service, Dismantling, Assembly

6.1 Periodic Maintenance 6.1.2 Maintenance procedures
Periodic (preventive) maintenance reduces At each Intermediate and/or Major service,

the risk of unexpected stoppages and take a copy of the maintenance log and use it to
breakdowns. Follow the maintenance log in make notes during the service.
this chapter in order to facilitate the An intermediate and Major service should be
periodic maintenance. carried out as follows:
1 Dismantle the parts as described in ‘‘6.3
6.1.1 Maintenance intervals Dismantling” on page 72.
The following directions for periodic Place the separator parts on clean, soft
maintenance give a brief description of parts to surfaces such as pallets.
be cleaned, checked and renewed at different 2 Inspect and clean the dismantled separator
maintenance intervals. parts according to the maintenance log and
The maintenance log for each maintenance description in ‘‘6.4 Actions Before
interval on page 69 gives a detailed list of Assembly” on page 105.
actions to be performed. 3 Fit all the parts delivered in the service kit
Daily checks consist of minor check points to while assembling the separator as
carry out for detecting abnormal operating described in chapter ‘‘6.6 Assembly” on
conditions. page 130.
4 When the separator is assembled, make
final checks described in ‘‘6.7 Actions after
Intermediate service i i assembly” on page 172.
An Intermediate consists of an overhaul of the
separator bowl, inlet/outlet, oil change and
operating water device every 3 months or 2000
ING
operating hours. WARN
!
Seals in bowl and gaskets in inlet/outlet device
are renewed. Disintegration Hazards
Separator parts that are either missing, worn
beyond their safe limits or incorrectly
assembled, may cause severe damage or fatal
Major service M injury.
An Major consists of an overhaul of the
complete separator (including separator bowl,
inlet/outlet and operating device) every 12
months or 8000 operating hours. Seals and ON
CAUTI
bearings in the separator are renewed. !
Burn and Corrode Hazards

Oil change Escaping hot and/or corroding process
The oil should be changed every 2000 hours, or material, which can be hazardous, may still
remain in the separator after stop.
at least once every year if the total number of
operating hours is less than 2000 hours/year.
593308-02 67
6 SERVICE, DISMANTLING, ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTION BOOK
The use of service symbols in the 6.1.4 Service kits

dismantling/assembly instructions
Special service kits are available for
Parts that have to be renewed from the service
Intermediate and Major service, OWMC and
kits (see below) are marked i i and/or M in
Foundation feet.
the assembly instructions.
For other services the spare parts have to be
ordered separately.
Example:
Note that the parts for Intermediate are not
a Fit the O-ring ii . included in the Major service kit and parts for
Intermediate and Major service are not
When dismantling and assembling between
included in the 3S kit.
the service periods, some procedures do not
have to be carried out. These procedures are The contents of the kits are described in the
marked i i and/or M . Spare Parts Catalogue.
Example:
5 Renew the valve plugs on the operating NOTE
slide i i . Always use Alfa Laval genuine parts as
otherwise the warranty may become invalid.
All symbols used in the instructions refer to
Alfa Laval takes no responsibility for the
activities mentioned in the maintenance logs. safe operation of the equipment if non-
genuine spare parts are used.
6.1.3 Tightening of screws

Tightening all screws with the correct torque
ING
value is important. WARN
!
These figures apply unless otherwise stated:
Torque Use of imitation spare parts may cause severe
damage.
Metric Stainless steel Carbon steel
thread
Nm kpm Ib.ft Nm kpm Ib.ft
6.1.5 Cleaning
M4 1,7 0,17 1,2 2,5 0,25 1,8
CIP (Cleaning In Place)
M5 3,4 0,34 2,5 4,9 0,5 3,6
To prolong the intervals between manual
M6 7 0,7 5 8 0,8 5,9 cleaning of the separator the use of CIP
M8 17 1,7 13 20 2 14,7 together with repeated discharges can be used.
M10 33 3,4 24 39 3,9 28,7 Some CIP liquids can be corrosive to parts
which are included in the separator.
M12 57 5,8 42 68 6,9 50
M16 140 14 100 155 15,8 114 ON
CAUTI
!
M20 270 28 200 325 33 239
M24 470 48 340 570 58 420 Use only Alfa Laval recommended CIP liquids.
The figures apply to lubricated screws

tightened with a torque wrench.
68 593308-02
6.2 Maintenance Log
Name of plant: Local identification:
Separator: AFPX 810XGV-14CG/74CG Manufacture No./Year:
Total running hours: Product No.: 881264-04-01/3
Date: Signature:
Intermediate
Check
Major
Part i M Action Page Note

In- and outlet device and frame hood
- All parts x x Clean, check for corrosion and cracks 105-108
- In- and outlet device x x Clean, check and renew all O-rings 168
- Frame hood x x Renew seal strip 168
x Control measure of paring disc height 169
x Check height adjusting rings 169
- Cyclone and pipe x Renew sealing rings 121
connections
Bowl
- All parts x x Clean, check for corrosion and cracks 105-108
- All parts x x Check for erosion damages 108
- Bowl body x x Check for impact marks and corrosion 106
x x Renew seal ring 155
- Operating slide x x Renew rectangular ring 152
x x Renew valve plugs 151
- Bowl hood x x Renew seal ring 123
x x Renew O-ring 159
- Centre screw x x Renew O-ring 156
- Disc stack x x Check disc stack pressure 164
- Hydraulic ring x x Renew oval rings & O-rings 147
- Control paring disc x x Renew O-rings 147
x x Check height adjustment 148
Frame
- Frame feet x Renew frame feet (including washers 111 3-year service kit
and screws)
69
593308-02
Intermediate
Check
Major
Driving device vertical
- All parts x Clean, check for corrosion and cracks 105-108
- Bottom bearing housing x Renew O-rings 144
- Top bearing housing x Renew springs 141
- Bowl spindle x Pre-lubricate and renew ball bearing 154
x Pre-lubricate and renew self-aligning 143
roller bearing
x Renew rubber buffers 140,141
x Measure the radial wobble 145
x Lubricate 154
- Distributing cover x Renew gasket 147
Driving device horizontal
- All parts x Clean, check for corrosion and cracks 105-108
- Worm wheel shaft and x Check radial wobble of worm wheel 138
gear housing shaft
x Renew bearings, O-rings, sealings 130
and tolerance ring
x x Renew oil in gear housing 171
-Flexible coupling x Check axial play of elastic plates 134
70
593308-02
Intermediate
Check
Major
Monitoring equipment
- Sensors x x Function check 36
OWMC
- Cylinder x Clean and check 194
x Renew seal and garter strap 194
- Piston x Clean and check, 194
x Renew seal rings 194
x Lubricate 195
- Two-pulse adapter x Clean and check 195
Electrical motor
- Electrical motor x Lubricate if nipples are fitted. See sign 234
on motor
Signs and labels on separator
- Machine plate x Check attachment and legibility 172
- Power supply frequency x Check attachment and legibility 172
- Lifting instructions x Check attachment and legibility 172
- Safety labels x Check attachment and legibility 172
- Name plate x Check attachment and legibility 172
- Representative label x Check attachment and legibility 172
71
593308-02
6.3 Dismantling
6.3.1 Introduction
The separator must be dismantled regularly
for cleaning and inspection.
The frame hood and heavy bowl parts must

be lifted by means of a hoist. Position the
hoist exactly above the bowl centre. Use a
lifting sling and lifting hooks with safety
catches.
The parts must be handled carefully. Don’t

place parts directly on the floor, but on a
clean rubber mat, fibreboard or a suitable
pallet.
NOTE
For safety reasons, it is essential that all

personnel who work with the separator read
this manual thoroughly and completely.
Do not allow personnel to clean, assemble,
operate or maintain the separator until they
have read and fully understood this manual.
Ensure that all personnel who operate and
service the separator are well-trained and
knowledgeable concerning the separator and
the work to be carried out.
ING
WARN
!
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock-
out the power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
Make sure that machine has come to a

complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work.
S0068821
The motor fan indicate if separator parts are

rotating or not.
The direction of rotation can also be checked by
comparing the direction of motor fan and the arrow on
the fixed plate on the motor.
72
593308-02
6.3.2 Tools
Special tools from the tool kit must be used
for dismantling and assembly, as well as
Standard tools (not included). The special
tools are specified in the Spare Parts Catalogue
and are illustrated at the beginning of each
dismantling section.
Standard Tools
1
2 3
6
4
G 0 96 3 2A 1
1 Screwdriver
2 Dial indicator with magnetic base
3 Heating equipment for bearings
4 Sliding calliper
5 Adjustable spanner
6 Spanners (various sizes)
73
593308-02
6.3.3 Frame hood and outlet device
Inlet bend
O-ring
Nut
Plug
Discharge housing
G 0 97 01 M 1
O-ring
O-rings
1 2
Inlet pipe
Height adjusting
rings
3
G 08 60 6 I1
Frame hood
1 Lifting eye (frame hood).

2 Hook spanner (coupling nut)
3 T-handle with extension rod, sockets
ING
WARN
! G 1 02 60 1 1
Entrapment hazard
To avoid accidental start, switch off and lock-
out the power supply before starting any
dismantling work.
Make sure that machine has come to a

complete standstill before starting any
dismantling work.
74
593308-02
1 Removing the in- and outlet device.
a Disconnect and remove all

connections.
b Unscrew the nut and remove the

inlet bend.
c Unscrew the screws and

remove the discharge
housing.
G 10 26 02 1
75
593308-02
6.3.4 Bowl (purifier)

Lock ring
Gasket Paring chamber
cover
O-rings
Paring chamber
lower
Gravity disc
O-rings Lock ring
O-ring
Bowl hood
O-ring
Seal ring
O-ring
Top disc
1 2
3
Bowl disc Wing insert
with neck
4 6
5
Bottom disc
Screw & usit ring
7 8 Distributor
9
Insert
10 11 12 O-ring
Centre screw
O-ring
Distributing cone
14
13
Liner O-ring
O-ring Clamp ring

G 0 86 05 O 1
O-ring
Wear protection
1 Lifting eye bolts (large lock ring). Rectangular ring
2 Lifting tool (distributor).
Sliding bowl
3 Driving out pin (sealing ring). bottom
4 Spanner (large lock ring).
Screw & washer
5 Lifting tool (Bowl body)
6 T-handle (lock ring) (M5) Bowl body
7 Lifting tool (sliding bowl bottom)
G 10 2 61 11
Operating slide Rectangular ring

8 Lifting tool (distributing cone)
9 Mounting tool (wear protection) Valve plug
Rectangular
10 Spanner (small lock ring) rings Nozzle
11 Lifting tool (bowl hood)
Screw O-ring
12 Compressing tool
13 Lifting eye (distributing cover) Operating ring
14 Spanner for clamp ring
O-ring Control paring disc
Hydraulic ring
76
593308-02
6.3.5 Bowl (concentrator)

Lock ring
Gasket Paring chamber
cover
O-rings
Paring chamber
lower
Gravity disc
O-rings Lock ring
O-ring
Bowl hood
O-ring
Seal ring
O-ring
Top disc
1 2
3
Bowl disc Wing insert
with neck
4 6
5
Bottom disc
Screw & usit ring
7 8 Distributor
9
Insert
10 11 12 O-ring
Centre screw
O-ring
Distributing cone
14
13
Liner O-ring
O-ring Clamp ring

G 0 86 05 O 1
O-ring
Wear protection
1 Lifting eye bolts (large lock ring). Rectangular ring
2 Lifting tool (distributor). Sliding bowl
3 Driving out pin (sealing ring). bottom
4 Spanner (large lock ring).
Screw & washer
G 1 02 6 1A 1
5 Lifting tool (Bowl body)

6 T-handle (lock ring) (M5) Bowl body
7 Lifting tool (sliding bowl bottom) Operating slide Rectangular ring
8 Lifting tool (distributing cone)
9 Mounting tool (wear protection) Valve plug
Rectangular
10 Spanner (small lock ring) rings Nozzle
11 Lifting tool (bowl hood)
O-ring
12 Compressing tool Screw
13 Lifting eye (distributing cover) Operating ring
14 Spanner for clamp ring
O-ring Control paring disc
Hydraulic ring
77
593308-02
1 Removing the frame hood.
a Remove the screws for the

frame hood and lift it off by
using two lifting eyes.
G 10 26 03 1
2 Removing the small lock ring.
a Unscrew the small lock ring using the

special spanner included in the tool kit.
NOTE
Left-hand thread!
G07 2 79 N1
78
593308-02
3 Removing the paring chamber and inlet pipe
a Remove the upper paring chamber

cover.
b Remove the inlet pipe with paring

disc.
c Remove the gasket and paring

chamber lower.
b Remove the gravity disc.
G 1 02 6 12 1
79
593308-02
4 Compressing the disc stack.
a Fit the lifting tool on the bowl

hood.
G 05 31 2 21
NOTE
Use the compressing tool to reduce shocks to

bearings and thread wear minimized when
unscrewing the large lock ring.
b Fit the compressing tool by screwing the pole of the

tool into the threads of the distributor using the
horizontal handle.
The control lever on the compressing tool should be
in position 0.
G 05 31 3 11
c Turn the control lever to position

1 for compression.
Compress the disc stack by
pumping the horizontal handle
until the oil pressure is released
through the relief valve.
G 0 53 3 62 1
80
593308-02
5 Removing the large lock ring.
a Fit the lock ring spanner and

unscrew the large lock ring.
NOTE
Left-hand thread!
G 0 5 31 41 1
b Release the pressure in the
compressing tool and remove it
from the lifting tool.
G 05 31 3 11
c Fit two eye bolts (M16) and
remove the large lock ring by a
hoist.
NOTE
The lock ring must be

kept lying horizontally
or it may become
distorted. Even the
slightest distortion
could make it
impossible to refit.
G05 3 15 C1
81
593308-02
6 Separating the bowl hood from the bowl body.
a Separate the bowl hood from the bowl body by using the
compression tool.
Remove the lifting tool from the bowl hood.
Fit the compressing tool by screwing the pole of the tool into the
threads of the distributor using the horizontal handle.
The control lever on the compressing tool should be in position 0.
G 0 5 43 95 1
b Fit the lifting tool on the bowl hood.
Turn the control lever to position 2 for expansion.
Separate the bowl hood from the bowl body by pumping the
horizontal handle.
Remove the lifting tool and the compressing tool.
G 0 54 40 11
Then refit the lifting tool.
c Lift off the bowl hood using a hoist.

Be careful not to scratch the bowl
hood seal ring.
ON
CAUTI
!
Cut hazard
G 05 3 99 21
If the top disc is stuck into

the bowl hood, remove it
now before it accidentally
falls out.
82
593308-02
7 Removing the top disc.
a Remove the top disc if not

already removed from the
bowl.
G 0 7 28 34 1
8 Removing the disc stack.
ON
CAUTI
!
Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the bowl
discs may cause cuts
a Fit the lifting tool into the

distributor and lift the
distributor with disc stack
out of the bowl body using
a hoist.
Lifting tool
b Carefully lift off the

disc stack assembly.
G 10 2 61 91
83
593308-02
9 Removing the centre screw and distributing cone.
a Unscrew and remove the

centre screw.
NOTE
Left-hand thread!
G 10 26 1 31
b Fit the lifting tool to the
distributing cone and lift
it out.
G 0 66 9 44 1
84
593308-02
10 Removing the sliding bowl bottom.
a Fit the lifting tool onto the sliding

bowl bottom and lift it out
together with the liner and
clamp ring using a hoist.
G 01 84 9 11
11 Dismantle the sliding bowl bottom.
a Remove the clamp ring by

hitting the tool pins with the tin
mallet.
G 0 9 63 1N 1
85
593308-02
12 Removing the bowl body.
Guide lug
a Unscrew all hexagon socket Screw

head screws in the bottom of the
bowl body and the screws for
hydraulic ring. Start with the
screw opposite the guide lug in
the bowl body wall and continue
with the other two 120o apart.
b Fit the lifting tool into the bowl body bottom with the
three screws.
Release the bowl body from the spindle by using the

lifting tool as a puller. Turn the handle at top of the
lifting tool until the bowl body comes loose from the
spindle taper.
Hydraulic ring
c Lift out the bowl body.
NOTE
Handle the bowl body carefully. If it is

roughly handled, the ejection d Observe that the hydraulic ring remains on the
mechanism may be damaged. distributing cover.
G 05 3 29 81
86
593308-02
13 Prepare for removal of operating slide and operating ring.
a Thread a strap through two

sludge ports and place the bowl
body on the side using a hoist.
b Unscrew the three screws, in the

bottom of the bowl body, holding
the operating ring.
G 08 6 10 A 1
87
593308-02
14 Removing the operating slide and operating ring.
a Remove the operating ring.
b Fit lifting eyes to the operating

slide and lift it off from the bowl
body.
G 0 86 10 G 1
88
593308-02
6.3.6 Driving device vertical 2 3 4

1
5 6
7
G 0 86 05 P1
8 9 10
1 Ring (dism. bearing). 7 Washer (bearing)

2 Ring (mount bearing). 8 Driving off tool (bearing)
3 Lifting tool (spindle) 9 Mounting tool
G 08 63 3 I1
4 Lifting tool (spindle) (rigid ball bearing)
5 Tube (mount bearing). 10 Sleeve (dismounting
6 Pin spanner (oil fan) top bearing)
Rubber buffer
Distributing cover
Ball bearing holder
Flat gasket Ball bearing
Screw Ball bearing holder
Protecting plate Compression spring

O-ring Rubber buffer
Protecting collar Top bearing
Screw support
Guide ring
Screw
Protecting cap
Oil fan
O-ring
Worm
Screw
O-ring Support washer
Top bearing cover Roller bearing

O-ring Spacing washer
Lock washer
Round nut
O-ring
Bowl spindle O-ring
Bottom bearing
housing
Screw
G 0 96 32 V1
89
593308-02
NOTE
Clean the space in the bowl casing thoroughly

before starting to dismantle the bowl spindle to
prevent contaminations falling down into the oil
gear housing.
1 Removing the control paring disc, hydraulic ring and the distributing cover.
a Remove the control paring disc b Unscrew the screws holding the
and the hydraulic ring. distributing cover.
Control paring disc

c Fit lifting eyes to the distributing
cover and lift it out from the
Hydraulic ring frame.
G 0 9 63 42 1
2 Removing the protecting plate and protecting collar.
a Unscrew the screws and remove

the protecting plate.
b Remove the O-ring and pull off

the protecting collar.
G 09 6 35 31
90
593308-02
.
3 Removing the guide ring, protecting cap and O-ring.
a Unscrew the screws and remove

the guide ring and protecting
cap.
b Remove the rubber ring.
G 0 9 63 65 1
4 Drain the oil.
Place a collecting tray under the oil

drain hole, remove the worm gear
cover and the drain plug and then
drain the oil from the worm gear
housing. ON
CAUTI
!
Burn hazard
Lubricating oil and various
machine surfaces can be
hot and cause burns.
0 48 4 24 1
.
5 Prepare for removal of the spindle assembly
a Unscrew the screws holding the

top bearing cover.
G 0 9 63 72 1
91
593308-02
6 Removing the worm wheel.
ON
CAUTI
!
Crush hazard
The worm wheel is quite
heavy. Hold it firmly when
dismantling. Risk of
jamming injury.
a On the horizontal driving device,

loosen the screws in the
clamping element uniformly and
successively in the order shown
in the illustration. In the first step,
do not loosen the screws more
than ¼ turn to avoid distortion in
the clamping element. Do not
unscrew the screws entirely.
G 02 07 92 1
b Push the worm wheel to one
side before removing the
spindle. If worm wheel is stuck
use a piece of wood to loosen it.
92
593308-02
7 Lifting out the spindle assembly
G 0 96 3 83 1
8 Removing the worm from the spindle.
a Pull off the worm together with

its spacing sleeve, roller bearing
and the protecting collar.
In addition to the special tools,

use a bar to stop the spindle
from turning (see the
illustration). Hit a few light blows
with a hammer on the end of the
screw if the worm will not loosen.
G 0 1 88 45 1
93
593308-02
9 Remove the round nut, the lock washer and the spacing washer.
G 0 18 83 1 1
10 Removing the oil fan.
a Place the spindle upside down

into the mounting tube.
b Unscrew and remove the oil fan
Mounting tube
G 01 8 95 31
94
593308-02
11 Removing the top bearing support and lower rubber buffer.
a Remove the screws fixing the

top bearing support to the top
bearing cover.
b Remove the top bearing support

and the lower rubber buffer. The
lower rubber buffer is provided
with springs.
G 01 8 86 81
95
593308-02
12 Removing the top bearing cover and upper buffer.
a Lift out the spindle, lay it down

and remove the top bearing
cover and the upper rubber
buffer.
G 0 1 88 73 1
13 Removing the ball bearing holders.
a Ease off the lower and upper

ball bearing holders by using
the three screws removed in
point 11.
G 0 18 8 84 1
96
593308-02
14 Removing the bearing.
a Drive off the ball bearing from

the top end of the spindle. use a
wooden bed to protect the
thread in the bottom end of the
spindle.
G 01 8 89 51
15 Removing the bottom bearing housing from the frame.
G 0 83 1 59 1
97
593308-02
6.3.7 Horizontal driving device
1 3
2
5
4
6
G 0 8 60 5H 1
7
1 Puller (worm wheel). 4 Ring (worm wheel shaft)

2 Puller (ball bearing 5 Washer (brake pulley).
worm wheel shaft). 6 Screw (bearing shield)
3 Dismounting tool 7 Lock ring
(brake pulley).
G 02 46 5Z 1
Worm gear end
1. Round nut* 8. Clamp element 13. Cooling coil
2. Frame bottom part 9. Small ball bearing 14. Washer
3. Bearing housing* with O-ring 10. Gasket 15. Nut
4. Round nut 11. Bearing shield 16. Washer
5. Large ball bearing 11A.O-ring 17. Screw
6. Lock ring (left hand thread) 11B.Corrugated shim 18. Seal ring
7. Worm wheel 12. Worm wheel shaft
* The bearing housing should normally remain sitting in the frame.

It should be dismantled only when it is necessary to replace it, or when the separator is to be reconditioned.
If it is to be removed, observe that the round nut (1) is locked with Loctite. The nut is therefore easier to unscrew
when heated. The bearing housing is also fixed with Loctite.
When fitting a new bearing housing, apply Loctite 243 on the threads.
98
593308-02
6.3.8
Drive motor end

1 Nut
2 Washer
3 Stud bolt
4 Screw
5 Nut
6 Coupling drum
7 Elastic plate
8 Screw
9 Spring washer
10 Washer
11 Coupling pulley
12 Motor
G 07 78 26 1
13 Motor adapter
99
593308-02
1 Removing the guard and the bearing shield
a Shut off the water supply and

disconnect the cooling water
connections to the cooling coil in the
worm gear housing.
b Remove the guard covering the

bearing shield.
G 0 79 79 11
c Remove the nuts and washers fixing
the cooling coil to the bearing shield
and press the two tube ends up into
the bearing shield.
d Remove the bearing shield:

ease it off by means of two of the
fastening screws.
G 0 21 2 42 1
ON
CAUTI
!
Crush hazard
The shield is quite heavy (15 kg
cast iron). Hold the shield firmly
or use two longer screws as
guide pins to prevent dropping
it during dismantling.
2 Removing the cooling coil

a Remove the protecting cover.
b Lift out the cooling coil, take

care of the gaskets (A).
G 07 98 0 41
100
593308-02
3 Removing the bearing, clamping element and worm wheel
a Fit the puller tool and pull off the ball

bearing from the worm wheel shaft.
G 02 12 5 21
b Remove the clamping element and
worm wheel.
ON
CAUTI
!
Crush hazard
The worm wheel is quite heavy.
Hold it firmly when dismantling.
Risk for jamming injury.
G 0 2 07 82 1
101
593308-02
4 Removing the motor and the elastic plates
a Disconnect the motor cables. Note the

positions of cables in the terminal box to re-
connect correctly (for correct direction of
rotation).
b Hook up the motor in a hoist and loosen the

motor from the separator frame.
G 0 7 78 2B 1
Pull out the motor carefully.
c Remove the three elastic plates.

d If the coupling drum has to be dismantled, use a
washer to protect the threaded hole in the motor shaft.
5 Removing the coupling disc
a To remove the coupling disc from the

Centre screw
horizontal driving shaft, unscrew the centre
screw (A) and remove the plain washer (B).
Then tighten the screw (A) again to protect
the worm wheel shaft during next
operation. Plain washer
G 04 6 27 11
b Fit the puller tool illustrated below and

pull off the coupling disc.
4 84 41 1
102
593308-02
6 Removing the lock ring on the worm wheel and knock loose the worm wheel shaft
a Remove the lock ring on the

worm wheel side.
Left-hand thread!
G 01 92 3 11
b Knock loose the worm wheel
shaft by means of a piece of
wood and a tin hammer. Use
light blows from the motor side.
G 0 21 34 21
103
593308-02
7 Removing the ball bearing
a Unscrew the round nut fixing

the ball bearing. The nut is
locked with Loctite 243.
G 0 2 12 61 1
b Remove the ball bearing. Put
some cotton twist into the tool
to avoid damage to the shaft.
The pressure should be
applied to the inner race of the
ball bearing.
G 0 21 27 11
104
593308-02
6.4 Actions Before

Assembly
6.4.1 Cleaning i M
Clean the separator parts according to the
diagram below. Afterwards, protect all cleaned
carbon steel parts against corrosion by oiling.
Part Procedure Cleaning agents
Frame and The external cleaning of the frame and motor should be Water and de-greasing agent.
motor restricted to brushing, sponging or wiping while the motor is
running or still is hot.
ING
WARN
!
Electrical hazard
Never wash down a separator with a direct
water stream.
Never play a water jet on the motor. Totally
enclosed motors can be damaged by direct
hosing to the same extent as open motors,
resulting in short-circuit and internal corrosion.
Bowl Cleaning of bowl discs A chemical cleaning agent must

Inlet/ outlet Handle the bowl discs carefully in order to avoid damage to dissolve the deposits quickly without
the surfaces during cleaning attacking the material of the separator
parts.
1 Remove the bowl discs from the distributor and place them
individually in the cleaning agent.
ON
2 Allow the discs to remain in the cleaning agent until the CAUTI
deposits have been dissolved. This will normally take
!
between two and four hours.
3 Lastly, clean the discs with a soft brush. Cut hazard
Sharp edges on the separator
discs may cause cuts.
Cleaning of operating ring, paring chamber cover lower
and operating slide with nozzle.
Use 10% acetic acid solution to dissolve lime deposits. The
acid should be heated to 80 °C.
Clean the nozzle on the operating slide using a soft iron wire
or a similar object.
Driving device Use a sponge or a soft brush. White spirit, cleaning-grade kerosene
or diesel oil.
105
593308-02
6.4.2 Inspection for corrosion i

M
Inspect the separator parts for corrosion.
Evidence of corrosion attacks should be looked
for and rectified each time the separator is
dismantled.
Max. 1,0 mm
ING
WARN
!
G 0 2 05 24 1
Always contact your Alfa Laval representative if
you suspect that the depth of the corrosion
damage exceeds 1,0 mm or if cracks have been
found. Do not continue to use the separator
until it has been inspected and given clearance
for operation by Alfa Laval.
Material Type of corrosive Appearance Measure

environment
Non-stainless steel Water or dampness Rust If damage exceeds 1,0 mm, contact
and cast iron parts Alfa Laval.
Stainless steel Chlorides or acidic Acidic solutions cause general Polish dark-coloured spots and
solutions corrosion. other corrosion marks with a fine
Chloride corrosion begins as small grain emery cloth. This may prevent
dark spots that can be difficult to further damage.
detect, and goes on to local damage If damage exceeds 1,0 mm contact
such as pitting, grooves or cracks. Alfa Laval.
ING
WARN
!
Pits and spots forming a line may indicate
cracks beneath the surface.
All forms of cracks are a potential danger and
are totally unacceptable.
Replace any part where corrosion can be
suspected of affecting its strength or function.
106
593308-02
6.4.3 Inspection for cracks i M

Check the separator parts for cracks. It is
particularly important to inspect for cracks in
rotating parts, and especially the pillars
between the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
ING
WARN
!
All forms of cracks are potentially dangerous as
they reduce the strength and functional ability
of components.
Always replace a part if cracks are present.
Cracks can occur from cyclic material stresses

and corrosion. Keeping the separator and its
parts clean and free from deposits will help to
prevent corrosion attacks.
ING
WARN
!
you suspect that the depth of the damage
exceeds 1,0 mm.
Do not continue to use the separator until it
has been inspected and given clearance for
operation by Alfa Laval.
593308-02 107
6.4.4 Inspection for erosion i M

Erosion may occur when particles
suspended in the process liquid slide along
or strike against a surface.
Surfaces particularly subjected to erosion are:
Erosion is characterised by:

1 Burnished traces in the
material.
2 Dents and pits having a
granular and shiny surface.
The paring disc.
The top disc
The sealing edge of the sliding

bowl bottom
Pillars between the

sludge ports in the
bowl wall
The underside of the

distributor in the vicinity of
the distribution holes and
wings The surface of the
sliding bowl bottom
that faces the conical
part of the distributor.
G 10 25 63 1
1 Inspect the bowl and inlet/outlet parts for 2 Replace parts if erosion is suspected.
erosion damages.
ING
NOTE WARN
!
you suspect that the depth of the damage Disintegration hazard
exceeds 1,0 mm. Do not continue to use the Erosion damage weakens parts by reducing
separator until it has been inspected and the thickness of the material.
cleared for operation by Alfa Laval. Pay special attention to the pillars between
the sludge ports in the bowl wall.
Replace parts if erosion is suspected of
affecting strength or function.
108 593308-02
Wear liners in the bowl

The wear liners protect the wall pillars in the
bowl body. They must be replaced before the
liners have been perforated by erosion.
Wear liners in wall pillars

When fitting new liners keep in mind that they
will be subjected to a very high service stress.
Forces up to 10 000 G are not unusual at the
bowl periphery. It is essential, therefore, that
the liners are being mounted carefully and in
full agreement with the following instructions.
1 Fitting new liners.
a Remove the old liner and place

the new liner blank in the wall
pillar.
S0 03 2 01 1
b Fasten the mounting tool
between the wall pillars. Clamp
the wear liner with the tool.
G 0 2 98 61 1
c Tighten the tool nut with a

spanner until the liner is firmly
pressed to its seat.
G 0 2 98 71 1
109
593308-02
2 Adjusting the new liners.
a Bend the shank (1) at right

angles to the outside of the bowl
wall using a drift.
G 0 29 8 92 1
b Back off the nut of the tool and
remove it.
G 02 9 89 41
Remove the liner and cut the
shank so that it ends 0,5-1,5
mm (A) from the bowl wall.
c Fit the wear liner in the wall pillar

and clamp it with the tool. Knock
the shank flat against the wall of
the pillar.
S00 31 8 11
d Remove the tool and check that

the wear liner is well attached
and that the shank (1) does not
G 0 2 98 82 1
protrude beyond the bowl

periphery. Fit the other liners as
described above.
593308-02 110
6.4.5 Exchange of frame feet

Renew the frame feet as described below.
When replacing the frame feet, the separator

must be lifted. Follow ‘‘6.9.1 Lifting the
separator” on page 188.
NOTE
Discard the old frame feet, screws and washers.
1 Fitting new frame feet
a Disconnect pipes, hoses and cables

connected to the separator.
b Remove the set screws, three for

each foundation foot.
c Lift the separator.
d Unscrew the screw which is

Rubber cushions
G 0 25 89 B 1
locked with Loctite and then
renew the two rubber cushions.
Set screw
e Apply Loctite 242 on the screw

thread and tighten it with 40 Nm.
f Level against the upper face of the three

holders. Screw the holders to compensate for
inclination, if any. Any gap between a holder and
a foundation foot must be eliminated by adding
or removing one or more adjusting washers.
Note that the total thickness of the adjusting
G 06 67 06 1
washers for one foot must not exceed

corresponding 4 washers.
111
593308-02
2 Lowering the frame
a After all rubber cushions have Rubber cushion

been renewed lower the
Frame foot Set screw
separator into the three holders.
Rectangular ring
Washer
b Tighten the set screws, first by Screw
hand (or by a hand tool, if Holder
necessary) until all of them are Adjusting washer
in contact with the frame feet. Foot on foundation plate
Then tighten the set screws with
G 0 68 38 31
100 Nm.
Note that the total thickness of the

adjusting washers for one foot must
NOTE not exceed corresponding 4
washers.
Tighten the set screws before
mounting the bowl or cyclone.
c Connect the previously

disconnected pipes, hoses and
cables.
112
593308-02
6.4.6 Bowl spindle taper and bowl

body nave taper
1 Remove impact marks
Impact marks on the spindle

taper or in the bowl body nave
taper may cause poor fit and
out-of-balance vibrations.
The bowl spindle and the nave

should also be checked if the
bowl spindle has been
dismantled or if the bowl runs
roughly.
Corrosion may cause the bowl

to stick firmly to the spindle
taper and cause difficulties
during the next dismantling.
NOTE
Always use a scraper with

great care. The taper shape
must not be deformed.
Remove any impact marks with a scraper and/

or whetstone.
Rust can be removed by using a fine-grain
G 0 54 7 96 1
emery cloth (e.g. No. 320).
Finish with polishing paper (e.g. No. 600).
113
593308-02
6.4.7 Lock ring: wear and damage
1 Check lock ring threads
Excessive wear or impact marks on threads,

guide and contact surfaces of the lock ring,
bowl hood and bowl body may cause
hazardous galling.
Check the thread condition by tightening the

lock ring (1) after removing the disc stack
and bowl hood O-ring (2) from the bowl.
G 05 3 52 81
2 Check alignment marks
In a new bowl the alignment marks on the lock ring

and the bowl body are exactly opposite each other.
If thread wear is observed, mark the lock ring at the

new position opposite the alignment mark on the
bowl body by punching in a new mark.
A
If the original φ−mark on the lock ring passes the
φ−mark on the bowl body by more than 25°
(which corresponds to A=100 mm), an Alfa Laval
representative must be contacted immediately.
If the marks become illegible, an Alfa Laval

representative should be contacted immediately to
inspect thread wear and for determining the position
of new alignment marks. G 0 5 78 13 1
(MAX 25 )
ING
WARN
!
Wear on large lock ring thread
must not exceed safety limit.
The φ-mark on lock ring must
not pass opposite φ-mark by
more than the specified
distance.
114
593308-02
3 Check and rectify damages
The position of the threads, contact and

guide surfaces are indicated by arrows in
the illustration.
Clean the threads, contact and guide

surfaces with a suitable degreasing agent,
see ‘‘6.1.5 Cleaning” on page 68.
Check for burrs and protrusions caused by
impact.
ON
CAUTI
!
Cut hazard
The lock ring thread may
have sharp edges which
can cause cuts.
G 0 53 72 N1
If damage is established, rectify by using a
whetstone or fine emery cloth
(recommended grain size 240). Do not use
rotating files etc. If the damage is
considerable, use a fine single-cut file,
followed by a whetstone.
Remove the damage material on top of the
surface. Just take away the damage, not the
undamaged material.
After remedy, the edges of the damaged

surfaces should be smooth.
Accomplish the treatment by priming the

damaged surfaces if Intermediate Service. If
Major Service, the whole lock ring should
anyway be primed as described in ‘‘6.4.9
Lock ring; priming (non-food applications
only)” on page 119.
G 06 86 6 21
115
593308-02
6.4.8 Guide surfaces
1 Check surfaces indicated A or B
Clean the illustrated parts with a suitable

cleaning agent. Do not degrease the contact A
surfaces indicated B. These surfaces are
primed with a slide lacquer which must not
be removed. A
0 37 82 V1
Sliding bowl bottom
NOTE
To avoid the risk of galling, the

contact surfaces indicated B are
primed with a slide lacquer at
every Major Service (MS).
The slide-lacquered surfaces will A
be destroyed if the surfaces are
degreased A
Check surfaces indicated A and B for burrs

or galling. Rectify when necessary. A
G 03 78 2 W1
Bowl body
B
Before fitting the parts, apply lubricant
according to ‘‘6.8.4 Recommended
lubricants” on page 181 with a well-cleaned
brush on surfaces indicated A and B.
B
G 0 37 82 Z1
Operating slide
A
G 1 0 08 31 1
Operating ring
116
593308-02
2 Repair of galling on guide surfaces
Galling (friction marks) may appear on guide surfaces in

the operating system, the bowl body and the sliding
bowl bottom. Surfaces subject to repair are indicated by
an arrow.
The example below describes the repair of the lower

guide surface of the bowl body nave.
G 0 2 05 51 1
Recommended tools for correction of galling:
- Emery cloth, 240 grade. Guide surface in the bowl body

- Small power drill
- Degreasing agent.
- Fibre brush, ∅ 25mm.
- Fibre brush, ∅ 50 mm.
- Very fine single-cut file.
a Clean the surface thoroughly with a

degreasing agent, i.e. white spirit. This
is important.
G 0 20 56 11
b If the galling is excessive, first use the
fine single-cut file. The file should be
used with caution so that the damage
is not made worse.
Remove the high spots on the surface.
Do not use rotating files or similar.
Remove the high spots only - not the
undamaged material.
G 02 0 57 11
117
593308-02
Repair of galling on guide surfaces
c An emery cloth of 240 grade should

be used to smooth the edges and to
remove any burnt-in foreign matter.
G 02 05 8 11
d Finish off by polishing the damaged
spot with the fibre brushes and brush
wax. It is recommended that the whole
area where galling may occur is
polished. Polishing will help smooth
the whole of the damaged area, even
in the deepest parts.
G 0 20 59 11
Prime the repaired area with slide lacquer. Read
the correct procedure under checkpoint ‘‘6.4.9
Lock ring; priming (non-food applications only)”
on page 119.
Apply Alfa Laval lubricating paste or Molykote
1000 Paste to the surface after priming.
118
593308-02
6.4.9 Lock ring; priming

(non-food applications only)
1 Threads, guide and contact surfaces to be primed.
Recommended agents for priming procedure:
Degreasing agent
Slide lacquer Molykote D321R (varnish or spray)
Small power drill
2 fibre brushes
G 0 53 72 O 1
2 Clean the lock ring and spray surfaces with slide lacquer.
a Clean the lock ring thoroughly with a

degreasing agent and wipe it off.
G 02 06 91 1
b Spray the threads, guide and contact

surfaces with slide lacquer Molykote
D321R. Let the lacquer air-cure for about
15 minutes.
G 0 20 70 11
119
593308-02
3 Polish, spray and polish again
a Use a fibre brush to polish the slide

lacquer into the surface. The black spray
will look like well-polished leather when
properly finished.
G 02 07 3 11
b Spray the lock ring a second time and let
it dry for about 15 minutes.
G 02 07 21 1
c Polish the slide lacquer to a black shiny
surface which will now last about a year.
NOTE
Proceed in the same way with the threads

G 0 20 7 31 1
of the bowl body and with the guide

surfaces of the bowl hood and bowl body.
120
593308-02
6.4.10 Cyclone; seal rings
1 Clean and renew seal rings
a Dismantle and clean the cyclone and the

adjoining pipes.
When assembly, renew the sealing rings
marked in the illustration.
The new sealing rings are included in the

Major Service (MS) kit.
G 0 77 8 5H 1
121
593308-02
6.4.11 Lubrication of bowl parts
a Apply lubrication, see ‘‘6.8.4 Recommended lubricants” on

page 181, on the following contact surfaces. For non-food
applications also apply D321 on the operating slide and the
bowl body guide pin.
Sliding bowl bottom
Bowl body
(for non-food applications also
apply D321 on guide pin)
Operating slide
Operating ring
G 10 25 6 41
Hydraulic ring
122
593308-02
6.4.12 Bowl hood seal ring
1 Removing the seal ring from the bowl hood.
Max. permitted indentation of Poor sealing between the bowl hood seal ring
the seal ring is 1 mm and the sealing edge of the sliding bowl
bottom will cause a leakage of process liquid
from the bowl.
a Knock out the old ring by

means of a pin inserted in the
holes intended for this purpose.
G 02 0 63 41
ING
WARN
!
Risk for eye injury from flying seal ring

parts or from splashing fluid
The seal ring breaks when removed from the bowl
hood and may cause trapped fluid to splash. Wear
safety goggles.
123
593308-02
2 Fit new seal ring i i to the bowl hood
a Press the ring into the groove

with a straight wooden board
placed across the ring.
G 02 06 4 11
NOTE
If the new ring is too narrow,

place it in hot water (70-80 °C)
for about 5 minutes.
If it is too wide, it will shrink
after drying at 80-90 °C for about
24 hours.
6.4.13 Distributor insert
1 Clean the insert
a Remove the screws on top of

the distributor.
Lay the distributor down and
remove the insert.
b Remove o-ring and flush the

insert with water.
G 10 26 1 81
124
593308-02
6.4.14 Wear liner in sliding bowl

bottom
When fitting a new wear liner in the sliding O-ring

bowl bottom, dismantle and assemble as
illustrated. Clamp ring
When unscrewing the clamp ring use spanner O-ring

for clamp ring.
Note! Left-hand thread.
The wear liner can preferably be pressed out
of the sliding bowl bottom by using two screw
drivers or similar. Normally the wear liner will Wear liner
be destroyed when removed.
O-ring
O-ring
NOTE
G 09 6 31 N1
Sliding bowl bottom
Check that a new wear liner is
available before removing the
fitted wear liner.
When renewing the wear liner also renew the

O-rings.
The sliding bowl bottom has an assembly mark

(Ø) on its upper edge. This mark simplifies the
assembly of the bowl. Because the mark is
covered by the wear liner make a similar mark
on the edge of the wear liner in the same
position.
125
593308-02
6.5 Common maintenance

directions
6.5.1 Ball and roller bearings
Special-design bearings for the bowl spindle

The bearings used for the bowl spindle are
specified to withstand the speed, vibration,
temperature and load characteristics of high-
speed separators.
G0587321
Only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts should be
used.
1 Outer race
A bearing that appears equivalent to the 2 Ball/roller
genuine may differ considerably in various 3 Inner race
4 Cage
respects: inside clearances, design and
tolerances of the cage and races as well as
material and heat treatment.
NOTE
Using an incorrect bearing can cause a serious

breakdown with damage to equipment as a
result.
Do not re-fit a used bearing. Always replace it
with a new.
Dismantling
For bearings where no driving-off sleeve is
included in the tool kit, remove the bearing
from its seat by using a puller. If possible, let
the puller engage the inner ring, then remove
the bearing with a steady force until the
bearing bore completely clears the entire length
of the cylindrical seat.
The puller should be accurately centred during
G0587411
dismantling; otherwise, it is easy to damage the

seating.
For bearings where no driving-off
sleeve is included in the tool kit, use a
puller when removing bearings
NOTE
Do not strike with a hammer directly on the

bearing.
126
593308-02
Cleaning and inspection

Check shaft (spindle) end and/or bearing seat
in the housing for damage indicating that the
bearing has rotated on the shaft (spindle) and/
or in the housing respectively. Replace the
damaged part(s), if the faults cannot be
remedied by polishing.
Assembly
• Leave new bearings in original wrapping
until ready to fit. The anti-rust agent
protecting a new bearing should not be
removed before use.
• Use the greatest cleanliness when handling
the bearings.
• To facilitate assembly and also reduce the
risk of damage, first clean and then lightly oil
the bearing seating on shaft (spindle) or
alternatively in housing, with a thin oil.
G0587511
Clean and oil the bearing seating
before assembly
• Bearings fitted with two seals (1) are filled

with grease at delivery.
These bearings should not be heated above

60-70 °C before fitting and never heated in
oil. G0873211
If heating in oil or exceeding the temperature Bearing with two seals (1)
above, the grease in the bearing will be
dissolved and the lifetime of the bearing will
be considerably reduced.
127
593308-02
• When assembling ball bearings without

seals, the bearings must be heated in oil to
max. 125 °C.
NOTE
G0587611
Heat the bearing in a clean container.
Use only clean oil with a flash point above

250 °C. The bearing must not be in direct
contact with the container
The bearing must be well covered by the oil and
not be in direct contact with the sides or the
bottom of the container. Place the bearing on
some kind of support or suspended in the oil
bath.
ING
WARN
!
Burn hazard
Use protective gloves when handling the heated
bearings.
• There are several basic rules for assembling

cylindrical bore bearings:
– Never directly strike a bearing’s rings,
cage or rolling elements while assembling.
A ring may crack or metal fragments break
off.
– Never apply pressure to one ring in order
to assemble the other.
– Use an ordinary hammer. Hammers with
soft metal heads are unsuitable as
fragments of the metal may break off and
enter the bearing.
– Make sure the bearing is assembled at a
right angle to the shaft (spindle).
128
593308-02
• If necessary use a driving-on sleeve that

abuts the ring which is to be assembled with
an interference fit, otherwise there is a risk
that the rolling elements and raceways may
be damaged and premature failure may
follow.
G0587711
Use a driving-on sleeve for
bearings that are not
heated.
Angular contact ball bearings

Always fit single-row angular contact ball
G0587211
bearings with the wide shoulder of the inner
race facing the axial load (upwards on a bowl
The wide shoulder of the
spindle). inner race must face the
axial load.
Lubrication
NOTE
Since roller bearings are normally treated only

with rust protection oil from the factory, an
initial lubrication of new bearings must always
be performed whenever bearings are replaced.
This is, however, not valid for bearings with
seals because they are already filled with
grease at delivery.
The initial lubrication implies adding a few

drops of lube oil to the bearings. Use the same
oil type as in the separator.
129
593308-02
6.6 Assembly
6.6.1 Driving device horizontal
NOTE
Renew all parts included in the IS- and MS-kits.

The O-rings and other sealing rings should be
lubricated with grease of silicone type, see
‘‘6.8.5 Recommended lubricating oils” on page
185
NOTE
When mounting some of the ball bearings and

bearing housings on the bowl spindle and
worm wheel shaft as described in this chapter,
these must be heated in oil to max. 125 °C.
ING
WARN
!
Burn hazard
Use protective gloves when handling the
heated bearings.
NOTE
Since roller bearings are normally treated only

with rust protection oil from the factory, an
initial lubrication of new bearings must always
be performed whenever bearings are replaced.
This is, however, not valid for bearings with
seals because they are already filled with
grease at delivery.
The initial lubrication implies adding a few

drops of lube oil to the bearings. Use the same
oil type as in the separator worm gear housing.
130
593308-02
1 Fit the large ball bearing M .
a Clean and oil the seat of the

large ball bearing on the
worm wheel shaft.
b Fit the large ball bearing. The

bearing is pre-lubricated and
sealed with two seals. It
should therefore not be
G 0 19 24 11
heated before fitting.
If necessary, knock the ball

bearing into its seat with the
driving-on sleeve tool and the Mounting tools
ring.
2 Fit the new seal ring
a Fit a new seal ring inside the

bearing housing. Use soap
water to facilitate mounting.
Seal ring
G 0 57 66 51
3 Fit the round nut
a Lock the ball bearing in its

position by tightening the
round nut.
G 0 19 16 11
131
593308-02
4 Fit the worm wheel shaft into the frame M .
a Clean the ball bearing

housing in the frame and oil
the outer race of the ball
bearing.
Mounting tools
G 0 2 13 52 1
NOTE
The bearing must

cool down before
fitting the worm
wheel shaft into the
frame. Otherwise
the tolerance
between the outer
diameter of the
bearing and the b Force the worm wheel shaft
bearing housing into its position in the frame so
will be too narrow. that the ball bearing enters
correctly into its seat. Use the
driving-on sleeve and the ring
forcing the outer race of the
ball bearing.
5 Fit the lock ring
a Fit the lock ring. Tighten it with

the pin spanner.
Left-hand thread!
G 02 46 01 1
132
593308-02
6 Fit the coupling disc
a Fit the coupling disc. Check

that the key in the worm wheel
shaft enters into the recess in
the nave of the disc.
G 0 77 77 1 1
b Lock the coupling disc in its
position by means of the plain
washer, spring washer and
centre screw.
c If the pulley has been removed, first lubricate

the motor shaft, see page 181. Then knock the
disc on to the motor shaft as far as possible
using a piece of wood and a hammer.
Screw the tool illustrated into the motor shaft
G 04 8 59 11
as far it goes and apply some grease to its
washer. Then turn the tool until the pulley is in
position. Lock with the lock screw.
133
593308-02
7 Fit the elastic plates M
a Check the three elastic plates

and guide ring. Clean or
renew, if needed.
b Fit the electric motor, using a

hoist.
G 0 7 78 29 1
8 Check the axial play
a Check the axial play between

two of the flexible plates.
Correct measure (A) is 4 +2 mm.
The measure can be adjusted by

moving the pulley (1) axially on
G 06 3 38 51
the motor shaft.
134
593308-02
9 Assemble the worm wheel and fit it onto the shaft
a Worm wheel assembly:
If the rubber buffers (1) have

been replaced in the worm
wheel, apply some Loctite
270 on the six screws (A).
Then tighten crosswise with
33 Nm.
G 0 19 1 92 1
b Clean the worm wheel shaft and the
inner surface of the worm wheel
nave thoroughly with a clean cloth.
Then oil the surfaces. The oil must
be of the same quality as used in
the worm gear housing.
G 05 71 83 1
Carefully push the worm wheel as
far as possible onto the shaft.
10 Fit the clamping element to the worm wheel
a Clean the inner surface of the

clamping element and oil it.
The oil must be of the same
quality as is used in the gear
housing. Slip the clamping
element onto the worm wheel.
The tightening is described in
conjunction with mounting the
bowl spindle on page 149.
G 0 2 13 81 1
135
593308-02
11 Fit the heated bearing onto the worm wheel shaft
a Mount the heated ball bearing

onto the free end of the worm
wheel shaft. If necessary,
apply the mounting tool and
hit a few blows on the bearing
to get it in the correct position. NOTE
G 0 48 56 11
Hitting with heavy
strokes can
damage the inner
bearing on the
worm wheel shaft.
12 Fit the cooling coil in the worm gear housing
a Fit gaskets M (A) onto the

cooling coil tubes and place
the cooling coil in the worm
gear housing.
G 0 79 80 5 1
136
593308-02
13 Fit corrugated shim, O-ring, seal strip and gasket in the bearing shield and cooling coil.
a Clean the bearing seat in the

bearing shield (11). Fit a new
O-ring (11A) M and
corrugated shim (11B) M
into the bearing shield.
G 08 28 6 E1
NOTE
Check that the end

bearing on the shaft
has cooled down. b Renew the gasket M (10) and
Otherwise the fit the bearing shield using the
tolerance between two guide pins in the tool set.
the outer diameter of Note that the shield can be fitted
the bearing and the in one position only.
seat in the bearing If necessary, pull it into position
shield will be too using the screws or tap its centre
narrow. with a tin hammer.
c Press the two tube ends of the

cooling coil (13) into the
bearing shield.
d Fit the washers (14) and nuts

(15) and tighten the coil to the
shield.
e Connect the cooling water to

the coil. Supply the cooling
water and check for leakages.
137
593308-02
14 Check the radial wobble
a Check the radial wobble of the worm wheel shaft

by first camping a dial indicator in a magnetic
support and fasten it to the surface for the worm
wheel guard. Turn the worm wheel shaft by hand.
Permissible radial wobble is maximum 0,10 mm.
If the wobble is greater, the worm wheel shaft must

be removed from the frame for closer examination.
Get in touch with your Alfa Laval representative as
the worm wheel shaft may need to be renewed.
NOTE
Excessive wobble on the

worm wheel shaft may
cause vibration and noise.
G 0 24 6 17 1
138
593308-02
6.6.2 Driving device vertical
1 Mount the top bearing M and holders
a Wipe off and oil the bearing

seats before fitting the
bearing support and ball
bearings.
b Check the indentations in the

lower ball bearing holder and
the top bearing support made
by the springs. Admitted
indentations are max. 0,5 mm.
Lower bearing holder Top bearing support
Rubber buffer with springs
c Heat the upper and lower ball Upper bearing holder

bearing holders and fit them
on the top bearing M .
Top bearing
Lower bearing holder

G 0 18 90 2 1
139
593308-02
2 Fit the top bearing assembly on the spindle
a Heat the top bearing

assembly and fit it on the
spindle. Use the oil fan as a
tool to secure the correct
position of the top bearing
assembly.
Tighten the oil fan with the pin

spanner.
b Remove the oil fan
after about five
G 0 1 89 24 1
minutes.
3 Lower the spindle into the mounting tube
Upper rubber buffer a Fit the O-ring M on

the top bearing cover.
Top bearing cover
b Place the top bearing

O-ring cover and the upper
rubber buffer M , the
one without springs,
upside down in the
mounting tube tool.
Mounting tube
c Lower the bowl spindle
upside down into the
tube and be sure that the
parts come into their
positions.
G 0 18 9 34 1
140
593308-02
4 Place the lower rubber buffer, the top bearing support
a Place the lower

rubber M buffer
with springs on the
ball bearing holder.
Bearing support
b Fit a new O-ring M in

the top bearing cover and
fit the bearing support.
c Screw the top bearing

support together with the
top bearing cover by
tightening the three
screws.
G 01 89 42 1
141
593308-02
5 Fit the oil fan
G 0 1 89 54 1
6 Fit the worm wheel and spacing sleeve
a Force the worm wheel

by hand onto the
lower, cleaned
tapered part of the
bowl spindle.
b Fit the support

washer.
NOTE
Wipe off and oil the
The worm should bearing seat before
not be heated fitting the bottom
before assembly. bearing.
01 89 67 1
142
593308-02
7 Fit the bottom bearing M onto the spindle
a Heat the bottom

bearing M and fit it
on the spindle.
G 0 18 99 61
b Fit the spacing
washer, the lock
washer and the round
nut.
G 01 90 01 1
c Fasten the whole
assembly with the
lock washer.
G 01 9 01 11
143
593308-02
8 Fit the bottom bearing housing to the frame
a Fit new O-rings M to

the bottom bearing
housing and fit the
housing to the frame.
G 0 83 15 A 1
9 Fit the spindle assembly into the frame
a When the bottom bearing have cooled

down, lift the bowl spindle assembly into
the frame with the lifting tool fitted on the
spindle top.
Lower the spindle with great care to avoid

damaging the worm teeth. Guide the
spindle into the bottom bearing housing.
Also guide the spindle so the screw holes
in the bearing housing are in line with the
holes in the frame.
If the spindle assembly does not quite

bottom in its seat, knock lightly on the
spindle top with a tin hammer.
b Fasten the bowl spindle assembly

in the frame with the six screws.
G 01 88 1 51
144
593308-02
10 Check radial wobble

a Set up a dial indicator on a magnetic (A) is max. allowed radial wobble
stand. Use the key for the large lock ring = 0,04 mm.
as a support for the stand.
G 0 68 14 11
b Use the coupling drum to
revolve the spindle manually.
Measure the wobble at the top

of the tapered end of the
spindle. Permissible radial
wobble (A) is maximum 0,04
mm.
G 06 81 91 1
11 Fit rubber ring M protecting cap and guide ring
a Fit a new rubber ring

M in the frame top
part and a new O-ring b Fit the protecting cap,
to the M top guide ring and tighten
bearing cover. the six screws.
G 0 96 36 6 1
145
593308-02
12 Fit the protecting collar, O-ring and protecting plate
a Fit the protecting collar

and a new O-ring M .
NOTE
Check that the protecting

collar is in the bottom
position (resting against
the thrust collar) before
tightening the protecting
plate.
b Fit the protecting

plate and tighten the
screws.
G 0 9 63 54 1
146
593308-02
13 Fitting the distributing cover, hydraulic ring and control paring disc.
a Fit new gasket M and the

distributing cover. Tighten the
screws.
b Fit the hydraulic

ring and the
control paring
disc with their
O-rings i .
See next page for height adjustment of

the control paring disc.
G 0 96 3 45 1
147
593308-02
14 Height adjustment of the control paring disc.
a Gaskets to be
mounted in such a way
that the dimension 142
+ 0,7 is obtained.
G 0 86 7 7C 1
NOTE!
Always mount at least
one gasket.
15 Check for scraping noise
NOTE
Rotate the spindle by

rotating the coupling drum
by hand and check for
smooth run. No scraping
G 0 6 81 91 1
or other jarring sounds

must be heard.
148
593308-02
16 Fit the clamping elements
a Push the worm wheel on the

horizontal shaft into position
for driving the bowl spindle.
b Check that the inner surface

of the clamping element is
clean and oiled.
c Slip the clamping element

onto the worm wheel and fix
the worm wheel by first
tightening the three clamping
element screws A, B and C
but only such that the
clamping element just sticks
on the worm wheel.
G 0 20 7 84 1
d Then tighten all the screws uniformly
and successively around the
clamping ring in the order indicated in
the illustration (1-12). Do not tighten
crosswise.
Tightening torque: 29 Nm.
The tightening must be repeated

several turns around the clamping
element until the screws are fully
tightened.
NOTE
Check continuously that

the ring of the clamping
element fit evenly.
149
593308-02
17 Fitting the clutch cover.
a Fit the cover and its

gasket covering the worm
gear housing. Also fit the
coupling cover if
G 0 6 83 41 1
removed.
150
593308-02
6.6.3 Bowl
1 Check operating slide and bowl body
a Poor sealing between the

valve plugs (1) in the
operating slide and bowl
body may prevent complete
closing of the bowl.
Examine the sealing surfaces
(2) of the bowl body in
contact with the valve plugs.
Remove any marks and lime
deposits with a very fine grain
emery cloth.
G 06 70 6 41
2 Fitting new valve plugs on the operating slide i i .
a Remove all the valve plugs.

Tap in the new plugs i .
G 0 53 69 1 1
151
593308-02
3 Fit the operating ring and the operating slide i M .
a Fit new rectangular ring i to the

bowl body.
b Place the operating slide on

the bowl body.
c Fit new rectangular rings and

O-rings i to the operating
ring.
d Fit the operating ring.

G 0 8 61 0I 1
152
593308-02
4 Turn the bowl body an fasten the operating ring
a Turn the bowl body using a hoist to

its up-right position with a strap
threaded through two sludge ports.
b Fasten the operating ring with the

screws.
G 0 86 10 A 1
c Turn the bowl body in an upright
position.
153
593308-02
5 Fit the bowl body onto the spindle

a Wipe off the spindle top and nave
bore in the bowl body. Lubricate
the tapered end of the spindle and
wipe it off with a clean cloth.
b Fit the lifting tool into the bowl body

bottom with the three screws.
Turn the handle at the top of the
lifting tool so that the central screw
is home.
b Lower the bowl body using hoist until the

central screw rests on the spindle top.
Then screw up the central screw so that
the bowl body sinks down onto the
spindle.
Remove the tool.
Hydraulic ring
Screws
G 05 35 9 41
b Fit the three hexagon socket head

screws in the bottom of the bowl body
and the three screws for attaching the
hydraulic ring.
154
593308-02
6 Change seal ring i i on the sliding bowl bottom and fit the sliding bowl bottom
a Turn the sliding bowl bottom

upside down and inject
compressed air through the
hole on the underside. This
will press the ring outwards
far enough to be gripped
easily.
G 02 07 5 11
b Turn the sliding bowl bottom in its
upright position and fit a new seal
ring i . NOTE
Chamfer up!
G 0 20 7 59 1
c Assemble the sliding bowl bottom
as described on page 125.
d Except lubrication of the parts

mentioned in ‘‘6.4.8 Guide
surfaces” on page 116, also
lubricate the guide pin fitted
in bottom of the bowl.
Make sure that the wear liner

inside the sliding bowl bottom
is fitted according to
instructions on page 125.
Fit the lifting tool to the sliding

bowl bottom and lift it into the
bowl body using a hoist.
G 01 84 91 1
155
593308-02
7 Fit the distributing cone and the centre screw
a Attach the lifting tool to the

distributing cone and fit the
distributing cone onto the
sliding bowl bottom.
Check that the guide pins on

the underside of the
distributing cone enter the
recess in the sliding bowl
bottom.
G 06 69 4 41
b Apply silicone grease on the O-ring
G 10 26 1 41
i for the centre screw.
c Fit the centre screw and

tighten firmly.
Left-hand thread!
G 10 26 15 1
156
593308-02
8 Fit the insert
a Fit new o-ring onto insert.
b Lay the distributor down and fit

the insert.
Assemble the screws on top of
the distributor.
G 1 02 61 8 1
157
593308-02
9 Assemble the disc stack and fit into the bowl
ING
WARN
!
Cut hazard
a Assemble the discs one by Sharp edges on the
one on the distributor. The separator discs may
distributor has one guide rib cause cuts.
for positioning the discs
correct.
Start with the bottom disc

which has caulks also on its
underside. Continue with the
rest of the discs.
NOTE
Make sure that the disc

inlet is fitted inside the
distributor according to
Distributor instructions on page 124
b Fit the lifting tool to the

distributor and lift the
distributor with disc stack into A
the sliding bowl bottom using
a hoist.
B
Check that the drill mark (A)
on the distributor is in line with
the guide key (B) on the bowl
body. The guide pins in the
distributing cone will then fit
into the recesses on the
G 10 2 61 61
underside of the distributor.
158
593308-02
10 Fit the top disc
a Fit the top disc.
G 07 28 3 41
159
593308-02
11 Fit the bowl hood
a Fit the lifting tool to the bowl

hood and lift it using a hoist.
G 05 39 9 21
b Check that the O-ring
i and the seal ring of the
bowl hood are properly fitted
and lubricated.
Make certain that the so-

called dovetail slot (1) is well
cleaned.
G 07 3 22 51
c Lower the bowl hood straight

down onto the disc stack,
otherwise it may get stuck. Be
careful not to scratch the bowl
hood seal ring.
Check that the guide recess

on the bowl hood enters the
guide lug in the bowl body.
G 05 3 56 21
Remove the lifting tool.
160
593308-02
12 Lubricate contact- and guide surfaces
a Lubricate the lock ring

threads, contact and guide
surfaces with lubricating
paste, see ‘‘6.8.4
Recommended lubricants” on
page 181.
G 0 5 44 76 1
161
593308-02
13 Fit the lock ring and compress the disc stack
a Fit the lifting tool to the bowl

hood and lift it using a hoist.
G 0 53 15 D1
b Fit the lifting tool onto the bowl
hood.
G 0 53 12 21
c Fit the compressing tool by
screwing the pole of the tool
into the threads of the
distributor by the horizontal
handle.
The control lever on the

compressing tool, should be
G 0 53 13 11
in position 0.
d Turn the control lever to

position 1 for compression.
Compress the disc stack by
pumping with the horizontal
handle until the oil pressure is
released through the relief
valve.
G 0 53 36 41
162
593308-02
14 Tighten the lock ring
a Fit the lock ring spanner and

tighten the large lock ring, first
by hand.
Then advance the lock ring by
giving the spanner handle
some blows until the φ-marks
are in line or passed.
Left-hand thread!
G 0 57 11 31
NOTE
A
The assembly marks
must never pass each
other more than 25°
which corresponds to
A=100 mm.
G 05 7 81 31
(MAX 25 )
If the assembly marks have passed each
other by more than 25° after tightening
the lock ring, contact your Alfa Laval
representative.
b Release the pressure in the
compressing tool by turning
the control lever to position 0
and then remove the
compressing and lifting tools.
163
593308-02
Checking of disc stack pressure

If the disc stack pressure is correct it should be
possible to tighten the lock ring so far by hand
that the φ-mark on the lock ring is positioned
20-30 mm before the mark on the bowl hood
when the compressing tool is used.
To achieve this an appropriate number of discs
in the disc stack beneath the top disc must be
fitted. Add or remove discs if necessary.
NOTE
When checking the disc stack pressure in this way,

the threads of the lock ring and the bowl body must
be well cleaned.
If the φ-marks do not reach or pass each other

after giving the spanner handle some blows, the
reason could be an incorrectly assembled bowl
or too many discs in the disc stack. Reassemble
and check.
NOTE
Ensure that the disc stack pressure is sufficient to

maintain bowl balance. Insufficient pressure in the
disc stack can cause vibration and reduce lifetime
of ball bearings.
164
593308-02
Complementary check of disc stack

pressure:
• With the large lock ring correctly tightened
and the compressing tool mounted on the
separator bowl, turn the control lever to
position 1 for compression.
• Compress the disc stack by pumping the
horizontal handle until the oil pressure is
G 0 5 33 63 1
released through the relief valve.
• Measure the height (H1) of the piston rod
(see illustration) with the slide calliper depth
gauge. Make a note of the reading obtained.
• Release the pressure in the compressing
tool by turning the control lever to position 0.
The piston rod will now move downwards
slightly when the disc set is released inside
the bowl.
• Measure once again the height (H2) of the
piston rod with the slide calliper and make a
note of the reading obtained.
If the difference between H1 and H2 is less

than 2 mm, the disc stack pressure is
correct.
If it exceeds 2 mm, the number of discs is

insufficient. Add one or more discs and
repeat the above procedure until the correct
disc stack pressure is obtained.
15 Check the threads of the inlet pipe and paring disc
G 09 70 1
Damage to the threads of inlet pipe and

the top surfaces of distributing cone and
wing insert may cause the paring disc to
scrape against the paring chamber cover
even if the height of the outlet housing has NOTE
been adjusted correctly.
Left-hand thread!
Fit the inlet pipe and check that the inlet
pipe turns easily.
165
593308-02
16 Fitting the inlet pipe
a Renew and lubricate with silicone

grease the O-rings i on all parts.
e Fit the upper paring chamber cover.
O-rings i
d Fit the inlet pipe with paring disc.
c Fit the paring chamber lower and

gasket.
G 1 02 61 71
b Fit the gravity disc
166
593308-02
17 Fit the small lock ring
a Lubricate the small lock ring and

tighten it using the special spanner.
Left-hand thread!
See ‘‘6.8.4 Recommended

lubricants” on page 181
G 0 72 7 9O 1
167
593308-02
6.6.4 In- and outlet and frame hood
1 Fitting the frame hood i M .
a Fit the seal strip i and fit a new

O-ring M in the frame.
b Put the frame hood in place

and tighten it with the screws.
Remove the lifting eyes.

G 10 26 0 41
168
593308-02
2 Control measurement of paring disc height i M .
The height position of the outlet device is decided

by the position of the top of the upper paring
chamber cover in the relation to the outlet housing
which will be fitted onto the top of the frame hood
next.
The height position should normally not be checked

at Intermediate Service but when the bowl spindle
has been removed (each Major Service) or when
the bowl has been replaced.
The tolerances are narrow and therefore it is of

great importance that the parts are well cleaned
and free from burrs.
Height adjusting rings are mounted in such
a way that the dimension 10,6 ±0,7 mm is
obtained.
G 1 02 60 51
169
593308-02
3 Fitting the in- and outlet device.
a Renew and lubricate with silicone

grease the O-rings i on all parts.
c Fit the nut and the inlet

bend.
O-rings i
b Fit the screws and fit the

discharge housing.
d Fit all connections.
G 1 02 6 02 1
170
593308-02
4 Check for scraping noise
a When the outlet device is

assembled, revolve the
worm wheel shaft by hand.
If it turns heavily or if a
scraping noise is heard,
wrong height adjustment of
the outlet device or wrong
G 0 6 81 91 1
fitting of the outlet pipe may
be the cause.
5 Fill gear housing with oil
a Fit the oil drain plug and pour oil into

the gear housing. The oil level should
be slightly above middle of the sight
glass.
See ‘‘8.2 Technical data” on page 207

for oil volume and ‘‘6.8 Oil Change”
on page 176 for further instructions.
G 0 82 69 1 1
171
593308-02
6.7 Actions after assembly
6.7.1 Control of machine plates and

safety labels o
Alfa Laval ref. 594133 rev. 0
1 Check that the following signs are attached.
11
3
1 4
A B
7
5
!
2. leve
r le
t de
avan
ions
truct
díns
FR uel
le manur.
Lire rate lyft.
sépa före in-
ken t de
1. liftin
g. SE
instr
uktio
nsbo
tild,
eers
re t opge
befo d- Läs word
ual Han ukt n.
im NL proding leze
n man en uma
GB uctio itung het
at dleid s de
d instr Anle Vord tihan s ante
Rea erst struc uçõe
er instr.
imm
DE en il ma- PT de
ual açõo
Heb ere elev
dem n! e,
legg o man de
8
Vor lese rator Leia açõo
buch oper
il sepa
IT vare ntar
solle ne. leva JP
a di ruzio s de
Prime díst ante
nual ones
ucci
ES instr
de
ual GR
Ar
el man ra.
Lea rado
t.N
la sepa
o.5
RU
ta.
amis
85
n nost
en
9
enne
FI jeet rator
töoh n sepa
käyt inde
Lue len,
anua
DK nsm
uktio
instr 2
Læss op. Rev.
løfte 001
1270
No.
Art.
G 10 27 91 1
C D
1. Machine plate 7. Frequency sign
3. Safety label 8. Lifting instructions
4. Name sign 11. Hot surface sign
5. Plate with arrow
172
593308-02
2 Check legibility. Following texts should be read on the labels.
Separator
Manufacturing serial No. / Year
Product No.
In- and outlet device
Bowl
Machine bottom part
Max. speed (bowl)
Direction of rotation (bowl)
Speed motor shaft
El. current frequency
Recommended motor power
Max. density of feed
Max. density of sediment
Max. density of operating liquid
Process temperature min./max.
Warning
! WA R N I N G
Read the instruction manuals before installation, operation and maintenance.
Consider inspection intervals.
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXX XXXX XXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXX XXX
XXXXXXX XXXXX XX
XXXXX XXXXXXX
XXX XXX X XXX XX XXXX
XXXX XX X X XXXXX XXX
X XXX XXXX XXX XX XX X
XX X XXXXX XX X XXXX
XXX XXX X XXXXXX
Failure to strictly follow instructions can lead to fatal injury.
XXXXXXXXX. X XXX X XXX. XXX XXX XXX X XXXXX
XXX X XXXX .
XXXXX XXX XXXX XXX
XXXXX XXXX X XXXX XXX XXXXX X XXXXX XX X
XX. XXX XX XXX XXX XX X.
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator and keep bowl filled with liquid
XXXXXXX/XX,X XX
during rundown.
Out of balance vibration will become worse if bowl is not full.
Separator must stop rotating before any dismantling work is started.
Read instruction manual before lifting.
Designed for:
! WA R N I N G Motor speed 1500 rpm
Designed for: Motor connection frequency 50 Hz
Motor speed 1500 rpm
Motor connection frequency 50 Hz See instruction manual!
See instruction manual!
173
593308-02
3 Connections according to connection list.
10.1
10.5
4
10.2
6
3
10.6
462
G
E F
10.8 10.10
G 10 2 79 21
G H
174
593308-02
4 Connections according to connection list.
10.12 10.15
10.11
506c
10.14
506a
10.13 506b
I J
10.20 10.21 10.22

10.18
10.19
701 730
10.17
10.16
K L
10.28
10.24 760
733
10.27 731
10.25
750
10.23
741a
729
10.26
G 1 02 7 93 1
175
593308-02
6.8 Oil Change

The separator should be at standstill when
oil is filled or the oil level is checked.
6.8.1 When changing oil
Worm wheel and worm; wear of teeth

To check at each oil change
Check the teeth of both the worm wheel and
worm for wear. Examine the contact surfaces
and compare the tooth profiles with the ‘‘ Tooth
appearance examples” on page 177. The gear
may operate satisfactorily even when worn to
some degree.
• Replace both worm wheel and worm at the
same time, even if only one of them is worn.
• To avoid damaging the teeth when lifting the
G 0 56 8 04 1
bowl spindle, push the worm wheel to one
side first.
1. Worm
Position the spindle in correct place before
2. Worm wheel
fitting the worm wheel.
When replacing the gear, always make sure

that the new worm wheel and worm have the
same number of teeth as the old ones. See
chapter ‘‘8.2 Technical data” on page 207 for
correct number of teeth.
ING
WARN
!
G0205411
Check that gear ratio is correct for power
Check the gear ratio (number of
frequency used. If incorrect, subsequent teeth) when replacing the gear.
overspeed may result in a serious breakdown.
NOTE
Presence of metal chips in the oil bath is an

indication that the gear is wearing abnormally.
176
593308-02
Important!
When using mineral-type oil in the worm gear
housing, the presence of black deposits on the
spindle parts is an indication that the oil base
has deteriorated seriously or that some of the
oil additives have precipitated. If pitting is
found on the worm gear, the cause could be that
the additives are not suitable for this purpose.
In all these cases it is strongly recommended to
change to a high-temperature oil.
For further information, see ‘‘6.8 Oil Change”
on page 176.
Tooth appearance examples

Satisfactory teeth:
Uniform wear of contact surfaces. Surfaces are
smooth.
Good contact surfaces will form on the teeth
G0538711
when the gear is subjected to only moderate
load during its running-in period. Satisfactory teeth
Worn teeth:
Permissible wear is as a rule 1/3 of the
thickness of the upper part of a tooth, provided
that
• the wear is uniform over the whole of the
G0538811
flank of a tooth
Worn teeth
• all teeth are worn in the same way.
Spalling:
Small bits of the teeth have broken off, so-
called spalling. This is generally caused by
excessive load or improper lubrication. Damage
G0538911
of this type may not necessitate immediate

replacement, but careful checking at short Spalling
intervals is of imperative importance.
Pitting:
Small cavities in the teeth, so-called pitting,
can occur through excessive load or improper
lubrication. Damage of this type need not
necessitate immediate replacement, but careful
G0539011
check at short intervals is of imperative

importance. Pitting
177
593308-02
6.8.2 Oil change procedure
1 Drain the oil
Cover
Sight glass
Drain plug
G 0 82 8 33 1
a Place a collecting tray under
the drain hole, remove the
cover and drain plug and
then drain out the oil.
ON
CAUTI
!
Burn hazard
The lubricating oil and various
machine surfaces can be
sufficiently hot to cause burns.
G 0 48 4 24 1
2 Fill oil
a Fill new oil in the worm gear housing.

The oil level should be slightly above
middle of the sight glass.
ON
CAUTI
!
Oil volume: Approx. 12,5 litres
(see ‘‘8.2 Technical data” on page 207)
During operation the oil
level must be slightly below
Suitable oil brands can be found in
the middle of the sight
G 02 6 20 31
‘‘6.8.6 Recommended oil brands” on

glass.
page 186.
If the oil level is too high,
the lifetime of the roller
bearings will be reduced
due to high temperature.
178
593308-02
6.8.3 Lubrication chart, general

Alfa Laval ref. 553216-01 rev. 8
Lubricating points Type of lubricant Interval

The oil bath: See ‘‘Recommended Oil Change:
Bowl spindle bearings are lubricating oils” on page
lubricated by oil splash from 185.
the oil bath. Volume: see ‘‘Technical 1. Continuous operation: 2000h
data” on page 207. 2. Seasonal operation:
Before every operating period
3. Short period’s operation:
12 months even if total number of
operating hours is less than stated
above.
Bowl spindle taper: Lubricating oil, only a few At assembly.
drops for rust protection.
Bowl: Pastes as specified in At assembly.
Sliding contact surfaces, ‘‘Recommended
thread of lock nut and cap nut. lubricants” on page 181.
Rubber seal rings: Grease as specified in At assembly.
‘‘Recommended
lubricants” on page 181.
Friction coupling ball The bearings are packed -
bearings: with grease and sealed
Not valid for rigid coupling and need no extra
lubrication.
Electric moto:r Follow manufacturer’s Follow manufacturer’s instructions.
instructions.
Threads: Lubricating oil, if not At assembly.
otherwise stated.
179
593308-02
NOTE
Check and pre-lubricate new spindle bearings

and those that have been out of service for one
month or longer.
The Lubrication chart can be complemented

with more detailed charts, showing the
lubricating points in detail and what type of
lubricants to use.
Instructions related to a specific design of the

machine refer to general assembly drawings.
If not otherwise specified, follow the supplier’s
instructions about applying, handling and
storing of lubricants.
ON
CAUTI
!
Check the oil level before start.
Top up when necessary.
Do not overfill.
Oil volume = see .“Technical data” on page 207
180
593308-02
6.8.4 Recommended lubricants

Alfa Laval ref. 553217-01 rev. 11
NOTE
The data in below tables is based on supplier

information in regards to lubrication properties.
Trade names and designations might vary from
country to country, contact your local supplier
for more information.
Brands with Alfa Laval article number are

approved and recommended for use.
Pastes for non-food applications:
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No
Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 805K

Gleitmo 705
Dow Corning Molykote 1000 (Paste) 537086-02 (1000 g)

Molykote 1000 (Paste) 537086-03 (100 g)
Molykote G-rapid plus (Paste) 537086-04 (50 g)
Rocol Dry Moly Paste

MT-LM
Klüber Wolfracoat C (Paste)
Bonded coatings:
Manufacturer Designation Alfa Laval No
Fuchs Lubritech Gleitmo 900 (Varnish or spray)
Dow Corning Molykote D321R (Spray) 535586-01 (375 g)
181
593308-02
Pastes for hygienic applications

(NSF registered H1 is preferred):
Manufacturer Designation Hygienic Comment Alfa Laval No
Bremer & Leguil, Gleitmo 805 DVGW (KTW) approval for

Fuchs Lubritech drinking water
(TZW prüfzeugnis)
Gleitmo 1809 554336-01
Geralyn 2 NSF Registered H1 561764-01 (50 g)

(3 sep 2004)
Geralyn F.L.A NSF Registered H1

(2 Apr 2003)
German §5 Absatz 1 LMBG
approved
Dow Corning Molykote TP 42

Molykote D
Molykote P1900 NSF Registered H1

(7 Jan 2004)
Klüber Klüberpaste 46 MR 401 White; contains no lead,

cadmium, nickel, sulphur nor
halogens.
Klüberpaste UH1 84-201 NSF Registered H1

(26 Aug 2005)
Rocol Foodlube Multi Paste NSF Registered H1

(13 Apr 2001)
182
593308-02
Silicone grease for rubber rings:
Manufacturer Designation Hygienic comment Alfa Laval No

Dow Corning Molykote 111 Conform to the FDA regulations (21 539474-02 (100 g)
(Compound) CFR 178.3570) for occasional food 539474-03 (25 g)
contact. Certified: National Water
Council UK and WRC, UK.
Certified: food industry as per
Chemical Testing Laboratory Dr.
Böhm, Munich.
Molykote G-5032 NSF registered H1 569415-01 (50 g)
(June 3 2005)
Bremer & Leguil, Chemplex 750 DVGW approved according to the

Fuchs Lubritech German KTW-recomendations for
drinking water.
Geralyn SG MD 2 NSF Registered H1
(30 March 2007)
Klüber Unisilkon L 250 L Complies with German
Environmental Agency on hygiene
requirements for tap water.
Certified by DVGW-KTW, WRC,
AS4020, ACS.
Paraliq GTE 703 NSF Registered H1 (25 Feb 2004)
Complies with LMBG and the
European standard EN 1672,
part2.
Bel-Ray No-Tox Silicone valve NSF Registered H1
seal (19 June 2002)
MMCC ALCO 220 NSF Registered H1
(25 March 2002)
Rocol Foodlube Hi-Temp NSF Registered H1
(18 April 2001)
183
593308-02
Greases for ball and roller bearings:
NOTE
Always follow the specific recommendation for

lubrication as advised by the manufacturer.
Manufacturer Designation Hygienic

comment
BP Energrease MP-MG2
Energrease LS2
Energrease LS-EP2
Castrol APS 2
Spheerol EPL 2
Chevron Chevron Dura-Lith Grease EP2

Texaco Multifak AFB 2
Dow Corning Molykote G-0101

Molykote Multilub
ExxonMobil Beacon EP2

Unirex N2
Mobilith SHC 460
Mobilux EP2
Fuchs Lubritech Lagermeister EP2
Q8/Kuwait Petroleum Rembrandt EP2
Shell Alvania EP 2
Albida EP2
SKF LGEP 2
LGMT 2
LGFB 2 NSF registered H1 (14
sept 2005)
Total Multis EP2
BP Energrease MP-MG2
Energrease LS2
Energrease LS-EP2
184
593308-02
6.8.5 Recommended lubricating oils

Alfa Laval ref. 553219-07, rev. 2
Type of frame: X 10 with motor < 25 kW.

One group of lubricating oil is approved.
It is designated as Alfa Laval lubricating oil
group B.
The numerical value after the letter states the
viscosity grade.
The corresponding commercial oil brands are
found in ‘‘6.8.6 Recommended oil brands” on
page 186.
Ambient temperature Alfa Laval lubricating oil Time in operation

(°C) group
Oil change interval
Between +5 and +45 B/220 1 500 h
NOTE
• In a new installation or after change of gear

transmission, change oil after 200 operating
hours.
• When the separator is operated for short
periods, lubricating oil must be changed
every 12 months even if the total number of
operating hours is less than stated in the
recommendations above.
• Check and prelubricate spindle bearings on
separators which have been out of service
for 6 months or longer.
• In seasonal operation, change oil before
every operating period.
185
593308-02
6.8.6 Recommended oil brands

NOTE
The following is a list of recommended oil brands.

Trade names and designations might vary from
country to country.
Please contact your local oil supplier for more
information.
Paraffinic mineral lubricating oil,

category (ISO-L-) CKE 220.
Alfa Laval lubrication oil group B
Viscosity grade VG (ISO 3448/3104) VG 220

Viscosity index VI (ISO 2909) VI 90
Manufacturer Designation
Bel-Ray 100 Gear Oil 90
BP Energol GR-XP 220
CastrolAlpha SP 220 (Former Optimol) Optigear BM 220
ChevronTexaco Gear Compound EP 220 (H2)

Ultra Gear 220 (H2)
Texaco/Caltex Meropa 220
ExxonMobil Spartan EP 220

Mobilgear 630
Mobilgear SHC (XMP)220, Synthetic *
Q8/Kuwait Petroleum Goya 220
Shell Omala 320

(Omala RL 320) * Synthetic
Statoil LoadWay EP 220

Mereta 220, Synthetic *
Total Carter EP 220

Elf Epona Z 220
Carter SH 220, Synthetic *
* These oils must be used when the frame temperature is above 80 °C. If you
can’t verify the temperature by measuring, a rough estimate is that 80 °C is
when you can touch the surface of lower part of frame for a short time only.
186
593308-02
The list of recommended oil brands are not complete. Other oil brands may
be used as long as they have equivalently quality as the brands
recommended. The oil must have the same viscosity class and shall follow
the requirements in one of the standards below. The oil must also be
endorsed for worm gear with brass worm wheel. The use of other lubricants
than the recommended is done on the exclusive responsibility of the user or
oil supplier.
Standard Designation
ISO 12925-1, (ISO 6743/6) ISO-L-CKC/CKD/CKE/CKT 220
DIN 51517 part 3 DIN 51517 - CLP 220
187
593308-02
6.9 Lifting instructions

1 2
G 0 86 05 G 1
1 Lifting eye (frame).
2 Screw.
6.9.1 Lifting the separator
Attach three adjustable slings

(1) or cables to the lifting eyes
(the screws must be tightened Weight to lift approx. 900 kg
with spanner).
S0 10 0 01 1
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
Use only the three special
lifting eyes for lifting the
separator.
A falling separator can
cause accidents resulting
G 0 79 8 37 1
in serious injury to persons

and damage to equipment.
188
593308-02
1 Remove the inlet and outlet device, the

frame hood and the bowl according to the
instructions in ‘‘6.3 Dismantling” on page 72.
NOTE
Never lift or transport the separator with the

bowl still inside.
2 Disconnect all connections.

3 Fit the lifting eyes to the frame.
4 Attach lifting slings to the lifting eyes. Total
length of each loop: minimum 1 metres.
5 Unscrew the foundation bolts.
6 When lifting and moving the separator, follow
normal safety precautions for lifting large
heavy objects.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
A falling separator can cause accidents
resulting in serious injury and damage.
Never lift the separator by any other method
than described in this manual.
NOTE
When lifting parts without weight

specifications, always use lifting straps with
the capacity of at least 500 kg.
189
593308-02
6.9.2 Lifting the bowl Weight to lift approx. 300 kg
This instruction describes how to lift a

complete bowl, which normally is done only
The lock ring must be properly
during a transport of the separator. Lifting tool tightened when lifting the bowl.
When lifting the bowl, use the special lifting

tool fastened on the bowl hood.
1 Fit the lifting tool to the bowl assembly.

2 Check that the lock ring is mounted correctly
before lifting the complete bowl.
3 Lift the bowl using a sling with the proper
rating.
G 05 44 6 E1
NOTE
Never try to lift the bowl while it is still in the

frame.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
A falling bowl can cause accidents resulting in
serious injury and damage.
Never lift the bowl by any other method than
described in this manual.
NOTE
When lifting parts without weight

specifications, always use lifting straps with
the capacity of at least 500 kg.
190
593308-02
6.9.3 Other parts

The frame hood and the heavy bowl parts must
be lifted by means of a hoist. Position the hoist
exactly above the bowl centre. Use endless
lifting straps and a lifting hook with safety
catch. Special tools from the tool kit must be
used for dismantling and assembly. The special
tools are specified in the Spare Parts Catalogue
and are shown as illustrations together with
the dismantling/assembly instructions.
191
593308-02
6.10 Operating water

module (OWMC)
Nut
Cylinder
Turcon AQ-seal
(3 pieces)
Locking wire
Piston
Turcite slide ring

Garter strap
O-rings
Outlet O-ring
Turcon variseal "M"

Air tank
Nozzle
Screw
Two-pulse adapter
End protection
Bracket
G 08 7 83 61
Nut
192
593308-02
6.10.1 Dismantling (MS-service)
NOTE
When dismantling, the OWMC Service kit is

needed.
ING
WARN
!
Crush hazard
Never dismantle the OWMC when
pressurized.
NOTE
The Air tank must only be dismantled by Alfa

Laval personnel.
1 Shut off the air and operating water supply to

the OWMC.
2 Remove the connections for operating water.
3 Pull off the cylinder
a Turn the cylinder anti-clockwise relative to

the air tank. The upper locking wire is
thereby forced out. Use two belt wrenches
when turning the cylinder. The lower tool
prevents the air tank from rotating.
NOTE
Be careful to keep the

cylinder straight against
the air tank.
In order not to damage the

water tank, make sure to
place the upper wrench at
the top of the water tank, as
G 0 87 81 71
illustrated.
193
593308-02
4 Press out the piston
Piston
a Carefully press the piston out

of the cylinder using a soft rod
or similar.
Rod
G 08 78 34 1
5 Checkpoints
Clean and check the condition of the

dismantled parts.
Seal
Check the cylinder, piston and two-
pulse adapter for scratches and
scuffing marks.
Garter strap
Renew the garter strap fitted inside the
cylinder.
Two-pulse adapter
Renew the piston seal rings and the
seal which are included in the service
kit for the module.
Renew all other parts included in the Piston seal rings

service kit.
G 08 78 2 21
194
593308-02
6.10.2 Assembly (MS-service)
1 Assemble the OWMC unit opposite the dismantling
a Check that the piston and inside of the cylinder are

well cleaned. Lubricate the inside of the cylinder with
the grease included in the Service kit for OWMC.
NOTE
Make sure that the hole in

the groove (for the locking
wire end) on the air tank
can be seen through the
slot on the cylinder.
b Lubricate the locking wire with the grease

included in the Service kit for OWMC.
G 0 87 8 18 1
c Place the locking wire end in the hole in
the air tank. Secure the cylinder to the air
tank with the locking wire by turning the
cylinder clockwise relative to the air tank
until the hook on the locking wire reaches
the groove.
d Fit water and air connections. 506c

Inlet for activating a large discharge
e Turn on the air and operating water supply.

Check that there are no leakages.
Needle valve
Silencer
506a
Inlet for compressed 506b
air to air tank Inlet for activating a
small discharge
G 0 87 80 41
195
593308-02
6.10.3 Air tank

If the air tank has to be dismantled (i.e. repair) it is Air tank
removed by removing the nuts.
NOTE
If problems are related to the Air tank always

End protection
contact Alfa Laval representative.
Bracket
G 08 78 37 1
Nuts
196
593308-02
INSTRUCTION BOOK 7 FAULT FINDING
7 Fault Finding
These fault finding instructions are for the
separator only.
If the separator has been installed as a part

of a processing system, first study the trouble-
tracing part (if any) in the system
documentation. If the problem is not solved,
continue with this chapter.
7.1 Mechanical functions
7.1.1 Smell
Cause Corrective actions
Bearing is damaged Renew
Oil level in gear housing is too low Check oil level and add oil if necessary
Motor is over-heated due to frequent repeated start Allow the motor to cool down before attempting to re-start
sequences
Motor failure Repair/renew motor
7.1.2 Noise
Oil level in gear housing is too low Check oil level and add oil if necessary
Height adjustment of the outlet device for processed liquid Stop the separator, measure and adjust the height
is incorrect
Worm wheel and worm are worn Renew worm wheel and worm
Bearing is damaged or worn Renew
Incorrect play between elastic plates in coupling Adjust the play
Too high or too low counter pressure Adjust, see page 48
593308-02 197
7.1.3 Separator vibrates
NOTE
Some vibration is normal during the starting

and stopping sequences when the separator
passes through its critical speed.
ING
WARN
!
If excessive vibration occurs, stop separator
and keep bowl filled with liquid during rundown.
The cause of the vibration must be identified
and corrected before the separator is restarted.

Bowl out of balance due to: Dismantle the separator and check the assembly and
- poor cleaning cleaning.
- incorrect assembly Check the number of bowl discs, compare with the number
in Spare Parts Catalogue. If necessary, rebalance the
- incorrect disc stack compression bowl.
- bowl assembled with parts from other separators
Uneven sediment deposits in sediment space Dismantle and clean the separator bowl
Height adjustment of the outlet paring disc is incorrect Stop the separator, measure and if necessary adjust the
height
Bowl spindle bent (max 0,05 mm) Renew the bowl spindle
Vibration damping rubber cushions are worn out Renew all rubber cushion
Too weak foundation Investigate
7.1.4 Starting power too high

Wrong direction of rotation Change electrical phase connections to the motor
Wrong settings of the frequency converter Check the parameter settings in ‘‘8.2 Technical data” on
page 207, ‘‘8.7.1 Motor drive data” on page 236 and ‘‘8.8
Guidelines for frequency converter drives” on page 238
198
593308-02
7 FAULT FINDING INSTRUCTION BOOK
7.1.5 Starting power too low
Motor failure Repair/renew the motor
7.1.6 Speed too low

Bowl is leaking or not closed Dismantle the bowl and check
Motor failure Repair/renew the motor.
Bearing is damaged Renew
Too high or too low counter pressure Adjust, see page 48
Speed sensor failure Check/replace the sensor
7.1.7 Starting time too long

Height position of outlet device for processed liquid is Stop, check and adjust the height(s)
incorrect
Liquid flows through the bowl Try to close the bowl/stop the flow.
7.1.8 Water in worm gear housing

Bowl casing drain is obstructed Clean the casing and the drains properly. The drains have
connection Nos. 462 & 463 on the‘‘8.6.1 Basic size
drawing” on page 229.
Solve the reason for obstruction.
Clean worm gear housing and change oil.
Leakage at top bearing Renew seal ring and change oil
Condensation Clean worm gear housing and change oil
199
593308-02
7.2 Separating functions
7.2.1 Unsatisfactory separation

result
Gravity disc hole is too small Use a disc with larger hole
Too high or to low counter pressure Adjust, see page 48
Incorrect separation temperature Adjust
Throughput is too high Adjust
Bowl disc stack is clogged Clean the disc stack
Inlet is clogged Clean the inlet
Sediment space in bowl is filled See ‘‘7.2.11 Bowl clogged with sediment’’
Bowl speed is too low Examine the motor and power transmission including the
gear ratio, see ‘‘7.1.6 Speed too low’’
Cleaned liquid contains sediment Reduce the time between discharges
7.2.2 Outgoing heavy phase

contains light phase
Gravity disc hole too large Use a disc with smaller hole
Gasket/O-ring at the gravity disc or paring chamber cover Renew the gasket/O-ring
is defective
O-rings sealing the outlet paring disc are defective Renew the O-rings
The make-up liquid line is obstructed or the pressure/flow Check make-up liquid pressure/flow.
is too low Compare with the recommended values in chapter ‘‘8.3
Connection List” on page 208
200
593308-02
7.2.3 Light phase discharges

through heavy phase outlet
(broken liquid seal)
Gravity disc hole too large Use a disc with smaller hole
Incorrect separation temperature Adjust
Throughput too high Adjust
The make-up liquid line is obstructed or the pressure/flow Check make-up liquid pressure/flow.
is too low Compare with the recommended values in chapter ‘‘8.3
Connection List” on page 208
Gasket/O-ring at the gravity disc or paring chamber cover Renew the O-ring
is defective
Disc stack is clogged Clean the disc stack
Bowl hood seal ring defective or the sealing surface of Renew the seal ring. Polish the surface on sliding bowl
sliding bowl bottom (wear liner) is damaged bottom (wear liner) or renew it
Rectangular seal ring in sliding bowl bottom is defective Renew the seal ring
Bowl speed to low See ‘‘7.1.6 Speed too low’’
Bowl is incorrectly assembled Check the assembly
7.2.4 Unsatisfactory sediment

discharge
Sediment hard packed due to long discharge interval Shorten the discharge interval
Valve plugs in the operating slide are worn or too high Renew with correct valve plugs
Sediment deposits in the operating system Check and clean the operating system
Faulty OWMC unit See ‘‘7.2.13 OWMC related faults’’
7.2.5 Bowl fails to open for

sediment discharge

Operating liquid supply is obstructed Check the liquid supply
Discharge liquid pressure/flow is too low Check the discharge liquid pressure/flow.
Compare with the recommended values in chapter ‘‘8.3
Connection List” on page 208.
Seal ring in the operating slide is defective Renew the seal ring. Carry out an Intermediate Service
(IS)
201
593308-02
7.2.6 Bowl opens accidentally

during operation
Strainer in the operating liquid supply is clogged Clean the strainer
No liquid in the operating liquid system Check the operating liquid system and make sure the
valve(s) are open
Liquid connections to the separator are incorrectly fitted Correct
Upper nozzle in the dosing ring is clogged Clean the nozzle. Carry out an Intermediate Service (IS)
Square-sectioned ring in sliding bowl bottom is defective Renew the square-sectioned ring. Carry out an
Intermediate Service (IS)
Valve plugs are defective Renew all plugs. Carry out an Intermediate Service (IS)
Sediment deposits on the operating slide Clean the operating slide
Seal ring in operating slide is defective Renew the seal ring
7.2.7 Liquid flows through the bowl

casing drain and/or sediment
outlet
Sediment discharge or liquid draining in progress None (normal)
Channels in operating liquid device are clogged Clean the operating liquid device
Seal rings in the operating liquid device are defective Renew the seal rings
O-ring under the paring chamber cover is defective Renew the O-ring
Paring chamber cover is defective Renew the paring chamber cover
Seal ring in the bowl hood is defective Renew the seal ring
Sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom (wear liner) is Smoothen sealing edge of the sliding bowl bottom (wear
defective liner) or renew it
Operating slide of bowl jams due to poor lubrication, Dismantle and check
defective seal ring, burrs or deformation
Operating slide springs are defective Renew the springs
Valve plugs are defective Renew all valve plugs
Sliding bowl bottom jams - seal ring is defective Renew the seal ring
Bowl speed too low See ‘‘7.1.6 Speed too low’’’
7.2.8 Too much process liquid in

sediment
Discharge interval is too short Prolong the discharge interval
Bowl is leaking See ‘‘7.2.7 Liquid flows through the bowl casing drain and/
or sediment outlet’’
Too high counter pressure Adjust, see page 48
202
593308-02
7.2.9 High pressure in heavy phase

liquid outlet
Throughput is too high Adjust
Valve(s) in heavy liquid outlet line is throttled too much Open the valve(s) and adjust according to values in
chapter ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on page 208.
7.2.10 Air intermingles with the

cleaned liquid
Back pressure in the clean heavy liquid outlet is too low Increase the back pressure, see ‘‘5.1.5 Running” on page
60
Outlet paring disc defective Renew paring disc
7.2.11 Bowl clogged with sediment

Sediment is too viscous Discharge more frequently
Too large particles in the feed Remove large particles from feed before entering the
separator inlet
Too high flow rate with high sediment content in feed Reduce the feed rate
Frame is filled with sediment Clean the frame and shorten the interval between
discharges
Sediment tank is overfilled Empty the sediment tank and clean the bowl casing in
frame
7.2.12 Sediment in frame parts

Frame is filled with sediment Clean the frame and shorten the interval between
discharges. Flush the sediment cover during the discharge
cycle
Cyclone is filled Check / clean the pipes after the cyclone outlet
203
593308-02
7.2.13 OWMC related faults

Indication Cause Corrective actions Page
The bowl does not eject or the Needle valve for setting of small Adjust the throttling 32
volume is too small discharge is throttled too much
Air pressure for setting of large Adjust the air pressure 32
discharge is too low
No supply or signal air to the Check the air supply –
OWMC
Faulty check valve in operating Check function of the valve –
water feed line before the OWMC
inlet
OWMC piston does not return to Impurities in water or air which Follow the instructions carefully for 1)
its initial position or returns too increase friction between piston air and water quality.
slowly and cylinder
Clean and lubricate piston and 2)
cylinder with GLEITMO 1821V
Too low operating water pressure Check the operating water 3)
in the feed line before the OWMC pressure
Silencer for air outlet in the OWMC Renew the silencer –
is clogged
Faulty check valve in operating Check function of the valve –
water feed line before the OWMC
inlet
The discharged volume too large Faulty sealing for the two-pulse Renew the sealing 2)
adapter, see pos. 2 on page 27
Too high pressure of the air supply Reduce the air pressure 32
(506a).
Bowl fails to close after sediment Clogged nozzle fitted in the two- Clean the nozzle 2)
discharge pulse adapter
1) See ‘‘8 Technical Reference” on page 205.
2) See ‘‘6.10 Operating water module (OWMC)” on

page 192.
3) See ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on page 208.
204
593308-02
INSTRUCTION BOOK 8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
8 Technical Reference
8.1 Product description
NOTE
The separator is a component operating in an integrated

system including a monitoring system.
If the technical data in the system description does not
agree with the technical data in this instruction manual,
the data in the system description is the valid one.
Product number: 881264-04-01/3

Separator type:
Application: Fish and meat industry.
Technical design:
M18 frame.
Rigid coupling.
Sealing available in Nitrile.
Open light phase outlet.
Paring disc - heavy phase outlet.
Variable discharge system.
Designed in accordance with directives and
standards:
See ‘‘8.1.1 Directives and standards’’
Restrictions:
Hydraulic capacity: 17 m³/h
Feed temperature: 0 °C to +100 °C
Ambient temperature 0 °C to +35 °C
Discharge intervals: 1-60 min.
Maximum discharge volume: 13 litres
Maximum allowed speed: 6250 r/min.
Maximum feed pressure: 400 kPa.
Only land based installations permitted.
Bowl must be kept filled during stopping
sequence.
Risk for corrosion and erosion have to be
investigated in each case by the application
centre.
593308-02 205
8.1.1 Directives and standards

Designed in accordance with

directives and standards:
2006/42/EC Machinery Directive
2004/108/EC Electromagnetic Compatibility
2006/95/EC Low Voltage Directive
EC 1935/2004 Materials Traceability
To meet these requirements the following

standards have been used
EN 12547 Centrifuges-Common safety requirements.
(including several other EN- standards )
206
593308-02
8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE INSTRUCTION BOOK
8.2 Technical data

Subject Value Unit

Maximum allowed speed 6250 r/min
Gear ratio 104:25
Motor speed 1500 r/min
Motor connection frequency 50 Hz
Bowl speed, synchronous 6240 r/min
Critical speed 1000-1500 r/min
Max. hydraulic capacity 17 m3/hour
Max. density of feed/sediment 1100/1400 kg/m3
Max. density of operating liquid, max. 1000 kg/m3
Min./Max. feed temperature 0/100 °C
Discharge volume, min./max. 6/13 litres
Discharge interval, min./max. 1/60 minutes
Separator weight (without motor) 1210 kg
Motor weight (575214) 134 kg
Motor power, 50 Hz 18,5 kW
Power consumption idling/max. capacity: kW
Jp reduced to motor shaft 150 kg m2
Starting time, min./max. 5/7 minutes
Stopping time min./max. 10/14 minutes
Stopping time without brake, average 45 minutes
Max. running time with neither feed flow nor frame
part cooling 15 minutes
Lubricating oil volume 12,5 litres
Sound power/uncertainty 9,5/0,3 Bel(A)
Sound pressure/uncertainty 78/3 dB(A)
Vibration level new sep./sep in use
(measured with handheld instrument) 7/9 mm/sec.
Connection 750 (1st / 2nd) 4,5/5,6 mm/sec.
Connection 750 at critical speed (1st/2nd) 9/11 mm/sec.
Alarm levels for operating water pressure
Connection 375, low/high 30/80 kPa
Alarm levels for flushing water pressure conn. 303b 50 kPa
Alarm levels neck bearing temperature conn. 731 110 °C
Bowl weight 300 kg
Bowl max. inner diameter 411 mm
Bowl liquid volume 15 litres
Sludge volume 6,8 litres
Bowl body material AL1112398-02
The main strength parts of the centrifuge are made of stainless steel
207
593308-02
8.3 Connection List

No. Description Requirements/limits
201 Inlet for process liquid

• Temperature 0 °C to +100 °C
• Density See ‘‘Technical data” on page 207.
• Flow Max. 17 m3/h
• Pressure Max. 400 kPa
220 Outlet light phase, clarified liquid

• Open outlet
221 Outlet heavy phase

• Recommended counter pressure See ‘‘Paring disc characteristics” on page
257
222 Outlet solid phase

• Small discharge 6-7 litres + flushing liquid
• Large discharge 10-12 litres + flushing liquid
• Discharge frequency Max 60 discharge / hour
The outlet from the cyclone must always be
arranged to prevent the cyclone from being
filled up with sludge. Solids are discharged
by gravity.
304 Flushing in sediment outlet (Normally used only in the discharge

sequence and/or cleaning)
• Quality requirements See page ‘‘Operating Water” on page 227
• Pressure 100-600 kPa
• Flow (at 300 kPa) 33 litres/min
• Consumption 10-25 litres / discharge
375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid

• Quality requirements See page ‘‘Operating Water” on page 227.
• Density Max. 1000 kg/m3
Make-up liquid
• Pressure 40-70 kPa
• Pipe length via a check valve, max. 30 metres
• Pipe dimension, min. Ø 10x1 mm
• Consumption 9 litres/hour
Discharge liquid
• Consumption 1 litre/discharge
208
593308-02
409 Inlet for cooling oil cooler See page ‘‘Operating Water” on page 227.
• Consumption 120 litres / hour
• Pressure Max. 50 kPa
410 Outlet for cooling/heating oil cooler Should be possible to drain liquids by
gravity.
462 Drain of frame top part, lower Should be possible to drain liquids by
gravity.
463 Drain of frame top part, upper Should be possible to drain liquids by
gravity to a liquid seal.
506a Inlet compressed air to OWM

• Quality requirements See page ‘‘Compressed Air” on page 228
• Pressure, must be adjustable 200-700 kPa
506b Inlet for activating a small discharge

• Pressure range 450-700 kPa
506c Inlet for activating a large discharge

• Pressure range 450-700 kPa
701 Motor for separator

• Allowed frequency variation from nominal ± 2%
• Allowed voltage variation from nominal ± 5%
729 Pressure transmitter
• Power supply 12,5 -28VDC, max. 28mA
• Out signal 4 - 20mA
• Pressure range, relative 0 - 250kPa
730 Temperature sensor for motor winding

• PTC thermistor tripping temperature 150 oC
731 Temperature sensor, Pt 100 type

• Neck bearing holder
• Alarm level See page ‘‘Technical data” on page 207
733 Temperature sensor, Pt 100 type

• Lubrication oil in gear
741a Speed sensor for motor speed, NAMUR type

• Type Inductive promixly switch
• Supply voltage 6 -10 V DC
• Current consumption max. 3 mA
• Number of pulses per revolution 1
209
593308-02
750 Unbalance sensor, vibration

• Type Vibration accelerometer sensor
• Supply voltage 10 to 32 V DC
• Output signal 4 to 20 mA
• Frequency response 2 Hz - 1 kHz
760 Cover interlocking switch (optional)

• Type Mechanical switch
• Max voltage 500 V AC 250 V DC
• Max. switching capacity
- Voltage 500 V AC 125 V DC
- AC load in VA 5000
- DC load in W 400
821a Connection for optional level guard
821b Plugged connection on cyclone

• (Can be used for ventilation)
821c Connection for optional flushing
210
593308-02
8.4 Interface Description

8.4.1 Scope
This document gives information,
requirements, and recommendations about
operational procedures and signal
processing for safe and reliable operation of
the separator. It is intended to be used for
designing auxiliary equipment and control
systems for the separator.
8.4.2 References
This Interface Description is one
complementary document to the separator.
Other such documents that contain necessary
information and are referred to here are:
• ‘‘8.6.3 Interconnection diagram’’
• ‘‘8.3 Connection List’’
• ‘‘8.2 Technical data’’
• ‘‘8.7.1 Motor drive data’’
• ‘‘8.8 Guidelines for frequency converter
drives’’
• ‘‘8.9 Dimensioning of a frequency converter’’
• ‘‘5.2 CIP (Cleaning In Place)’’ - CIP Program
Standards referred to are:

• EN 418 Safety of machinery - Emergency
stop equipment, functional aspects -
Principles of design
• EN 1037 Safety of machinery - Prevention of
unexpected start-up
211
593308-02
8.4.3 Definitions
For the purpose of this document, the following
definitions apply:
• Synchronous speed: The speed the machine
will attain when it is driven by a three phase
squirrel-cage induction motor and there is no
slip in the motor and the drive system.
• Full speed: The synchronous speed minus
normal slip.
8.4.4 Goal
Information and instructions in this document
aim at preventing situations as the following:
Situation Effect
Unbalance caused by uneven sediment Too high stress on bowl and bearing
accumulation in the bowl. system which might cause harm.
Too high bowl speed. Too high stress on bowl which might
cause harm.
Access to moving parts. Can cause injury to person who

accidentally touches these parts.
Insufficient cleaning of separator. Unsatisfactory product quality.
Bowl leakage. Product losses.
Control and supervision can be more or less

comprehensive depending on the type of used
control equipment. When a simple control unit
is used it would be impossible or too expensive
to include many of the functions specified here
while these functions could be included at
nearly no extra cost when a more advanced
control unit is used. For this reasons functions
that are indispensable or needed for safety
reasons to protect the machine and/or
personnel are denoted with shall while other
functions are denoted with should.
212
593308-02
8.4.5 Description of separator

modes
For control purposes the operation of the
separator should be divided into different
modes.
The normally used modes are described below
but other modes might exist.
It is assumed that:
• The separator is correctly assembled.
• All connections are made according to
Connection List, Interconnection Diagram
Motor drive data and Interface Description.
• The separator control system is activated.
If above conditions are not fulfilled the
separator is not ready for operation.
Stand still means:

• The power to the separator motor is off
• The bowl is not rotating.
Starting means:
• The power to the separator motor is on.
• The bowl is rotating and accelerating
Running means:
• The power to the separator motor is on.
• The bowl is rotating at set speed.
• RUNNING is a collective denomination for a
number of sub modes which e.g. can be:
– STAND BY: Separator is in a waiting mode
and not producing.
– PRODUCTION: Separator is fed with
product and producing.
– CLEANING: Separator is fed with cleaning
liquids with the intention to clean the
separator.
213
593308-02
Stopping means:
• The power to the separator motor is either off
or used for braking.
• The bowl is rotating and decelerating.
• STOPPING is a collective denomination for a
number of sub modes which e.g. can be:
– NORMAL STOP: A manually or
automatically initiated stop.
– SAFETY STOP: An automatically initiated
stop at too high vibrations.
– EMERGENCY STOP: A manually initiated
stop at emergency situations. This stop
will be in effect until it is manually reset.
8.4.6 Handling of connection

interfaces
Electrical connections:
701 Separator motor.

The separator is equipped with a 3-phase
standard motor. The motor shall be fed from a
frequency converter.
The frequency converter shall have an over
speed alarm function that initiates a NORMAL
STOP of the separator if the bowl speed
exceeds "Maximum allowed speed".
The frequency converter shall have a system
that initiates a NORMAL STOP of the
separator if the frequency goes above the
values given in the Connection list.
There shall be an emergency stop circuit
designed according to EN 418 and a power
isolation device according to EN 1037.
There shall be a start button close to the
separator that shall be used for first start after
assembly of the separator.
There should be a counter to count number of
running hours.
214
593308-02
There should be a current transformer to give

an analogue signal to the control unit
proportional to the motor current.
729 Pressure transmitter, Operating water

The separator is equipped with a operating
water pressure transmitter in order to interlock
discharge and give alarm if the operating water
pressure is too low or too high. Preset values for
alarm levels can be found in "Technical Data"
Signal processing in STARTING:

The signal from the pressure transmitter
should be blocked until two minutes after
closing the bowl.
Signal processing in RUNNING:

• If the operating water pressure is too high an
alarm "High operating water pressure"
should be given and discharge interlocked
and an turn over to STAND BY should take
place.
• If the operating water pressure is too low an
alarm "Low operating water pressure" should
be given and discharge interlocked and turn
over to STAND BY should take place.
• The signal from the pressure transmitter
should be blocked during and 80sec after
the discharge.
Signal processing in STOPPING:

The signal from the pressure transmitter
should be blocked.
215
593308-02
730 Temperature sensors, motor winding.

The separator motor is equipped with three
thermistor sensors, one in each winding. The
sensors are connected in series and shall be
connected to a thermistor relay that gives a
signal when the temperature exceeds the
tripping level (see ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on
page 208).
Signal processing in STAND STILL and

STOPPING:
• The signal should trigger an alarm and
interlock start.
Signal processing in any other mode:
• The signal shall trigger turn over to NORMAL
STOP.
731 Temperature sensor in bearing system

The bearing system unit can be equipped with
a temperature sensor for the neck bearing
holder. The sensor of Pt 100 type shall be
connected to a transmitter that gives a signal
when the temperature exceeds the value given
in Technical Data. It should also be possible to
monitor the temperature continuously.
Signal processing in STAND STILL and

STOPPING
• The signal should trigger an alarm and
interlock start.
Signal processing in any other mode
• The signal shall trigger turn over to NORMAL
STOP.
733 Temperature sensor, Lubricating oil

The gear house can be equipped with a
temperature sensor for the lubricating oil.
216
593308-02
741a Speed sensor

A proximity sensor of inductive type according
to DIN 19234 (Namur) standard is giving a
number of pulses per revolution of the bowl (see
‘‘8.3 Connection List” on page 208). The bowl
speed is gear ratio (See ‘‘8.2 Technical data” on
page 207) multiplied by the speed of the motor
shaft.

• The separator should be stopped
automatically according to NORMAL STOP
procedure and an alarm should be given
when the accumulated time for acceleration
is longer than the maximum time specified in
Technical data. An abnormal start time
indicates some malfunction of the separator
equipment and should be investigated.
• If the speed exceeds “Maximum allowed
speed” in Technical Data the separator shall
be stopped automatically by NORMAL STOP
and a high speed alarm shall be given.
• The speed monitoring system shall be
checked continuously (e.g by checking that
pulses are coming). In case of failure
indication the separator shall be stopped
automatically by NORMAL STOP with a timer
controlled stop sequence and an alarm for
speed monitoring system failure shall be
given.
• The acceleration should be supervised to
ensure that a certain speed (e.g 100 r/min.)
has been reached within a certain time (e.g
30 seconds).
• If the speed exceeds “Maximum allowed
bowl speed” in Technical data the separator
shall be stopped automatically by NORMAL
STOP and a high speed alarm shall be
given.
217
593308-02
• If the speed falls more than 5% below the

synchronous speed for a period longer than
1 minute a low speed alarm should be given.
Low speed indicates some malfunction of
the separator equipment and shall be
investigated.
• The speed monitoring system shall be
checked continuously (e.g. by checking that
pulses are coming). In case of a failure
indication an alarm for speed monitoring
system failure shall be given. If there is a risk
of too high speed the separator shall be
stopped by NORMAL STOP.

• STAND STILL shall be indicated when no
pulses are detected within 30 seconds.
• Stopping the separator when alarm for
speed monitoring system failure is active,
shall cause a timer controlled stop. (See
“Stop time” in ‘‘8.2 Technical data” on page
207.)
750 Unbalance sensor.

For indication of any abnormal unbalance and
to be able to perform appropriate
countermeasures, the separator has been
equipped with an accelerometer on the
separator frame. The signal from the
accelerometer shall be monitored and two
alarm levels according to the vibration alarm
levels in Technical Data should be set. The
vibration level shall be high for 3 seconds to
generate an alarm. The first level is only used
to generate an alarm while the second level
shall stop the machine.
The vibration monitor shall include self check
function to be performed at least at initiation of
STARTING.
If vibrations exceed the second alarm level the
separator shall be stopped the quickest way
possible and it shall not been restarted until
the reasons for the vibrations have been found
and measures to remove them have been taken.
218
593308-02

• If vibrations exceed the second alarm level
the separator shall be stopped automatically
by SAFETY STOP.
• The vibration level should be supervised
during starting of the separator. The alarm
might be blocked or set to a higher level
when passing through the critical speed
interval(s).
• If the self check system triggers, an alarm
shall be given and an automatic stop by
NORMAL STOP shall be initiated.
• If vibrations exceed the first alarm level an
alarm should be given. Vibrations of this
magnitude will reduce the expected life time
of the bearings and should therefore be
eliminated.
• If vibrations exceed the second alarm level
the separator shall be stopped automatically
by SAFETY STOP.
shall be given.
shall be given.
Signal processing in NORMAL STOP:
• If vibrations exceed the second level the
system shall turn over automatically to
SAFETY STOP.
219
593308-02
760 Cover interlocking switch (optional)

The separator is equipped with a interlocking
switch to detect if the cover is mounted.
Signal processing in STAND STILL:

• The circuit is closed when the cover of the
separator is mounted.
• The interlocking switch should be connected
in such a way that starting of the motor is
prevented when the separator cover is not
mounted.
Signal processing in STARTING and
RUNNING:
• If the circuit is broken the separator should
be stopped automatically by NORMAL
STOP. This is to minimise the risk of having
access to moving parts.
Fluid connections
Complementary information is given in the
document Connection List.
201 Inlet
Processing in STAND STILL:
• Shall be closed.
Processing in STARTING:
• Should be closed. Bowl will be open and
empty or closed and filled depending on if
start is done from STAND STILL or
STOPPING.
Processing in RUNNING:
• Could be closed or open.
• Shall be open at discharges
220
593308-02
Processing in CLEANING:
• A sequence of cleaning liquids should be
fed to the separator. The flow rate should be
as high as possible and preferably not less
than the production flow rate.
An example of a procedure is given in the
document CIP-program.
Processing in NORMAL STOP or
EMERGENCY STOP:
• Could be closed or open but the bowl should
be filled unless the stop is initiated in
STARTING.
Processing in SAFETY STOP:
• Could be closed or open but the bowl shall
be filled unless the stop is initiated in
STARTING.
220, 221 and 222 Outlets

Processing in STAND STILL:
• Could be closed or open.
Processing in other modes:

• Shall be open.
221
593308-02
304 Flushing connections
Processing in RUNNING:
• Could be used at any time but is normally
used only in connection with discharges and
in many cases only at discharges in
CLEANING.
• When flushing is used it should not be on
continuously but in short pulses. It is
possible to flush at all connections at the
same time but it is an advantage if each
connection can be controlled individually as
flushing time then can be adapted to actual
requirements.
• When flushing is used at discharges, a
normal procedure is to make a short flush
(e.g. 3 seconds) before the discharge to wet
the surfaces. Then wait until the discharged
material has left the sludge drain (e.g. 20
seconds) and then make a new flush (e.g. 10
seconds).
• Flushing can be done with water or CIP-
liquids.
Processing in other modes:

• Flushing should not be used.
222
593308-02
375 Inlet for discharge and make-up liquid

Processing in all modes:
• Shall be on when the speed of the bowl is
more than 3500rpm.
• If bowl is running at full speed without feed
flow for a long time it might be overheated if
cooling is not on. For that reason a time
limitation is given in Technical Data for
running without feed flow. If cooling media
supply is supervised no such limitation is
needed.
• When going from STARTING to STANDBY a
discharge shall be initiated to fill the
discharge system with water and remove air
pockets.
• When coming from PRODUCTION a
discharge shall be initiated to remove
sediments from bowl to avoid problems due
to solidification.
Signal processing in PRODUCTION:
• Automatic discharges shall be initiated by
timer. Activate input 506b or 506c for 5
seconds, see ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on page
208.
Signal processing in CLEANING:
timer. Activate input 506b or 506c for 5
seconds, see ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on page
208.
• Discharges should not be made.
Signal processing in SAFETY STOP and
EMERGENCY STOP:
• Discharges shall not be made.
223
593308-02
Pneumatic connections:
Compressed air for OWMC

The separator is equipped with an Operating
Water Module Compact. The OWMC is
equipped with following connections.
506a Inlet for compressed air to OWMC
506b Inlet for activating a small discharge
506c Inlet for activating a large discharge
See ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on page 208 list for
inlet pressures.
• When going from STARTING to STANDBY a
discharge shall be initiated to fill the
discharge system with water and remove air
pockets.
• A discharge is activated by open inlet 506b
or 506c for 5 seconds.
• After a discharge has been triggered the
motor current or bowl speed should be
monitored to indicate if there comes a
current peak or a sudden drop in speed. The
absence of such indication means that the
discharge has failed and corrective action
should be taken (e.g. trigger a new
discharge). Absence of a discharge may
result in problems due to solidification of the
sediment. That the current returns to original
value after discharge could also be
supervised. If current is much higher after
the discharge this might be an indication that
the bowl has not closed properly after the
discharge.
• For service purposes there should be a
counter to count number of discharges.
Signal processing in STAND BY:
• When coming from PRODUCTION a
discharge shall be initiated to remove
sediments from bowl to avoid problems due
to solidification.
224
593308-02
Signal processing in PRODUCTION:

timer.
Signal processing in CLEANING:
timer.
1 Inlet for process liquid or safety water (201)
can be open or closed.
2 A discharge is activated by open inlet 506b
or 506c for 5 seconds.
3 After a discharge has been triggered the
motor current or bowl speed should be
monitored to indicate if there comes a
current peak or a sudden drop in speed. The
absence of such indication means that the
discharge has failed and corrective action
should be taken (e.g. trigger a new
discharge). Absence of a discharge may
result in problems due to solidification of the
sediment. That the current returns to original
value after discharge could also be
supervised. If current is much higher after
the discharge this might be an indication that
the bowl has not closed properly after the
discharge.
4 Separator motor (701) shall be shut off.
Signal processing in SAFETY STOP and
EMERGENCY STOP:
All the connections that are related to safety
are included here, regardless previous modes.
1 The separator bowl shall be kept filled.
2 Separator motor (701) shall be shut off.
3 Signal for discharge shall be blocked.
4 Inlet for make-up liquid (375) shall be open.
5 The separating system shall be deactivated
until the reason for the safety stop is
investigated and the cause is eliminated.
225
593308-02
Other connections
821a Connection for optional level guard

If the outlet from the cyclone is arranged in
such a way that there is a risk that the outlet
can be blocked, e.g. if there is a pump connected
to the cyclone outlet, then it is advisable to
mount a level guard in the cyclone. If this
guard gives an alarm some action shall be
taken, e.g. start the pump and prevent new
discharges.
821b Plugged connection

• Can be used for ventilation
821c Connection for optional flushing.
226
593308-02
8.5 Quality requirements
8.5.1 Operating Water

Operating water is used in the separator for several different functions: e.g. to operate the
discharge mechanism, to lubricate and cool mechanical seals.
Poor quality of the operating water may with time cause erosion, corrosion and/or operating
problem in the separator and must therefore be treated to meet certain demands.
The following requirements are of fundamental importance

1.1 Turbidity free water, solids content <0,001% by volume
Deposits must not be allowed to form in certain areas in the separator
1.2 Max. particle size 50 μm
2 Total hardness less than 180 mg CaCO3 per litre, which corresponds to 10°dH or 12.5°E
Hard water may with time form deposits in the operating mechanism. The precipitation
rate is accelerated with increased operating temperature and low discharge frequency.
These effects become more severe the harder the water is.
3 Chloride content max 100 ppm NaCl (equivalent to 60 mg Cl/l)
Chloride ions contribute to corrosion on the separator surface in contact with the operating
water, including the spindle. Corrosion is a process that is accelerated by increased
separating temperature, low pH, and high chloride ion concentration.
A chloride concentration above 60 mg/l is not recommended.
4 pH>6
Increased acidity (lower pH) increases the risk for corrosion; this is accelerated by
increased temperature and high chloride ion content.
NOTE
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for consequences

arising from unsatisfactorily purified operating
water supplied by the customer.
227
593308-02
8.5.2 Compressed Air

The supply of compressed air to separator discharge system, valve actuators,

positioners, instruments etc. must be of such a quality that satisfactory
function is ensured for a reasonable time.
To this end three conditions must be fulfilled:
1 Dirt in the form of solid particles down to a size below 10 micron (0,01 mm)
must be removed from the air. This is preferably done by means of special
filters or reducing valves provided with filters
2 Oil is always transferred to the compressed air from oil-lubricated
compressors and must be removed to the highest possible degree. It
constitutes a serious contamination, which it is difficult to remove from the
instruments. Special filters or oil separators must, therefore, be provided
before the instruments. In small plants, oil-free compressors can be used as
an alternative.
3 In the compressed-air system a condensation takes place at various rates,
depending on the moisture content at the air inlet, the temperature before
and after the compressor, partially lower temperature in any cold zone
passed by the pipe (outdoor, cellar etc.) and the like.
The air must thus be dried with regard to the lowest temperature existing
after the drying device, so that condensate in the instruments is avoided.
Note that the air will also be cooled through expansion after passing
constrictions and nozzles in the instruments, with condensation as a result.
In view of the above, the following must be observed:
At the inlet to an instrument, the dew point of the compressed air should lie
at least 10 °C below the lowest ambient temperature. This is usually
obtained by using an absorption drier of suitable capacity. If the air contains
much water, provide a primary separator before the filter.
Air filters should be placed so as to be easily surveyable and accessible in
order to facilitate daily condition checks, and exchange of the filter cartridge.
NOTE
Alfa Laval accepts no liability for

consequences arising from unsatisfactorily
purified compressed air supplied by the
customer.
228
593308-02
8.6 Drawings
8.6.1 Basic size drawing

Max. horizontal displacement at the outlet 143

connections during operation + 20 mm
101
60
201
729
221
302a
731
302b
733
446
741a
750
1667
1621
760 479
1436
1285
1417
611
140
844
222
493
370
506a
145
409
506b
506c
360 339
410
919
508
462
416 162
821a
+
Tightening
821b
torque 100 Nm
+
821c
+
684
Adjusting
558
washers
546
432
126
max. 4 cs/foot
179
214
436
G 1 02 57 11
701 730
919
Connection 220 turnable 360o in 90o steps.

All connections to be installed non-loaded and flexible
All dimensions are nominal. Reservation for individual deviations due to tolerances.
Data for connection, see ‘‘8.3 Connection List” on page 208.
Connection 302 a,b and 303 a,b only valid for high speed machine, 7200 rpm.
229
593308-02
230
348
INSTRUCTION BOOK
304
230
462
657 connection 303b 168
655 connection 303a & 462
303b
578 connection 375
46
140
3
375
195
479
220 164
290
36
30
87
593308-02
303a
211
660 connection 304
G 1 02 57 21
8 TECHNICAL REFERENCE
Connections
Nut, size 50 DIN 11850 Loose flange DN 200, PN 10, DIN 2642
ISO-R1/4
4
Rd 78x1/6
50
221 302a 462

201
ISO G3/8
50,5
35,6
463 303a
222
ISO-G 1/2
409 410
11
50,5
304
375
22,6
ISO-G 1/2
Nut, DN 63,5 SMS 1148
Needle valve
50
6c
303b 302b
Rd 85-6
821a 821b 821c
76
220
ISO-G 3/8
+
Blind flange
6a
50
50
6b
506a 506b 506c
G 10 25 7 31
6
231
593308-02
8.6.2 Foundation drawing

A B
M
D
E
J
N
O
F
P
G
Q
K Total vertical/horizontal
L dynamic instantaneous
I foundation forces (sum of all
G 09 77 66 1
feet) +20 kN
(static forces excluded.
H
A Min. lifting capacity required during service: 900 kg
B Max. height of largest component incl. lifting tool.
C Recommended speed for lifting:
Low speed 0,5 - 1,5 m/min.
High speed: 2-6 m/min.
D Horizontal max. deviation 0,4 o
E Installation according to stated foundation forces.
F Floor level
G Foundation plate
H Anchor bolt
I Expanding concrete
Structural concrete
J Center for lifting device.
K 7 holes ∅20
L 3 holes M20 for horizontal adjustment
M Service side
N Recommended free floor space for unloading when
doing service.
O No fixed installation within this area.
P Vertical dynamic forces +20 kN/foot
(static forces excluded).
Q Horizontal dynamic forces +20 kN/foot
(static forces excluded)
232
593308-02
8.6.3 Interconnection diagram

Junction box
Interlocking switch (frame top part)
Temperature sensor (lube oil)
Temperature sensor (neck bearing)
Vibration sensor
Speed sensor PNP (motor shaft speed)
Separator motor with Speed sensor NAMUR (motor shaft speed)
G 08 7 00 61
thermistor Speed sensor NAMUR (motor shaft speed)
Pressure transmitter (OWMC water)
Normally open when cover not fitted
All wires to be cut to appropriate length to match Wire colour codes:

respective earth connection terminal. Wire ends to be
marked with "PARTEX" PA01 or PA02 (yellow with black BK=Black
marking) after insulation and fitted with ferrules and/or BN=Brown
cable shoes with insulated collar. Loose wire ends to be BU=Blue
insulated with shrinking tubing. RD=Red
GN-YW =Green-Yellow
WT=White
Items showed in this document are not included in all

separators.
233
593308-02
8.7 Electric motor

Knockout openings for

2x M40 + M16 cable
glands on both sides.
Drain holes with closable plastic

plugs acc. to variant code 066 (open
at delivery IP55) for horizontal
mounting IM 3061.
G 1 0 25 81 1
Shaft dimensions
Manufacturer ABB Motors

Manuf. drawing 3GZV 102 027-B A1.4778
Standards Appropriate IEC and EN-standard
Size IEC 180 M
Type M3AA 180 MLB 3GAA182032B_G
Weight 164 kg
Poles 4
Insulation class F
Bearings D-end 6310-2Z/C3
N-end 6209-2Z/C3
Method of cooling IC 411 (IEC 34-6)
Spec. Totally enclosed three-phase
standard motor for frequency drive.
234 593308-02
Type of mounting Degree of

protection
IEC 34-7 IEC 34-5
IM 3061 IP 55
Noise level Mean sound pressure level is

62 dB(A) at 50 Hz and 66 dB(A) at
60 Hz.
Tolerance +3 dB(A)
Thermistor
tripping temp. 150 oC
Vibration level Balanced with half key
Quality grade R according to IEC
34-14 (max. 1,12 mm/s rms) acc. to
variant code +052.
Lubrication The motor bearings are
permanently lubricated with the
lifetime of 40 000 hours at
maximum.
235
593308-02
8.7.1 Motor drive data

Current- and speed curves at start with frequency converter

Speed Current
r/min l/ln
Motor speed
l/ln
G 10 25 8 21
7
Acceleration time 6 minutes Time (minutes)
l/ln = Starting current/rated current
236
593308-02
Article Output Manu- Type Number Speed η Power Rated

No. (kW) facturer of poles 50 Hz (%) factor torque
(r/min) (cos ϕ) Mn (Nm)
575214 18,5 ABB M3AA 4 1470 0,921 0,84 120

Motors 180 M4
Bowl speed, max. 6250 r/minute.

Motor synchronous speed 1500 r/minute
Moment of inertia: 8,67 kgm2 (bowl)
Machine idling power
consumption: 10 kW (motor input)
Cables and fuses (recommendations)
Voltage Rated Fuse Cable area

(V) current (A) (mm2 Cu)
(A) mains
(mains) (motor)
400 35 50 10 6
440 35 40 6 6
460 34 40 6 6
Note: The motor and the main cables must be

dimensioned acc. to local safety regulations.
Shielded symmetrical motor cable is
recommended.
237
593308-02
8.8 Guidelines for

frequency converter
drives
Frequency converter.
For dimensioning and programming of a frequency converter
see ‘‘8.9 Dimensioning of a frequency converter’’:
When choosing the rated power for the converter, regard must
be paid to the motor current peaks, which occur during the
automatic discharges of centrifuge.
When dimensioning an electrical brake it is essential to be
aware of the current of the motor. The current should not
exceed the nominal current for the motor.
The start of the centrifuge shall be carried out using a suitably
adjusted acceleration ramp. The acceleration period is to be
chosen with regard to the moment of inertia of the rotor, and
the rated torque of the motor.
The limit of current during start should be below 140 % the
rated current for the motor. The main reasons are heat in the
motor and the stress on the transmission.
If there are adjustable parameters, which set the level for over
speed, it is required, that a password and/or a hardware lock
protect the parameter adjustment function. In order to avoid
unintentional altering of the parameter settings, two separate
operations must be performed before parameter adjustment is
enabled. Examples of interlocks are password, hardwiring
with jumpers and disconnecting of control panel.
When the frequency converter will be installed in the process
area, the code of protection of the enclosure shall be at least
IP54. When installed in a special room, an electrical operation
area, the enclosure can be of IP20.
The frequency converter is to be set for one direction of
rotation only and the motor connected for correct direction of
rotation with the use of this setting. The direction is to be
found on the machine plate.
238
593308-02
The possibility of changing the direction of rotation of the motor

through adjustment of the converter should be prevented. It is required
that password and/or a hardware lock protect the parameter
adjustment function. In order to avoid unintentional altering of
direction, two separate operations must be performed before
adjustment is enabled. Examples of interlocks are password,
hardwiring with jumpers, disconnecting of the control panel.
The frequency converter shall be able to function in such a way that it
can 'catch' a rotating load - 'flying start'. If, for example, the centrifuge
has stopped because of a power supply failure to the factory, and the
operator restarts the centrifuge before it has reached stand still, then
the converter must have the capability to synchronise to the present
rotor speed and start from there. The acceleration should be in
accordance with the pre-set acceleration ramp.
It is recommended to choose a frequency converter with the possibility
to monitor the chosen maximum output frequency. If the frequency
exceeds the maximum allowable frequency, and then the converter
should stop the centrifuge.
Centrifuge.
The rotor must not exceed 'Maximum allowed speed'. Too high rotor
speed or frequency shall stop the centrifuge with automatically
initiated stop. The stop shall be in effect until it is manually reset.
Maximum allowed speed and if applicable the minimum allowed speed
for the rotor could be found in Technical Data for the centrifuge.
To reduce the hazard for overspeed there shall be two systems for
supervision of the rotor speed, which are independent from each other.
One system can for example, be the supervision system in the VFD and
the other should be the speed supervision of the rotor. When the speed
monitoring system is used as a part of an over speed protection system,
it shall be designed in accordance with EN 954 Category 3, with
continuous checking of the function.
239
593308-02
Control systems
The control system of the centrifuge should be connected to the frequency
converter so that start and stop of the centrifuge can be initiated from the
control panel. Furthermore, the control system should monitor the rotor
speed via a speed sensor mounted in the centrifuge. The control system
should stop the centrifuge if the speed exceeds or falls below the allowed
speed limits, which are stated in the documentation for the corresponding
centrifuge.
The emergency stop stop should break the power supply to the frequency
converter.
The restart should not be possible during safety stop or emergency stop.
The starting sequence for the centrifuge should be interrupted if the speed
supervision system or the frequency supervision system is not in
operation.
The electric motor

The nominal frequency for the motor has to preferably be chosen as close as
possible to the chosen frequency for the centrifuge. Deviation of more than -
20% is not recommended, as the available motor torque is decreased when
operating below or above the nominal frequency. A closer description is
found in ‘‘8.9 Dimensioning of a frequency converter’’.
The motor winding is available with standard or reinforced insulation
strengthening system, which can be combined with du/dt filter and/or
insulated bearings depending on the motor size/type and voltage.
Closer description and choosing criteria can be found in motor and/or
frequency converter documentation.
If a standard motor is used, then it is recommended that the motor is
equipped with thermistors in the stator windings. The tripping
temperature for the thermistors should be the maximum allowable
operating temperature for the corresponding insulation class. CT motors
used by Alfa Laval are already provided with thermistors in the stator
windings - these should therefore be connected to the motor's monitoring
equipment when frequency converter drive is used.
The motor cable should be shielded so that approved suppression of
electromagnetic radiation can be obtained - as required by the EMC
directive or corresponding regulations. The shielding shall be connected to
both motor and frequency converter with special cable glands.
Special countermeasures have to be taken regarding cabling and
grounding/earthing due to the occurrence of bearing currents in the motor.
See the motor manufactures recommendation and installation
requirements.
240
593308-02
Electrical installation
The installation of the frequency converter shall be in accordance with EC-
regulations e.g. EMC Directive. Instructions shall always be supplied together
with a frequency converter.
In order to suppress the emitted electromagnetic radiation a correct cabling
system shall be used. It consists of symmetric shortest possible power cable
equipped with concentric protective copper shield round the phase leads or with
concentric Cu/Al-shield round the three symmetrical conductors for protective
grounding and the phase leads. The correct supplying cable shall be connected
with 360 degrees termination of cable shield at both the motor terminal box end
and converter end with shortest possible earth lead to the earthing bolts (PE-
terminal) in both ends. Thus unsymmetrical cables can be used up to 10 mm 2
cable size and up to 30 kW motor power, shielded cable is always recommended.
To reduce circuit-bound electrical disturbances to the power supply, the converter
shall be supplied with a power supply filter, an RFI-filter.
Attention shall be paid to the motor cable's length, so that tripping-out of the
converter because of excessive currents, as well as impaired properties of power
supply filter can be avoided. In doubtful cases, the converter's manufacturer
should be consulted regarding maximum allowable cable length.
The signal outputs and the control connections of the converter shall conform to
the requirements for immunity to electromagnetic disturbances as stated in the
EMC directive or corresponding regulations.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

IT IS OF OUTMOST IMPORTANCE THAT THE CENTRIFUGE IS SO
DESIGNED AND SAFEGUARDED THAT THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED SPEED
FOR THE ROTOR NEVER WILL BE EXCEEDED. OVER SPEED CAN RESULT
IN EJECTION OF PARTS. SAFETY-RELATED PARTS SHOULD BE
DESIGNED WITH REFERENCE TO EN 954-1.
241
593308-02
8.9 Dimensioning of a
frequency converter
8.9.1 Dimensioning and

programming of a frequency
converter
Basic requirements for a frequency converter:

– Select correct frequency converter for mains supply voltage and
frequency.
– Select the frequency converter power according to the initial conditions
and the specified motor. Check that the converter's rated output current is
similar or higher than the motors nominal rated current.
– The frequency converter's capability to produce the maximum required
current and power (typically during discharge sequences) has to be
checked, use values given for "heavy duty" use in manufacturer's
catalogue
– When controlled braking is required, select the frequency converter with
braking functionality, as described in ‘‘8.9.5 Braking methods’’.
– Only frequency converter fulfilling requirements in IEC 61508 part
1"Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-
related systems", EN 60204-1 "Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment
of machines" and EN 61800-3 "EMC Directive" shall be chosen.
For safety precautions of a variable frequency drive see ‘‘8.8 Guidelines for
frequency converter drives” on page 238.
8.9.2 Selecting the motor with correct voltage and

frequency for a variable frequency drive
If the motor with correct voltage and frequency is not already selected or there
are several motor alternatives to choose between, the following control
calculations for the continuous loadability of the motor should be made,
otherwise continue to ‘‘8.9.3 Dimensioning of a frequency converter for an
actual application” on page 245.
242
593308-02
Controlling the loadability of the motor at actual frequency drive

Example:
Power consumption at maximum capacity, found in Technical Data =
35 kW.
There are 2 motors available in centrifuge specification, 37 kW / 400
V / 50 Hz and 42 kW / 400 V / 60 Hz, both fulfilling the above power
requirement, control calculation for motor torque has to be made.
The motor with nominal frequency as close as possible to the actual
drive frequency should preferably be chosen.
Set frequency acc. to Technical Data = 70 Hz, gives motor relative
speed = 70 Hz / 50 Hz = 1,4 for 50 Hz's motor and 70 Hz / 60 Hz ~ 1,2
for 60 Hz's motor.
When validating these relative speeds 1,4 and 1,2 in motor loadability
curve, it can be seen that 60 Hz's motor is better alternative with
higher T / Tn factor, giving ~ 83% of Tn with 70 Hz set frequency.
Motor with 42 kW / 400 V / 60 Hz is therefore selected.
The motor torque can be calculated from speed and mechanical

(output) power:
T=P/ω
T = torque (Nm)
P = power (W)
ω = motor speed (rad/s)
The motor speed is put in the formula in rpm´s instead of rad/s:
ω = n x (2 x Π / 60)
n = actual motor speed (rpm) = relative speed factor x nominal speed
T = P / ω = P x 60 / n x 2 x Π
Continuously needed motor torque at maximum capacity = 35000 x
Π
60 / 1,2 x 1780 x 2 x = 156 Nm.
During discharges needed motor torque = 70000*) x 60 / 1,2 x 1780 x 2
Π
x = 313 Nm.
*) If values for maximum current or power during discharges are not

known, multiply value for power consumption at maximum capacity
by factor 2 6 estimated power consumption during discharges = 35 kW
x 2 = 70 kW = 70000 W
243
593308-02
Controlling continuous available motor torque at 70 Hz = (42000 x 60 / 1780

x 2 x Π) x 83% = 188 Nm
Controlling maximum available motor torque at 70 Hz = 188 x 2,5**) = 470
Nm
**) 2,5 is a factor for the relationship between maximum and nominal
motor torque, Tmax/Tn, as found in motor catalogue.
Both values are higher than in centrifuge operation needed torque values.
The motor is correct for the application.
Loadability curve for an electric motor in

a frequency converter drive.
G0962351
A. Relative speed
T/Tn = Available/nominal motor torque.

Relative speed = Actual drive frequency/motor nominal
frequency
244
593308-02
8.9.3 Dimensioning of a frequency converter for an

actual application
Frequency converter shall be dimensioned regarding to maximum
needed power and current, overload capacity,
which usually occurs during discharge sequences for a centrifuge
The relation between the nominal and the actual motor current in field
weakening range (above the motors nominal frequency / speed) can
approximately be calculated by:
I m ≈ (P load / P n) x I n
I m = actual motor current (A)
P load = actual needed power by driven machine during discharges (W) *)
P n = motor's nominal power (W)
I n = motor's nominal current (A)
*) If values for maximum current or power are not known, multiply

value for power consumption at maximum capacity by factor 2 6
estimated power consumption during discharges = 35 kW x 2 = 70 kW
= 70000 W
Maximum needed output current (actual motor current during

discharges) from the frequency converter ≈
(70000/ 42000) x 78 = 130 A
The frequency converter with capability for this current shall be

chosen.
This current is called for maximum monitored output current, short-
term overload current or peak current, and it is usually limited to
150% of nominal output current.
This current is usually limited for a short time only periodically (ex. 1
minute every 5 minutes or 2 seconds every 15 seconds), which should
be taking in consideration when deciding discharge intervals and
speed regaining time after discharge.
Speed regaining time can also be prolonged by converter's maximum
output power, normally limited to 150% of converter's nominal output
power.
Control the frequency converter's nominal output current, it should be
similar or higher than the motors nominal current, in this case, at
least 78 A.
245
593308-02
Values to be used when selecting the converter:

Nominal output current ≥ 78 A
Overload current (short time) ≥ 130 A
These values, when looking into manufacturer's catalogues, should

give a converter for heavy-duty use of 45 kW.
8.9.4 Programming the frequency converter

Since parameter setup and programming interface are different from
manufacturer to another, detailed instructions cannot be given here,
only the most important programmable parameters for starting-up
and running the centrifuge will be explained!
See frequency converter instruction for use for detailed information
– Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate, including
nominal power, voltage, current, speed, frequency and
eventually power factor (cosinus ϕ).
– Optionally and if available, select motor identification run for fine
adjustment of the motor data, choose between standard/
extended or reduced. NOTE! During standard/extended
identification run the motor will rotate and has to be off-loaded
from the centrifuge!
– If available, select the torque control mode (variable or pump/fan
characteristics) for controlling of the motor.
– Check and, if necessary, change the direction of rotation of the
motor
– Set the minimum motor speed or frequency, should be 0 rpm or 0
Hz respectively
– Set the actual motor speed or set frequency, values given in
Technical Data
IT IS OF UTMOST IMPORTANCE THAT THIS SETTING HAS
TO BE CHECKED. A FAULTY FREQUENCY SETTING CAN
LEAD TO OVERSPEEDING, WHICH MIGHT CAUSE
HAZARDS.
– Set the start time, value given in Technical Data or Motor Drive
Data.
246
593308-02
8.9.5 Braking methods

NOTE! Not to be used in explosive atmospheres!
Motor flux braking:

Flux braking is a method based on motor losses. When braking in the
drive system is needed, the motor flux and thus also the magnetizing
current component used in the motor are increased. The control of flux
can be easily achieved through the direct torque control principle (DTC).
With DTC the inverter is directly controlled to achieve the desired
torque and flux for the motor. During flux braking the motor is under
DTC control which guarantees that braking can be made according to
the specified speed ramp.
The flux braking method based on DTC enables the motor to shift
quickly from braking to motoring power when requested.
In flux braking the increased current means increased losses inside the
motor. The braking power is therefore also increased although the
braking power delivered to the frequency converter is not increased. The
increased current generates increased losses in motor resistances.
Typically, in low power motors (below 5 kW) the resistance value of the
motor is relatively large in respect to the nominal current of the motor.
The higher the power or the voltage of the motor, the less the resistance
value of the motor in respect to motor current. In other words, flux
braking is most effective in a low power motor.
Rated motor power

1 2,2 kW
2 16 kW
3 37 kW
4 75 kW
5 250 kW
G0962361
Percentage of motor braking torque of rated torque as

a function of output frequency.
A. Braking torque (%)
B. No flux braking
C. Flux braking
247
593308-02
The main benefits of flux braking are:

• No extra components are needed and no extra cost, using DTC control
method.
• The motor is controlled during braking.
The main drawbacks of flux braking are:

• Increased thermal stress on the motor if braking is repeated over short
periods.
• Braking power is limited by the motor characteristics e.g. resistance value.
• Flux braking is useful mainly in low power motors.
• Not recommended in explosive atmospheres.
Brake chopper and braking resistor:

The braking chopper is an electrical switch that connects the DC bus voltage
to a resistor, where the braking energy is converted to heat. During
deceleration, the motor changes to generator operation and supplies energy
back through the inverter. As brake energy cannot be fed back to the supply
via the normal diode bridge, the brake chopper will turn on at a certain level
and feed energy out via the brake resistor. Here, the energy is converted to
heat and wasted, unless a separate heat recovery system is installed;
additional ventilation for the room may be required.
The main benefits of the braking chopper and resistor are:
• Simple electrical construction and well-known technology.
• Low fundamental investment for chopper and resistor.
• The chopper works even if AC supply is lost.
The main drawbacks of the braking chopper and resistor are:
• The braking energy is wasted if the heated air cannot be utilized.
• The braking chopper and resistors require additional space.
• May require extra investments in the cooling and heat recovery system.
Braking choppers are typically dimensioned for a certain cycle, e.g. 100%
power 1/10 minutes. Longer braking times, require more accurate
dimensioning of the braking chopper.
248
593308-02
DC braking:
NOTE! Not to be used in explosive atmospheres!
DC braking can be performed with or without a frequency converter.
With a frequency converter, a stop command makes the frequency
converter switch to supplying the motor with direct current,
developing a braking torque. Same effect can also be achieved using
the DC brake unit, for dimensioning of the unit see document 565309.
The main drawbacks of the DC injection braking are:
• The motor flux control is lost during braking, e.g. no control of adjusted
braking time.
• Heat losses in the motor.
• Not recommended in explosive atmospheres.
Regenerative drive - IGBT solution braking:

The IGBT based regeneration is based on the same principles as power
transmission within a power network. It has a low amount of supply
current harmonics in both, motoring and regeneration, as well as high
dynamics during fast power flow changes on the load side. It also offers
the possibility to boost the DC voltage higher than the respective
incoming AC supply. This can be used to compensate for a weak
network or increase the motor's maximum torque capacity in the field
weakening area.
The main benefits of the IGTB solution braking are:
• Stable torque even if net voltage is unstable.

• Nominal torque available even in the field weakening area.
• Fast and smooth operation in motoring-regenerating-motoring
transition.
The main drawbacks of the IGTB solution drive are:
• Higher investment cost, up to 2 times of a standard frequency

converter cost.
• The braking capability is not available during power supply failure.
249
593308-02
8.10 Monitoring kit

Temperature
sensor
Cover interlocking switch
Speed sensor
Pressure
sensor
Vibration
sensor
Temperature sensor G 0 87 89 9 1
250
593308-02
8.10.1 Inductive sensor (for speed)

Electrical and Mechanical data:

according to manufacturers data sheet.
4
M 12 x1
4,5
G06361J1
40 L
General installation
The switch distance (s) is depending on the material of

the test object.
For materials other than mild steel the switch distance

will be reduced. This is done by multiplying (s) by the G0555911
following factors:
Stainless steel: 0,74 Installation requirements
Copper 0,3 6 1) Installation in metal
Aluminium 0,37 1)
1)
Not to used, affects the tolerance of measurements.
Mounting
Plain hole mounting, (do not use threaded hole). Use
the supplied nuts.
Tighten the nuts after adjustment with a torque of max.
50 Nm
251
593308-02
8.10.2 Vibration sensor

G0688621
A. Sensitive axis
B. Black -
C. White +
D. Screen
Technical data:
- Frequency response 2 Hz to 1 kHz
- Mounted resonance 18 kHz min
- Measurement range 50 gpeak
- Isolation: base isolated
- Temperature sensitivity: 0,08%/Co
- Electrical noise: 0,3 mV max
- Transverse sensitivity: less than 5%
- Supply voltage 10-32 Voltage DC
- Output signal: 4-20 mA
- Standard cable: 5 metres over braided twin core PTFE
- Case material: Stainless steel
- Weight: 150 gms (nominal)
- Sealing: IP 67
- Example of supplier: Monitran Ltd.
- Suppliers denomination: MTN/1185CM-25 PG7 (0-25 mm/sec. RMS)
MTN/1185CM-50 PG7 (0-50 mm/sec. RMS)
MTN/1185CM-100 PG7 (0-100 mm/sec. RMS)
252
593308-02
8.10.3 Pressure transmitter

Approx. 61
Pin 1: + supply
Pin 2: - common
G 0 77 64 Y1
Technical data:
- Pressure range: 0 - 2,5 bar relative
- Out signal: 4 - 20 mA
- Housing material: stainless steel
- Power supply: 12,5 - 28 VDC, max 28 mA
- Electrical connection according to: DIN 43 650 - A
253
593308-02
8.10.4 Temperature sensor

G 09 3 76 11
1.Temperature sensor a.White
2.Screw b.Red
3.Cable length 3 m, diameter 2,5 mm, colour: black
Electric data
Sensing element: PT 100
Mechanical data
Materials:
- Cable: Teflon
- Sensor body: SIS 2343
Basic values for measuring resistance

°C °F Ohm
0 +32 100,00
+20 +68 107,79
+40 +104 115,54
+60 +140 123,24
+80 +176 130,89
+100 +212 138,50
+110 +230 142,29
+120 +248 146,06
+130 +266 149,82
+140 +284 153,58
+150 +302 157,31
+160 +320 161,04
254
593308-02
8.10.5 Cover interlocking switch

G0636451
A. Cable:
– Colour: Grey
– Leads area: 0,75 mm2
– Material: PVC
B. Switching points
C. Contact closed
D. Contact open
G 0 86 77 N1
Wire colour codes:

BK Black
BN Brown
GN-YE Green-Yellow
255
593308-02
Approvals:
Approved for flameproof applications according to

EN 50014/NFC 23-514, EN 50018/NFC 23-518.
- Approval: LCIE No. 81.6089. See AL drawing 551338
- Switching capacity: 1 million cycles
Type code:
- Actuator and ring made of stainless steel.
Mechanical data:
Protection class: IP67 acc. to IEC 529.
Ambient temperature: -25 °C to +70 °C
Resistance against;
- Shock: 50 g acc. to IEC 68-2-7
- Vibration: 5 g (10-500Hz) acc. to IEC 68-2-7
Enclosure;
- Material: Zinc
- Coating: THROPIC treatment
Switch mechanism;
- Material: Stainless Steel
- Sealing rings: Chloroprene rubber
Electrical data:
- Maximum voltage: 500V AC/DC acc. to NCF 20.040
Switching capacity:
Voltage: 12 24 48 127 230
AC load in VA: 75 200 280 500 550
DC load in W: 7 7 9 13 --
Explosion protection: Certified acc. to Directive 94/9/EC (ATEX)
Explosion protection: ll 2 GD EEx d llC T6 IP66/67 T85oC
Test certificate: INERIS 03ATEX0083X
Switching capacity: 1 milion cycles
256
593308-02
8.11 Paring disc

characteristics
Paring disc 588225-01

Bowl speed. 6240 rpm
Gravity disc 119

Counter pressure (kPa) Power (kW)
1000 50
900 45
Pmax
800 40
700 35
Pmin
600 30
500 25
400 20
Power
300 15
200 10
G 10 2 59 11
100 Pin 5
0 0
0 5 10 15 20
Flow (m3/h)
257
593308-02
258
593308-02
INSTRUCTION BOOK 9 INSTALLATION
9 Installation
9.1 Introduction
These installation specifications are valid for
the AFPX 810XGV-14CG/74CG separator.
The installation instructions are specifications,

which are compulsory requirements.
Any specific requirements from classification
societies or other local authorities must be
followed.
NOTE
If the specifications are not followed, Alfa Laval

can not be held responsible for any
malfunctions related to the installation.
Ensure that the separator delivered is suitable

for the application. Elements that are important
to consider are, e.g., process liquid density and
temperature, corrosion characteristics, sludge
characteristics, solids contents of the process
liquid, toxicity, inflammability, degree of
automation, etc.
Most of the installation instructions are
Specifications, which are compulsory
requirements. These specifications are
sometimes completed with non-compulsory
Recommendations, which could improve the
installation quality.
Additional installation information, such as
drawings, connection lists and interface
description, can be found previous in this
chapter.
593308-02 259
9.1.1 Storage and transport of

goods
Storage
Specification
Upon arrival to the store, check all
components and keep them:
• Well stored and protected from mechanical
damage.
• Dry and protected from rain and humidity.
• Organized in the store in such a way that the
goods will be easily accessible when
installation is about to take place.
A separator can be delivered with different

types of protection:
Fixed on a pallet.
The separator must be stored in a storage
room well protected from mechanical damage
and also dry and protected from rain and
humidity.
G 0 40 2 72 1
In a wooden box which is not water tight.

The separator must be stored dry and
protected from rain and humidity.
G 04 02 73 1
260
593308-02
9 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTION BOOK
In a special water-resistant box for outdoor

storage.
The separator and its parts have been treated
with an anti-corrosion agent. Once the box
has been opened, store dry and protected
from rain and humidity.
The packaging for outdoor storage is only to
special order.
G 0 40 27 41
Transport
Specification
• During transport of the separator, the frame

hood and bowl must always be removed
from the machine.
• When lifting a separator it must always be
hung securely. See chapter ‘‘6.9 Lifting
instructions” on page 188.
ING
WARN
!
Crush Hazard
Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting
instructions.
• During erection, all inlets and outlets to

separators and accessories must be
covered to be protected from dirt and dust.
261
593308-02
9.1.2 Planning of installation
Space for separator

The separator shall be placed in such a way
that suitable space for maintenance and repair
is obtained.
The space required for one or more separators
can be calculated by consulting the drawings in
the chapters ‘‘8.6.1 Basic size drawing” on page
229, ‘‘8.6.2 Foundation drawing” on page 232
and instructions for ancillary equipment,
electrical and electronic equipment and cables.
Specification
• See chapter ‘‘8.6.2 Foundation drawing” on

page 232 for the service space required with
the separator installed.
Recommendation
• The spanner for the large lock ring should

have sufficient space to make a complete
turn without touching any of the ancillary
equipment surrounding the separator.
262
593308-02
G 0 87 37 2 1
Important measurements are:
- minimum lifting height for lifting bowl parts
- shortest distance between driving motor and wall
- space for control and operation
- free passage for dismantling and assembly
- space for maintenance work
- space on floor for machine parts during maintenance
work
Lifting height for transport of bowl
Specification
• A minimum height is required to lift the bowl,

bowl parts and the bowl spindle, see
chapter ‘‘8.6.2 Foundation drawing” on page
232.
Recommendation
• When two or more separators are installed it

is recommended to plan the installation in
such a way that parts from one separator do
not have to be lifted over another separator.
263
593308-02
Space for oil changing
Specification
• The plug for gearbox oil draining must not be

blocked by floor plate arrangement, etc.
Recommendation
• It should be possible to place a portable

collecting tray under the gearbox drain plug
for changing oil.
Place the separator in such a way that makes

the oil change easy
G 0 48 42 41
264
593308-02
Connections to surrounding equipment
Specification
• If the local safety regulations prescribe that
the installation has to be inspected and
approved by responsible authorities before
the plant is put into service, consult with
such authorities before installing the
equipment and have the projected plant
approved by them.
• Ensure that all service media (compressed
air, electric power, operating, cooling and
safety liquids etc.) required for the separator
have the correct quality and capacity. In
cases where supply failure of the service
media might cause damage, automatic
supervision is recommended. This applies to
operating media for solids discharging
separators where a failure could cause
unbalance or water leakage into the
lubricating oil.
• If the starting equipment containing the main
switch is placed in such a position that it
cannot be seen from the separator, most
local safety regulations require that a
separate safety switch must be installed in
the power supply to the separator motor.
• As the separator stands on soft rubber
mountings, always design the pipe-work to
and from the separator in such a way that
there will be sufficient flexibility. Possible
vibration should not be allowed to be
transmitted via the piping.
• For specification of flexibility for feed inlet
and outlets, see ‘‘8.6.1 Basic size drawing”
on page 229.
265
593308-02
• Only motors (including necessary monitoring

equipment) specified by Alfa Laval may be
fitted to the separator. Violation of this can
cause severe damage and create a safety
risk for the personnel. Motor drives of
variable speed must not be used unless
approved by Alfa Laval and used in
combination with appropriate safety devices.
• Design the system is such a way that there is
always an open outlet for liquid from the bowl
casing drain outlet.
• If the sediment from the separator is
discharged into a tank, this tank must be
sufficiently ventilated. The connection
between the separator and the tank must be
of the size and configuration specified.
• If the solids are discharged from the
separator bowl casing into a closed system,
ensure that this system cannot be overfilled
or closed in such a way that the solids
cannot leave the bowl casing. This could
cause a hazardous situation.
266
593308-02
9.1.3 Foundations
NOTE
When lifting a separator it must always be

hung securely. See chapter ‘‘6.9 Lifting
instructions” on page 188.
Specification
• The separator should be installed at floor level, see chapter ‘‘8.6.2 Foundation
drawing” on page 232 for measures and how to pour the foundation plate in concrete.
• The separator must be installed on a strong and rigid foundation to reduce the
influence of vibrations from adjacent machinery.
At delivery the parts 1-5 are fitted on the separator.

The screw (5) is locked with Loctite 243 and tightened with 40 Nm.
Proceed in the following way when mounting the separator onto the feet of the
foundation plate (8):
a Level against the upper face of the

three holders (6). Screw the holders
to compensate for inclination, if any.
Any gap between a holder and a
foundation foot (8) must be
eliminated by adding one or more
G 0 66 70 4 1
adjusting washers (7).
b Lower the separator into the three

holders.
c Tighten the set screws (9), first by hand (or

by a hand tool, if necessary) until all of them
are in contact with the frame feet (2).
Then tighten the set screws with 100 Nm.
1. Rubber cushion
NOTE 2. Frame foot
3. Rectangular ring
Tighten the set screws before 4. Washer
mounting the bowl or cyclone. 5. Screw
6. Holder
7. Adjusting washer
d Mount the bowl and check that the frame is
8. Foot on foundation plate
horizontal by means of a level placed on the 9. Set screw
C 00 58 6F 1
outer frame rim.

Make a new adjustment if necessary
267
593308-02
9.1.4 Protection and storage of

goods
a The separator must be stored indoors at 5 -

55 °C, if not delivered in a water-resistant
box, designated for outdoor storage.
b If there is a risk for water condensation, the

equipment must stand well ventilated and at
a temperature above dew point.
The following protection products are

recommended:
1 Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 112 or equivalent) with long
lasting effective treatment for external surfaces.
The oil should prevent corrosion attacks and c If the storage time exceeds 12 months, the
leaves a waxy surface. equipment must be inspected every 6
2 Anti-rust oil (Dinitrol 40 or equivalent) is a thin months and, if necessary, the protection be
lubricant for inside protection. It gives a renewed.
lubricating transparent oil film.
3 Solvent, e.g. white spirit, to remove the anti-rust
oil after the storage period.
4 Moist remover to be packed together with the
separator equipment.
G 0 87 36 71
268
593308-02
9.1.5 Maintenance service
A work bench should be installed in the separator room.
Hot water and compressed air should be available near the work
bench to make maintenance work easier.
An overhead hoist with capacity of 300 kg is required for

transport of bowl parts to the working bench. Lifting point should
be above the centre of the separator.
NOTE
When two or more separators are installed, the

lifting height should be increased to enable
bowl parts from one separator to be lifted and
moved over an adjoining separator.
See ‘‘8.6.2 Foundation drawing” on page 232.
G08 73 8 C1
269
593308-02
9.1.6 Connections to surrounding

equipment
Local safety regulations

If the local safety regulations prescribe that the
installation has to be inspected and approved by
responsible authorities before the plant is put
into service, consult with such authorities before
installing the equipment and have the projected
G 0 8 73 91 1
plant design approved by them.
Service media
Ensure that all service media (electric power,
operating and safety liquids etc.) required for the
separator have the correct quality and capacity.
G 0 87 40 11
Sludge discharge tank
If the sediment from the separator is discharged
into a tank, this tank must be sufficiently
ventilated. The connection between the
separator and the tank must be of the size and
configuration specified.
If the solids are discharged from the separator
bowl casing into a closed system, ensure that
this system cannot be overfilled or closed in such
a way that the solids cannot leave the bowl
casing. This could cause a hazardous situation. G 0 87 4 31 1
270
593308-02
9.2 Storage at out of

operation
If the separator is out of operation for more
than 2 weeks:
1 Lift out the bowl.
2 Protect the spindle taper from corrosion by
lubricating it with oil.
3 Keep the separator and bowl well stored, dry
and protected from mechanical damage.
For details see ‘‘9.1.4 Protection and storage of
goods” on page 268
9.3 Before start-up

If the separator has been out of operation for:
6 months or longer
1 Perform an Intermediate service i i and
make sure to pre-lubricate the spindle
bearings.
2 Change the oil before starting.
18 months or longer
1 Perform an Major service M .
G 08 6 87 P1
2 Change the oil before starting.
271
593308-02
272
593308-02
Specification No. 881264-04-01/3

Book No. 593335 02 Rev. 6
.
Spare parts catalogue, Reservdelskatalog, Ersatzteilkatalog, Catalogue de piéces de rechange, Varaosaluettelo,

Catalogue de piezas de recambio, Каталог запасных частеи, Catalogo parti di ricambio, Reservedelskatalog,
Catalogo de pecas sobressalentes, Καταλογοσ ανταλλακτικων, Reserveonderdelen-catalogus
Specification No. 881264-04-01/3

Book No. 593335 02 Rev. 6
Published By:
Alfa Laval Tumba AB
SE-147 80 Tumba, Sweden
Telephone: +46 8 530 650 00

Telefax: +46 8 530 310 40
© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2011-04-26

Original instructions
This publication or any part there of may not be
reproduced or transmitted by any process or
means without prior written permission of
Alfa Laval Tumba AB.
Contents
1 Read this first 5
1.1 General information 7
1.2 Translation list 19
2 Machine bottom part 22

2.1 Driving device horizontal 24
2.2 Driving device vertical 26
3 Machine top part 28

3.1 Inspection box 30
4 Separator bowl, Purifier 32
5 Separator bowl, Concentrator 36
6 Inlet and outlet device 40
7 Cyclone complete 42
8 Monitoring kit 44
9 Parts for mounting of motor 46
10 Operating water module compact

M18 48
11 Fittings for OWMC 50
12 Set of plates 52
13 Temperature sensor kit 54
14 Temperature sensor kit 56
3
15 Set of tools 58
16 Cover interlocking kit 64
17 Service kit for foundation feet 66
18 Foundation plate 68
19 Intermediate service kit 70
20 Major service kit 72
21 OWMC service kit 74
22 Cross reference list 76
4
1 Read this first
1 Read this first
The name plate - the guide for finding the correct spare part numbers. See also Warnings
in chapter ‘‘1.1 General information” on page 7.
Maskinskylten - en guide till det rätta reservdelsnumret. Se även Varningar i kapitel “1.1
Allmän information” på sidan 8.
Das Typenschild - ein Hinweis zur korrekten Ersatzteilnummer. Siehe auch Warnhinweise
in Kapitel “1.1 Allgemeine Informationen” auf Seite 9.
La plaque de la machine - un guide pour trouver le numéro de piéce de rechange correct.
Voir à ce propos les mises en garde du chapitre “1.1 Informations générales ” en page 10.
La placa-marca de la máquina - guía del número correcto del repuesto. Consulte también
las Advertencias del capítulo “1.1 Información General” en la página 11.
Фирменная табличка машины — указатель правилного номера запасной части. См.
также предупреждения в главе “1.1 Общие сведения” на странице 12.
La targhetta della macchina - guida al corretto numero dei ricambi. Vedere anche le
Avvertenze nel capitolo “1.1 Informazioni generali” a pagina 13.
A placa do fabricante da máquina - um guia do número correto das partes sobressalentes.
Consultar também os Avisos no capítulo “Informação Geral 1.1” da página 14.
Konekilpi - opastin oikeaan varaosanumeroon. Katso myös kappaleessa 1.1 sivulla 15
olevaa kohtaa “Yleiset tiedot ”.
Η πινακίδα της μηχανής είναι ο οδηγός του σωστού ανταλλακτικού. Δείτε επίσης τις
προειδοποιήσεις του κεφαλαίου "1.1 ΓΕΝΙΚΕΣ ΠΛΗΡΟΦΟΡΙΕΣ", στη σελίδα 16.
Het gegevensplaatje - een wegwijzer naar het juiste onderdeelnummer. Zie ook
Waarschuwingen in hoofdstuk “1.1 Algemene informatie”, op blz. 17.
first Typeskiltet - en guide til det rette reservedelsnummer. Se også under Advarsler i
kapitel “1.1 Generelle oplysninger” på side 18.
5
1 Read this first
6
1.1 General information 1 Read this first
1.1 General information
Safeguard your commitment to quality by always using genuine

Alfa Laval spare parts.
Remember, Alfa Laval cannot accept responsibility for the
failure of separator equipped with non-original spare parts. We
guarantee the quality and reliability of our products.
XXXXXX
WARNING B
When changing certain parts in the separator bowl assembly,

the vibration level may increase. This can result in shorter life
time of components like rolling bearings and gears. If severe
unbalance occurs, the rotating bowl assembly can come into
contact with the frame causing damage to equipment and injuries
to personnel. It is strongly recommended that the exchange of
parts is supervised by an Alfa Laval service engineer. Alfa
Laval assumes no liability for damage to property or injury to
personnel resulting from unauthorized installation of those parts.
XXXXXX
WARNING C
Certain bowl parts carry milling marks from the balancing of the
complete separator bowl. These parts must not be replaced
without rebalancing the complete bowl. The rebalancing should
be made by an Alfa Laval service shop.
7
Följ ditt kvalitetstänkande genom att endast använda Alfa Laval

originalreservdelar.
Kom ihåg att Alfa Laval inte tar något ansvar för fel på en
separator som innehåller icke-originaldelar. Vi garanterar
kvaliteten och driftsäkerheten hos våra egna produkter.
XXXXXX
VARNING B
Om vissa delar i separatorkulan byts ut, kan vibrationsnivån

komma att öka. Detta kan i sin tur leda till förkortad livslängd
på t.ex. lager och växlar. Om kraftiga vibrationer uppstår, kan
den roterande kulan komma att slå i stativets delar, vilket kan
medföra allvarlig maskin- och personskada. Det är därför av stor
vikt att utbyte av kulans delar övervakas av en serviceingenjör
från Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval tar inget ansvar för maskin- eller
personskador som kan uppkomma på grund av att delar bytts ut
av icke auktoriserad personal.
XXXXXX
VARNING C
Vissa av separatorkulans delar har urfrästa spår som resultat

av balansering av hela kulan. Dessa delar kan inte bytas ut
utan att en ombalansering av kulan görs. För att bästa resultat
ska uppnås, ska den kompletta kulan sändas till en Alfa Laval
serviceverkstad för ombalansering.
8
Sichern Sie sich Ihren Anspruch auf Qualität durch

ausschließliche Verwendung von original Alfa Laval
Ersatzteilen.
Beachten Sie bitte, daß Alfa Laval keine Verantwortung für den
Ausfall eines Separators übernimmt, der mit Nicht-Originalteilen
ausgestattet ist. Wir garantieren für die Qualität und
Zuverlässigkeit unserer Produkte.
XXXXXX
WARNUNG B
Durch den Austausch bestimmter Teile in der Separatortrommel-

Baugruppe, kann ihr Schwingungspegel steigen. Dies
kann zu einer kürzeren Lebensdauer von Teilen, wie z.B.
Wälzlagern und Getrieben, führen. Bei einer schweren
Unwucht kann die rotierende Trommelbaugruppe in Kontakt
mit dem Gestell kommen, was zu Beschädigungen der
Ausrüstung oder Personenverletzungen führen kann. Es wird
dringend empfohlen, den Austausch von einem Alfa Laval
Service-Ingenieur beaufsichtigen zu lassen. Alfa Laval
übernimmt keine Haftung für eine Gerätebeschädigung oder
Personenverletzung aufgrund einer ungenehmigten Montage
dieser Teile.
XXXXXX
WARNUNG C
Bestimmte Trommelteile haben Fräsmarken vom Auswuchten

der kompletten Separatortrommel. Diese Teile dürfen nicht ohne
eine Neuauswuchtung der kompletten Trommel ausgetauscht
werden. Die Neuauswuchtung sollte in einer Alfa Laval
Service-werkstatt erfolgen.
9
Respectez votre engagement de qualité en utilisant toujours

des pièces de rechange d’origine Alfa Laval.
Attention, Alfa Laval décline toute responsabilité en cas de
panne d’un séparateur équipé de pièces de rechange qui ne
sont pas d’origine. Nous garantissons la qualité et la fiabilité de
nos produits.
XXXXXX
AVERTISSEMENT B
Le remplacement de certaines pièces du bol du séparateur

risque d’augmenter le niveau de vibrations, et donc de réduire la
durée de vie des composants tels que les paliers à roulements
et les engrenages. En cas de déséquilibre trop important, le
bol en rotation risque d’entrer en contact avec des pièces du
bâti, provoquant ainsi des détériorations de l’équipement et
des blessures du personnel. Nous vous incitons fortement
à faire réaliser le remplacement sous la surveillance d’un
technicien de maintenance Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval n’assume
aucune responsabilité en cas de détérioration du matériel ou de
blessure du personnel résultant d’une installation non approuvée
de ces pièces.
XXXXXX
AVERTISSEMENT C
Certaines pièces du bol présentent des marques de repérage

effectuées lors de l’équilibrage du bol du séparateur. Il ne faut
pas remplacer ces pièces sans avoir au préalable procédé à un
nouvel équilibrage de l’ensemble du bol. Cet équilibrage doit
être réalisé dans un atelier de réparation Alfa Laval.
10
Proteja su compromiso con la calidad utilizando siempre

repuestos originales Alfa Laval.
Recuerde que Alfa Laval no acepta ninguna responsabilidad
por el fallo de una separadora equipada con repuestos no
originales. Alfa Laval garantiza la calidad y la fiabilidad de sus
productos.
XXXXXX
ADVERTENCIA B
Cuando se cambian ciertas piezas del conjunto del rotor

de la separadora, puede que se produzca un aumento del
nivel de vibraciones, lo que puede provocar un desgaste de
algunos componentes, como los rodamientos de rodillos y los
engranajes. Si se produce un desequilibrado importante, el
conjunto del rotor en movimiento puede rozar con el bastidor,
causando serios daños al equipo y al personal. Se recomienda
encarecidamente que el cambio sea supervisado por un
técnico de mantenimiento de Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval no se
hace responsable de los daños materiales o daños personales
provocados por la instalación no autorizada de esas piezas.
XXXXXX
ADVERTENCIA C
Algunas piezas del rotor llevan marcas estampadas para el

equilibrado del rotor completo de la separadora. Siempre que
se cambien estas piezas se debe equilibrar de nuevo todo el
rotor, operación que debe ser realizada por un experto de un
centro de servicio Alfa Laval.
11
Для обеспечения качества работы вашего оборудования

используйте только подлинные запасные детали компании
Alfa Laval.
Помните: компания Alfa Laval не несет ответственность за
нарушения работы сепаратора, на котором установлены не
подлинные запасные детали. Мы гарантируем качество и
надежность нашей продукции.
XXXXXX
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ B
В случае замены некоторых частей устройства барабана

сепаратора может повыситься уровень вибрации.Это
может привести к сокращению срока службы компонентов,
таких как подшипники и привод. В случае значительного
дисбаланса, устройство вращающегося барабана может
войти в контакт со станиной, что приведет к серьезному
повреждению оборудования и травмам обслуживающего
персонала. Настоятельно рекомендуется, чтобы замена
была проконтролирована инженером по обслуживанию
компании Alfa Laval. Компания Аlfa Laval не несет никакой
ответственности за повреждения собственности или травмы
персонала в результате неразрешенной установки этих
деталей.
XXXXXX
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ C
На некоторых частях барабана поставлены отметки после

балансировки барабана сепаратора полностью. Эти части
не могут быть заменены без повторной балансировки всего
устройства барабана сепаратора. Повторная балансировка
должна быть произведена в ремонтном центре Alfa Laval.
12
Salvaguardate la qualità del vostro separatore utilizzando

sempre ricambi originali Alfa Laval.
Ricordate che la Alfa Laval non accetta alcuna responsabilità
in caso di difetti al separatore dovuti all’utilizzo di ricambi non
originali. La Alfa Laval garantisce la qualità e l’affidabilità
esclusivamente dei propri prodotti.
XXXXXX
AVVERTENZA B
In seguito alla sostituzione di alcune parti del tamburo del

separatore, il livello di vibrazioni può aumentare. Questo può
comportare la riduzione della vita utile di componenti quali
cuscinetti a rulli ed ingranaggi. In caso di elevato spostamento, il
tamburo può entrare a contatto con le parti del telaio provocando
seri danni all’attrezzatura e lesioni alle persone. Si raccomanda
caldamente di far controllare la sostituzione da un tecnico
di assistenza Alfa Laval. La Alfa Laval non assume alcuna
responsabilità per danni alle cose o lesioni al personale dovuti
all’installazione non autorizzata delle suddette parti.
XXXXXX
AVVERTENZA C
Alcune parti del tamburo dipendono dal bilanciamento

complessivo del tamburo del separatore. Le suddette parti
non possono essere sostituite senza procedere ad un nuovo
bilanciamento. Per ottenere i migliori risultati, rivolgersi ad un
centro assistenza Alfa Laval per il ribilanciamento dell’intero
gruppo.
13
Preserve o seu compromisso com a qualidade utilizando

sempre peças originais Alfa Laval.
Não se esqueça de que a Alfa Laval não assume quaisquer
responsabilidades pela avaria dum separador que não esteja
equipado com peças originais. Por isso, asseguramos a
garantia da qualidade e fiabilidade dos nossos produtos.
XXXXXX
AVISO B
Ao mudar determinadas peças no conjunto do rotor da

separadora, poderá provocar um aumento da vibração.
Tal poderá originar a redução do tempo de duração dos
componentes, tais como rolamentos de roletes e engrenagens.
Caso se verifique um desequilíbrio acentuado, o conjunto do
rotor giratório poderá entrar em contacto com a estrutura, vindo
a provocar danos no equipamento e ferimentos pessoais.
Recomenda-se vivamente que a substituição de peças seja
vistoriada por um técncico de serviço da Alfa Laval. A Alfa
Laval não assume qualquer responsabilidade por danos em
bens ou ferimentos pessoais resultantes da instalação não
autorizada daquelas peças.
XXXXXX
AVISO C
Determinadas partes do rotor contêm marcas de atrito do

balanceamento do rotor do separador completo. Estas peças
não devem ser substituídas sem reequilibrar o rotor completo.
O reequilibro deve ser executado por uma centro de assistência
Alfa Laval.
14
Varmista käyttämiesi tuotteiden laatu käyttämällä aina aitoja ja

alkuperäisiä Alfa Laval -varaosia.
Muista, ettei Alfa Laval voi vastata sellaisen separaattorin
toimintahäiriöstä, jossa on käytetty muita kuin alkuperäisiä
varaosia. Me takaamme omien tuotteidemme laadun ja
luotettavuuden.
XXXXXX
VAROITUS B
Kun separaattorin kuula-asennelman tiettyjä osia vaihdetaan,

sen tärinän taso voi kasvaa. Tämä voi johtaa joidenkin osien,
kuten vierintälaakereiden ja hammasvaihteiden, käyttöiän
lyhenemiseen. Jos asennelma joutuu pahasti epätasapainoon,
pyörivä kuula-asennelma voi koskettaa runkoa ja aiheuttaa
laite- ja henkilövahinkoja. Suosittelemme, että Alfa Lavalin
huoltoinsinööri valvoo vaihtoa. Alfa Laval ei ota vastuuta
omaisuudelle tai henkilökunnalle aiheutuneista vahingoista,
mikäli ne johtuvat näiden osien väärin suoritetusta asennuksesta.
XXXXXX
VAROITUS C
Tietyissä kuulan osissa on merkinnät koko separaattorikuulan

tasapainotuksesta. Näitä osia ei saa vaihtaa ilman, että koko
kuula tasapainotetaan. Tasapainotus on annettava Alfa Laval -
korjaamon hoidettavaksi.
15
Διασφαλίστε τη δέσμευσή σας για ποιότητα χρησιμοποιώντας

πάντοτε γνήσια ανταλλακτικά Alfa Laval.
Σας υπενθυμίζουμε ότι η Alfa Laval δεν αναλαμβάνει ευθύνη
για τη βλάβη διαχωριστήρα που δεν είναι εξοπλισμένος με
αυθεντικά ανταλλακτικά. Εγγυώμαστε την ποιότητα και την
αξιοπιστία των προϊόντων μας.
XXXXXX
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ B
Όταν αλλάζετε ορισμένα εξαρτήματα στο σύστημα του τυμπάνου

του διαχωριστήρα, η στάθμη κραδασμών μπορεί να αυξηθεί.
Αυτό μπορεί να έχει σαν αποτέλεσμα μικρότερη διάρκεια ζωής
των εξαρτημάτων, όπως ρουλεμάν και γρανάζια. Σε περίπτωση
σοβαρής έλλειψης ζυγοστάθμισης, το περιστρεφόμενο σύστημα
του τυμπάνου μπορεί να έλθει σε επαφή με το πλαίσιο,
προκαλώντας ζημιές στο μηχάνημα και τραυματισμό του
προσωπικού. Οι οποιεσδήποτε αλλαγές εξαρτημάτων
πρέπει να γίνονται υπό την επίβλεψη μηχανικού της Alfa
Laval. Η Alfa Laval δεν φέρει καμμία ευθύνη για υλικές ζημιές
ή για τραυματισμό του προσωπικού λόγω τοποθέτησης αυτών
των εξαρτημάτων από μη εξουσιοδοτημένα άτομα.
XXXXXX
ΠΡΟΣΟΧΗ C
Ορισμένα εξαρτήματα του τυμπάνου φέρουν ίχνη φρεζαρίσματος

από τη ζυγοστάθμιση ολόκληρου του συστήματος του
τυμπάνου του διαχωριστήρα. Αυτά τα εξαρτήματα δεν
πρέπει να αντικατασταθούν χωρίς να ξαναγίνει ζυγοστάθμιση
ολόκληρου του συστήματος του τυμπάνου του διαχωριστήρα.
Η επαναζυγοστάθμιση πρέπει να γίνει σε κάποιο από τα
επισκευαστικά κέντρα της Alfa Laval.
16
Doe geen concessies aan kwaliteit en gebruik altijd originele

Alfa Laval-reserveonderdelen.
Wij wijzen u erop, dat Alfa Laval geen verantwoordelijkheid kan
aanvaarden voor defecten aan een separator die is uitgerust
met nietoriginele reserveonderdelen. Wij garanderen de
kwaliteit en de betrouwbaarheid van onze producten.
XXXXXX
WAARSCHUWING B
Als er bepaalde onderdelen van de separatortrommel worden

vervangen, kan het trillingsniveau veranderen. Dit kan leiden
tot een verkorte levensduur van onderdelen als rollagers
en tandwielen. Als er sprake is van een ernstige mate van
onbalans, kan de roterende trommel in contact komen met het
frame, wat kan leiden tot ernstige schade aan goederen of tot
persoonlijk letsel. Het is dan ook ten sterkste aan te raden
om onderdelen te laten vervangen onder supervisie van een
onderhoudstechnicus van Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval aanvaardt
geen enkele aansprakelijkheid voor schade aan goederen of
persoonlijk letsel als gevolg van onoordeelkundige installatie
van die onderdelen.
XXXXXX
WAARSCHUWING C
Op bepaalde onderdelen van de trommel zitten freesmarkeringen

van het uitbalanceren van de gehele separatortrommel. Deze
onderdelen mogen niet worden vervangen zonder dat de
gehele trommel opnieuw wordt uitgebalanceerd. Het opnieuw
uitbalanceren moet gebeuren in een onderhoudswerkplaats van
Alfa Laval.
17
Beskyt din investering i kvalitet ved altid at anvende originale

reservedele fra Alfa Laval.
Husk at Alfa Laval påtager sig intet ansvar for fejl i separatorer,
der er udstyret med uoriginale reservedele. Vi indestår for vore
produkters kvalitet og driftssikkerhed.
XXXXXX
ADVARSEL B
Ved udskiftning af visse dele i separatorkuglen, kan

vibrationsniveauet blive forøget. Dette kan forkorte levetiden for
komponenter som kuglelejer og tandhjul. I tilfælde af kraftige
vibrationer kan den roterende separatorkugle komme i kontakt
med rammedele, hvilket kan medføre alvorlig beskadigelse
af udstyr og personskade. Det anbefales på det kraftigste,
at udskiftningen sker under tilsyn af en servicetekniker fra
Alfa Laval. Alfa Laval påtager sig intet ansvar for ting- eller
personskade som følge af ikke-autoriseret montering af disse
dele.
XXXXXX
ADVARSEL C
Visse kugledele er forsynet med mærker fra afbalanceringen af

den samlede separatorkugle. Ved udskiftning af disse dele skal
der foretages en ny afbalancering af den samlede kugleenhed.
Afbalanceringen bør foretages af et Alfa Laval-servicecenter.
18
1.2 Translation list 1 Read this first
1.2 Translation list
Översättningslista
Übersetzungsliste
Liste de traduction
Lista de traducciones
Part no. Reservdelsnummer Teil-Nr. Numéro de pièce Pieza No.
Qty Antal Anzahl Quantité Cantidad
Description Benämning Bezeichnung Dénomination Descripción
Notes Anmärkningar Anmerkungen Remarques Notas
Machine type Maskintyp Maschinentyp Type de machine Tipo de máquina
Product no. Produktnr Produktnummer Numéro de produit Número de producto
Machine unit description Maskinblocksbenämning Bezeichnung des Dénomination de partie Descripción de sección de
Maschinenblocks de machine la máquina
Machine unit no. Maskinblocksnr Maschinenblock Nr. Partie de machine nº No. de sección de
máquina
Subassembly description Undergruppsbenämning Bezeichung der Dénomination de Descripción de

Untergruppe sous-ensemble subconjunto
Subassembly no. Undergruppsnr Untergruppe Nr. Nº de sous-ensemble Número de subconjunto
See page Se sidan Siehe Seite Vòir page Véase la página
Fig. ref. Figurhänvisning Bildhinweise Réf. de fig. Referencia de figura
Product name Produktnamn Produktname Nom du produit Nombre del producto
Exchange necessitates Utbyte nödvändiggör Austausch erfordert Le remplacement El racmbio requiere el

rebalancing of bowl ombalansering av kulan Wiederauswuchtung der nécessite le rééquilibrage reequilibrado del rotor
Trommel du bol
See separate spare parts Se separat reservdelslista Siehe separate Voir liste séparée des Véase la lista de piezas
list Ersatzteilliste pièces de rechange separada
Not delivered as spare Levereras ej som Nicht als Ersatzteil Non livré comme piéce de No se entrega como pieza
part reservdel geliefert rechange de recambio
19
Словарь перевда
Lista traduzioni
Lista para tradução
Käännösluttelo
Part no. Деталь № Nr. parte Numero de peca Varaosanumero
Qty Кол—во Quantita Quantidade Lukumäärä
Description Наименование Descrizione Descricao Nimitys
Notes Примечания Note Notas Huomautuksia
Machine type Машина тнпа Tipo macchina Tipo de maquina Konetyyppi
Product no. Артикул № Nr.prodotto No. do produto Tuotteen no
Machine unit description Наименование блока Descrizione unita Descricao da unidade da Koneenosan nimitys
машины macchina maquina
Machine unit no. Блок машины № Nr. unita macchina Numero de unidade da Koneenosan no
maquina
Subassembly description Наименование группы Descrizione sottogruppo Descriao do subconjunto Alaryhmän nimitys
Subassembly no. Группа № Nr. sottogruppo Número de subconjunto Alaryhmän no
See page См. страницу Vedi pagina Véase la página Ks sivu
Fig. ref. Ссылка на зскиз Rif. fig. Referencia de figura Kuvaviite
Product name Наименование артикула Nome prodotto Nombre del producto Tuotteen nimi
Exchange necessitates Замена требует La sostituzione comporta El racmbio requiere el Vaihdettaessa kuula
rebalancing of bowl балансировки барабана la equilibratura del reequilibrado del rotor tasapainoitettava
tamburo uudelleen
See separate spare parts См. отдельный перечень Vedi lista separata delle Véase la lista de piezas Katso erillistä
list запасных частей parti di ricambio separada varaosaluetteloa
Not delivered as spare Не поставлена вместе с Non fornito come parte di No se entrega como pieza Ei toimiteta varaosana
part запасными частями ricambio de recambio
20
1.2 Translation list 1 Read this first
ΓΛΩΣΣΑΡΙ
Vertaallijst
Oversættelseliste
Part no. Λριθμός ανταλλακτικού Onderdeelnr. Reservedelsnummer
Qty Σύνολο Hoeveelheid Antal
Description Περιγραφή Beschrijving Betegnelse
Notes Παρατηρήσεις Opmerkingen Bemaerkninger
Machine type Τύπος μηχανήματος Machinetype Maskintype
Product no. Αριθμός προϊόντος Produktnr. Produktnr.
Machine unit description Περιγραφή συγκροτήματος Machineblokbenaming Maskinbetegnelse

μηχανής
Machine unit no. Αριθμός συγκροτήματος Machineblokbenamning Maskinnr.

μηχανής
Subassembly description Περιγραφή υποσυγκροτήματος Subgroepbenamning Undergruppsbetegnelse
Subassembly no. Αριθμός υποσυγκροτήματος Subgroepnr. Undergruppenr.
See page Βλέπε σελίδα Zie blz. Se side
Fig. ref. Παραπομπή σε εικόνα Afb. ref. Figurhenvisning
Product name Ονομασία προϊόντος Produktnaam Produktnavn
Exchange necessitates Ανταλλαγή απαιτεί Vervangning vereist Udskriftning kraever

rebalancing of bowl επαναρρύθμιση ισορροπίας herbalanceren van de kogel afbalcering af kuglen
του τύμπανου
See separate spare parts list Βλέπε ειδική λίστα Vervangning vereist van de Se spaat reservedelsliste
ανταλλακτικών kogel
Not delivered as spare part Δεν παραδίδεται ως Niet geleverd als Levereres ikke som reservedel
ανταλλακτικό reserveonderdeel
21
2 Machine bottom part

Machine unit number or
Subassembly description
574125-
Ref Part No Description -03 Notes
Quantity
1 585415 80 Frame bottom part 1
2 574143 05 Driving device horizontal 1 See page 24
3 585899 80 Driving device vertical 1 See page 26
4 526189 01 Drain screw 1
5 223316 05 Rectangular ring 1
6 523215 02 Fixing plate 1
7 37167 Rectangular ring 1
8 38685 Glass disc 1
9 528723 01 Gasket 1
10 221131 08 Screw 3
12 579926 81 Tube coil 1
14 223101 37 Washer 2
15 221803 40 Nut 2
16 574111 80 Bearing shield 1
16A 223406 36 O-ring 1
16B 554216 02 Corrugated shim 1
17 43626 Gasket 1
18 223101 61 Washer 8
19 221041 01 Screw 8
22 221041 20 Screw 2
23 574112 01 Protecting cover 1
24 528732 01 Gasket 1
25 221041 20 Screw 6
25.1 223101 61 Washer 6
26 578048 01 Protecting cover 1
27 528732 01 Gasket 1
28 221041 20 Screw 3
28.1 223101 61 Washer 3
36 587391 01 Holder 1
37 221041 26 Screw 2
22
2 Machine bottom part
28.1
,25.1
12
1554N
23
2.1 Driving device horizontal

574143-
Quantity
1 546198 53 O-ring 1
2 223521 98 Seal ring 1
3 546424 02 Worm wheel shaft 1
4 581488 01 Bearing housing 1
5 541985 01 Round nut 1
6 67478 Round nut 1
7 233211 94 Ball bearing 1
8 581491 01 Lock ring 1
9 566867 81 Worm wheel 1
9A 545705 02 Nave 1
9B 545704 01 Buffer 6
9C 545703 01 Sleeve 6
9D 566644 01 Ring 1
9E 221035 61 Hexagon head screw 6
9F 566860 03 Gear rim 1
10 8379 Ball bearing 1
11 260001 39 Screw 1
12 223107 28 Spring washer 1
13 541991 01 Washer 1
14 223610 32 Flat key 1
15 60571 Elastic plate 3
16 566031 80 Coupling pulley 1
17 541988 01 Clamp element 1
17A 221035 61 Hexagon head screw 12 pcs
24
2.1 Driving device horizontal 2 Machine bottom part
4
5 1
16 2
11 12 13
15
14
8
7
6
9E
9D
9B 9C 10
9A 9
9F
17 17A
0087G
25
2.2 Driving device vertical

585899-
Quantity
1 576468 01 Bottom bearing housing 1
1.1 260168 89 O-ring 1
2 38411 O-ring 1
3 221041 01 Screw 6
4 573973 01 Bowl spindle 1
5 548747 04 Ball bearing 1
6 542548 02 Ball bearing holder 1
7 542633 04 Rubber buffer 1
8 260083 44 Compression spring 12
9 549505 01 Top bearing support 1
10 542510 02 Oil fan 1
11 573128 01 Ball bearing holder 1
12 542633 04 Rubber buffer 1
13 572302 02 Top bearing cover 1
15 221716 04 Screw 3
16 544242 07 Worm 1
17 545636 01 Support washer 1
18 548744 01 Self-align roller bearing 1
19 542547 01 Spacing washer 1
20 221726 06 Screw 6
21 543056 02 Protecting collar 1
22 572301 01 Protecting cap 1
23 223402 17 O-ring 1
24 221036 19 Screw 6
25 223412 16 O-ring 1
26 574919 01 Protecting plate 1
27 260254 02 Screw 3
28 260104 21 O-ring 1
30 38706 Lock washer 1
31 67474 Round nut 1
32 585886 01 Guide ring 1
26
2.2 Driving device vertical 2 Machine bottom part
27
26
25
21 24 12
32
11
5
22
6
23 8
20 7
28 9
13 15
10
16
17
18
19
30
4 31
2
1.1
3
2015L
27
3 Machine top part

594281-
Quantity
1 588550 80 Frame top part 1
2 221731 18 Screw 6
3 578430 01 Flat gasket 3
3.1 578430 02 Distance ring 1
3.2 578430 03 Distance ring 1
4 586167 01 Distributing cover 1
5 223101 33 Washer 6
6 221036 20 Screw 6
7 573334 01 Gasket 1
8 586034 02 Nozzle holder 1
9 221031 29 Screw 2
10 579462 01 Nozzle 1
11 526350 03 Plug 1
12 578415 01 Control paring disc 1
13 521121 45 O-ring 3
14 565274 02 Seal strip 1
16 588112 01 Frame hood 1
17 223101 37 Washer 12
18 2210463 03 Screw 12
19 586027 80 Drainpipe 1
21 548175 81 Inspection box 1 See page 30
22 260121 11 Cylindrical pin 2
23 223101 61 Washer 2
24 221041 01 Screw 2
25 221803 29 Nut 2
26 221726 08 Screw 2
27 526350 03 Plug 1
28 526350 03 Plug 1
29 526350 03 Plug 1
28
3 Machine top part
29
18
17
16
10
12
27 13
9
8
7 6
5
3
3.1
3.2
24
14
28
23
21
1
22
25
20
26
2299B
19
26
29
3.1 Inspection box

548175-
Quantity
1 548172 01 Inspection box 1
3 534083 01 Glass tube 1
4 548406 80 Holder 1
5 221716 16 Screw 3
6 548173 01 Clamp ring 1
7 221711 23 Screw 4
9 71162 Seal ring 1
10 546113 81 Hose liner 1
11 190618 Coupling nut 1
12 548426 80 Lamp holder 1
12A 548426 01 Lamp socket 1
12B 221116 01 Screw 2
13 519761 12 Bulb 1
14 221121 46 Screw 3
30
3.1 Inspection box 3 Machine top part
0333C
31
4 Separator bowl, Purifier

587833-
Ref Part No Description -01 -02 Notes
Quantity
Caulk 0,8 mm ↓
Caulk 0.5 mm ↓
1 585306 82 Bowl body 1 1 C
1.1 548586 02 Wear protection 12 12
2 525643 27 Rectangular ring 1 1
3 573012 02 Operating slide 1 1
4 574139 02 Nozzle Ø 4,5 mm 1 1
5 537864 06 Valve plug 3 3
6 586107 01 Operating ring 1 1
9 548115 10 O-ring 1 1
10 578425 03 Screw 3 3
11 555170 89 Sliding bowl bottom 1 1
11A 573016 04 Sliding bowl bottom 1 1
11B 573444 02 Liner 1 1
11C 546095 52 O-ring 1 1
11D 546198 65 O-ring 1 1
11E 554981 02 Threaded clamp ring 1 1
13 521121 51 O-ring 1 1
14 573019 80 Distributing cone 1 1 B
14A 573019 02 Distributing cone 1 1
14B 72112 Cylindrical pin 3 3
15 555022 04 Centre screw 1 1
16 546198 60 O-ring 1 1
17 587839 80 Distributor 1 1 B
18 573933 01 Insert 1 1
18.1 564044 28 O-ring 1 1
19 221716 16 Screw 3 3
20 541453 04 Usit-ring 3 3
21 588686 80 Bottom disc 1
21 588686 82 Bottom disc 1
22 588686 81 Bowl disc 55
22 588686 83 Bowl disc 75
22.1 588686 81 Bowl disc 55
22.1 588686 83 Bowl disc 75
22.2 588686 81 Bowl disc 3
22.2 588686 83 Bowl disc 3
23 587841 80 Wing insert 1 1
24 588100 80 Bowl hood with neck 1 1 C
25 71440 Seal ring 1 1
26 223402 79 O-ring 1 1
27 223402 81 O-ring 1 1
28 573014 02 Lock ring 1 1 B
29 564044 89 O-ring 1 1
30 587835 01 Paring chamber low. 1 1
31 574504 01 Lock ring 1 1
32 587838 01 Top disc 1 1 B
34 588734 01 Paring chambe lower 1 1
35 546095 50 O-ring 1 1
32
31
30 18
39
36 18.1
34
29 47; 47.1; 47.2; 47.3; 47.4 15
38
16
28
14
37 14B 14A
11D
27 11C
11E
11B 11
24
12
26
11A
25
1.1
35
13
10
32
1
22.1
22.2
2
23 5
3
22 4
7
41 8
9
21 42
19
20 6
45
46
17 44
43
2132N
33

587833-
Ref Part No Description -01 -02 Notes
Quantity
Caulk 0,8 mm ↓
Caulk 0.5 mm ↓
36 68011 O-ring 1 1
37 223406 10 O-ring 1 1
38 517774 02 Gasket 1 1
39 68011 O-ring 1 1
41 521121 48 O-ring 1 1
42 578425 02 Screw 3 3
43 578292 01 Hydraulic ring 1 1
44 580750 02 O-ring 3 3
45 548115 08 O-ring 1 1
46 548115 09 O-ring 1 1
47 548369 02 Gravity disc Ø107 mm 1 1
47.1 548369 03 Gravity disc Ø111 mm 1 1
47.2 548369 04 Gravity disc Ø115 mm 1 1
47.3 548369 05 Gravity disc Ø119 mm 1 1
47.4 548369 10 Gravity disc Ø101 mm 1 1
34
31
30 18
39
36 18.1
34
29 47; 47.1; 47.2; 47.3; 47.4 15
38
16
28
14
37 14B 14A
11D
27 11C
11E
11B 11
24
12
26
11A
25
1.1
35
13
10
32
1
22.1
22.2
2
23 5
3
22 4
7
41 8
9
21 42
19
20 6
45
46
17 44
43
2132N
35
5 Separator bowl, Concentrator

587834-
Ref Part No Description -01 -02 -03 -04 Notes
Quantity
Dia 17/155 caulk 0,5 mm ↓
1 585306 82 Bowl body 1 1 1 1 C
1.1 548586 02 Wear protection 12 12 12 12
2 525643 27 Rectangular ring 1 1 1 1
3 573012 02 Operating slide 1 1 1 1
4 574139 02 Nozzle Ø 4,5 mm 1 1 1 1
5 537864 06 Valve plug 3 3 3 3
6 586107 01 Operating ring 1 1 1 1
9 548115 10 O-ring 1 1 1 1
10 578425 03 Screw 3 3 3 3
11 555170 89 Sliding bowl bottom 1 1 1 1
11A 573016 04 Sliding bowl bottom 1 1 1 1
11B 573444 02 Liner 1 1 1 1
11C 546095 52 O-ring 1 1 1 1
11D 546198 65 O-ring 1 1 1 1
11E 554981 02 Threaded clamp ring 1 1 1 1
13 521121 51 O-ring 1 1 1 1
14 587844 80 distributing cone 1 1 1 1 B
14A 587844 01 Distributing cone 1 1 1 1
14B 72112 Cylindrical pin 3 3 3 3
15 555022 04 Centre screw 1 1 1 1
16 546198 60 O-ring 1 1 1 1
17 587840 80 Distributor 1 1 B
17 587840 81 Distributor complete 1 1 B
18 573933 01 Insert 1 1 1 1
18.1 564044 28 O-ring 1 1 1 1
19 221716 16 Screw 3 3 3 3
20 541453 04 Usit-ring 3 3 3 3
21 587849 80 Bottom disc 1
21 587849 82 Bottom disc 1
21 587849 84 Bottom disc 1
21 587849 86 Bottom disc 1
22 587849 81 Bowl disc 75
22 587849 83 Bowl disc 68
22 587849 85 Bowl disc 68
22 587849 87 Bowl disc 34
22.1 587849 81 Bowl disc 75
22.1 587849 83 Bowl disc 68
22.1 587849 85 Bowl disc 68
22.1 587849 87 Bowl disc 34
22.2 587849 81 Bowl disc 3
22.2 587849 83 Bowl disc 3
22.2 587849 85 Bowl disc 3
22.2 587849 87 Bowl disc 3
23 587842 80 Wing insert 1 1 1 1
36
31
30 18
39
36 18.1
34
29 47; 47.1; 47.2; 47.3; 47.4 15
38
16
28
14
14A
37 14B
11D
27 11C
11E
11B 11
24
12
26
11
11A
25
1.1
35
13
10
32
1
22.1
22.2
2
23 5
3
22 4
7
41 8
9
21 42
19
20 6
45
46
17 44
43
2132O
37

587834-
Ref Part No Description -01 -02 -03 -04 Notes
Quantity
24 588100 80 Bowl hood with neck 1 1 1 1 C
25 71440 Seal ring 1 1 1 1
26 223402 79 O-ring 1 1 1 1
27 223402 81 O-ring 1 1 1 1
28 573014 02 Lock ring 1 1 1 1 B
29 564044 89 O-ring 1 1 1 1
30 587835 01 Paring chamber low. 1 1 1 1
31 574504 01 Lock ring 1 1 1 1
32 587838 01 Top disc 1 1 1 1 B
34 588734 01 Paring chambe lower 1 1 1 1
35 546095 50 O-ring 1 1 1 1
36 68011 O-ring 1 1 1 1
37 223406 10 O-ring 1 1 1 1
38 517774 02 Gasket 1 1 1 1
39 68011 O-ring 1 1 1 1
41 521121 48 O-ring 1 1 1 1
42 578425 02 Screw 3 3 3 3
43 578292 01 Hydraulic ring 1 1 1 1
44 580750 02 O-ring 3 3 3 3
45 548115 08 O-ring 1 1 1 1
46 548115 09 O-ring 1 1 1 1
47 548369 02 Gravity disc Ø107 mm 1 1 1 1
47.1 548369 03 Gravity disc Ø111 mm 1 1 1 1
47.2 548369 04 Gravity disc Ø115 mm 1 1 1 1
47.3 548369 05 Gravity disc Ø119 mm 1 1 1 1
47.4 548369 10 Gravity disc Ø101 mm 1 1 1 1
38
31
30 18
39
36 18.1
34
29 47; 47.1; 47.2; 47.3; 47.4 15
38
16
28
14
14A
37 14B
11D
27 11C
11E
11B 11
24
12
26
11
11A
25
1.1
35
13
10
32
1
22.1
22.2
2
23 5
3
22 4
7
41 8
9
21 42
19
20 6
45
46
17 44
43
2132O
39
6 Inlet and outlet device

593917-
Quantity
1 588371 80 Discharge cover 1
2 588225 01 Inlet pipe with paring disc 1
3 564044 26 O-ring 1
4 546198 47 O-ring 1
6 526350 01 Plug 1
7 546198 48 O-ring 1
8 576660 80 Nut 1
9 574251 04 Gasket 1
10 576658 80 Inlet bend 1
12 221131 04 Screw 4
13 585670 01 Ring 1
14 221046 22 Screw 4
15 574251 07 Gasket 2
16 574254 07 DIN liner 2
17 574204 04 DIN nut 2
18 585673 01 Height adjusting ring 5
40
6 Inlet and outlet device
15 16
10
17
9 6
8
15 16
14
17
1
3
7
4
2
12
13
18
2122D
41
7 Cyclone complete
585719-
Quantity
1 575978 82 Cyclone 1
14 540579 05 Gasket 1
15 221046 09 Screw 8
16 221891 16 Lock nut 8
42
7 Cyclone complete
16
14
15
2184B
43
8 Monitoring kit
585124-
Quantity
1 585164 80 Junction box 1
2 221121 08 Screw 2
3 552042 01 Inductive sensor 1
4 567112 01 Vibration sensor 1
5 569089 01 Pressure transmitter 1
6 568592 26 Cable 1
7 554627 01 Shrinking tubing 1
8 556416 04 Protective tube 1
9 552869 94 Tube clip 2
10 221126 51 Screw 2
12 582821 01 Stopping plug 1
15 552618 04 RYW-clip double 3
16 221121 15 Screw 3
44
8 Monitoring kit
C G
F F
B 45
1
2
15
16 4
A-A B
5
6
7
8
9;10
A A E
12
C
F-F
G
2228I
45
9 Parts for mounting of motor

573180-
Quantity
2 785332 02 Adjusting washer 18
3 528729 02 Holder 3
4 221731 11 Screw 9
5 526186 02 Frame foot 3
6 528738 02 Rubber cushion 3
8 260001 21 Screw 3
9 223142 04 Washer 3
10 572427 80 Coupling drum 1
10A 221581 69 Stop screw 1
11 572455 01 Motor adapter 1
12 221726 05 Screw 6
13 260176 01 Stud bolt 4
14 70490 Washer 4
15 221803 34 Nut 4
46
9 Parts for mounting of motor
0590D
47
10 Operating water module compact M18

566264-
Quantity
1 559867 02 Air tank 1
2 544311 10 O-ring 1
3 559869 01 Valve body 1
4 544311 11 O-ring 4
5 559856 01 Valve spindle 1
6 559855 01 Spring guide 2
7 559866 01 Compression spring 2
8 559854 01 Spacing 2
9 221711 24 Screw 2
10 544311 09 O-ring 2
11 559858 01 Valve cup 2
12 221706 24 Screw 4
13 544311 08 O-ring 6
14 559868 01 Valve connection 1
15 559892 10 Sealing washer 2
16 559892 09 Hexagon socket head screw 2
17 223406 32 O-ring 1
18 223406 43 O-ring 1
19 559863 80 Cylinder cover 1
20 559891 01 Locking wire 2
21 559892 08 Nut 1
22 559857 01 Needle 1
23 558710 01 Nipple 3
24 558926 01 Silencer 1
25 559870 01 End protection 1
26 559864 01 Cylinder 1
27 546198 76 O-ring 1
28 559865 01 Outlet 1
29 559892 07 Nut 2
30 559892 01 Turcon variseal "m" 1
31 559861 01 Piston 1
32 559892 03 Turcon aq-seal 1
33 559892 02 Turcite slydring 1
34 559862 01 2 pulse adapter 1
35 221711 07 Screw 1
36 559892 04 Nozzle Ø 4,0 mm 1
37 223406 42 O-ring 1
38 559892 06 Garter strap 1
39 559892 05 Nozzle Ø 4,2 mm 1
40 544311 07 O-ring 1
41 566261 80 Bracket 1
42 221803 28 Nut 4
43 223406 29 O-ring 1
48
10 Operating water module compact M18
1534G
49
11 Fittings for OWMC

585394-
Quantity
1 585395 01 Tube connection 1
3 563433 05 Seal ring 2
4 563417 02 Clamp ring 2
5 585396 80 Elbow connection 1
6 585397 80 Pipe 1
7 221721 13 Screw 2
50
11 Fittings for OWMC
4
5 3 1 2
4
7 6 3
0782A
51
12 Set of plates
571098-
Quantity
3 1270019 Set of safety labels 1
4 956264 13 Name sign 1
5 52406 Plate with arrow 1
6 66169 Drive screw 2
7 585933 02 Frequency sign 50 Hz 1
8 1270001 Lifting instruction 1
9 554214 02 Cable tie 1
11 566453 04 Hot surface sign 1
52
12 Set of plates
1 2 3,3A-S
! WA R N I N G
Read the instruction

manuals before
installation, operation and If excessive vibration
maintenance. Consider occurs, stop separator and Separator must stop
inspection intervals. keep bowl filled with liquid rotating before any
during rundown. dismantling work is
started.
Failure to strictly follow Out of balance vibration will
instructions can lead to fatal become worse if bowl is not
injury. full.
1270018-02-V5
4 5 6
7 8 9
! WA R N I N G
Designed for:
Motor speed 1500 rpm
Motor connection frequency 50 Hz
See instruction manual!
1. 2.
Art.No.585933-02 Rev.0 GB FR
Read instruction manual before lifting. Lire le manuel dínstructions avant de lever le
séparateur.
DE
SE
Vor dem Heben immer erst Anleitungen im Hand-
buch lesen! Läs instruktionsboken före lyft.
11 IT
Prima di sollevare il separatore, leggere il ma-

NL
Vordat het produkt wordt opgetild, eerst de in-
nuale dístruzione. structihandleiding lezen.
ES PT
Leia o manual de instruções antes de uma

Lea el manual de instrucciones antes de levantar operaçõo de elevaçõo.
la separadora.
RU JP
a Ä qe hlpqoriuh lm.
Oeoednmdyekmk nomvhq
FI GR
Lue käyttöohjeet ennen nostamista. Diabaste to egceiridio me tiz odhgiez protou
Bgalete th suskeuh apo to kibwtio.
DK
Læsinstruktionsmanualen, inden separatoren

løftes op.
Art. No. 1270001 Rev. 2
2118N
53
13 Temperature sensor kit

585124-
Quantity
11 573679 80 Temperature sensor 1
12 555603 11 Cable gland brass 1
14 53500487 15 Cable gland M12 (3-6mm) 1
54
14; 46
13
11
12
2228E
55

585124-
Quantity
17 564433 01 Temperature sensor 1
18 567509 01 Spacing sleeve 1
19 552870 40 Tube gland, angle 90 deg. 1
20 53500487 15 Cable gland M12 (3-6mm) 1
56
20; 47
17
19
34
18
2228D
57
15 Set of tools
573039-
Quantity
1 544302 02 Puller 1 Worm wheel, worm
2 544265 02 Puller 1 Ball bearing worm wheel shaft
3 543553 80 Dismounting tool 1 Brake pulley
4 543551 01 Ring 1 Dismounting ball bearing
5 544261 01 Ring 1 Mounting worm wheel shaft
6 543550 01 Ring 1 Mounting ball bearing
7 531296 81 Driving-off tool 1 Top bearing
10 544690 01 Tube 1 Mounting top bearing
11 544702 01 Sleeve 1 Dismounting top bearing
13 260001 43 Screw 1
14 537441 01 Washer 1 Dismounting brake pulley
15 537707 80 Pin spanner 1 Oil fan
17 543552 01 Mounting tool 1 Rigid ball bearing
18 546547 01 Screw 2 Bearing shield
20 549435 80 Spanner for lock ring 1 Large lock ring
20A 221046 29 Screw 1
21 260154 05 Lifting eye bolt 2 Large lock ring
22 549701 81 Mounting tool 1 Wear protection
23 585819 80 Lifting tool 1 Bowl body
58
15 Set of tools
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 13
14 15 17
18 20 21
A
22 23 24
2021D
59

573039-
Quantity
33 260154 01 Lifting eye bolt 2 Frame hood, operating slide
35 573584 80 Lifting eye 2 Distributing cover
37 71194 Driving-out pin 1 Sealing ring
43 72244 Extension rod 240-255 mm 1
44 75420 Socket 13 mm (1/2") 1
45 527353 04 Socket 17 mm (1/2") 1
46 527353 16 Socket 19 mm (1/2") 1
47 527353 09 Socket 30 mm (1/2") 1
48 66415 Hexagon socket head key 1
49 260164 03 Hexagon socket 8 mm (1/2") 1
51 528905 07 Ring spanner 19 mm, 22 mm 1
52 539030 03 Torque wrench 1
53 72243 T-handle 1
54 64324 Tin hammer 1
60
15 Set of tools
26 30 31
32 33 34
35 37 42
43 44 45
46 47 48
49 50 51
52 53 54
2021E
61

573039-
Quantity
55 69696 Hook spanner 1 Coupling nut
58 545529 80 Pin spanner 1 Lock ring horizontal device
67 553188 02 Lifting eye 3 Separator
68 2210463 34 Screw 3 Separator
69 553260 80 Lifting eye 1 Spindle (top)
70 545578 81 Lifting tool 1 For distributor
71 572874 80 Lifting tool 1 Sliding bowl bottom
72 555591 82 Spanner for lock ring 1 Lock ring small
74 556523 80 Lifting tool 1 Bowl hood
75 543135 33 Compression tool, bowl 1 See separate IB/ 1270369-02
76 260154 02 Lifting eye bolt 4 Machine bottom part
77 521196 16 Tubular socket 36 mm 1
78 260154 03 Lifting eye bolt 1 Distributing cone
81 527353 03 Socket 14 mm (1/2") 1
82 555016 80 Spanner for clamp ring 1
83 544288 01 Tube 1
84 537446 01 Belt pipe wrench 1
62
15 Set of tools
55 67
58
69 71
68
70 72 73
74 76 75
77 78
79 80 81
82 83 84
2021W
63
16 Cover interlocking kit

585124-
Quantity
23 552869 94 Tube clip 3
24 552957 01 Stud 2
25 221803 26 Nut 2
26 221126 51 Screw 1
27 553261 03 Switch actuator 1
28 221126 56 Screw 2
29 551337 01 Limit switch 1
30 221121 15 Screw 2
33 53500487 15 Cable gland M12 (3-6mm) 1
50 552870 95 Cable and tube gland 1
64
16 Cover interlocking kit
C G
26
23
F F
25
24 B
33; 48
23
A-A B
A A E
27
28
30
32 31 50 29 C
F-F
G
2228K
65
17 Service kit for foundation feet

553048-
Quantity
1 221731 11 Screw 9
2 528738 02 Rubber cushion 3
4 260001 21 Screw 3
66
17 Service kit for foundation feet
781C
67
18 Foundation plate
543688-
Quantity
1 543687 01 Foundation plate 1
2 542059 02 Foundation bolt 3
68
18 Foundation plate
2044A
69
19 Intermediate service kit

589732-
Quantity
1 525643 27 Rectangular ring 1 Bowl body/ Operating slide
2 525643 46 Rectangular ring 1 Operating ring/ Operating slide
3 525643 45 Rectangular ring 1 Operating ring/ Operating slide
4 548115 10 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Operating ring
6 521121 51 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Sliding bowl bottom
7 546198 60 O-ring 1 Distributing cone/ Centre screw
8 546198 47 O-ring 1 Inlet pipe with paring disc
9 546095 52 O-ring 1 Sliding bowl bottom/ Thread clamp ring
10 71440 Seal ring 1 Bowl hood/ Sliding bowl bottom
11 223402 79 O-ring 1 Bowl hood/ Bowl body
12 223402 81 O-ring 1 Bowl hood/ Lock ring
13 546198 65 O-ring 1 Sliding bowl bottom/ Thread clamp ring
14 564044 28 O-ring 1 Paring chamber cover/ Wing insert
15 564044 89 O-ring 1 Bowl hood/ Paring chamber cover
22 546198 48 O-ring 1 Inlet pipe with paring disc
23 574251 04 Gasket 1 Inlet pipe/ Inlet bend
24 574251 07 Gasket 2 DIN liner/ Inlet bend
26 564044 26 O-ring 1 Discharge cover
27 541453 04 Usit-ring 3 Distributor/ Screw
28 537864 06 Valve plug 3 Bowl body/ Operating slide
29 223316 05 Rectangular ring 1 Drain screw/ Frame bottom part
30 521121 48 O-ring 1 Bowl body/ Operating ring
31 580750 02 O-ring 3 Operating ring/ Hydraulic ring
34 521121 45 O-ring 3 Control paring disc/ Distributing cover
35 546095 50 O-ring 1 Neck/Top disc
36 68011 O-ring 2 Paring chamber/Paring chamber lower
part
37 223406 10 O-ring 1 Neck/Paring chamber lower part
38 517774 02 Gasket 1 Paring chamber/Gravity disc
50 554336 01 Lubricating paste 1
51 539474 03 Silicone grease 1
70
19 Intermediate service kit
780A
71
20 Major service kit

548751-
Quantity
1 223316 05 Rectangular ring 1 Frame bottom part/ Drain screw
2 37167 Rectangular ring 1 Glass disc/ Fixing plate
3 546229 08 Rectangular ring 2 Cooling coil/ Bearing shield
4 528732 01 Gasket 1 Frame bottom part/ Protecting cover
5 43626 Gasket 1 Frame bottom part/ Bearing shield
6 528732 01 Gasket 1 Frame bottom part/ Protecting cover
7 38685 Glass disc 1 Seal ring/ Seal ring
8 260168 89 O-ring 1 Bottom bearing housing/ Roller bearing
9 38411 O-ring 1 Bottom bearing housing
10 548747 04 Ball bearing 1 Bowl spindle/ Ball bearing holder
11 542633 04 Rubber buffer 1 Ball bearing holder/ Top bearing support
12 542633 04 Rubber buffer 1 Ball bearing holder/ Top bearing cover
13 548744 01 Self-align roller bearing 1 Bowl spindle/ Bottom bearing housing
14 223402 17 O-ring 1 Protecting cap
15 223412 16 O-ring 1 Bowl spindle/ Protecting collar
16 260104 21 O-ring 1 Top bearing cover/ Protecting cap
17 223406 36 O-ring 1 Bearing shield
18 554216 02 Corrugated shim 1 Bearing shield
19 223406 25 O-ring 1 Frame top part/ Frame hood
20 573334 01 Gasket 1 Distributing cover
21 38706 Lock washer 1 Round nut/ Spacing washer
22 233211 94 Ball bearing 1 Bearing housing/ Worm wheel shaft
23 8379 Ball bearing 1 Worm wheel shaft/ Bearing shield
24 565274 02 Seal strip 1 Frame top part/ Frame hood
25 528723 01 Gasket 1 Frame bottom part/ Glass disc
26 578430 01 Flat gasket 3 Frame top part/ Distributing cover
27 540579 01 Gasket 1 Frame top part/ Cyclone
28 574251 09 Gasket 1 Cyclone/ Coupling nut
29 190601 Rectangular ring 1 Fittings for OWM
30 223521 98 Seal ring 1 Worm wheel shaft/ Bearing housing
32 573255 17 Rectangular ring 1 Drai pipe/ Frame top part
33 563433 05 Seal ring 2 Fittings for OWM
34 60571 Elastic plate 3 Driving device horizontal
35 563022 09 Rectangular ring 1 Bowl body/ Sliding bowl bottom
36 585673 01 Height adjusting ring 5 Ring/Frame Hood
72
20 Major service kit
781A
73
21 OWMC service kit

558446-
Quantity
1 544311 10 O-ring 1 Air tank/ Valve body
2 544311 11 O-ring 4 Valve body/ Valve spindle
3 544311 09 O-ring 2 Valve cup/ Valve body
4 544311 08 O-ring 6 Valve body/ Valve connection
5 559892 10 Sealing washer 2 Valve connection/ Screw
6 223406 32 O-ring 1 Cylinder cover/ Valve connection
7 223406 43 O-ring 1 Cylinder cover/ Air tank
8 559891 01 Locking wire 2 Air tank/ Cylinder
9 546198 76 O-ring 1 Outlet/ Cylinder
10 559892 01 Turcon variseal "m" 1 Outlet/ 2 pulse adapter
11 559892 03 Turcon aq-seal 1 Piston/ Cylinder
12 559892 02 Turcite slydring 1 Piston/ Cylinder
13 223406 42 O-ring 1 Air tank/ Cylinder
14 544311 07 O-ring 1 Needle/ Valve connection
15 223406 29 O-ring 1 Outlet/ Fittings for OWMC
16 559892 06 Garter strap 1 Air tank/ Cylinder
18 555612 01 High protection grease 1
74
21 OWMC service kit
KI
T
No
.
781N
75
22 Cross reference list
+ Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
1270001 52 8 221803 28 48 42 260083 44 26 8
1270019 52 3 221803 29 28 25 260104 21 72 16
190601 50 2 221803 34 46 15 260104 21 26 28
190601 72 29 221803 40 22 15 260121 11 28 22
190606 30 2 221891 16 42 16 260154 01 59 33
190618 30 11 223101 33 28 5 260154 02 61 76
221031 29 28 9 223101 37 28 17 260154 03 61 78
221035 61 24 9E 223101 37 22 14 260154 05 58 21
221035 61 24 17A 223101 61 28 23 260164 02 61 73
221036 19 26 24 223101 61 22 18 260164 03 59 49
221036 20 28 6 223101 61 22 25.1 260164 04 59 50
221041 01 28 24 223101 61 22 28.1 260168 89 72 8
221041 01 22 19 223107 28 24 12 260168 89 26 1.1
221041 01 26 3 223142 04 46 9 260176 01 46 13
221041 20 22 22 223316 05 70 29 260254 02 26 27
221041 20 22 25 223316 05 72 1 37167 72 2
221041 20 22 28 223316 05 22 5 37167 22 7
221041 26 22 37 223402 17 72 14 38411 72 9
221046 09 42 15 223402 17 26 23 38411 26 2
221046 22 40 14 223402 79 32 26 38685 72 7
221046 29 58 20A 223402 79 37 26 38685 22 8
2210463 03 28 18 223402 79 70 11 38706 72 21
2210463 34 61 68 223402 81 32 27 38706 26 30
221116 01 30 12B 223402 81 37 27 43626 22 17
221121 08 44 2 223402 81 70 12 43626 72 5
221121 15 44 16 223406 10 33 37 517774 02 33 38
221121 15 64 30 223406 10 37 37 517774 02 37 38
221121 46 30 14 223406 10 70 37 517774 02 70 38
221126 51 44 10 223406 25 72 19 519761 12 30 13
221126 51 64 26 223406 29 48 43 521121 45 28 13
221126 56 64 28 223406 29 74 15 521121 45 70 34
221131 04 40 12 223406 32 48 17 521121 48 33 41
221131 08 22 10 223406 32 74 6 521121 48 37 41
221581 69 46 10A 223406 36 22 16A 521121 48 70 30
221706 24 48 12 223406 36 72 17 521121 51 32 13
221711 07 48 35 223406 42 48 37 521121 51 36 13
221711 23 30 7 223406 42 74 13 521121 51 70 6
221711 24 48 9 223406 43 48 18 521196 16 61 77
221716 04 26 15 223406 43 74 7 523215 02 22 6
221716 16 30 5 223412 16 72 15 52406 52 5
221716 16 32 19 223412 16 26 25 525643 27 32 2
221716 16 36 19 223521 98 24 2 525643 27 36 2
221721 13 50 7 223521 98 72 30 525643 27 70 1
221726 05 46 12 223610 32 24 14 525643 45 32 8
221726 06 26 20 233211 94 24 7 525643 45 36 8
221726 08 28 26 233211 94 72 22 525643 45 70 3
221731 11 46 4 260001 21 46 8 525643 46 32 7
221731 11 66 1 260001 21 66 4 525643 46 36 7
221731 18 28 2 260001 39 24 11 525643 46 70 2
221803 26 64 25 260001 43 58 13 526186 02 46 5
76
Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
526189 01 22 4 543135 33 61 75 546229 08 72 3

526350 01 40 6 543550 01 58 6 546424 02 24 3
526350 03 28 27 543551 01 58 4 546547 01 58 18
526350 03 28 28 543552 01 58 17 548115 08 33 45
526350 03 28 29 543553 80 58 3 548115 08 37 45
526350 03 28 11 543687 01 68 1 548115 08 70 32
527353 03 61 81 544242 07 26 16 548115 09 33 46
527353 04 59 45 544261 01 58 5 548115 09 37 46
527353 09 59 47 544265 02 58 2 548115 09 70 33
527353 16 59 46 544288 01 61 83 548115 10 32 9
528723 01 72 25 544302 02 58 1 548115 10 36 9
528723 01 22 9 544311 07 48 40 548115 10 70 4
528729 02 46 3 544311 07 74 14 548172 01 30 1
528732 01 22 24 544311 08 48 13 548173 01 30 6
528732 01 22 27 544311 08 74 4 548175 81 28 21
528732 01 72 4 544311 09 48 10 548369 02 33 47
528732 01 72 6 544311 09 74 3 548369 02 37 47
528738 02 46 6 544311 10 48 2 548369 03 33 47.1
528738 02 66 2 544311 10 74 1 548369 03 37 47.1
528905 07 59 51 544311 11 48 4 548369 04 33 47.2
531296 81 58 7 544311 11 74 2 548369 04 37 47.2
534083 01 30 3 544690 01 58 10 548369 05 33 47.3
53500487 15 54 14 544702 01 58 11 548369 05 37 47.3
53500487 15 56 20 545529 80 61 58 548369 10 33 47.4
53500487 15 64 33 545578 81 61 70 548369 10 37 47.4
537441 01 58 14 545636 01 26 17 548406 80 30 4
537446 01 61 84 545703 01 24 9C 548426 01 30 12A
537707 80 58 15 545704 01 24 9B 548426 80 30 12
537864 06 32 5 545705 02 24 9A 548586 02 32 1.1
537864 06 36 5 546095 50 32 35 548586 02 36 1.1
537864 06 70 28 546095 50 37 35 548744 01 72 13
539030 03 59 52 546095 50 70 35 548744 01 26 18
539474 03 70 51 546095 52 32 11C 548747 04 72 10
540579 01 72 27 546095 52 36 11C 548747 04 26 5
540579 05 42 14 546095 52 70 9 549435 80 58 20
541453 04 32 20 546113 81 30 10 549505 01 26 9
541453 04 36 20 546198 47 40 4 549701 81 58 22
541453 04 70 27 546198 47 70 8 551337 01 64 29
541985 01 24 5 546198 48 40 7 552042 01 44 3
541988 01 24 17 546198 48 70 22 552618 04 44 15
541991 01 24 13 546198 53 24 1 552869 94 44 9
542059 02 68 2 546198 60 32 16 552869 94 64 23
542510 02 26 10 546198 60 36 16 552870 40 56 19
542547 01 26 19 546198 60 70 7 552870 95 64 50
542548 02 26 6 546198 65 32 11D 552957 01 64 24
542633 04 72 11 546198 65 36 11D 553188 02 61 67
542633 04 72 12 546198 65 70 13 553260 80 61 69
542633 04 26 7 546198 76 48 27 553261 03 64 27
542633 04 26 12 546198 76 74 9 554214 02 52 9
543056 02 26 21 546229 08 22 13 554216 02 22 16B
77
Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
554216 02 72 18 559892 06 48 38 573334 01 72 20

554336 01 70 50 559892 06 74 16 573334 01 28 7
554627 01 44 7 559892 07 48 29 573444 02 32 11B
554627 01 64 31 559892 08 48 21 573444 02 36 11B
554627 02 44 45 559892 09 48 16 573584 80 59 35
554627 02 54 46 559892 10 48 15 573679 80 54 11
554627 02 56 47 559892 10 74 5 573933 01 32 18
554627 02 64 48 563022 09 32 12 573933 01 36 18
554981 02 32 11E 563022 09 36 12 573973 01 26 4
554981 02 36 11E 563022 09 72 35 574111 80 22 16
555016 80 61 82 563417 02 50 4 574112 01 22 23
555022 04 32 15 563433 05 50 3 574139 02 32 4
555022 04 36 15 563433 05 72 33 574139 02 36 4
555170 89 32 11 564044 26 40 3 574143 05 22 2
555170 89 36 11 564044 26 70 26 574204 04 40 17
555591 82 61 72 564044 28 32 18.1 574251 04 40 9
555603 11 54 12 564044 28 36 18.1 574251 04 70 23
555612 01 74 18 564044 28 70 14 574251 07 40 15
556416 04 44 8 564044 89 32 29 574251 07 70 24
556416 05 64 32 564044 89 37 29 574251 09 72 28
556416 15 56 34 564044 89 70 15 574254 07 40 16
556416 31 54 13 564433 01 56 17 574504 01 32 31
556523 80 61 74 565274 02 28 14 574504 01 37 31
558710 01 48 23 565274 02 72 24 574919 01 26 26
558926 01 48 24 566031 80 24 16 575978 82 42 1
559854 01 48 8 566261 80 48 41 576468 01 26 1
559855 01 48 6 566453 04 52 11 576658 80 40 10
559856 01 48 5 566644 01 24 9D 576660 80 40 8
559857 01 48 22 566860 03 24 9F 578048 01 22 26
559858 01 48 11 566867 81 24 9 578292 01 33 43
559861 01 48 31 567112 01 44 4 578292 01 37 43
559862 01 48 34 567509 01 56 18 578415 01 28 12
559863 80 48 19 568592 26 44 6 578425 02 33 42
559864 01 48 26 569089 01 44 5 578425 02 37 42
559865 01 48 28 572301 01 26 22 578425 03 32 10
559866 01 48 7 572302 02 26 13 578425 03 36 10
559867 02 48 1 572427 80 46 10 578430 01 72 26
559868 01 48 14 572455 01 46 11 578430 01 28 3
559869 01 48 3 572874 80 61 71 578430 02 28 3.1
559870 01 48 25 573012 02 32 3 578430 03 28 3.2
559891 01 48 20 573012 02 36 3 579462 01 28 10
559891 01 74 8 573014 02 32 28 579926 81 22 12
559892 01 48 30 573014 02 37 28 580750 02 33 44
559892 01 74 10 573016 04 32 11A 580750 02 37 44
559892 02 48 33 573016 04 36 11A 580750 02 70 31
559892 02 74 12 573019 02 32 14A 581488 01 24 4
559892 03 48 32 573019 80 32 14 581491 01 24 8
559892 03 74 11 573128 01 26 11 582821 01 44 12
559892 04 48 36 573255 17 28 20 585164 80 44 1
559892 05 48 39 573255 17 72 32 585306 82 32 1
78
Part No. Page Ref. Part No. Page Ref.
585306 82 36 1 588550 80 28 1
585395 01 50 1 588686 80 32 21
585396 80 50 5 588686 81 32 22
585397 80 50 6 588686 81 32 22.1
585415 80 22 1 588686 81 32 22.2
585670 01 40 13 588686 82 32 21
585673 01 40 18 588686 83 32 22
585673 01 72 36 588686 83 32 22.1
585819 80 58 23 588686 83 32 22.2
585886 01 26 32 588734 01 32 34
585899 80 22 3 588734 01 37 34
585933 02 52 7 60571 24 15
586027 80 28 19 60571 72 34
586034 02 28 8 63366 61 79
586107 01 32 6 64324 59 54
586107 01 36 6 65235 46 7
586167 01 28 4 65235 66 3
587391 01 22 36 66169 52 6
587835 01 32 30 66415 59 48
587835 01 37 30 66432 61 80
587838 01 32 32 67474 26 31
587838 01 37 32 67478 24 6
587839 80 32 17 68011 33 36
587840 80 36 17 68011 33 39
587840 81 36 17 68011 37 36
587841 80 32 23 68011 37 39
587842 80 36 23 68011 70 36
587844 01 36 14A 69584 30 8
587844 80 36 14 69696 61 55
587849 80 36 21 70490 46 14
587849 81 36 22 71162 30 9
587849 81 36 22.1 71194 59 37
587849 81 36 22.2 71440 32 25
587849 82 36 21 71440 37 25
587849 83 36 22 71440 70 10
587849 83 36 22.1 72112 32 14B
587849 83 36 22.2 72112 36 14B
587849 84 36 21 72243 59 53
587849 85 36 22 72244 59 43
587849 85 36 22.1 75420 59 44
587849 85 36 22.2 785332 02 46 2
587849 86 36 21 8379 24 10
587849 87 36 22 8379 72 23
587849 87 36 22.1 956264 13 52 4
587849 87 36 22.2
588100 80 32 24
588100 80 37 24
588112 01 28 16
588225 01 40 2
588371 80 40 1
79
Snavssamler med gevind
Snavssamler med gevindPLENTY FILTERGevindmuffer
Plenty filter Type : SIMPLEX

Gevindmuffer
Anvendelse: damp, kondensat, vand, olie og gas.
* Enkel servicering uden brug af værktøj

* Filter kan udskiftes uden at tømme huset
* Kundespecificerede løsninger
Generelle data
Type : SIMPLEX
Materiale : Støbejern BS1452 Gr220
Trykklasse : PN 16
Filtersi : Rustfrit stål, 2,0mm perforering
Pakning : Viton O-ring
Drænprop : 1/2" BSPT
Indbygningslængde : Se skema
Filtre
Tilslutning : Gevindmuffer BSP.
DIMENSIONER (mm) ANDET

Varenr. DN A B C E Vægt (kg)
50103525 1" 162 98 102 83 5
50103540 11/2" 171 149 102 83 6
Optioner:- Hus i andre materialer

- Filterindsatse fra 20-300mesh (740-50μ)
- Støttekurv for filter
- NPT muffer
- Dobbeltfiltre, fritstrømsfiltre, selvrensende typer
206 Tlf : +45 43 64 66 11

Fax : +45 43 64 11 42
e-mail : info@klinger.dk
SNAVSSAMLER I RØDGODSRG - gevindmuffer
Snavssamler i rødgods Type : 74A

RG - gevindmuffer
* Universel montering
* Udskifteligt filter/Andre maskestørrelser
Generelle data
Type : 74A
Materiale : Rødgods RG 5
Trykklasse : PN 20
Dæksel : EN12165 CW617N
Filter : Rustfrit stål
Pakning : Asbestfri fiberpakning
Tilslutning : Gevindmuffer iht. ISO228
Filtre
Temperatur : 180ºC. 20bar
100oC
DIMENSIONER (mm) TILSLUTNINGER ANDET

Varenr. Gevind Længde Højde R Maskestørrelse Vægt (kg)
50100001 3/8" 56 38 3/8" 0,65 0,2
50100002 1/2" 59 40 1/2" 0,65 0,2
50100003 3/4" 67 46 3/4" 0,65 0,3
50100004 1 " 76 58 1 " 0,65 0,4
50100005 1.1/4" 92 70 1.1/4" 0,65 0,7
50100006 1.1/2" 100 80 1.1/2" 0,65 0,9
50100007 2 " 125 100 2 " 0,65 1,4
Tlf : +45 43 64 66 11 207

Fax : +45 43 64 11 42
SNAVSSAMLER I STØBEJERNRG - gevindmuffer
Snavssamler i støbejern Type : Armstrong CA41SC

RG - gevindmuffer
* Udskifteligt filter/Andre maskestørrelser
Generelle data
Type : Armstrong CA41SC
Materiale : Støbejern ASTM A 48
Trykklasse : PN 17
Filter : AISI 304
Pakning : Asbestfri fiberpakning
Indbygningslængde : se tabel
Tilslutning : Gevindmuffer BSPT, alternativt NPT
Filtre
Temperatur : + 207ºC(damp).

50100012 1/2" 108 76 1/2" 0,5 1,4
50100034 3/4" 108 95 3/4" 0,5 1,4
50100100 1 " 127 102 1 " 0,5 2
50100114 1.1/4" 140 113 1.1/4" 1 3
50100112 1.1/2" 160 138 1.1/2" 1 4,5
50100200 2 " 191 164 2 " 1 6,8
50100212 21/2" 216 203 2 " 1 11
208 Tlf : +45 43 64 66 11

Fax : +45 43 64 11 42
SNAVSSAMLER I STÅLRG - gevindmuffer
Snavssamler i stål Type : KP-4750

RG - gevindmuffer
* Udskifteligt filter
Generelle data
Type : KP-4750
Materiale : Stål A 105
Trykklasse : PN 100
Filter : AISI 316
Pakning : AISI 316 + Grafit
Prop : Stål A 105
Tilslutning : Gevindmuffer iht. DIN 2999
Filtre
Temperatur : -10ºC til 425ºC

50303038 3/8" 95 65 3/8" 0,8 0,9
50303012 1/2" 95 65 1/2" 0,8 0,9
50303034 3/4" 110 75 3/4" 0,8 1,4
50303100 1 " 125 95 1 " 0,8 2,6
50303114 1.1/4" 160 120 1.1/4" 0,8 6,0
50303112 1.1/2" 155 120 1.1/2" 0,8 6,0
50303200 2 " 190 160 2 " 0,8 7,0
Tlf : +45 43 64 66 11 209

Fax : +45 43 64 11 42
SNAVSSAMLER I RUSTFRIT STÅLRG - gevindmuffer
Snavssamler i rustfrit stål Type : KP-4758

RG - gevindmuffer
Generelle data
Type : KP-4758
Materiale : AISI 316
Trykklasse : PN 100
Filter : AISI 316
Pakning : AISI 316 + Grafit
Prop : AISI 316
Tilslutning : Gevindmuffer iht.DIN 2999

Filtre

50704038 3/8" 95 65 3/8" 0,8 0,9
50704012 1/2" 95 65 1/2" 0,8 0,9
50704034 3/4" 110 75 3/4" 0,8 1,4
50704100 1 " 125 95 1 " 0,8 2,6
50704114 1.1/4" 160 120 1.1/4" 0,8 6,0
50704112 1.1/2" 155 120 1.1/2" 0,8 5,8
50704200 2 " 190 160 2 " 0,8 7,0
210 Tlf : +45 43 64 66 11

Fax : +45 43 64 11 42
RG - gevindmuffer
Snavssamler i rustfrit stål Type : JY-800S

RG - gevindmuffer
Generelle data
Type : JY-800S
Materiale : AISI 316
Trykklasse : PN 40
Filter : AISI 316
Pakning : PTFE
Prop : AISI 316
Tilslutning : Gevindmuffer iht.BSPP DIN 2999(parallel)

: Options: svejsender, NPT
Filtre

50705014 1/4" 95 65 1/4" 1,6 0,9
50705038 3/8" 95 65 3/8" 1,6 0,9
50705012 1/2" 95 65 1/2" 1,6 0,9
50705034 3/4" 110 75 3/4" 1,6 1,4
50705100 1 " 125 95 1 " 1,6 2,6
50705114 1.1/4" 160 120 1.1/4" 1,6 6,0
50705112 1.1/2" 155 120 1.1/2" 1,6 5,8
50705200 2 " 190 160 2 " 1,6 7,0
Tlf : +45 43 64 66 11 211

Fax : +45 43 64 11 42
Technical Information
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Level limit switch for liquids in the foodstuff industry, compact
design, housing made of corrosion-resistant stainless steel
Application Your benefits

The Liquiphant T FTL20H is a level limit switch for
• E.g. stainless steel housing with round connector
liquids in storage tanks, agitators and pipes which have
M12x1, degree of protection IP69K, always air-tight
to meet particularly high hygiene standards internally
even in the event of hour-long overflooding and
and externally.
intensive cleaning
It is used in particular in areas where other measurement • External test option using test magnet
methods would probably fail: e.g. in the event of • On-site function control using external LED display
viscosity, build-up, turbulences, flows, air bubbles, rash • Large selection of process connections for hassle-free
temperature change when cleaning. installation in existing systems
• Easy to install even at points difficult to access due to
The Liquiphant T FTL20H is a hygiene version for fluid
compact design
temperatures up to 150 °C.
• Rugged stainless steel housing (316L)
• CIP and SIP cleanability ensured
• EHEDG certification
TI379F/00/en
71096275
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Table of contents
Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Function test with test magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Light signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Measuring range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
CE mark, declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Sanitary compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Switching outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Overfill protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Operating modes for variants AC and DC-PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Marine approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Other standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Electrical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Liquiphant T FTL20H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18

Switching delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Socket wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Welding neck G ¾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Measured value resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Welding neck G ¾ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Measuring frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Welding neck G 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Welding neck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Coupling nut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Settling time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Influence of ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Supplementary documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Influence of medium temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Influence of medium pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Technical Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Certificates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Operating conditions: Installation instructions . . . . . . 9
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Operating conditions: Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Shock resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Overvoltage protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Operating conditions: Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Medium temperature range and process pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
State of aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Gas content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Solids content ø . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Design, dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2 Endress+Hauser
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Function and system design

Measuring principle The tuning fork of the FTL20H is brought to its resonance frequency by means of a piezoelectric drive.
If the tuning fork is covered by liquid, this frequency changes. The electronics of the FTL20H monitor the
resonance frequency and indicate whether the tuning fork is freely vibrating or is covered by liquid.
Measuring system The measuring system comprises:

• Liquiphant T FTL20H limit switch
• Progammable logic control (PLC), miniature contactor, solenoid valve or AS-i bus
AS-interface
PLC
U–
...
~ 230 V
L00-FTL20Hxx-14-05-xx-en-001
Example 1): Overfill protection or top level detection

Example 2): Lower level detection or dry running protection
Example 3): Dry running protection for pump
Endress+Hauser 3
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Input
Measured variable Density
Measuring range > 0.7 g/cm3

Other density settings on request, e.g. 0.5 g/cm3
Output
Switching outputs
DC-PNP valve connector DC-PNP M12x1 AC 2-wire AS-i
Function Positive voltage signal at the switch output Switching the Switching the
of the electronics (PNP) power supply line D0 bit
Switch behaviour ON/OFF 0/1

(free / covered)
Relay switching capacity 250 mA D0 bit
Fail-safe mode MIN/MAX (see below) D1 bit

D1: 0 error
Switching delay approx. 0.5 s on coverage / approx. 1.0 s on tuning fork becoming uncovered
other switching time on request
Switching threshold with vertical orientation: 13.0 mm from top of fork

with horizontal orientation: 3.5 mm from fork centre
Hysteresis 3 ±0.5 mm
Operating modes for variants The FTL20H can be connected in two operating modes. By choosing the suitable operating mode
AC and DC-PNP (MAX or MIN safety), you ensure that the FTL20H switches safely even in the event of a fault (e.g. if the power
supply line is disconnected).
MAX - maximum safety

• The FTL20H keeps the electronic switch closed as long as the liquid level is below the fork.
• Example of an application: overfill protection
MIN - minimum safety

• The FTL20H keeps the electronic switch closed as long as the fork is immersed in liquid.
• Example of an application: dry running protection for pumps
The electronic switch opens if the limit is reached, if a fault occurs or the power fails.
4 Endress+Hauser
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Power supply
Cable entry
a e f g h
1.) 2.)
27.5 mm
27.5 mm
i d
min. 40 mm min. 40 mm
b
c d
c
d d d
L00-FTL20Hxx-04-05-xx-xx-001
Pg11 / NPT ½ / QUICKON M12x1 M12x1

(Plastic) (Metal)
Material:
a: Polyamid; b: NBR/SEBS; c: PPSU; d: 316L; e: PUR blue; f: PVC grey; g: PVC transparent; h: PVC orange; i: Cu Sn/Ni
Accessories
1.) 4 x 0.34 M12 (Cu Sn/Ni) elbowed (order number: 52010285)
2.) 4 x 0.34 + female angled connector M12 (316L) without built-in LEDs (order number: 52024216) or
4 x 0.34 + female angled connector M12 (316L) with built-in LEDs (order number: 52018763)
Endress+Hauser 5
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Electrical connection Variant DC-PNP (direct current) M12x1 connector

Voltage source: shock-protected voltage or Class 2 circuit (North America)
Suitable for use in non-equivalent operation:

When both outputs are connected, the MIN and MAX outputs take on opposite states in trouble-free operation.
In the event of an alarm condition or a line break, both electronic switches are open. In addition to level
monitoring, function-dependent sensor monitoring can also be performed with the aid of 2-channel evaluation.
Operating mode MAX (NC contact) Operating mode MIN (NO contact)
1 2 1 4
1 2 1 4
L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-002 L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-003
2 1 1: BN 2 1 1: BN
2: WT 3: BU
3 4 3: BU 3 4 4: BK
R 0.5 A R 0.5 A
L– L+ L– L+
Variant DC-PNP (direct current) valve connector
Operating mode MAX (NC contact) Operating mode MIN (NO contact)
3 2 2 3
3 2 2 3
1 2 1 2
+
3 3 +
R
– R
–
0.5 A 0.5 A
PE L– L+ PE L– L+
(Ground) (Ground)
6 Endress+Hauser
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Variant AC (alternating current) valve connector
Operating mode MAX Operating mode MIN
1 3 1 2
1 3 1 2
1 1 2
3
> 19 V > 19 V
R R
0.5 A 0.5 A
PE L1 N PE L1 N
(Ground) (Ground)
! Note!
Approved for relays with a holding power/rated power >2.5 VA (253 V) or > 0.5 VA (24 V).
Relays with lower holding power/rated power can be operated via a parallel-connected RC-element (option).
Connect AS-i bus
AS-i + 1: BN
2 1 3: BU
3 4
AS-i –
L00-FTL20xxx-04-05-xx-xx-008
Programming instructions for the AS-i

AS-i profile: S-3.A.1
The address is defaulted to 0 (HEX). It is changeable via the bus master or programming unit.
Data bit:
D0:1 Sensor covered D1:1 Status = O.K.
D0:0 Sensor free D1:0 Status = error
D2 and D3 are not used.
Parameter bits (P0...P3) are not used.
Endress+Hauser 7
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Electrical connection DC-PNP valve connector DC-PNP M12x1 AC 2 wire AS-i
Supply voltage 10...35 V DC 10...35 V DC 19...253 V AC 24.5...31 V DC
Cable entry Pg11 / M12x1 Pg11 / M12x1

NPT ½ / NPT ½ /
QUICKON QUICKON
Cable specification Max 1.5 mm2 and IEC 60947-5-2 Max 1.5 mm2 and IEC 62026-2
ø 3.5...6.5 ø 3.5...6.5
Power consumption < 825 mW < 825 mW < 810 mW < 825 mW
Current consumption < 15 mA < 15 mA < 3.8 mA < 25 mA
Residual ripple 5 Vss at 0...400 Hz 5 Vss at 0...400 Hz – –
Performance characteristics
Switching delay 0.5 s when covering
1.0 s when becoming free
Other switching time on request
Reference operating Ambient temperature: 23 °C

conditions
Process pressure: 1 bar
Medium: water
Medium density: 1
Medium temperature: 23 °C
Installation from above/vertical
Density setting: > 0.7
Measured value resolution < 0.5 mm
Measuring frequency Approx. 1100 Hz in air
Maximum measured error 13.0 ±1 mm
Repeatability ±0.5 mm
Hysteresis 3.0 ±0.5 mm
Settling time <2s
Influence of Negligible
ambient temperature
Influence of –29.6 x 10-3 mm/°C

medium temperature
Influence of –55.2 x 10-3 mm/bar

medium pressure
8 Endress+Hauser
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Operating conditions: Installation instructions

Orientation The Liquiphant T FTL20H can be installed in any position in a container or pipe. The formation of foam does
not impair its function.
L00-FTL20Hxx-11-05-xx-xx-001
Example 1): Overfill protection or top level detection

Example 2): Dry running protection for pump
Example 3): Lower level detection
Connecting cable Up to 1000 m with AC/DC-PNP, AS-i to IEC 62026-2
Operating conditions: Environment

Ambient conditions
Ta
°C
70
60
50
40
20
TP
0
–40 –20 0 30 60 90* 120 150 °C
–20
–25**
–40
L00-FTL20Hxx-05-05-xx-xx-002
* max. 150 mA relay switching capacity

** for AS-i elektronic
Ambient temperature Ta
Process temperature Tp
Storage temperature –40...+85 °C
Degree of protection • IP65 with valve connector

• IP66/67 with M12x1 connector PPSU (plastic)
• IP66/68 with M12x1 connector 316L (metal);
IP69K with accessory 52024116 (signalling via connector without LEDs) or
IP69K with accessory 52018763 (signalling via connector with LEDs)
Endress+Hauser 9
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Shock resistance To EN 60068-2-27 (30 g)
Vibration resistance To EN 60068-2-64
Electromagnetic Interference emission to EN 61326, Electrical Equipment Class B,

compatibility interference immunity to EN 61326, Annex A (Industrial) and NAMUR Recommendation NE 21 (EMC).
AS-interface to EN 50295.
Overvoltage protection Overvoltage category III
Operating conditions: Process

Medium temperature range
pe
and process pressure
bar
(psi)
40
(580)
Tp
–1 °C
–40 0 (–14.5) 150 (°F)
(–104) (32) (300)
L00-FTL20Hxx-05-05-xx-xx-001
State of aggregation Liquid
Density > 0.7 g/cm3 (other density setting on request)
Viscosity 1...10000 cst
Gas content Stagnant mineral water
Solids content ø < 5 mm
10 Endress+Hauser
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Mechanical construction
! Note!
All dimensions in mm
Design, dimensions
M12x1 QUICKON Valve connector
40
45
30
28.5
36
51.5
45.5
ø40 ø40
ø31.5 ø31.5 ø31.5
185.5
179.5
173
32 AF 32 AF 32 AF
38.2
38.2
38.2
*1
*1
*1
13
13
13
2 2
3.5 * 2 3.5 * 3.5 *
ø17.1 ø17.1 ø17.1
*2 *2 *2
L00-FTL20Hxx-06-05-xx-en-001
*1 Switch point with vertical installation

*2 Switch point with horizontal installation; the level increases in the direction of the arrow
Switch points at: density 1 / 23 °C / 0 bar
Process connections Process connection / Order Accessories Pressure

Dimensions code (optional) Temperature
G ½, GCJ max. 40 bar

G¾ GDJ max. 150 °C
DIN ISO 228/I
93 63.9
22.7 32 AF 16 38
L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-003
Endress+Hauser 11
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Process connection / Order Accessories Pressure

G¾ GDJ Welding neck max. 25 bar

DIN ISO 228/I (with defined max. 150 °C
for flush-mounted installation in welding neck thread start)
with silicone O-ring max. 40 bar
EHEDG with welding neck 52018765 Endress+Hauser max. 100 °C
52018765
93 63.9
22.7 32 AF 16 38 FDA approved
materials according
to 21 CFR
Part 177.1550/2600
L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-003 See also Page 18

G1 GEJ max. 40 bar
DIN ISO 228/l max. 150 °C
93 74.5
22.7 32 AF 18.6 47.9
L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-004
G1 GEJ Welding neck max. 25 bar

DIN ISO 228/I (with defined max. 150 °C
with sealing surface for flush-mounted installation thread start)
in welding neck with silicone O-ring max. 40 bar
Endress+Hauser max. 100 °C
EHEDG with welding neck 52001051 52001051
(Seal geometry same as e.g. FTL260)
FDA approved
93 74.5 materials according
22.7 32 AF 18.6 47.9 to 21 CFR
Part 177.1550/2600
See also Page 19
L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-004
NPT ½ RCJ max. 40 bar

ANSI B 1.20.1 max. 150 °C
R½ RRJ
DIN 2999
93 (63.9)
22.7 32 AF 47.9
L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-005
NPT ¾ RDJ max. 40 bar

ANSI B 1.20.1 max. 150 °C
R¾ RSJ
DIN 2999
93 (63.9)
22.7 32 AF 47.9
L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-en-005
12 Endress+Hauser
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Process connection / Order Accessories Pressure

Tri-Clamp max. 16 bar

DN 25-38 (1½") = ø50.5 mm TCJ max. 120 °C
DN 40-51 (2") = ø64.0 mm TDJ
ISO 2852 max. 2 bar
max. 150 °C
EHEDG only with 2" version and special seal.
(Seal: manufacturer, Hyjoin Limited, UK)
Clamping ring and front seal are not included and can be
purchased from retailers.
108.8 47.9
22.7
L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-xx-008
Threaded pipe joint DN 25, DN 32, DN 40:

DN 25 MNJ max. 40 bar up to 100 °C
DN 32 MPJ max. 25 bar up to 140 °C
DN 40 MQJ
DIN 11851 DN 50:
max. 25 bar
Coupling nut and sealing ring are not included and can be max. 140 °C
purchased from retailers.
108.8 47.9
22.7
L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-xx-009
Flush-mounted for welding neck 1" UPJ Welding neck max. 40 bar
Works standard (tuning fork max. 100 °C
Endress+Hauser with silicone seal and can be aligned)
coupling nut (accessory 52021715): included Endress+Hauser max. 25 bar
52001047 max. 150 °C
EHEDG
FDA approved
116 52.9 materials according
22.7 47.9 to 21 CFR
Part 177.1550/2600
See also Page 20
L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-xx-010
Weight Approx. 300 g
Materials Sensor and housing made of 316L, surface quality Ra < 1.5 μm
(In the area of the weld surface grade is not defined.)
Housing Pipe housing
Terminals Valve connector,

QUICKON,
M12x1
Endress+Hauser 13
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Human interface
Function test with test magnet Variants AC and DC-PNP:
On testing, the current state of the electronic switch is reversed.
Variant AS-interface:
On testing, D0 is inverted.
Performing test
Hold the test magnet against the mark on the nameplate:
L00-FTL20Hxx-19-05-xx-xx-001
The switching state changes.
Light signals Variants AC and DC-PNP with valve connector/QUICKON
gn rd
L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-001
Green light (gn) lighting:

FTL20H is connected to the power supply and is operational.
Red light (rd) lighting:

Mode of operation MAX (overfill protection): sensor is immersed in liquid.
Mode of operation MIN (dry running protection): sensor is not covered by liquid.
Green light (gn) does not come on

Error:
No power supply.
– Check plug, cable and power supply
Red light (rd) flashing:

Error:
Overload or short-circuit in load circuit.
– Rectify the short-circuit
– Reduce maximum load current to below 250 mA
Error:
Internal sensor error or sensor corroded.
– Replace device
14 Endress+Hauser
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Variant AS-interface and DC-PNP with M12x1 circular connector PPSU
gn
rd
ye
L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-002

Yellow light (ye) lighting:

Sensor is immersed in liquid.
Red light (rd) lighting with AS-interface:

Error:
Address 0 set or communication error.
– Carry out addressing process
– Parameterise slave
– Or reduce line length (< 100 m total length)
Red light (rd) lighting with DC-PNP

Error:
Overload or short-circuit in load circuit.
– Reduce maximum load current to below 250 mA

Error:
No power supply.
Red light (rd) flashing (2 Hz):

Error:
– Replace device
Endress+Hauser 15
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Variant DC-PNP with M12x1 circular connector 316L
ye 1
ye 2 gn
L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-003

Yellow light (ye 1) lighting:

Sensor is not covered by liquid.
Yellow light (ye 2) lighting:

Sensor is immersed in liquid.

Error:
No power supply.
Green light (gn) lighting, both yellow lights (ye 1+2) does not come on
Error:
short-circuit in load circuit.
Error:
– Replace device
16 Endress+Hauser
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Certificates and approvals

! Note!
The specified certificates and approvals are available on www.endress.com/ftl20.
CE mark, The instrument is designed to meet state-of-the-art safety requirements, has been tested and left the factory in
declaration of conformity a condition in which it is safe to operate.
The instrument complies with the applicable standards and regulations as listed in the EC declaration of
conformity and thus complies with the statutory requirements of the EG directives.
Endress+Hauser confirms the successful testing of the instrument by affixing to it the CE mark.
Sanitary compatibility EHEDG (see process connections on Page 11), approval number: 3119/03/0445
Overfill protection WHG and leakage
Marine approval German Lloyd (GL), approval number: 42855-02HH
Other standards and AS-i profile S-3.A.1 as per EN 50295 (limit switch)
guidelines
Ordering information
Liquiphant T FTL20H 10 Approval: *
0 Non-hazardous area, WHG (leakage monitoring)
3 CSA General Purpose, CSA C US
9 Special version
20 Process Connection:
GCJ Thread ISO228 G ½, 316L
GDJ Thread ISO228 G ¾, 316L installation > accessory: welding neck
GEJ Thread ISO228 G 1, 316L installation > accessory: welding neck
RCJ Thread ANSI NPT ½, 316L
RDJ Thread ANSI NPT ¾, 316L
RRJ Thread DIN2999 R ½, 316L
RSJ Thread DIN2999 R ¾, 316L
UPJ Flush-mounted, 316L installation > accessory: welding neck
1" 52001047
TCJ Tri-Clamp ISO2852 DN25-38 (1...1½"), 316L
TDJ Tri-Clamp ISO2852 DN40-51 (2"), 316L
MNJ DIN11851 DN25 PN40, 316L
MPJ DIN11851 DN32 PN40, 316L
MQJ DIN11851 DN40 PN40, 316L
YY9 Special version
30 Switch Output:
1 2-wire 19...253 V AC
2 3-wire, PNP 10... 35 V DC
3 AS-i bus
9 Special version
40 Application; Cable entry:

B 150 °C, Plug Pg11, ISO4400, IP65/67
C 150 °C, Plug NPT ½, ISO4400, IP65
D 150 °C, Plug M12, IP67
E 150 °C, Plug QUICKON, IP65
F 150 °C, Plug M12, IP69K
Y Special version
FTL20H Order code
* The specified certificates and approvals are available on www.endress.com/ftl20.
Endress+Hauser 17
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Accessories
! Note!
• All dimensions in mm
• More detailed information about weld-in adapter can be taken from TI426F/00.
Socket wrench Order number: 52010156

Socket wrench AF 32
32 AF
L00-FTL20xxx-00-05-xx-en-001
Welding neck G ¾ Order number: 52018765 max. 25 bar

26.1
EN10204–3.1 material with inspection max. 150 °C
21
certificate
max. 40 bar
• For flush-mounted installation
max. 100 °C
and sealing
ø50 –0.4
ISO 228
• With defined thread start * ø32
G¾
• Sensor cannot be aligned
Material: corrosion-resistant steel
1.4435 (AISI 316L) L00-FTL20xxx-06-05-xx-xx-011
Weight: 0.13 kg
Seal: silicone O-ring
Order number: 52021717 (5 piece set)
FDA approved materials according to
21 CFR Part 177.1550/2600
! Note!
Use only for FTL20 and FTL20H!
(Use order number 52001052 for
FTL50, FTL50H, FTL51, FTL51H)
18 Endress+Hauser
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Welding neck G ¾ Order number: 52028295 max. 25 bar

EN10204–3.1 material with inspection 30
max. 150 °C
certificate 25.2
max. 40 bar
max. 100 °C
and sealing
ISO 228
Ø 32 –0.4
G 3/4
Ø 26
Ø 29
• With defined thread start *
1.4435 (AISI 316L) A0008265
Weight: 0.10 kg
21 CFR Part 177.1550/2600
! Note!
Use only for FTL20 and FTL20H!
(Use order number 71093129 for
FTL50, FTL50H, FTL51, FTL51H)
Welding neck G 1 Order number: 52001051 max. 25 bar

29.6
Order number: 52011896 max. 150 °C
24.6
EN10204–3.1 material with inspection
certificate max. 40 bar
max. 100 °C
and sealing
ø60 –0.4
ISO 228
ø41
G1
• With defined thread start *

1.4435 (AISI 316L) L00-FTL5xxxx-06-05-xx-xx-020
Weight: 0.19 kg
21 CFR Part 177.1550/2600
* The tolerance of the defined thread beginnings between welding neck and sensor amounts to ± 15°.
Endress+Hauser 19
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Welding neck Order number: 52001047

4.5
Order number: 52006909
EN10204–3.1 material with inspection
certificate
• For flush-mounted installation and sealing of
a Liquiphant FTL50H, FTL20H with process
RD 52 x 1 6
ø42.3
ø65
connection EE2, UPJ
• Sensor can be aligned
1.4435 (AISI 316L)
~26
Weight: 0.15 kg
L00-FTL5xxxx-06-05-xx-xx-022
Profile gasket: Silicone
21 CFR Part 177.1550/2600
Coupling nut Order number: 52021715

for connection UPJ or
welding neck 52001047
DIN 11851-F25-1.4301
RD 52 x 1/ 6
ø56
ø63
ø36
Weight: 0.17 kg
When ordering "process connection for flush-
mounted installation (UPJ)" the delivery
includes the coupling nut.
21
L00-FTL20Hxx-06-05-xx-xx-007
Cable Order number: 52010285

4 x 0,34 M12 socket
Cable: PVC (grey) 5 m length
27.5
Body: PUR (blue)

Coupling nut: Cu Sn/Ni min. 40
Protection: IP67
L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-004
Temperature range: –25 °C to +70 °C

4 x 0,34 M12 socket
Cable: PVC (orange) 5 m length
27.5
Body: PVC (orange)

Coupling nut: 316L min. 40
Protection: IP69K (fully locked)
L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-005
20 Endress+Hauser
Liquiphant T FTL20H

4 x 0,34 M12 socket with integrated LEDs
Cable: PVC (orange) 5 m length
27.5
Body: PVC (transparent)
Coupling nut: 316L min. 40
Protection: IP69K (fully locked)
L00-FTL20Hxx-07-05-xx-xx-005
Supplementary documentation
Operating Instructions • FTL20H
KA214F/00/a6
• Welding neck G ¾
KA219F/00/a6
Technical Information Weld-in adapter

TI426F/00/de
Certificates • Liquiphant FTL20, FTL20H

Allgemeine bauaufsichtliche Zulassung Z-65.11-311
ZE247F/00/de
• Liquiphant FTL20, FTL20H (Leckage)
Allgemeine bauaufsichtliche Zulassung Z-65.40-312
ZE248F/00/de
• Liquiphant FTL20, FTL20H
Number of the Certification Document 37102
ZE249F/00/a2
• Liquiphant FTL20, FTL20H
Certificate of Compliance No. 1238461
ZE250F/00/en
! Note!
The specified certificates and approvals are available on www.endress.com È download.
Endress+Hauser 21
Liquiphant T FTL20H
22 Endress+Hauser
Liquiphant T FTL20H
Endress+Hauser 23
Instruments International
Endress+Hauser
Instruments International AG
Kaegenstrasse 2
4153 Reinach
Switzerland
Tel. +41 61 715 81 00

Fax +41 61 715 25 00
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com
TI379F/00/en/05.09
71096275
SL/FM+SGML6.0 ProMoDo
71096275
Keep an Eye on your Product
LKGG-1 and LKGL-1 In-Line Sight Glass PD 65083 GB4 2002-02
Application
In-line sight glass type LKGG-1 and LKGL-1 is used in pipelines
to allow visual observation of product flow.
Standard design
LKGG-1 consists of a perforated stainless steel shield tube fitted
with a welding union at each end. A special glass tube is fixed in
the shield tube so that it is unaffected by possible stresses in the
pipelines.
LKGL-1 has a stainless steel light fitting unit welded onto the
shield tube so that the product flow can be illuminated.
Materials
Seals: EPDM rubber.
Steel grade: Stainless steel AISI 304 or acid-
resistant steel AISI 316.
Glass: Borosilicate.
Sizes
25 mm (1"), 38 mm (1½"), 51 mm (2"), 63.5 mm (2 ½") and
76 mm (3").
Technical data
Max. test pressure (20oC): 500 kPa (5 bar).
Recommended max.
Working temperature: 110oC.
Max. thermal shock: 100oC.
Bulb: 24 V / 24 W.
Bulb socket: B 15.
Options
Material grades
A) Seals of Nitrile (NBR).
Ordering
Please state the following when ordering: Upper: LKGG-1, In-line sight glass.
- Materials, AISI 304 or 316. Lower: LKGL-1, In-line sight glass.
- Type: LKGG-1 or LKGL-1.
- Size.
Dimensions (mm)
Size 25mm 38mm 51mm 63.5mm 76.1mm 101.6mm

A 175 181 188 194 200 -
B 64 77 91 106 122 148
OD 26.2 38.9 51.6 64.3 76.6 102
ID 22.5 35.5 48.5 60.5 72 97.6
t 1.85 1.7 1.55 1.9 2.3 2.2
Weight (kg) 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.6 -
Note! - LKGL-1: +0.5 kg

- Size 101.6mm only for LKGG-1
A
200
t
ID
OD
B B
a. LKGG-1. b. LKGL-1.
Fig. 3. Dimensions.
PD 65083 GB4 2002-02 The information contained herein is correct at the time of
issue, but may be subject to change without prior notice.
How to contact Alfa Laval

Contact details for all countries
are continually updated on our website.
Please visit www.alfalaval.com to
access the information direct.
Automated valve control and monitoring
Valve-top control and indicator units

Valve automation
right where you need it
Sanitary valves play key roles in processes throughout the food,
dairy, brewery and pharmaceutical industries. There are almost
countless different makes and types.
The most cost-effective ways to reap maximum benefit from such

valves is to control and monitor their action as accurately, reliably
and economically as possible.
Alfa Laval provides a full range of easy-to-install, easy-to-use

valve-top control and indicator units that do exactly that.
Better control Easy to install

Traditional indicators are rarely capable These units fit onto all Alfa Laval
of maintaining pre-set parameters for sanitary valves fitted with actuator
valve operation. Alfa Laval units solve this “mushrooms”, in an easy, straight-
by using a state-of-the-art “no touch” forward procedure that requires no
sensor system, pre-configured with a special expertise or costly adaptors.
tolerance band. This makes them ideal for retrofitting
and updating your existing processing
This does away with adjustments plant and for increasing flexibility.
during the unit’s service life, providing
you with a time-saving “set and forget” Once fitted, the initial set-up is done
solution that also keeps production manually using a rapid, foolproof
downtime to a minimum. “5-push setup”. You can then virtually
forget about valve settings.
Cost-effective combinations of
ThinkTop® and IndiTop units give
you full control over fluid handling
processes – with the exact degree of
Alfa Laval valve-top control
automation you require.
and indicator units benefit your
operations by ensuring:
• Better control and monitoring of
processing operations
• Full insight and documentation
about what happens
• Greater safety and reliability
• Low cost of ownership due to
savings on time and manpower,
and avoiding downtime and
mistakes
• Easy upgrading, expansion
and reconfiguration of existing
installations, with no adaptors
required.
2 Automated valve control and monitoring

Low cost of ownership Data about the settings for each valve
Alfa Laval control and indicator units is automatically stored in the unit’s own
give you a remarkably low cost of memory. This important information
ownership via savings on time, is therefore fully protected against the
manpower and installation costs, as effects of any power failure.
well as by boosting production uptime
throughout the service life of the unit. Safe and rugged
Alfa Laval control and indicator units
ThinkTop and IndiTop units feature have well-proven features designed
modular, fully encapsulated (potted) to ensure maximum safety during
designs that are extremely robust and production by making sure that each
only have a small number of valve is doing exactly what it is
components. This saves on spare supposed to – regardless of conditions.
parts inventory and maintenance
costs throughout their service life. The “no touch” sensor system is
less sensitive to the effects of
Built to last temperature and vibration because
Alfa Laval control and indicator units they are moulded directly into the
are built for maximum durability, valve-top units.
providing long-term service both
“No touch” sensor
indoors and outdoors. They
comply with the stringent IP66 and
IP67 standards for protecting
Magnet
electronic equipment against
penetration by dust particles or liquids.
ThinkTop units are completely

watertight and suitable for use in any
known operating environment. They
are also fitted with GORE™ protective
venting technology that gets rid of any The sensor detects valve stem
accumulated moisture. movement with extremely high
accuracy. This means these units can
All the materials used help protect be set up with individual tolerance
against the effects of physical impact, bands for detecting any deviation in the
UV radiation and working environments opening/closing of the valve plug. This
in which grease, oil and chemicals may helps prevent any operating errors that
be present. might result in wasted production.
LKB Unique SSV Unique

butterfly valve single seat valve mixproof valve
ThinkTop
These top-level control and indicator units give you access to
the full range of electronic interfaces available for operating
solenoid valves, transmitting feedback signals and ensuring
the operator full benefit from the many technical features of
Alfa Laval sanitary valves.
ThinkTop units make it possible to fulfil all the requirements

for automated valve monitoring and control. They also
provide reliable, real-time data that paves the way to full
traceability for each production batch.
ThinkTop Basic
These are mid-level units that fulfil basic requirements for
the automated control and monitoring of sanitary valves,
with a reduced number of digital inputs and outputs.
Installing ThinkTop Basic units is both quick and easy,

and helps provide a cost-effective degree of flexibility
in controlling both automated and semi-automated
processing set-ups.
IndiTop
IndiTop indicator units are designed to transmit small
amounts of data as feedback about the current position
of any sanitary valve. No solenoids are used, eliminating
the need for adjustment over time and, making this a true
“set and forget” system.
These units are ideal for cost-effective use in either new

or existing installations where only low-level digital signals
are used.
Side indicator brackets

Certain Alfa Laval valve types are available with special side
indicator brackets for mounting a range of different sensors
and monitoring switches.
Automated valve control and monitoring 4

Getting the message across
Alfa Laval control and indicator units are designed to provide you and
your staff with accurate, reliable information about the exact operating
status of your sanitary-standard valves at any given time.
This important information is always provided in visual

form, with colour-coded LEDs that make sure your
operators can see the current valve position and whether
the power is on or off.
Alfa Laval control and indicator units can also provide

digital electronic feedback by relaying sensor data about
the exact valve position to a PLC (Programmable Logic
Controller), via a range of different industry-standard
Cable
configurations. These include traditional digital interfaces,
the relatively simple AS-Interface system and the more
advanced DeviceNet™ fieldbus interface
Combining bus systems and digital technologies

Alfa Laval equipment is compatible with all major
PLC digital input/output cards and gateways for
communication via other fieldbus systems. This makes
it easy to combine different types of control and
indication units and data communication interfaces
to meet your particular valve control needs at any
given time.
AS-Interface
Alfa Laval valve automation technology enables you to
combine different valves, different control equipment and
different communication protocols as you see fit, to deal
with your changing requirements.
Alfa Laval solutions also let you streamline interface

and wiring configurations by connecting feedback
signals from multiple control or indicator units into
one. This greatly reduces the investment required to
implement efficient, future-compatible valve control
and monitoring set-ups.
Combination
of different
communication
protocols
DeviceNet
Alfa Laval in brief
Alfa Laval is a leading global provider of
specialized products and engineered
solutions. Our equipment, systems and
services are dedicated to helping
customers to optimize the performance
of their processes. Time and
time again.
We help our customers to heat,
cool, separate and transport products
such as oil, water, chemicals,
beverages, foodstuffs, starch and
pharmaceuticals.
Our worldwide organization works
closely with customers in almost 100
countries to help them stay ahead.

Up-to-date Alfa Laval contact details for
all countries are always available on our
website at www.alfalaval.com
Alfa Laval is a registered trademark and owned by Alfa Laval Corporate AB, Sweden. © 2008 Alfa Laval
ThinkTop is a registered trademark and owned by Alfa Laval Corporate AB.
ESE00669EN 0804
6213
2/2-way servo assisted

Solenoid Valve for liquids
• Forced coupled diaphragm system

• Compact body from brass or stainless steel
• High flow rate (Kv value)
• Anti-waterhammer, low noise
• Diaphragm materials NBR, EPDM, FKM
Type 6213 can be combined with...
Type 2508 Type 1078

Cable plug Timer unit
The Type 6213 is a 2/2-way normally closed Technical data

solenoid valve with a forced coupled diaphragm Orifice DN 10 - 40 mm
system. It switches from 0 bar and can be used Body material Brass acc. to DIN EN 50930-6, stainless steel 1.4404
universally for fluids. For complete opening, Coil material Epoxy, Polyamide
a differential pressure of at least 0.1 bar is Coil insulation class H (Epoxy), B (Polyamide)
necessary. Inner part of valve
Brass body Brass, stainless steel and PPS
Stainless steel body Stainless steel and PPS
Circuit function A Seal material NBR, FKM, EPDM
Media
A Servo-assisted NBR Neutral fluids, water, hydraulic oil, oil without additives
2/2-way valve; FKM Per-solutions, hot oils with additives
normally closed, EPDM Oil and fat-free fluids
P
with 2-way pilot Ambient temperature Max. +55 °C
control Media temperature
NBR -10 to +80 °C
FKM 0 to +90 °C with polyamide coil / 0 - 120 ºC with Epoxy coil
EPDM -30 to +120 °C
Voltages 024/DC, 024/50, 230/50, 024/UC (others on request)
Voltage tolerance ±10%
Duty cycle 100% continuous rating
Electrical connection Tag connector acc. to DIN EN 175301-803 Form A (previously
DIN 43650) for cable plug Type 2508
(see Ordering chart for accessory)
Protection class IP 65 with cable plug
Installation As required, preferably with actuator upright
Approval DIN EN 60730
Response times1) 0.1 - 4 seconds

(depending on orifice and differential pressure)
1)
Measured at valve outlet at 6 bar and +20°C
Opening: pressure build-up 0 to 90%
Closing: pressure decay 100 to 10%
www.burkert.com p. 1/5
6213
Technical data
Power consumption
Orifice Coil Power consumption 1) Coil insulation class Weight
DN size Inrush Hold (hot coil) Seal Seal NBR brass stainless
AC DC AC [VA] AC [VA/W] DC [W] (hot coil) EPDM and FKM [kg] steel [kg]
10 32 40 34 14/8 10 (11) H B 0.4 0.4
13 32 40 36 14/8 10 (11) H B 0.45 0.55
20 32 40 38 14/8 10 (11) H B 1.0 1.1
25 42 42 150 37/16 72/4 H H 1.7 -
40 42 42 190 37/16 72/4 H H 3.5 -
1)
Values in brackets at coil temperature 20 ºC
Materials
Locknut:
Brass version: Steel (surface thick-film
passivated acc. to Rohs)
SS version: 1.4305
PTFE coated
Coil Insulation material: Polyamide or Epoxy
Stopper:
DN 10-13 mm: 1.4113
DN 25-40 mm: 1.4105
Shading ring: Cu (copper)

(only with AC voltage)
Plunger:
DN 10-13 mm: 1.4113
DN 25-40 mm: 1.4105
O-rings: NBR, FKM, EPDM
Bonnet: Durethan BKV30H
Plunger seal: NBR, FKM, EPDM
Cover:
DN 10-25 mm 1.4301
DN 40 brass
Spring: 1.4310
Diaphragm: NBR, FKM, EPDM
Diaphragm
support: PPSGF40
Valve body: Brass or stainless steel 1.4404
p. 2/5
6213
Ordering chart for valves (other versions on request)

Valves with brass or stainless steel body, without cable plug
DN 10-20
Item no. per voltage/frequency [V/Hz]
Orifice [mm]
connection
Pressure
Kv value
function
[m3/h] 1)
024/DC
024/50
230/50
Circuit
[bar] 2)
range
water
A 2/2-way valve NC Port
Brass body, NBR diaphragm (Polyamide coil)
G 1/4 10 1.9 0 - 10 139 100 139 101 139 103
G 3/8 10 1.9 0 - 10 125 653 125 654 125 656
G 1/2 13 3.6 0 - 10 125 657 125 658 125 660
G 3/4 20 8.3 0 - 10 126 284 126 285 126 287
Brass body, FKM diaphragm (Polyamide coil)
G 1/4 10 1.9 0 - 10 139 104 139 105 139 107
G 3/8 10 1.9 0 - 10 126 264 126 265 126 267
G 1/2 13 3.6 0 - 10 126 276 126 277 126 279
G 3/4 20 8.3 0 - 10 126 292 126 293 126 295
Brass body, EPDM diaphragm (Epoxy coil)
G 1/4 10 1.9 0 - 10 139 096 139 097 139 099
G 3/8 10 1.9 0 - 10 135 217 135 218 135 220
G 1/2 13 3.6 0 - 10 135 226 135 227 135 229
G 3/4 20 8.3 0 - 10 135 234 135 235 135 237
Stainless steel body, FKM diaphragm (Polyamide coil)
G 1/4 10 1.9 0 - 10 141 187 141 188 141 190
G 3/8 10 1.9 0 - 10 141 191 141 192 141 194
G 1/2 13 3.6 0 - 10 141 215 141 216 141 218
G 3/4 20 8.3 0 - 10 141 239 141 240 141 242
G1 20 8.3 0 - 10 141 243 141 244 141 246
DN 25-40
Item no. per voltage/frequency [V/Hz]
connection
024/UC *
Pressure
Kv value
function
[m3/h] 1)
024/50
230/50
Orifice
Circuit
[bar] 2)
range
water
[mm]
Port
A 2/2-way valve NC Brass body, NBR diaphragm (Epoxy coil)

G1 25 11.0 0 - 10 178 921 178 920 178 923
G 1 1/4 25 11.0 0 - 10 178 925 178 924 178 927
G 1 1/2 40 30.0 0 - 10 178 947 178 946 178 950
G2 40 30.0 0 - 10 178 953 178 951 178 956
Brass body, FKM diaphragm (Epoxy coil)
G1 25 11.0 0 - 10 178 929 178 928 178 931
G 1 1/4 25 11.0 0 - 10 178 933 178 932 178 935
G 1 1/2 40 30.0 0 - 10 178 959 178 957 178 963
G2 40 30.0 0 - 10 178 967 178 965 178 970
Brass body, EPDM diaphragm (Epoxy coil)
G1 25 11.0 0 - 10 178 913 178 912 178 915
G 1 1/4 25 11.0 0 - 10 178 917 178 916 178 919
G 1 1/2 40 30.0 0 - 10 178 937 178 936 178 939
G2 40 30.0 0 - 10 178 941 178 940 178 945
1)
Measured at +20ºC, 1 bar 2) pressure at valve inlet and free outlet
2)
Pressure data [bar]: Overpressure with respect to atmospheric pressure.
Please note that the cable plug has to be ordered separately, see Ordering chart for accessory and separate datasheet, Type 2508
* For DN 25 and DN 40 with 24 V/UC, a cable plug with an integrated high-power electronics is provided as part of the delivery.
Further versions on request

Port connection Voltage Seal Material
DN 10 G 1/2, 13 G 3/4, 20 G 1, NPT, Rc Non-standard voltages EPDM with KTW/FDA approval
Temperature Approvals
FKM version up to +120ºC with Epoxy coil UL, UR, CSA
p. 3/5
6213
Ordering chart for accessory

Cable plug Type 2508 according to DIN EN 175301-803 Form A
frequency
Voltage /
Circuitry
Fixing screw
Item no.
Flat seal
None (standard) 0 - 250 V AC/DC 008 376
further versions see datasheet Type 2508
The delivery of a cable plug includes the flat seal and the fixing screw. For other cable plug versions acc. to DIN EN 175301-803 Form A (previously
DIN 43650), see separate datasheet Type 2508.
Dimensions [mm]
DN 10 - 20
G Thread AC coil DC coil DC and AC coil

DN G F B H K B H K C L (Brass/St.st.) M
10 G 1/4 12 82.0 32 45 82.5 40 51 37.5 50/55 3.5
G 3/8 12
G 1/2 14
13 G 1/2 14 95.5 32 45 96.0 40 51 45.0 58/65 3.5
G 3/4 16
20 G 3/4 16 115.5 32 45 116.0 40 51 66.0 80/100 3.5
G1 18
p. 4/5
6213
Dimensions [mm]
DN 25 - 40
A
B
D
F* F* G*
E SW
L
12
K
C
J
H
D
*G * NPT * Rc
DN A B C D E F1 G1 F2 G2 F3 G3 H J K L SW M
165 18 G1 16.8 NPT 1 16.8 Rc 1 95 41
25 137.5 78 78 40.5 43 27 55.5 7
169.5 20 G1 1/4 17.3 NPT 1 1/4 19.1 Rc 1 1/4 95 50
186 22 G1 1/2 17.3 NPT 1 1/2 19.1 Rc1 1/2 132 60
40 149 104.5 104.5 69 43 27 55.5 7
191 24 G2 17.6 NPT 2 23.4 Rc 2 132 70
To find your nearest Bürkert facility, click on the orange box www.burkert.com
In case of special application conditions, Subject to alterations 0810/4_EU-en_00891750

please consult for advice. © Christian Bürkert GmbH & Co. KG
p. 5/5
Instruction Manual
LKB Automatic or Manual Butterfly Valve and LKB-LP Low Pressure Butterfly Valve
TD 403-263
IM70730-EN6 2010-04
/RIGINAL)NSTRUCTIONS
$! /VERS TTELSEAFORIGINALEINSTRUKTIONER
)4 4RADUZIONEDELLEISTRUZIONIORIGINALI
&) !LKUPER ISTENK YTT OHJEIDENK NN S
%3 4RADUCCI NDELASINSTRUCCIONESORIGINALES
04 "2 4RADU ODASINSTRU ESORIGINAIS

$ECLARATIONOF#ONFORMITY
4HEDESIGNATINGCOMPANY
!LFA,AVAL
#OMPANY.AME
!LBUEN$+ +OLDING$ENMARK

!DDRESS

0HONE.O
HEREBYDECLARETHAT
!UTOMATICOR-ANUAL"UTTERFLY6ALVE,+"
$ENOMINATION4 YPE 9EAR
ISINCONFORMITYWITHTHEFOLLOWINGDIRECTIVES
-ACHINERY$IRECTIVE%#
$. $.4HEVALVESAREINCOMPLIANCEWITHTHE0RESSURE%QUIPMENT$IRECTIVE%#ANDWAS
SUBJECTEDTOTHEFOLLOWINGASSESSMENTPROCEDURE-ODULE!#ATEGORY)&LUIDSGROUP

-ANAGER0RODUCT#ENTRES
#OMPACT(EAT%XCHANGERS&LUID(ANDLING "JARNE3NDERGAARD
4ITLE .AME
!LFA,AVAL
#OMPANY 3IGNATURE
$ESIGNATION
$ECLARATIONOF#ONFORMITY
4HEDESIGNATINGCOMPANY
!LFA,AVAL
#OMPANY.AME
!LBUEN$+ +OLDING$ENMARK

!DDRESS

0HONE.O
HEREBYDECLARETHAT
,OW0RESSURE "UTTERFLY6ALVE,+" ,0
$ENOMINATION4 YPE 9EAR
ISINCONFORMITYWITHTHEFOLLOWINGDIRECTIVES
-ACHINERY$IRECTIVE%#
$. $.4HEVALVESAREINCOMPLIANCEWITHTHE0RESSURE%QUIPMENT$IRECTIVE%#ANDWAS
SUBJECTEDTOTHEFOLLOWINGASSESSMENTPROCEDURE-ODULE!#ATEGORY)&LUIDSGROUP

-ANAGER0RODUCT#ENTRES
#OMPACT(EAT%XCHANGERS&LUID(ANDLING "JARNE3NDERGAARD
4ITLE .AME
!LFA,AVAL
#OMPANY 3IGNATURE
$ESIGNATION
Table of Contents
The information contained herein is correct at the time of issue but may be subject to change without prior notice.
1. Safety ........................................................................................................................ 8
1.1 Important information ....................................................................................... 8
1.2 Warning signs .................................................................................................. 8
1.3 Safety precautions ........................................................................................... 9
2. Installation ................................................................................................................ 10
2.1 Unpacking/Delivery .......................................................................................... 10
2.2 General installation ........................................................................................... 11
2.3 Welding ............................................................................................................ 12
2.4 Fitting actuator/bracket/handle on the valve (optional extras) ............................ 13
3. Operation .................................................................................................................. 14
3.1 Operation ......................................................................................................... 14
3.2 Fault finding ..................................................................................................... 15
3.3 Recommended cleaning .................................................................................. 16
4. Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 17
4.1 General maintenance ....................................................................................... 17
4.2 Dismantling of valve - LKB/LKB-2 .................................................................... 19
4.3 Assembly of valve - LKB/LKB-2 ....................................................................... 20
4.4 Dismantling of valve - LKB-F ............................................................................ 21
4.5 Assembly of valve - LKB-F ............................................................................... 22
4.6 Dismantling of actuator .................................................................................... 23
4.7 Assembly of actuator ....................................................................................... 24
5. Technical data........................................................................................................... 25
5.1 Technical data .................................................................................................. 25
6. Parts List / Service kits ........................................................................................... 26

6.1 LKB, LKB-2, LKB-F Butterfly valves, Drawings ................................................. 26
6.2 LKB-LP Butterfly Valve, Drawings ..................................................................... 27
6.3 LKLA and LKLA-T Actuators Ø85 mm, Drawings ............................................. 28
6.4 LKLA and LKLA-T Actuators Ø133 mm, Drawings ........................................... 29
6.5 LKB Butterfly valve - Parts list .......................................................................... 30
6.6 LKB-F Buttefly valve - Parts list ........................................................................ 32
6.7 LKB-2 Butterfly valve - Parts list ....................................................................... 34
6.8 LKB-LP Butterfly Valve- Parts list ...................................................................... 36
6.9 LKLA Actuators ø85 mm (NO/NC) - Parts list ................................................... 38
6.10 LKLA Actuators ø85 mm (A/A) - Parts list ......................................................... 40
6.11 LKLA Actuators DN 125 - 150 ø85 mm (A/A) ................................................... 42
6.12 LKLA Actuators ø133 mm (NO/NC).................................................................. 44
6.13 LKLA Actuators ø133 mm (A/A) ....................................................................... 46
6.14 LKLA-T ø85 mm (NO/NC) ................................................................................ 48
6.15 LKLA-T ø85 mm (A/A) ...................................................................................... 50
6.16 LKLA-T DN 125 - 150 ø85 mm (A/A)................................................................ 52
6.17 LKLA-T ø133 mm (NO/NC) .............................................................................. 54
6.18 LKLA-T ø133 mm (A/A) .................................................................................... 56
6.19 Handles ............................................................................................................ 58
7
Installation:
1.1 Important information
Always 1. Safety
1.2 Warning signs
Always
Never
Never
Unsafe
Never practices and other important information are emphasized in this manual.
Never are emphasized by means of special signs.
Warnings
Always read the manual before using the valve!

Operation:
WARNING!
Never
Indicates
Never that special procedures must be followed to avoid severe personal injury.
Always
Always
CAUTION!
Never that special procedures must be followed to avoid damage to the valve.
Indicates
Never
Always
NOTE!
Always
Always read
Indicates the manual
important before
information using the
to simplify pump!practices.
or clarify
Maintenance:
WARNING
Always
General
Always warning.
Never
CAUTION
Never
Never
Never
Caustic
NOTE agents.
Transportation:
Always secure that compressed air is released

Always secure that all connections is disconnected before attemt to remove the valve from the installation
Always drain liquid out of valves before transportation
Always used predesigned lifting points if defined
Always secure sufficient fixing of the valve during transportation - if special designed packaging material is available it
must be used
Recycling information.
• Unpacking
- Packing material consists of wood, plastics, cardboard boxes and in some cases metal straps.
- Wood and cardboard boxes can be reused, recycled or used for energy recovery.
- Plastics should be recycled or burnt at a licensed waste incineration plant.
- Metal straps should be sent for material recycling.
• Maintenance
- During maintenance oil and wear parts in the machine are replaced.
- All metal parts should be sent for material recycling.
- Worn out or defective electronic parts should be sent to a licensed handler for material recycling.
- Oil and all non metal wear parts must be taken care of in agreement with local regulations.
• Scrapping
- At end of use, the equipment shall be recycled according to relevant, local regulations. Beside the equipment itself, any
hazardous residues from the process liquid must be considered and dealt with in a proper manner. When in doubt, or in the
absence of local regulations, please contact the local Alfa Laval sales company.
8
1. Safety 1.3 Safety precautions
All warnings in the manual are summarized on this page.

“Mushrooms” = Fastening connections on the end cap.
Pay special attention to the instructions below so that severe personal injury or damage to the valve are avoided.
Installation:
- Always observe the technical data (see chapter 5).

- Always release compressed air after use.
- Never touch the coupling between the valve body and the actuator if compressed air is
supplied to the actuator.
Operation:
Always observe the technical data (see chapter 5).

Never touch the valve or the pipelines when processing hot liquids or when sterilizing.
Never touch the coupling between the valve body and the actuator if compressed air is
Always handle lye and acid with great care.
Maintenance:
- Always observe the technical data (see chapter 5)

- The valve must never be hot when servicing it.
- The valve/actuator and the pipelines must never be pressurised when servicing the valve/
actuator.
Never stick your fingers through the valve ports if the valve is supplied with compressed air.
Never touch the coupling between the valve body and the actuator if compressed air is
The actuator springs are not caged (ø85 mm, NC/NO).
- Never use compressed air for removing the end cap of the actuator.
- Always fit the end cap with the “mushrooms” turned outwards and position it correctly
before supplying compressed air to the actuator.
9
2.1 Unpacking/Delivery 2. Installation
The instruction manual is part of the delivery. Study the instructions carefully.
The items refer to the parts list and service kits section.
The valve is supplied as separate parts as standard (for welding).
The valve is assembled before delivery, if it is supplied with fittings (LKB/LKB-2).
Step 1
NOTE!
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for incorrect unpacking.
Check the delivery:
1. Complete valve (see 2).
2. Complete actuator, if supplied (see 3).
3. Bracket for actuator, if supplied (see 3).
4. Complete handle, if supplied.
5. Delivery note.
6. Instruction manual.
Step 2 Separate parts for welding!
Standard delivery of valve parts:
1. Two valve body halves (1).
2. Valve disc (2) fitted in seal ring (5).
3. Two bushes (3, 4) fitted on the disc stem.
4. A set of screws and nuts (6).
5. Two flanges (7) and two flange seal rings(8), (LKB-F).
LKB/LKB-2 LKB-F (only for welding)
Step 3 LKLA - ø133mm

Delivery of actuator and bracket:
1. Complete actuator with coupling and activating ring LKLA - ø85mm
(ø85mm) or indication pin (ø133mm).
2. Bracket with screws for the actuator.
Bracket with
screws
Coupling
Step 4 Actuator
1. Clean the valve/valve parts for possible packing materials. Handle
2. Clean the handle or the actuator, if supplied.
Remove
packing
materials!
Valve
Step 5
Actuator
Inspection! Handle
1. Inspect the valve/valve parts for visible transport
damage.
2. Inspect the handle or the actuator, if supplied.
Caution!
Avoid damaging the valve/valve parts. Valve
Avoid damaging the handle or the actuator, if supplied.
10
2. Installation 2.2 General installation
Study the instructions carefully. The valve has welding ends as standard but can also be supplied with fittings (not LKB-F).
NC = Normally closed.
NO = Normally open.
A/A = Air/air activated.
Step 1

- Never touch the coupling between the valve body and the actuator if compressed air is supplied to the actuator.
NOTE!
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for incorrect installation.
Step 2 Risk of
Avoid stressing the valve. damage!
Pay special attention to:
- Vibrations.
- Thermal expansion of the tubes.
- Excessive welding.
- Overloading of the pipelines.
Step 3
Fittings: Remember
Ensure that the connections are tight. seal rings!
Step 4
Position of actuator:
Position the water rejector on the actuator correctly. (The
actuator can be installed in any position).
Turn the ventilation

opening downwards!
Air connection of actuator: Air Air Air

Connect compressed air correctly.
Pay special attention to the warnings! R1/8”(BSP)
NC NO A/A
Pre-use check:
Open and close the valve several times to ensure that
the valve disc moves smoothly against the sealring.
Pay special attention to the warnings!
11
2.3 Welding 2. Installation
Study the instructions carefully. The valve is supplied as separate parts to facilitate the welding.
LKB: For ISO tubes.
LKB-2: For DIN tubes.
LKB-F: With flange connection.
LKB/LKB-2
1. Weld the valve body halves into the pipelines.
2. Maintain the minimum clearance (A) so that the actuator can be removed.
3. If welding both valve body halves, ensure that they can be moved axially B1 mm, so that the valve parts can be
removed.
4. Assemble the valve in accordance with the steps 1-5 in section 4.3 after the welding.
LKB-F
1. Weld the flanges into the pipelines.
2. Maintain the minimum clearances (A and B2) so that the actuator and the valve parts can be removed.
3. Assemble the valve in accordance with the steps 1-5 in section 4.3 after welding.
Pre-use check - LKB/LKB-2/LKB-F:

Open and close the valve several times to ensure that the valve disc moves smoothly against the seal ring.
A
B2
Caution!
B1 B1
A(mm) Ø85 Ø133 B1(mm) B2(mm)

LKLA LKLA-T LKLA LKLA-T 1” 20 43
1” 245 1½” 20 43
1½” 245 2” 20 47
2” 255 2½” 24 46
2½” 265 3” 24 59
3” 265 4” 37 59
4” 290 +172 420 +172 DN25 20 43
DN25 245 (incl. (incl. DN32 20 43
DN32 245 top top DN40 20 43
DN40 250 unit) unit) DN50 20 47
DN50 260 DN65 24 59
DN65 270 DN80 23 59
DN80 275 DN100 37 59
DN100 290 420 DN125 40 63
DN125 315 440 DN250 41 79
DN250 325 445
12
2. Installation 2.4 Fitting actuator/bracket/handle on the valve (optional extras)
Study the instructions carefully and pay special attention to the warnings!
NO = Normally open.
Bracket/indication: Screw for bracket

1. Fit the bracket as shown. Bracket
2. Fit and tighten the screws. Direction
3. Fit the activating ring/indication pin as shown. of rotation
Activating ring/
indication
Drain hole
pin
Actuator/bracket - NC: NC actuator No pressure!

1. Ensure that the valve is closed by checking the
position of the groove of the disc stem top.
2. Fit the actuator/bracket in accordance with step 4 in
section 4.3.
Closed!
Actuator/bracket - NO: NO actuator No pressure!

1. Ensure that the valve is open by checking the position of
the groove of the disc stem top.
2. Fit the actuator/bracket in accordance with step 4 in
section 4.3.
Open!
Actuator/bracket - A/A: A/A actuator

1. Ensure that the valve is open by checking the position of
the groove of the disc stem top.
2. Supply compressed air to the actuator.
Air pressure!
3. Fit the actuator/bracket in accordance with step 4 in Open!
section 4.3.
Handle/indication:
1. Fit the standard handle on the valve so that the screw
Standard Handle with
can enter the hole in the disc connection.
handle position
2. Fit the handle with position indication as shown and in
indication
accordance with the steps 3-4 in section 4.3.
Pre-use check:
Open and close the valve several times to ensure that it
operates smoothly.
13
3.1 Operation 3. Operation
The valve is automatically or manually operated by means of an actuator or a handle.
Step 1
Always observe the technical data (see chapter 5).
NOTE!
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for incorrect
operation.
Step 2
Burning
danger!
Never touch the valve or the pipelines when processing hot
liquids or when sterilizing.
Step 3 Air
Never touch the coupling between the valve body and the
actuator if compressed air is supplied to the actuator.
Rotating parts!
Step 4 Air
Operation by means of actuator:
Automatic on/off operation by means of compressed air.
Rotating parts!
Step 5 Closed valve

Operation by means of standard handle:
1. Manual on/off operation.
2. Pull the handle outwards while rotating it.
Open valve Open valve
NOTE!
This also applies for the Lockable Multiposition Handle.
Closed valve
TD 403-114
Step 6 Closed valve

Operation by means of regulating handle:
1. Manual flow regulation because of infinite locking positions.
2. Loosen the handle, rotate it and tighten again.
Open valve Open valve
Closed valve
14
3. Operation 3.2 Fault finding
Pay attention to possible break-down. Study the instructions carefully.

NC = Normally closed. NO = Normally open. A/A = Air/air activated.
NOTE!
Study the maintenance instructions carefully before
replacing worn parts. - See section 4.1
Problem Cause/result Repair
- External leakage - Worn seal ring Replace the seal ring and the bushes
- Internal leakage by closed valve - Worn flange seal ring (LKB-F)
(normal wear)
- External leakage - High pressure - Change rubber grade

- Internal leakage by closed valve - High temperature - Change the operation conditions
(too early) - Aggressive liquids
- Many activations
- Difficult to open/close Incorrect seal ring (swelling) Replace by a seal ring of a different
- Damage of disc connection rubber grade
(high torque)
Difficult to open/close - 900 displacement of the actuator - Fit correctly (see section 2.4)
- Incorrect actuator function (NC,NO) - Change from NC to NO or
vice versa
- Worn actuator bearings - Replace the bearings
- Dirt penetration into the actuator - Service the actuator
15
3.3 Recommended cleaning 3. Operation
The valve is designed for cleaning in place (CIP). CIP = Cleaning In Place.
NaOH = Caustic Soda.
HNO3= Nitric acid.
Step 1 Caustic danger!
Always use rubber gloves! Always use protective goggles!

Step 2 Burning danger!
Never touch the valve or the pipelines when sterilizing.
Step 3 1. 1% by weight NaOH at 700C (1580f ).

Examples of cleaning agents: 1 kg (2.2 lbs) + 100 l (26.4 gal ) = Cleaning agent.
Use clean water, free from clorides. NaOH water
2.2 l (0.6 gal ) + 100 l (26.4 gal ) = Cleaning agent.
33% NaOH water
2. 0.5% by weight HNO3 at 700C (1580f ).
0.7 l (0.2 gal ) + 100 l (26.4 gal ) = Cleaning agent.

53% HNO3 water
Step 4
1. Avoid excessive concentration of the cleaning agent
⇒ Dose gradually!
2. Adjust the cleaning flow to the process

⇒ Sterilization of milk/viscous liquids
⇒ Increase the cleaning flow!
Always rinse well with clean water after the cleaning. Always!
Clean water Cleaning

agents
Step 6
NOTE!
The cleaning agents must be stored/discharged in accord-
ance with current rules/directives.
16
4. Maintenance 4.1 General maintenance
Maintain the valve and the actuator carefully. Study the instructions carefully and pay special attention to the warnings!
Always keep spare seal rings, rubber seals, bushes and actuator bearings in stock.
“Mushrooms” = Fastening connections on the end cap.
Step 1

NOTE!
All scrap must be stored/discharged in accordance with current rules/directives.
Step 2 Atmospheric
pressure
required!
- The valve must never be hot when servicing it.
- The valve/actuator and the pipelines must never be
pressurised when servicing the valve/actuator.
Burning
danger!
Step 3 Air
Never stick your fingers through the valve ports if com- Cutting
pressed air is supplied to the actuator. danger!
Step 4 Air
Never touch the coupling between the valve body and the
actuator if compressed air is supplied to the actuator.
Rotating
parts!
Step 5
Actuator size ø85mm (NC/NO):

The actuator springs are not caged.
Springs -
Caution!
Step 6 Caution! “Mushrooms”

End cap
End cap of actuator:

- Never remove the end cap by using compressed air.
- Always fit the end cap with the “mushrooms” turned
outwards and position it correctly before supplying
compressed air to the actuator.
17
4.1 General maintenance 4. Maintenance
Maintain the valve and the actuator carefully.

Study the instructions carefully.
Always keep spare seal rings, rubber seals, bushes and actuator bearings in stock.
Recommended spare parts: Service kits (see chapter 6).

Order service kits from the service kits list (see chapter 6)
Ordering spare parts

Contact the Sales Department.
Valve seal rings Valve bushes Actuator rubber Actuator bearings

seals
Preventive mainte- Replace after 12 Replace when replac- Replace after 24

nance months ing the valve seal months
rings
Maintenance after Replace by the end Replace when replac- Replace when pos-
leakage (leakage nor- of the day ing the valve seal sible
mally starts slowly) rings
Planned maintenance - Regular inspection Replace when replac- - Regular inspection Replace when they
for leakage and ing the valve seal for leakage and become worn
smooth operation rings smooth operation
- Keep a record of
the valve - Keep a record of
- Use the statistics the actuator
for planning of
inspections - Use the statistics
for planning of
Replace after leakage inspections
Replace after air

leakage
Lubrication Before fitting None Before fitting When replacing ac-

(use USDA-H1 ap- - Molycote Long tuator rubber seals
proved) term 2 Plus (Δ)
- Unisilcon L641(*) - Molycote 1132(Δ) - Molycote Long term
- Paraliq (*) GTE (for aggressive 2 Plus (Δ)
703 enviroment)
- Molycote 111 (D) - Molycote 1132 (Δ)
(for aggressive
enviroment)
18
4.2 Dismantling of valve - LKB/LKB-2/LKB-LP 4. Maintenance
Study the instructions carefully. The items refer to the parts list and service kits section.
Handle scrap correctly.
LKB: For ISO tubes.
LKB-2: For DIN tubes.
Step 1
Valve with actuator:
1. Remove screws and nuts (6).
2. Remove the bracket with the actuator.
Step 2
Valve with handle:
1. Remove the complete handle.
2. Remove screws and nuts (6).
Step 3
Remove seal ring (5) together with valve disc (2).
Step 4
Remove bushes (3,4) from the disc stems.
Step 5
Remove valve disc (2) from seal ring (5).
NOTE!
For the valve sizes 25-38mm and DN25-40 it is recom-
mended to remove the valve disc by using a special
service tool.
19
4. Maintenance 4.3 Assembly of valve - LKB/LKB-2/LKB-LP
LKB: For ISO tubes. LKB-2: For DIN tubes.
Lubricate the seal ring before fitting it.
Lubricate the disc stem before fitting the bushes.
Step 1
1. Lubricate the pin holes in seal ring (5), (important for
Silicone and Viton).
2. Fit valve disc (2) in the seal ring (5).
NOTE!
For the valve sizes 25-38mm and DN25-40 it is
recommended to fit the valve disc by using a special service
tool.
Step 2
1. Fit bushes (3,4) on the disc stem.
2. Fit seal ring (5) together with valve disc (2) between the
two valve body halves (1).
CAUTION!
Rotate the valve disc so that the valve is open before
tightening screws and nuts (6).
Step 3
Valve with handle:
1. Fit screws and nuts (6) and torque tighten in accordance
with the requirements (see 5).
2. Fit the complete handle on the disc connection and
tighten the screw on the handle.
NOTE!
This also applies for the Lockable Multiposition Handle.
Step 4
Valve with actuator: Fit correctly!
1. Fit the actuator with the bracket so that the disc (See section 2.4)
connection enters the coupling (see section 2.4).
2. Fit screws and nuts (6) and torque tighten in accordance
with the requirements so that the bracket is fixed to the
valve (see 5).
Step 5
Pre-use check:
Check that the valve disc moves smoothly against the seal ring.
Tools/torque values for assembly of the valve body halves:
25mm 38mm 51mm 63.5mm 76mm 101.6mm

Valve size DN 25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100 DN125 DN150
Allen Key 5mm 5mm 5mm 6mm 6mm 6mm 8mm 8mm 8mm
(0,2”) (0,2”) (0,2”) (0,24”) (0,24”) (0,24”) (0,3”) (0,3”) (0,3”)
Recomm.Torque 18Nm 18Nm 18Nm 20Nm 20Nm 20Nm 38Nm 38Nm 38Nm
(13 lbf-ft) (13 lbf-ft) (13 lbf-ft) (15 lbf-ft) (15 lbf-ft) (15 lbf-ft) (28 lbf-ft) (28 lbf-ft) (28lbf-ft)
20
4.4 Dismantling of valve - LKB-F 4. Maintenance

Step 1
1. Loosen the two upper screws and nuts (6).
2. Loosen and remove the two lower screws and nuts (6).
3. Remove the valve unit from flanges (7).
Step 2
1. Remove the two upper screws and nuts (6), (4 nuts)
2. If supplied, remove the actuator from the valve body
unit.
3. If supplied loosen the screw and remove the handle
from the valve body unit.
Step 3
1. Loosen and remove the two center screws and nuts (6).
2. Remove seal ring (5) together with valve disc (2).
3. Remove flange seal rings (8).
Step 4
Remove bushes (3,4) from the disc stems.
Step 5
Remove valve disc (2) from seal ring (5).
NOTE!
For the valve sizes 25-38mm and DN25-40 it is recommended
to remove the valve disc by using a special service tool.
21
4. Maintenance 4.5 Assembly of valve - LKB-F
LKB-F: With flange connection,
Lubricate the seal rings before fitting them.
Lubricate the disc stem before fitting the bushes.
Step 1
1. Lubricate the pin holes in seal ring (5), (important for
Silicone and Viton).
2. Fit valve disc (2) on seal ring (5).
3. Fit bushes (3,4) in the disc stem.
NOTE!
For the valve size 25-38mm and DN25-40 it is
recommended to fit the valve disc by using a special service
tool.
Step 2
1. Lubricate flange seal rings (8) with water and fit them.
2. Fit seal ring (5) together with valve disc (2) between the
valve body halves (1).
3. Fit and tighten the two center screws and nuts (6).
CAUTION!
Rotate the valve disc so that the valve is open before tight-
ening screws and nuts (6).
Step 3
1. If supplied, fit the handle and tighten the screw.
2. If supplied, fit the actuator.
3. Fit the two upper screws and nuts (6), (4 nuts).
Step 4
1. Fit the valve unit between flanges (7).
2. Fit and tighten the two lower screws and nuts (6).
3. Tighten the two upper screws and nuts (6).
Step 5
Pre-use check:
Check that the valve disc moves smoothly against the seal ring.
Tools/torque values for assembly of the valve body halves:
25mm 38mm 51mm 63.5mm 76mm 101.6mm

Valve size DN 25 DN32 DN40 DN50 DN65 DN80 DN100 DN125 DN150
Spanner flats 10mm 10mm 10mm 13mm 13mm 13mm 17mm 17mm 17mm
(0.4”) (0.4”) (0.4”) (0.5”) (0.5”) (0.5”) (0.67”) (0.67”) (0.67”)
Recomm.Torque 18Nm 18Nm 18Nm 20Nm 20Nm 20Nm 38Nm 38Nm 38Nm
(13 lbf-ft ) (13 lbf-ft ) (13 lbf-ft ) (15 lbf-ft ) (15 lbf-ft ) (15 lbf-ft ) (28 lbf-ft ) (28 lbf-ft ) (28 lbf-ft )
22
4.6 Dismantling of actuator 4. Maintenance
Step 1
1. Press end cap (5) into air cylinder (1).
Use a press!
2. Remove retaining ring (6).
Step 2
NC/NO actuator:
Release the pressure on end cap (5) carefully and remove the
end cap.
Pay special attention to the warning!
Step 3
A/A actuator:
Remove end cap (5) by hand.
Step 4
Remove piston (3) and the springs.
NOTE!
- The actuator size ø133mm has a caged spring assembly.
- The air/air actuator has no springs.
Step 5
Remove connex pin (16) and coupling (17) from rotating
cylinder stem (2).
Step 6
Remove rotating cylinder (2) and the remaining internal parts
from air cylinder (1).
23
4. Maintenance 4.7 Assembly of actuator

Lubricate the rubber seals before fitting them. Lubricate the bearings.
Clean the piston before assembly.
Step 1
Fit rotating cylinder (2) in air cylinder (1).
Step 2 Fit the connex

Fit coupling (17) on rotating cylinder stem (2) and fit connex pin correctly!
pin (16).
Step 3
Fit the springs in rotating cylinder (2) and fit piston (3) care-
fully.
CAUTION!
Fit the piston correctly in relation to the bearings.
NOTE! Fit correctly!
The air/air actuator is has no springs.
Step 4
A/A actuator:
1. Fit end cap (5) sufficiently into air cylinder (1) so that
retaining ring (6) can be fitted in the air cylinder.
2. Position the end cap correctly by hand.
Step 5
1. Fit end cap (5) in air cylinder (1) and press sufficiently
down so that retaining ring (6) can be fitted in the air
cylinder.
2. Release the pressure on the end cap. Use a press!
NC/NO actuator
Step 6
Pre-use check:
2. Activate the actuator several times to ensure that it oper
ates smoothly.
24
5.1 Technical data 5. Technical data
It is important to observe the technical data during installation, operation and maintenance.
Inform the personnel about the technical data.
Valve - data
Max. product pressure................................................................................. 1000kPa (10bar) (145 psi )
Min. product pressure.................................................................................. Full vacuum
Temperature range ...................................................................................... -100 C to +950 C (140F to 2030F )
Product acc. to PED 97/23/EC ................................................................... Fluids group 2
Data - valve/actuator
Valve - materials
Product wetted steel parts........................................................................... AISI 304 or AISI 316L
Other steel parts .......................................................................................... AISI 304
Rubber grades ............................................................................................ EPDM, Silicone (Q), Viton (FPM), HNBR, PFA
Bushes for valve disc ................................................................................... PVDF
Finish ........................................................................................................... Semi bright
Actuator - data
Max. air pressure
Materials ......................................................................................... 700kPa (7bar) (101.5 psi )
- valve/actuator
Min. air pressure, NC or NO......................................................................... 400kPa (4bar) (58 psi )
Temperature range ...................................................................................... -250 C to +900 C (-130F t0 + 940F )
Air consumption (litres free air) - ø85 mm ................................................. 0.24 x p (bar)
- ø133 mm ............................................... 0,95 x p (bar)
Actuator - materials
Actuator body.............................................................................................. AISI 304
Piston .......................................................................................................... Light alloy, bronze for ø85mm A/A
Seals ........................................................................................................... Nitrile (NBR)
Housing for switches ................................................................................... Noryl (PPO)
Finish ........................................................................................................... Semi bright
Noise
One meter away from - and 1.6 meter above the exhaust the noise level of a valve actuator will be approximately 77db(A)
without noise damper and approximately 72 db(A) with damper - Measured at 7 bars air-pressure.
25
6.1 LKB, LKB-2, LKB-F Butterfly valves 6. Parts List / Service kits
The drawings include all parts of the valves.

For parts list, please see section 6.5 - 6.7
LKB/LKB-2
LKB-F
26
6. Parts list / Service kits 6.2 LKB-LP Butterfly Valve
The drawings include all parts of the actuators.

For parts list, please see section 6.8.
27
6.3 LKLA and LKLA-T Actuators Ø85 mm 6. Parts List / Service kits

For parts list, please see section 6.9 - 6.18.
LKLA-T (NC-NO) LKLA-T (A/A)
LKLA (NC-NO) LKLA (A/A)
DN 125-150 (A/A)
28
6. Parts list / Service kits 6.4 LKLA and LKLA-T Actuators Ø133 mm

For parts list, please see section 6.9 - 6.18.
LKLA-T (NC-NO) LKLA-T (A/A)
LKLA (NC-NO) LKLA (A/A)
29
6.5 LKB Butterfly valves 6. Parts List / Service kits
The drawing and parts list include all items.
Parts List for LKB Service Kits for LKB

Pos. Qty. Denomination Denomination Item number
Product wetted parts
1 2 Valve body half, welding 8 - 25mm/DN 25
1a 2 Valve body half, male EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3028
2 1 Valve disc Q ...................................................................9611-92-3034
3Δ 1 Bush FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3040
4Δ 1 Bush HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3160
5Δ 1 Seal ring 8 - 38mm/DN 40
6 1 Set of screws and nuts EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3029
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3035
Δ:Service Kit - EPDM, Q, FPM, HNBR, PFA FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3041
(See Spare Parts List) HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3161
PFA ...............................................................9611-92-3183
8 - 51mm/DN 50
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3030
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3036
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3042
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3162
PFA ...............................................................9611-92-3184
8 - 63.5mm/DN 65
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3031
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3037
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3043
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3163
PFA ...............................................................9611-92-3185
10 - 76mm
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3032
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3038
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3044
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3164
PFA ...............................................................9611-92-3186
10 - DN 80
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3051
10 - 12 - 101.6mm/DN 100
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3033
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3039
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3045
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3165
PFA ...............................................................9611-92-3187
15 - DN 150
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3046
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3047
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3048
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3197
30
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.5 LKB Butterfly valves
The drawings show all items of the valves.
31
6.6 LKB-F Butterfly valves 6. Parts List / Service kits
Parts List for LKB-F Service Kits for LKB-F - DIN

Product wetted parts
1 2 Valve body half, welding 25mm
1a 2 Valve body half, male EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3100
2 1 Valve disc Q ...................................................................9611-92-3109
3Δ 1 Bush FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3118
4Δ 1 Bush 38mm
5Δ 1 Seal ring EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3101
6 1 Set of screws and nuts Q ...................................................................9611-92-3110
7 2 Flange FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3119
8Δ 2 Flange seal ring
DN 40
Δ:Service Kit - EPDM, Q, FPM, HNBR, PFA EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3102
(See Spare Parts List) Q ...................................................................9611-92-3111
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3120
Service Kits for LKB-F - ISO
Denomination Item number DN 50
Product wetted parts EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3103
25mm Q ...................................................................9611-92-3112
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3058 FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3121
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3064
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3070 DN 65
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3104
38mm Q ...................................................................9611-92-3113
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3059 FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3122
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3065
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3071 DN 80
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3105
51mm Q ...................................................................9611-92-3114
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3060 FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3123
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3066
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3072 DN 100
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3106
63.5mm Silicone (Q) ....................................................9611-92-3115
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3061 FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3124
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3067
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3073 DN 125
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3107
76mm Silicone (Q) ....................................................9611-92-3116
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3062 FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3125
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3068
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3074 DN 150
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3108
Silicone (Q) ....................................................9611-92-3117
101.6mm FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3126
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3063
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3069
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3099
32
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.6 LKB-F Butterfly valves
33
6.7 LKB-2 Butterfly valves 6. Parts List / Service kits
Parts List for LKB-2 Service Kits for LKB-2

8 - DN 25
1 2 Valve body half, welding EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3075
1a 2 Valve body half, male Q ...................................................................9611-92-3083
2 1 Valve disc FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3091
3Δ 1 Bush HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3210
4Δ 1 Bush 8 - DN 32
5Δ 1 Seal ring EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3076
6 1 Set of screws and nuts Q ...................................................................9611-92-3084
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3092
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3211
Δ:Service Kit - EPDM, Q, FPM, HNBR, PFA
(See Spare Parts List) 8 - DN 40
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3077
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3085
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3093
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3212
PFA ...............................................................9611-92-3191
8 - DN 50
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3078
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3086
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3094
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3213
PFA ...............................................................9611-92-3192
10 - DN 65
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3079
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3087
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3095
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3214
PFA ...............................................................9611-92-3193
10 - DN 80
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3080
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3088
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3096
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3215
PFA ...............................................................9611-92-3194
12 - DN 100
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3081
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3089
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3097
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3216
PFA ...............................................................9611-92-3195
14 - DN 125
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3082
Q ...................................................................9611-92-3090
FPM ..............................................................9611-92-3098
HNBR ............................................................9611-92-3217
34
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.7 LKB-2 Butterfly valves
35
6.8 LKB-LP Butterfly Valve 6. Parts List / Service kits
Parts List for LKB-LP Service Kits for LKB-LP ISO

Denomination Item number
Pos. Qty. Denomination
25mm
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3028
1 2 Valve body half, clamp
1a 2 Valve body half, welding
38mm
2 1 Disc EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3204
3 Δ 1 Bush
4 Δ 1 Bush
51mm
5 Δ 1 Sealring (EPDM)
6 1 Set screw EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3205
7 1 Handle
63.5mm
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3031
76.1 mm
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3032
101.6
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3033
Service Kits for LKB-LP DIN

Denomination Item number
DN25
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3206
DN40
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3207
DN50
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3208
DN65
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3079
DN80
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3209
DN100
EPDM ............................................................9611-92-3210
36
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.8 LKB-LP Butterfly Valve
37
6.9 LKLA ø85 mm (NO/NC) 6. Parts List / Service kits
The drawing and the parts list include all items.

NO = Normally open.
Parts List Service Kits LKLA ø85 mm

1 1 Air cylinder
2 1 Rotating cylinder Actuator
3 1 Piston LKLA NO/NC
4Δ 1 O-ring, NBR Kit .........................................................9611-92-3010
5a 1 End cap (Period 0011-)
6 1 Retaining ring Δ: Service kits - actuator
7Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
8 1 Inner spring
9 1 Outer spring
10Δ 2 Needle bearing
12Δ 2 Thrust bearing
14 1 Thrust plate
15Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Activating ring, Noryl
with screw
19 1 Water rejector (Period 8310-)
38
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.9 LKLA ø85 mm (NO/NC)
39
6.10 LKLA ø85 mm (A/A) 6. Parts List / Service kits

1 1 Air Cylinder
2 1 Rotating cylinder Actuator
3 1 Piston LKLA A/A
4Δ 1 O-ring, NBR Kit .........................................................9611-92-3011
5a 1 End cap
(Period 0011-)
7Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
14 1 Thrust plate
15Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Activating ring
with screw
22*** 1 Retaining plate
23 2 Threaded plug
40
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.10 LKLA ø85 mm (A/A)
41
6.11 LKLA DN 125-150 ø85 mm (A/A) 6. Drawing
1 1 Air Cylinder Actuator

2 1 Rotating cylinder LKLA A/A
3 1 Piston Kit .........................................................9611-92-3011
4Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
5a 1 End cap Δ: Service kits - actuator
(Period 0011-)
6 1 Retaining ring
7Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
13 1 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Activating ring with screw
22*** 1 Retaining plate
23 2 Threaded plug
42
6. Parts list / Drawing 6.11 LKLA DN 125-150 ø85 mm (A/A)
43
6.12 LKLA ø133 mm (NO/NC) 6. Parts List / Service kits

NO = Normally open.
1 1 Air cylinder Actuator

2 1 Rotating cylinder LKLA NO/NC
3 1 Piston Kit .........................................................9611-92-3010
4Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
5 1 End cap (Period: 0011- )
6 1 Retaining ring
7Δ 1 O-ring, NBR Δ: Service kits - actuator
8 1 Spring assembly
13 1 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Indication pin
19 1 Water rejector
44
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.12 LKLA ø133 mm (NO/NC)
45
6.13 LKLA ø133 mm (A/A) 6. Parts List / Service kits
1 1 Air Cylinder Actuator

2 1 Rotating cylinder LKLA A/A
3 1 Piston Kit .........................................................9611-92-3011
4Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
5 1 End cap (Period: 0011- )
7Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
13 2 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
16 2 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Indication pin
22 1 Retaining plate
23 1 Threaded plug
46
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.13 LKLA ø133 mm (A/A)
47
6.14 LKLA-T ø85 mm (NO/NC) 6. Parts List / Service kits

NO = Normally open.

2 1 Rotating cylinder LKLA-T NO/NC
3 1 Piston Kit .........................................................9611-92-3021
4Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
5 1 End cap Δ: Service kits - actuator
6 1 Retaining ring
7Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
8 1 Inner spring
9 1 Outer spring
14 1 Thrust plate
15Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Activating ring
with screw
20Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
21 1 Air fitting
48
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.14 LKLA-T ø85 mm (NO/NC)
49
6.15 LKLA-T ø85 mm (A/A) 6. Parts List / Service kits

2 1 Rotating cylinder LKLA-T A/A
3 1 Piston Kit .........................................................9611-92-3023
4Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
6 1 Retaining ring
7Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
14 1 Thrust plate
15Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
20Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
21 1 Air fitting
23 1 Threaded plug
50
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.15 LKLA-T ø85 mm (A/A)
51
6.16 LKLA-T DN 125-150 ø85 mm (A/A) 6. Parts List / Service kits

3 1 Piston Kit .........................................................9611-92-3023
4Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
6 1 Retaining ring
7Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
13 1 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
20Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
21 1 Air fitting
23 1 Threaded plug
52
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.16 LKLA-T DN 125-150 ø85 mm (A/A)
53
6.17 LKLA-T ø133 mm (NO/NC) 6. Parts List / Service kits

NO = Normally open.

2 1 Rotating cylinder LKLA-T NO/NC
3 1 Piston Kit .........................................................9611-92-3021
4Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
6 1 Retaining ring
7Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
8 1 Spring assembly
13 1 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
16 1 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Indication pin
19 1 Water rejector
20Δ 1 O-ring
21 1 Air fitting
24Δ 1 Guiding ring
25 1 Spring
54
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.17 LKLA-T ø133 mm (NO/NC)
55
6.18 LKLA-T ø133 mm (A/A) 6. Parts List / Service kits

3 1 Piston Kit .........................................................9611-92-3023
4Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
6 1 Retaining ring
7Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
13 2 Connex pin
14 1 Thrust plate
15Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
16 2 Connex pin
17 1 Coupling
18 1 Indication pin
20Δ 1 O-ring, NBR
21 1 Air fitting
24Δ 1 Guiding band
25 1 Spring
56
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.18 LKLA-T ø133 mm (A/A)
57
6.19 Handles 6. Parts List / Service kits
The drawings and the parts list include all items.
Parts list Parts list

Handles Handles
Standard handle, handle for indication unit and regulating Lockable Multiposition Handle:
handle with infinite positions:
Item Qty. Denomination Item Qty. Denomination
1 1 Location cap 1 1 Insert

1a 1 Location cap with 2 pos. 2 1 Location cap
1b 1 Location cap with 4 pos. (76-101.6 mm/DN65-100)
2 1 Transfer block Location cap
3 1 Handle (25-63.5 mm/DN25-50)
4 1 Screw with pin 3 1 Screw
5 1 Spring
6 1 Ball
7 1 Crosshead
8 1 Bracket
9 1 Screw
10 1 Coupling
58
6. Parts List / Service kits 6.19 Handles
This page shows exploded drawings of the standard handle,

the handle for indication unit, the regulating handle and the
Lockable Multiposition Handle.
The drawings and the parts list include all items.
Standard handle Handle for indication unit
Regulating handle with infinite positions
Lockable Multiposition Handle
TD 403-203
59
access the information directly.
.
ky For Gentle Product Flow

LKB-LP Low Pressure Butterfly Valve
Application
LKB Low Pressure is a sanitary manually operated butterfly valve for
use in stainless steel pipe systems.
Working principle
LKB Low Pressure is operated by means of a handle. The handle
mechanically locks the valve in its open or closed position. A disc
closes against a rubber seal when the handle is at right angle to the
pipeline. When the handle is turned 90° the disc is parallel to the
product flow and the valve is fully open.
Standard design
The valve consists of two valve body halves, valve disc, bushes for
the stem and seal ring. The valve is assembled by means of screws
and nuts.
The handle is fitted onto the valve by means of a cap/block system
and screw.
Materials
Valve body: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stainless steel 1.4301 (304).
Disc: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stainless steel 1.4301 (304).
Handle: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stainless steel 1.4301 (304).
Seal: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EPDM. LKB Low Pressure Butterfly valve
Finish: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Semi bright.
Size
. Connections
DN/OD 25 mm (1”) DN 25 LKB Low Pressure is available with the following connection
DN/OD 38 mm (1½”) DN 40 combinations:
DN/OD 51 mm (2”) DN 50
- ISO welding end - ISO welding end.
DN/OD 63.5 mm (2½”) DN 65
- DIN welding end - DIN welding end.
DN/OD 76.1 mm (3”) DN 80
- ISO clamp end - ISO clamp end.
DN/OD 101.6 mm (4”) DN 100
NOTE! Actuator not available.
Technical Data
Valve:
Max. product pressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 kPa (5 bar).
Min. product pressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Full vacuum.
Temperature range: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-10°C to +95°C.
Materials
Valve:
Finish: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Semi-bright.
Steel parts: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4301 (304).
Seal: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EPDM
Bushes for valve disc: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .PVDF.
Dimensions (mm) - Valve (900246/1)
Size 25 38 51 63.5 76.1 101.6 DN DN DN DN DN DN

mm mm mm mm mm mm 25 40 50 65 80 100
A 78.0 78.0 99.0 117.0 132.0 169.0 79.2 86.5 105.7 125.0 143.0 169.0
B1 47.0 47.0 52.0 54.0 62.0 80.0 47.0 47.0 52.0 62.0 64.0 80.0
B2 90.0 90.0 95.0 97.0 105.0 123.0 - - - - - -
OD 25.6 38.6 51.6 64.1 76.6 102.2 30.0 42.0 54.0 70.0 85.0 104.0
ID 22.5 35.5 48.5 60.5 72.0 97.6 26.0 38.0 50.0 66.0 81.0 100.0
t 1.55 1.55 1.55 1.8 2.3 2.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
C1 89.0 89.0 99.0 109.0 116.0 135.0 89.0 93.0 103.0 113.0 122.0 135.0
C2 91.0 91.0 101.5 110.5 118.0 136.5
D1 120.0 120.0 120.0 162.0 162.0 162.0 120.0 120.0 120.0 162.0 162.0 162.0
D2 150.0 150.0 150.0 150.0 200.0 200.0
Weight (kg) 1,1 1,0 1,5 2,1 2,8 4,8 1,1 1,0 1,5 2,1 2,8 4,8
NOTE! Weights are for valves with welding ends and handles.
a. LKB Low Pressure with welding ends. b. LKB Low Pressure with clamp ends.
c. LKB Low Pressure with welding ends and multiposition handle. d. LKB Low Pressure with clamp ends and multiposition handle.
Fig. 1. Dimensions - valve.
Options
- Multipositioning handle*
* A padlock can be mounted on the Lockable Multiposition Handle as shown on the drawings. NOTE! Padlock is not delivered.
Lockable Multiposition Handle with padlock.

1. Padlock
Dimensions - padlock. Positioning cap.

A. Min. 20 mm 1. On/Off
B. Min. 35 mm 2. Multi positioning
C. ø6 mm
.
ESE00287EN 1001 The information contained herein is correct at the time of issue,
but may be subject to change without prior notice.

.
ky The Safe Choice

LKC-2 Non-return Valve
Application
Non-return valve LKC-2 is designed for use in stainless steel pipe
installations to prevent reverse flow.
Working principle
LKC-2 opens when the pressure below the valve plug exceeds the
pressure above the plug and the spring force.
The valve closes when pressure equalization has been achieved. A
higher counter pressure will press the valve plug against the seat.
Standard Design
The valve body is in two parts, assembled by means of a clamp ring
and hygienically sealed with a special seal ring. A guide disc and four
legs guide the spring loaded valve plug with an O-ring seal. LKC-2 has
welding ends for ISO or DIN connections.
Materials
Steel parts: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Stainless steel 1.4301
(304) or acid-resistant steel
1.4404 (316L).
Seal rings: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EPDM rubber.
Finish: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Semi bright.
LKC-2, non-return valve.
Connections
The valve is available with welding ends for tubes according to ISO
and DIN 11850.
. Option
Product wetted seal rings of Nitrile (NBR) or Fluorinated rubber (FPM).
Technical data
Required differential pressure for opening the valve when fitted in a
vertical pipe, as shown in fig. 3, is approx. 6 kPa (0.06 bar).
Ordering
Please state the following when ordering:
Max. product pressure: . . . . . . . . . . .1000 kPa (10 bar).
- Size.
Max. temperature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140°C (EPDM).
- Steel grade, 1.4301 (304) or 1.4404 (316L).
Min. temperature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-10°C.
- Connections, if not welding ends.
- Rubber grade if not EPDM.
Pressure drop/capacity diagram
Fig.1. Note!
For the diagram the following applies:
Medium: Water (20°C).
Measurement: In accordance with VDI 2173.
Dimensions (mm)
Fig.3 1 = Flow direction.

Shows the optimal built-in situation. Other positions possible are e.g.
horizontal. The four guide legs of the valve cone ensures good alignment.
90° rotation.
Fig. 2. Dimensions.
Size 25 38 51 63.5 76.1 101.6 DN DN DN DN DN DN DN

mm mm mm mm mm mm 25 32 40 50 65 80 100
A 62.5 75.0 87.5 95.0 115 155 62.5 75.0 75.0 87.5 95.0 115 155
OD 25.4 38.4 51.4 63.9 76.4 102 30.0 36.0 42.0 54.0 70.0 85.0 104
ID 22.5 35.5 48.5 60.5 72.0 97.6 26.0 32.0 38.0 50.0 66.0 81.0 100
t 1.45 1.45 1.45 1.7 2.2 2.2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
H 72.0 85.5 99 127 138 164 72.0 85.5 85.5 99 127 138 164
Weight (kg) 0.5 0.7 1.0 1.7 2.4 4.3 0.5 0.7 0.7 1.0 1.7 2.4 4.3

Instruction Manual
Unique Single Seat Valve - Long Stroke
ESE00222-EN3 2011-05
Original manual
Table of contents
The information herein is correct at the time of issue but may be subject to change without prior notice
1. EC Declaration of Conformity ....................................................................... 4
2. Safety .................................................................................................... 5
2.1. Important information ............................................................................. 5
2.2. Warning signs ..................................................................................... 5
2.3. Safety precautions ................................................................................ 6
3. Installation .............................................................................................. 7
3.1. Unpacking/delivery ............................................................................... 7
3.2. General installation ................................................................................ 8
3.3. Welding ............................................................................................ 9
3.4. Recycling information ............................................................................. 10
4. Operation ............................................................................................... 11
4.1. Operation .......................................................................................... 11
4.2. Troubleshooting ................................................................................... 13
4.3. Recommended cleaning ......................................................................... 14
5. Maintenance ........................................................................................... 16
5.1. General maintenance ............................................................................. 16
5.2. Dismantling of valve .............................................................................. 18
5.3. Plug seal replacement ............................................................................ 18
5.4. Assembly of valve ................................................................................. 19
5.5. Actuator bushing replacement .................................................................. 19
6. Technical data ......................................................................................... 20

6.1. Technical data ..................................................................................... 20
7. Parts list and Service Kits ........................................................................... 21

7.1. Drawing ............................................................................................ 21
7.2. Unique Single Seat Valve - Long stroke Shut-off Valve ....................................... 22
7.3. Unique Single Seat Valve - Long Stroke Change-over Valve ................................. 24
3
1 EC Declaration of Conformity
The designating company

Alfa Laval
Company Name
Albuen 31, DK-6000 Kolding, Denmark

Address
+45 79 32 22 00
Phone No.
hereby declare that

Unique Single Seat Valve Long Stroke
Denomination Type Year
is in conformity with the following directives:

- Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
- Pressure Equipment Directive 97/23/EC category 1 and subjected to assessment procedure Module A.
Manager, Product Centres, Compact Bjarne Søndergaard

Heat Exchangers & Fluid Handling
Title Name
Alfa Laval Kolding

Company Signature
Designation
4
2 Safety
Unsafe practices and other important information are emphasized in this manual.
Warnings are emphasized by means of special signs.
2.1 Important information
Always read the manual before using the valve!
WARNING
Indicates that special procedures must be followed to avoid serious personal injury.
CAUTION
Indicates that special procedures must be followed to avoid damage to the valve.
NOTE
Indicates important information to simplify or clarify procedures.
2.2 Warning signs
General warning:
Caustic agents:
5
2 Safety
All warnings in the manual are summarized on this page.
Pay special attention to the instructions below so that severe personal injury and/or damage to the valve are avoided.
2.3 Safety precautions
Installation:
Always read the technical data thoroughly (See chapter 6 Technical data)
Always release compressed air after use
Never touch the moving parts if the actuator is supplied with compressed air
Never touch the valve or the pipelines when processing hot liquids or when sterilizing
Never dismantle the valve with valve and pipelines under pressure
Never dismantle the valve when it is hot
Operation:
Never dismantle the valve with valve and pipelines under pressure
Never dismantle the valve when it is hot
Never touch the valve or the pipelines when processing hot liquids or when sterilizing
Always rinse well with clean water after the cleaning
Always handle lye and acid with great care
Maintenance:
Never service the valve when it is hot
Never service the valve with valve and pipelines under pressure
Never stick your fingers through the valve ports if the actuator is supplied with compressed air
Transportation:
Always secure that compressed air is released

Always secure that all connections is disconnected before attemt to remove the valve from the installation
Always drain liquid out of valves before transportation
Always used predesigned lifting points if defined
Always secure sufficient fixing of the valve during transportation - if special designed packaging material is available it
must be used
6
3 Installation
The instruction manual is part of the delivery. Study the instructions carefully.
The items refer to parts list and service kits section.
The valve is supplied as separate parts as standard (for welding).
The valve is assembled before delivery, if it is supplied with fittings.
3.1 Unpacking/delivery
Step 1 Check the delivery for:

CAUTION 1. Complete valve, shut off valve or change-over
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for incorrect unpacking. valve (see steps 2a and 2b).
2. Delivery note.
Step 2
2a
Shut-off valve:
1. Complete actuator.
2. Bonnet (20).
3. Clamp (19).
4. Valve plug (23).
5. Valve body (22).
2b
Change-over valve:
1. Complete actuator.
2. Bonnet (20).
3. 2 x clamp (19).
4. Valve plug (27).
5. Lower valve body (22).
6. Valve seat (28).
7. Upper valve body (26).
TD 461-391_1
UP
Step 3
Remove possible packing materials from the valve/valve parts.
Inspect the valve/valve parts for visible transport damages.
Avoid damaging the valve/valve parts.
7
3 Installation
The valve has welding ends as standard but can also be supplied with fittings.
3.2 General installation
Step 1
Always read the technical data thoroughly.

See chapter 6 Technical data
Always release compressed air after use.
CAUTION
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for incorrect installation.
Step 2 Air
Never touch the moving parts if the actuator is supplied with

compressed air. Moving parts!
Air
Step 3 Avoid water

It is recommended to install the valve so that the flow is against hammer!
the closing direction to avoid water hammer.
Shock in the actuator must never occur.
Inlet
Inlet
Step 4
Avoid stressing the valve.
Pay special attention to:
- Vibrations. Risk of damage!
- Thermal expansion of the pipelines.
- Excessive welding.
- Overloading of the pipelines.
TD 461-398
8
3 Installation
The valve is supplied as separate parts to facilitate the welding.
Check the valve for smooth operation after welding.
3.3 Welding
Step 1
Always install valves with more than one valve body so that the
seals between the valve bodies can be replaced. Do not weld
more than one valve body into the system. B (incl. top unit)
Valve size A (mm) B (mm)

DN25/25 mm * 630
DN40/38 mm * 700
DN50/51 mm * 750
DN65/63.5 mm * 740
DN80/76 mm * 800
DN100/101.6 mm * 790
* Depending on body combination and piping solution. A*
Step 2
Assemble the valve in accordance with the steps on page 19.
Step 3 Air
Pre-use check:
2. Open and close the valve several times to ensure that it
operates smoothly.
Open/close! Air
9
3 Installation
The valve is supplied as separate parts to facilitate the welding.
Check the valve for smooth operation after welding.
3.4 Recycling information
• Unpacking
- Packing material consists of wood, plastics, cardboard boxes and in some cases metal straps
- Wood and cardboard boxes can be reused, recycled or used for energy recovery
- Plastics should be recycled or burnt at a licensed waste incineration plant
- Metal straps should be sent for material recycling.
• Maintenance
- During maintenance oil and wear parts in the machine are replaced
- All metal parts should be sent for material recycling
- Worn out or defective electronic parts should be sent to a licensed handler for material recycling
- Oil and all non metal wear parts must be taken care of in agreement with local regulations
• Scrapping
- At end of use, the equipment shall be recycled according to relevant, local regulations. Beside the equipment itself, any
hazardous residues from the process liquid must be considered and dealt with in a proper manner. When in doubt, or in the
absence of local regulations, please contact the local Alfa Laval sales company
10
4 Operation
Ensure that the valve operates smoothly.
4.1 Operation
Step 1
Always read the technical data thoroughly.

CAUTION
Alfa Laval cannot be held responsible for incorrect operation.
Step 2
Never touch the valve or the pipelines when processing hot liquids
or when sterilizing.
Burning danger!
Step 3 Air

Air
TD 461-401_1
11
4 Operation
Ensure that the valve operates smoothly.
Step 4 Shut-off valve Change-over valve

Lubrication of valves:
1. Ensure smooth movement between lip seal (25) and
plug stem (23, 27).
2. Lubricate with Klüber Paraliq GTE 703 if necessary
(see page 16).
Step 5
Lubrication of actuator
1. Ensure smooth movement of the actuator (the actuator is
lubricated before delivery).
2. Lubricate with Molykote Longterm 2 plus if necessary.
12
4 Operation
Pay attention to possible faults. Study the instructions carefully.
The items refer to the parts list and service kits section
4.2 Troubleshooting
NOTE!
Study the maintenance instructions carefully before replacing worn parts. - See page 16!
Problem Cause/result Repair
External product leakage Worn or product affected lip - Replace the seals
seal and/or O-ring - Replace with seals of a
different rubber grade
Internal product leakage - Worn or product affected - Replace the seal

plug seal - Replace with a seal of a
different rubber grade
- Product deposits on - Frequent cleaning

the seat and/or plug
- Product pressure exceeds - Replace with a high pressure actuator

actuator specification - Use auxiliary air on the spring side
(do not exceed 3 bar)
- Reduce product pressure
Water hammer The flow direction is the - The flow direction should be
same as the closing direction against the closing direction
- Throttle air release of solenoid in
top unit
The valve does not Product pressure exceeds - Replace with a high pressure actuator
open/close actuator specification - Use auxiliary air on the spring side
- Reduce product pressure
13
4 Operation
HNO3 = Nitric acid.
4.3 Recommended cleaning
Step 1 Caustic danger!
Always use Always use

rubber gloves! protective goggles!
Step 2
Never touch the valve or the pipelines when sterilizing.
Burning danger!
Step 3 Shut-off valve Change-over valve

Clean the plug and the seats correctly.
Lift and lower valve plug momentarily!
Step 4 1. 1% by weight NaOH at 70o C

Examples of cleaning agents:
Use clean water, free from clorides.
1 kg NaOH + 100 l water = Cleaning agent.
2.2 l + 100 l = Cleaning agent.

33% NaOH water
2. 0.5% by weight HNO3 at 70o C
0.7 l + 100 l = Cleaning agent.

53% HNO3 water
14
4 Operation
HNO3 = Nitric acid.
Step 5 Always rinse!

1. Avoid excessive concentration of the cleaning agent.
2. Adjust the cleaning flow to the process.
3. Always rinse well with clean water after the cleaning.
Clean water Cleaning agents
Step 6
NOTE
The cleaning agents must be stored/disposed of in accordance
with current regulations/directives.
15
5 Maintenance
Maintain the valve regularly.
Always keep spare rubber seals and lip seals in stock.
5.1 General maintenance
Step 1 NOTE
All scrap must be stored/discharged in accordance
Always read the technical data thoroughly. with current rules/directives.
Step 2
Atmospheric
Never service the valve when it is hot. pressure
required!
Never service the valve with valve and pipelines under pressure.
Burning danger!
Step 3 Air
Never stick your fingers through the valve ports if the actuator is
supplied with compressed air.
Cutting danger!
Air
Step 4 Air

Air
TD 461-401_1
16
5 Maintenance
Maintain the valve regularly.
Always keep spare rubber seals and lip seals in stock.
Below are some guidelines for maintenance and lubrication intervals. Please note that the guidelines are for normal
working conditions in one shift.
Product wetted seals Actuator bushings complete
Replace after Replace after

Preventive maintenance 12 months depending 5 years depending
on working conditions on working conditions
Maintenance after
Replace at the Replace when
leakage (leakage
end of the day possible
normally starts slowly)
- Regular inspection - Regular inspection

for leakage and for leakage and
smooth operation smooth operation
- Keep a record of - Keep a record of
Planned maintenance
the actuator the actuator
- Use the statistics for - Use the statistics for
planning of inspections planning of inspections
Replace after leakage Replace after leakage
Before fitting
Klüber Paraliq GTE 703 Before fitting
Lubrication
or similar USDA H1 Molykote Longterm 2 plus
approved oil/grease
Pre-use check:
Air
2. Open and close the valve several times to
ensure that it operates smoothly. Open/close!
Air
Recommended spare parts

Service kits (see page 21)
17
5 Maintenance
Study the instructions carefully. The items refer to the parts list and service kits section. Handle scrap correctly.
NO = Normally open.
5.2 Dismantling of valve
Step 1
1a
Shut-off valve:
1. Supply compressed air to the actuator (only NC).
2. Loosen and remove clamp.
3. Release compressed air (only NC).
4. Lift away the actuator.
5. Unscrew and remove valve plug.
6. Remove O-ring, lip seal and bushing in bonnet.
(Use bushing tool and rubber mallet).
Note! Be careful not to damage the bushing.
TD 461-959
Note!
Be careful not to damage the
Note! For plug seal replacement please see page 18.
bushing.
1b TD 461-410
Change-over valve:
1. Supply compressed air to the actuator (only NC).
2. Loosen and remove lower clamp.
3. Release compressed air (only NC).
4. Lift away the actuator and upper valve body.
5. Supply compressed air to the actuator (only NO).
6. Unscrew and remove valve plug.
7. Release compressed air (only NO).
8. Remove seat and O-rings.
9. Loosen and remove upper clamp.
10. Remove upper valve body.
11. Remove O-ring, lip seal and bushing in bonnet. UP
(Use bushing tool and rubber mallet.
See drawing, step 1a).
Note! Be careful not to damage the bushing. TD 461-395_1
Note! For plug seal replacement please see page 18.
5.3 Plug seal replacement
1. Remove old seal ring using a knife, screwdriver or similar. 1

Be careful not to damage metal parts.
2. Pre-mount plug seal without pressing it into the groove.
3. Squeeze plug seal into the groove using opposite pressure points.
4. Release compressed air behind plug seal.
3 4
18
5 Maintenance
The items refer to the parts list and service kits section. Handle scrap correctly.
5.4 Assembly of valve
Reverse order of 4.2, Dismantling of valve.

Lubricate O-ring (21) and lip seal (25) with Klüber Paraliq GTE 703.
Remember to tighten spindle and plug with a torque M = 30Nm (Use two 17mm spanners)
If there are vibrations in the pipeline Alfa Laval recommended to use locitite no. 243.
5.5 Actuator bushing replacement
1. Unscrew and remove top and bottom bushings with O-rings.

2. Lubricate O-rings with Molykote Longterm 2 plus before fitting.
3. Fit bushings and O-rings. Tighten brushing with a torque = 10Nm.
Be careful not to overtighten.
19
6 Technical data
It is important to observe the technical data during installation, operation and maintenance.
Inform the personnel about the technical data.
6.1 Technical data
Data - valve/actuator
Max. product pressure 1000 kPa (10 bar).
Min. product pressure Full vacuum (depending on product specifications).
Temperature range -10o C to + 140o C (standard EPDM seal).
Air pressure, actuator 500 to 700 kPa (5 to 7 bar).
Materials - valve/actuator
Product wetted steel parts 1.4404 (316L) (internal Ra < 0.8 μm).
Other steel parts 1.4301 (304).
Optional plug seal PTFE (TR2).
Product wetted seals EPDM (standard).
Optional product wetted seals HNBR and FPM.
Other seals NBR.
Noise
One meter away from - and 1.6 meter above the exhaust the noise level of a valve actuator will be approximately 77db(A)
without noise damper and approximately 72 db(A) with damper - Measured at 7 bars air-pressure.
20
7 Parts list and Service Kits
The drawing shows Unique Single Seat Valve - Long Stroke.
The items refer to the parts lists in the following sections
7.1 Drawing
Shut-off valve Change-over valve
21
The drawing shows Unique Single Seat Valve - Long Stroke, Shut-off.
The items refer to the parts lists in the following sections.
7.2 Unique Single Seat Valve - Long stroke Shut-off Valve
TD 461-344_1
22
The drawing shows Unique Single Seat Valve - Long Stroke, Shut-off.
Parts list
Pos. Qty Denomination
Actuator
O-ring set (10 pcs.) EPDM
O-ring set (10 pcs.) HNBR
O-ring set (10 pcs.) FPM
Lip seal set (10 pcs.) EPDM
Lip seal set (10 pcs.) HNBR
Lip seal set (10 pcs.) FPM
Plug seal set (10 pcs.) EPDM
Plug seal set (10 pcs.) HNBR
Plug seal set (10 pcs.) FPM
5 1 Adapter
6 2 Bushing
7 2 O-ring
8 2 O-ring
9 1 Plug
12 1(2) Air fitting
19 1 Clamp
20 1 Bonnet
21 ♦ 1 O-ring
22 1 Valve body
23 1 Plug
23.1 1 Plug, shut off, ISO/DIN
23.2 ♦ 1 Plug seal
24 1 Bushing
25 ♦ 1 Lip seal
Service kits
DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100
Denomination 38 mm 51 mm 63.5 mm 76.1 mm 101.6 mm
Service kit for Actuator

Service kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-6500 9611-92-6500 9611-92-6500 9611-92-6500 9611-92-6500
Service kit for Product wetted parts, standard

♦ Service kit, EPDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-6502 9611-92-6503 9611-92-6504 9611-92-6505 9611-92-6506
♦ Service kit, HNBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-6508 9611-92-6509 9611-92-6510 9611-92-6511 9611-92-6512
♦ Service kit, FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-6514 9611-92-6515 9611-92-6516 9611-92-6517 9611-92-6518
Parts marked with ♦ are included in the service kits.
Recommended spare parts: Service kits.
TD 900-334/1
23
The drawing shows Unique Single Seat Valve - Long Stroke, Change-over.
7.3 Unique Single Seat Valve - Long Stroke Change-over Valve
TD 461-345_2
24
The drawing shows Unique Single Seat Valve - Long Stroke, Change-over.
Parts list
Pos. Qty Denomination
Actuator
O-ring set (10 pcs.) EPDM
O-ring set (10 pcs.) HNBR
O-ring set (10 pcs.) FPM
Lip seal set (10 pcs.) EPDM
Lip seal set (10 pcs.) HNBR
Lip seal set (10 pcs.) FPM
Plug seal set (10 pcs.) EDPM
Plug seal set (10 pcs.) HNBR
Plug seal set (10 pcs.) FPM
5 1 Adapter
6 2 Bushing
7 2 O-ring
8 2 O-ring
9 1 Plug
12 1(2) Air fitting
19 2 Clamp
20 1 Bonnet
21 ♦ 3 O-ring
22 1 Valve body
24 1 Bushing
25 ♦ 1 Lip seal
26 1 Valve body
27 1 Plug
27.1 1 Plug, change over, ISO/DIN
27.2 ♦ 2 Plug seal
28 1 Seat
Service kits
DN 40 DN 50 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100
Denomination 38 mm 51 mm 63.5 mm 76.1 mm 101.6 mm
Service kit for Actuator

Service kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-6500 9611-92-6500 9611-92-6500 9611-92-6500 9611-92-6500
Service kit for Product wetted parts, standard

♦ Service kit, EPDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-6580 9611-92-6581 9611-92-6582 9611-92-6583 9611-92-6584
♦ Service kit, HNBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-6586 9611-92-6587 9611-92-6588 9611-92-6589 9611-92-6590
♦ Service kit, FPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9611-92-6592 9611-92-6593 9611-92-6594 9611-92-6595 9611-92-6596
Parts marked with ♦ are included in the service kits.
Recommended spare parts: Service kits.
TD 900-334/1
25
Contact details for all countries are
continually updated on our website.
Please visit www.alfalaval.com to access the information directly.
© Alfa Laval Corporate AB

This document and its contents is owned by Alfa Laval Corporate AB and protected by laws governing intellectual property and thereto related rights. It is the responsibility of the user of this
document to comply with all applicable intellectual property laws. Without limiting any rights related to this document, no part of this document may be copied, reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means (electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise), or for any purpose, without the expressed permission of Alfa Laval Corporate AB. Alfa Laval Corporate AB
will enforce its rights related to this document to the fullest extent of the law, including the seeking of criminal prosecution.
.
ky Simply Unique Single Seat

Unique SSV Standard
General Information
The new generation that meets the highest demands of your process
in terms of hygiene and safety. Unique Single Seat Valves are built on a
well-proven, platform from an installed base of more than one million
valves.
Application
Unique Single Seat Valve is a pneumatic seat valve in a hygienic and
modular design for a wide field of applications, e.g. as a Shut-off valve
with two (2) or three (3) ports or as a Change-over valve with three
(3) to five (5) ports.
Working principle
The valve is remote-controlled by means of compressed air. It has
few and simple moveable parts which results in a very reliable valve
and low maintenance cost.
Standard design
The Unique Single Seat Standard Valve comes in a one or two body
configuration. To ensure a high degree of flexibility the valve seat
between the two bodies in the Change-over version is loose. The
valve features an optimized life span of the seals through a defined
compression design. The actuator is connected to the valve body
using a yoke and all components are assembled with clamp rings.
To facilitate installation the valve is only partly assembled when

delivered. The valve has welding ends as standard and is available
with fittings as option.
The Unique Single Seat Valve range covers the sizes from DN25 to
DN100 and DN/OD 25 mm to 101.6 mm.
The actuator comes with a 5 years warranty.
Other valves in the same basic design

The Unique SSV valve range includes several purpose built
valves. Below listed are some of the valve models available,
though please use the Alfa Laval computer aided selection tool
(CAS) for full access to all models and options.
- Reverse acting valve. Unique Single Seat Standard Change-over and Shut-off Valve
- Long stroke valve.
- Manually operated valve.
- Tank Outlet valve.
.- Two Step valve.
- Tangential valve.
Unique Single Seat Valve is designed, tested and approved according

to EHEDG guidelines.
Pressure drop/capacity diagrams
Δ Δ
TD 461-119
15
DN25/25 Kv
Δ
Kv 15
DN25/25
Δ
DN25/25 Kv 15
Note!
For the diagrams the following applies:
Medium: Water (20° C)
Measurement: In accordance with VDI2173
Pressure data for Unique Single Seat Valve
Table 1 - Shut-off and Change-over valves
Max. pressure in bar without leakage at the valve seat
Actuator / Valve body Air Valve size

Plug DN 25 DN 40 DN50 DN 65 DN 80 DN 100
combination and direction pressure DN/OD DN/OD DN/OD DN/OD DN/OD DN/OD
position
of pressure (bar) 25 mm 38 mm 51 mm 63.5 mm 76.1 mm 101.6 mm
NO 10.0 8.2 8.4 4.5 6.8 4.4

TD 461-052_1
5 9.2 4.4 5.9 3.4 4.4 2.9
6 NO 10.0 7.6 9.6 5.6 7.2 4.8

TD 461-063_1
7 10.0 10.0 10.0 7.8 10.0 6.7

5 10.0 5.7 6.8 3.7 4.7 3.0
6 NC 10.0 9.8 10.0 6.1 7.7 5.0
TD 461-054_1 7 10.0 10.0 10.0 8.5 10.0 6.9
NC 10.0 6.3 7.2 4.2 6.4 4.2

TD 461-055_1
5 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 9.4

6 A/A 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
TD 461-057_1 7 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
5 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 9.1
6 A/A 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
TD 461-056_1 7 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
A = Air
P = Product pressure
Table 2 - Shut-off and Change-over valves

Max. pressure in bar against which the valve can open.

position
NO 10.0 10.0 10.0 7.4 9.7 6.3

TD 461-058_1
5 10.0 7.8 10.0 6.1 7.1 4.7

6 NO 10.0 10.0 10.0 8.3 9.9 6.6
TD 461-059_1
7 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 8.5
5 10.0 10.0 10.0 6.6 7.5 4.9
6 NC 10.0 10.0 10.0 9.0 10.0 6.9
TD 461-060_1 7 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 8.8
NC 10.0 9.7 10.0 6.8 9.1 6.1

TD 461-061_1
A = Air
Table 3 - Shut-off and Change-over valves with high pressure actuator option
Max. pressure in bar without leakage at the valve seat

position
NO 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 - -

TD 461-052_1
6 NO 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 - -

TD 461-063_1
6 NC 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 5.0 3.0

TD 461-054_1
NC 10.0 10.0 10.0 9.6 10.0 7.0

TD 461-055_1
A = Air
Dimensions (mm)
Inch tubes DIN tubes

Nominal size DN/OD DN
25 38 51 63.5 76.1 101.6 25 40 50 65 80 100
A1 313 314 364 390 423 468 315 315 365 389 427 470
A2 328 334 389 415 453 498 330 335 390 414 457 500
A3 360* 374 437 476 522 592 367* 379 440.6 481 534 596
A4 372* 391 459 498 549 619 379* 396 463 503 561 623
C 47.8 60.8 73.8 86.3 98.9 123.6 52 64 76 92 107 126
OD 25 38 51 63.5 76.1 101.6 29 41 53 70 85 104
ID 21.8 34.8 47.8 60.3 72.9 97.6 26 38 50 66 81 100
t 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 2 1.5 1.5 1.5 2 2 2
E 50 49.5 62 82 87 120 50 49.5 62 78 87 120
F1 15 20 25 25 30 30 15 20 25 25 30 30
F2 12* 17 22 22 27 27 12* 17 22 22 27 27
H 85 85 114.9 114.9 154.3 154.3 85 85 114.9 114.9 154.3 154.3
H (high pressure) 85 114.9 154.3 154.3 154.3 154.3 85 114.9 154.3 154.3 154.3 154.3
M (ISO clamp) 21 21 21 21 21 21 - - - - - -
M (DIN clamp) - - - - - - 21 21 21 28 28 28
M (DIN male) - - - - - - 22 22 23 25 25 30
M (SMS male) 20 20 20 24 24 35 - - - - - -
Weight (kg)
Shut-off valve 3.1 3.3 5.5 6.5 11.3 13.6 3.2 3.4 5.5 6.6 11.8 13.6
Change-over valve 3.9 4.2 7.1 8.5 14 18 4.1 4.5 7.2 8.8 14.9 17.9
* = only available with replaceable elastomer plug seal.
Caution, opening/closing time:

Opening/closing time will be effected by the
following:
- The air supply (air pressure).
- The length and dimensions of the air hoses.
- Number of valves connected to the same air
hose.
- Use of single solenoid valve for serial
connected air actuator functions.
- Product pressure.
Air Connections Compressed air:

R 1/8" (BSP), internal thread.
Shut-off valve Change-over valve
PTFE plug seal (TR2)

Technical Data
Max. product pressure (depending on valve specifications) . . . . . . . . . . .1000 kPa (10 bar).
Min. product pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Full vacuum.
Temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-10°C to +140°C (EPDM).
Air pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500 to 700 kPa (5 to 7 bar)
Valve Body Combinations
Actuator function
- Pneumatic downward movement, spring return.
- Pneumatic upward movement, spring return.
- Pneumatic upward and downward movement (A/A).
Air consumption (litres free air) for one stroke

DN25-40 DN50-65 DN80-100
Size
DN/OD 25-38 mm DN/OD 51-63.5 mm DN/OD 76.1-101.6 mm
NO and NC 0.2 x air pressure [bar] 0.5 x air pressure [bar] 1.3 x air pressure [bar]
A/A 0.5 x air pressure [bar] 1.1 x air pressure [bar] 2.7 x air pressure [bar]
Materials
Product wetted steel parts: .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4404 (316L) (internal Ra < 0.8 µm)
Other steel parts . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.4301 (304)
Plug seal: . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EPDM
Other product wetted seals: ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .EPDM (standard)
Other seals . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .NBR
Options
A. Male parts or clamp liners in accordance with required standard.
B. Control and Indication: IndiTop, ThinkTop or ThinkTop Basic.
C. Product wetted seals in HNBR or FPM.
D. Plug seals HNBR, FPM or TR2 plug (floating PTFE design).
E. High pressure actuator.
F. Maintainable actuator.
G. External surface finish bright.
Ordering
Please state the following when ordering:
- Size.
- Connections if not welding ends.
- Valve body combination.
- NC, NO or A/A.
- Options.
Note!
For further details, see instruction ESE00202.
. .
.

SCANDI BREW® Membrane sample valve
Sampling
Application
The membrane sample valve is used for sampling from tanks
and pipework under sterile conditions for physico-chemical or
micro-biological analyses.
Design
The valve body is available in the following constructions:
• Type T for direct welding into tank
• Type P for direct welding into pipe
• Type S for socket mounting.
Valve body with male part in 3/8” BSP
• Other types are available on request, f.inst. 1⁄2” BSP,
NW 10, NW 15.
All types are available for manual or pneumatic operation. The

two outlets are hose pieces designed as clip-on. The stan-
dard valve is equipped with one clip-on closing cap.
Special versions - please see reverse side.
The membrane sample valve is mounted on tanks and

pipework. Normally the valve should be mounted horizontally
with one outlet in upward position and one in downward. If
the valve is mounted in another position, it should be secured
that complete drainage can take place from one of the outlets.
Aseptic sampling is possible from a special valve type with
micro port. By removing the red closing cap, a hypodermic
The benefits of the membrane sample valve are:
needle can be inserted through a central channel into the
• Sterilisable in place with alcohol or steam
membrane and the aseptic sampling takes place with the
• Membrane sealing directly against product
valve in closed position.
• Representative sampling, giving repeatable results
• Safe to secondary contamination
After sampling the valve should be flushed with water or alco-
• Dual purpose, bulk and micro samples (special version)
hol. Sterilization has to take place by means of alcohol or
• Pilfer proof
steam. When not in use, the valve may be sealed with alcohol
• Manual and pneumatic operation
by leaving the clip-on closing cap on the lower outlet and fill-
ing with alcohol. By aseptic sampling the channel is to be
Working principle
rinsed with alcohol.
Sampling should only be done from a from sterile sample
valve. Before opening the valve, the closing cap should be
Cleaning in place only with vessel or pipeline cleaning. By
placed on upper hose piece. Afterwards, the handle is placed
interval flipping of valve, optimal cleaning of valve seat is
into a horizontal position until the required flow through the
obtained.
lower outlet is obtained.
Type S should be flushed backwards from outlet to secure a
clean connection to tank or pipe.
After sampling, the handle should be pulled back into vertical
position whereafter the valve is closed.
In this position, the handle can be removed if required.
Specifications Special Versions
Valve body: Stainless steel EN 1.4404 (AISI 316L) Instead of being clip-on type, the two outlets of the valve can
(welding parts with material certificate) be supplied with Tri-Clamps, Swagelok or welding ends.
Other Other type is available on request.
metallic parts: Stainless steel EN 1.4307 (AISI 304L)
Membrane: Silicone. EPDM on request The pneumatic valve can alternatively be supplied in a com-
Product pressure: Max. 6 bar (86 psi) as standard. 10 bar is bined manual - pneumatic execution.
available on request.
Please ask for separate information on the SCANDI BREW®
Extra Equipment Sampling system.
• Handle for operating the valve
• Assembling tool
• Membrane remover
• Proximity switch for indication of open/closed valve position
• Sampling coil with clip-on

• Isobaric hand bottling device with clip-on
• Hypodermic needle
• Silicone hose with clip-on
PFT00110EN 0806 Alfa Laval reserves the right to change specifications without prior notification.

Uni-Valve A / S
VENTILER & INSTRUMENTER
Telefon (+45) 43 43 82 00 • Telefax (+45) 43 43 74 75 • mail@uni-valve.com • www.uni-valve.com
Nåleventil DN6 – 25
UNI-35462 Needle valve
Nadelventil PN400
Type / series / Baureihe

• Nåleventil i smedet stål / needle valve of forged steel construction / Nadelventil in einem Stück geschmiedet
• BSP gevindender muffe-muffe (RG) / threaded connections / Innengewinde
• AISI 430F eller/or AISI 316L / 1.4104 oder 1.4401
• Med håndhjul / with handwheel / mit Handrad
Anvendelse / application / Verwendung

Vand, damp, luft, olier, væsker og andre medier som ventilens materialer er bestandige overfor /
Water, steam, air, oil, liquids and other media which the materials of the valve are resistant to /
Wasser, Wasserdampf, Luft, Öl, Flüssigkeiten und andere Medien wo die Werkstoffe des Ventils beständig sind.
UNI-35462-01 UNI-35462-02
Del Materiale Part Material Teil Werkstoffe Del Materiale Part Material Teil Werkstoffe
Hus AISI430F Body AISI430F Gehäuse 1.4104 Hus AISI316L Body AISI316L Gehäuse 1.4401
Spindel AISI420 Stem AISI420 Spindel 1.4021 Spindel AISI329 Stem AISI329 Spindel 1.4460
Håndhjul Stål Handwheel Steel plate Handrad Stahl gepresst Håndhjul Stål Handwheel Steel plate Handrad Stahl gepresst
Pakning Grafit Packing Graphite Dichtung Graphit Pakning Grafit Packing Graphite Dichtung Graphit
Arbejdstryk og temperatur / Tæthedsprøve 600 bar

working pressure and temperature / Tested at 600 bar
Druckstufen und Temperaturen Prüfdruck 600 bar
400 160 125 20 Bar

20 125 200 300 degC
Kv-værdier Vægt kg
DN RG K d L D Hmax Kv values Weight kg
Kv Gewicht kg
6 1/8" 12 4 60 65 85 0,30 0,42
8 1/4" 14 5 60 65 85 0,42 0,40
10 3/8” 15 5 60 65 85 0,48 0,38
15 1/2" 16 5 60 65 85 0,54 0,34
20 3/4” 18 8 70 85 100 1,20 0,90
25 1” 20 10 78 100 110 1,45 1,05
Optioner, options, Optionen :

• Svejseender, udvendigt gevind, indvendigt NPT-gevind, låst pakdåsemøtrik, messing
• Socket or butt weld, male threads, female NPT thread, locked box nut, brass
• Anschweissende, Aussengewinde, Gewinde NPT, Gesicherter Stopfbuchsmutter
Ret til ændringer forbeholdes / subject to changes / Änderungen vorbehalten
02.08 Uni-Valve A/S ● Sydvestvej 138-140 ● DK-2600 Glostrup PN 18.03

Omnigrad M TR44, TR45

Hygienic, modular RTD assembly
thermowell for TR45,
various process connections and neck tube
Application
• All hygienic applications for food, pharmaceutical and
fine chemicals industries
• Measuring range: -50...400 °C (-58...752 °F)
• Pressure range up to 40 bar (580 psi)
• Degree of protection: up to IP 68
Head transmitters
All Endress+Hauser transmitters are available with
enhanced accuracy, reliability and cost effectiveness
compared to directly wired sensors. Easy customizing by
choosing one of the following outputs and protocols:
• Analog output 4...20 mA
• HART®
• PROFIBUS® PA
• FOUNDATION Fieldbus™
Your benefits
• High flexibility based on modular assembly with
standard connection heads and customized
immersion length
• Providing most common hygienic process
connections, easily cleanable connection heads and
ferrit content determination due to the hygienic design
with 3-A® and EHEDG certification
• Highest accuracy with Pt100 sensors according
to IEC 60751
• ATEX EEx ia IIC and EEx nA II
4 5 0
TI244T/02/en
71073141
TR44, TR45

Measuring principle The Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) element consists of an electrical resistance with a value of 100 Ω
at 0 °C (32 °F). It is commonly known as Pt100 and is in compliance with IEC 60751. This resistance value
increases at higher temperatures according to a coefficient characteristic of resistor material (platinum). These
kind of sensors are called Positive Temperature Coefficient elements (PTC).
The coefficient is fixed with α = 0.00385 °C-1, calculated between 0 and 100 °C (32 and 212 °F), according
to ITS90 (International Temperature Scale 1990).
Thin film platinum resistance thermometers (TF) consist of an precise amount of platinum which is vaporized
under vacuum onto a ceramic substrate to a thickness of 1 μm. This is then protected by a glass layer. The
advantages are: smaller dimensions than wire wound and greatly improved vibration resistance. Thin film
resistances (TF) are flat, microscopic versions of the wire wound types (WW) with a measurement relevant
difference:
The temperature expansion behavior of the different layers of this structure leads to minimal mechanical
stresses. Temperature changes in thin film resistances (TF) cause the desired temperature relevant changes of
the resistor as well as minimal tension stress related resistance changes. Through this the resistance/
temperature characteristic of most thin film platinum resistance thermometers (TF) differs considerably from
the standard characteristics at higher temperatures. Thin film resistances are therefore used for temperature
measurement in ranges below 500 °C (932 °F).
Measuring system
a0008948
Example of an application of the thermometer

A Built-in hygienic RTD assembly TR44 or TR45 with head transmitter
B RIA 261 Field display
– The display measures an analog measurement signal and indicates this on the display. The display is connected
in a 4 to 20 mA current loop and also derives its supply from the loop. The volt drop is almost negligible
(< 2.5 V). The dynamic internal resistance (load) makes sure that independently from the loop current, the
maximum volt drop is never exceeded. The analog signal at the input is digitalized, analyzed, and shown in the
rear illuminated display. For details see Technical Information (see "Documentation").
C Active barrier RN221N
– The RN221N active barrier (24 V DC, 30 mA) has an galvanically isolated output for supplying voltage to loop
powered transmitters. The power supply has a wide-range input for mains power, 20 to 250 V DC/AC,
50/60 Hz to be used in any electrical circuit. For details see Technical Information (see "Documentation").
2 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
Equipment architecture
TR44 TR45
10 mm
(0.4 in)
1 2
E E
E
4
4
IL IL
5 5
L L L
6 6a 6 6b 6c
a0009567
Equipment architecture of the Omnigrad M TR44 (non-replaceable insert) and TR45 (replaceable insert)
1 Insert (∅ 3 mm, 0.12 in) with mounted head 6 Various tip shapes, detailed information see chapter ’tip shape’:
transmitter, for example
6a Straight and reduced for TR44
6b Tapered and reduced for TR45 inserts with ∅ 3 mm (0.12 in)
6c Straight for TR45 inserts with ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in)
2 Insert (∅ 6 mm, 0.24 in) with mounted E Neck tube
ceramic terminal block, for example
3 Various connection heads L Immersion length
4 Protection armature IL TR45 Insertion length = E + L + 10 mm (0.4 in)
5 Various hygienic process connections, detailed
information see chapter
’process connection’
The RTD assemblies Omnigrad M TR44 and TR45 are built up for hygienic processes and the main
requirements regarding "Cleaning-in-process" (CIP) and "Sterilization-in-process" (SIP). The architecture is
according to 3-A and EHEDG approvals. All common used hygienic process connections are possible to build
in.
Omnigrad M TR44 RTD assemblies consist of a connection head and a protection armature with integrated
insert. With a tip diameter of 6 mm (0.24 in) resp. 8 mm (0.31 in) reduced to 5.3 mm (0.21 in), it is possible
to realize best response times. Insert and neck tube are welded together. The hygienic process connection is
also fixed connected to the neck tube.
The Omnigrad M TR45 RTD assemblies are constructed in three modules: connection head, protection
armature and a replaceable insert. The protection armature consists of a neck tube, process connection welded
between neck tube and integrated protection tube.
Measurement range according to IEC 60751

• TR 44: -50 °C…250 °C (-58 °F...482 °F)
• TR 45: -50 °C…400 °C (-58 °F...752 °F)
Operating conditions Ambient temperature
Connection head Temperature in °C (°F)
Without mounted head transmitter • Housing, material aluminum -40 to 100 ºC (-40 to 212 °F)
• Housing, material polyamide -40 to 85 °C (-40 to 185 °F)
With mounted head transmitter -40 to 85 °C (-40 to 185 °F)
With mounted head transmitter and display -20 to 70 °C (-4 to 158 °F)
Endress+Hauser 3
TR44, TR45
Process pressure TR44
a0008063-en
Maximum process pressure

L = Immersion length
P = Process pressure
The diagram takes into consideration not only the overpressure but also the pressure load caused by the flow,
whereby a safety factor of 1.9 has been specified for operation with flow. The maximum permitted static
operating pressure is lower at greater insertion lengths due to the increased bending load caused by the flow.
The calculation assumes the maximum permitted medium velocity for the respective insertion length (see
diagram below).
" Caution!
The maximum process pressure for the conical metal-metal process connection (Option ND) is 16 bar =
1.6 MPa (232 psi)!
Maximum flow velocity TR44
a0008065-en
Flow velocity
L = Immersion length, during flow
v = Flow velocity
Medium: ----- air; - - - - - water
The permitted flow velocity is the minimum from resonance velocity (resonance distance 80%) and load or
buckling caused by flow, which would lead to failure of the thermometer tube or to exceedance of the safety
4 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
factor (1.9). Calculation was performed for the specified limit operating conditions of 200°C (392°F) and
≤10 bar (1450 PSI) process pressure.
Process pressure TR45

The pressure values to which the protection tube can be subjected at the various temperatures are illustrated
by the figures below.
a0008966
Maximum permitted process pressure for tube diameter

– Tube diameter 9 x 1 mm (0.35 in) -----------
A Medium water at T = 50 °C (122 °F)
B Medium superheated steam at T = 400 °C (752 °F)
L Immersion length
P Process pressure
Maximum flow velocity TR45

The highest flow velocity tolerated by the protection tube diminishes with increasing lengths of the tube/probe
exposed to the stream of the fluid.
a0008967
Flow velocity depending on the immersion length

– Tube diameter 9 x 1 mm (0.35 in) -----------
A Medium water at T = 50 °C (122 °F)
B Medium superheated steam at T = 400 °C (752 °F)
L Immersion length
v flow velocity
Endress+Hauser 5
TR44, TR45
Shock and vibration resistance 4g / 2 to 150 Hz as per IEC 60068-2-6
Accuracy RTD corresponding to IEC 60751
Class max. Tolerances Temperature Characteristics

(°C) range
RTD maximum error type TF - range: -50 to +400 °C
F0.15 (Cl. A) 0.15 ± 0.002 · |t|1) -50 °C to +250 °C Max. deviation (°C)
2.5
2.0
F0.3
1.5
1.0
F0.1 (1/3 Cl. B) 0.10 ± 0.0017 · |t|1) 0 °C to +150 °C
F0.15
0.5
F0.1
-50 0 100 200 300 400°C
F0.1
- 0.5
F0.3 (Cl. B) 0.3 ± 0.005 · |t|1) -50 °C to +400 °C F0.15
- 1.0
- 1.5
F0.3
- 2.0
- 2.5
Max. deviation (°C)
a0008965-en
1) |t| = absolute value °C
! Note!
For measurement errors in °F, calculate using equations above in °C, then multiply the outcome by 1.8.
Response time Tests of the sensor assemblies without transmitter in water at 0.4 m/s (1.3 ft/s), according to IEC 60751;
10 K temperature step changes:
Thermometer TR44 without protection tube
Outer diameter Response Reduced tip ∅ 5.3 mm (0.2 in) Straight tip ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in)
time
8 mm (0.31 in) t50 ≤ 2.5 s not available

t90 ≤5s not available
6 mm (0.24 in) t50 not available ≤ 4s

t90 not available ≤ 10 s
TR45 with protection tube
Diameter Response Reduced tip Tapered tip Straight tip

time ∅ 5.3 mm (0.2 in) ∅ 6.6 mm (0.26 in) ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in)
A1) B2) A1) B2) A1) B2)

9 x 1 mm t50 7.5 s 3.5 s 11 s 5s 18 s 10 s
(0.35 in) t90 21 s 8s 37 s 12 s 55 s 30 s
1) without thermoconductive paste

2) with thermoconductive paste
6 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
Insulation resistance Insulation resistance ≥100 MΩ at ambient temperature.

Insulation resistance between each terminal and the sheath is tested with a voltage of 100 V DC.
Self heating RTD elements are not self-powered and require a small current be passed through the device to provide a
voltage that can be measured. Self-heating is the rise of temperature within the element itself, caused by the
current flowing through the element. This self-heating appears as a measurement error and is affected by the
thermal conductivity and velocity of the process being measured; it is negligible when an Endress+Hauser
iTEMP® temperature transmitter is connected.
Calibration specifications The manufacturer provides comparison temperature calibrations from -80 to +600 °C (-110 °F to 1112 °F) on
the International Temperature Scale of 1990 (ITS90). Calibrations are traceable to national and international
standards. The report of calibration is referenced to the serial number of the thermometer.
TR44 (without replaceable insert) Minimum standard immersion length L in mm (inch)

Temperature range
-80 °C to -40 °C (-110 °F to -40 °F) 200 (7.9)
-40 °C to 0 °C (-40 °F to 32 °F) 160 (6.3)
0 °C to 250 °C (32 °F to 480 °F) 120 (4.7)
250 °C to 400 °C (480 °F to 752 °F) 300 (11.8)
TR45 (with replaceable insert) Minimum standard immersion length L in mm (inch)
Temperature range without head transmitter with head transmitter
-80 °C to -40 °C (-110 °F to -40 °F) 200 (7.9)

-40 °C to 0 °C (-40 °F to 32 °F) 160 (6.3)
0 °C to 250 °C (32 °F to 480 °F) 120 (4.7) 150 (5.9)
0 °C to 150 °C (32 °F to 300 °F) 80 (3.15) 110 (4.3)
150 °C to 250 °C (300 °F to 480 °F) 110 (4.3) 140 (5.51)
250 °C to 400 °C (480 °F to 752 °F) 300 (11.8)
Material
Material Short description max. application Features and benefits

temperature
SS 316L/ X2CrNiMo 17 13 2 800 °C (1472 °F) • Austenitic, stainless steel

1.4404/1.4435 • High corrosion resistance
• High resistance at low temperatures
• Optimal corrosion resistance in an acid, non oxydizing environment
(e.g. phosphorous and sulphuric acids in low concentration and at low temperatures)
• Not resistant to chloride at high temperatures
Endress+Hauser 7
TR44, TR45
Transmitter specifications
TMT180 TMT181 TMT182 TMT184 TMT85

PCP PCP HART® PROFIBUS®- PA FOUNDATION
Fieldbus™
Pt100 Pt100, TC, Ω, mV Pt100, TC, Ω, mV Pt100, TC, Ω, mV Pt100, TC, Ω, mV
Measurement accuracy 0.2 °C (0.36 °F), 0.2 °C (0.36 °F) or 0.08% 0.15 °C (0.27 °F) 0.1 °C (0.18 °F)
optional 0.1 °C (0.18 °F)
or 0.08%
% is related to the adjusted measurement range (the larger value applies)
Sensor current Ι ≤ 0.6 mA Ι ≤ 0.2 mA Ι ≤ 0.3 mA
Galvanic isolation - Û = 3.75 kV AC U = 2 kV AC

(input/output)
Transmitter long-term ≤ 0.1 °C/year (≤ 0.18 °F / year) or ≤ 0.05% / year

stability Data under reference conditions; % relates to the set span. The larger value applies.
System components
Family of temperature Measurement assemblies with iTEMP® transmitters are an installation ready solution to improve the
transmitters functionality of temperature measurement by increasing accuracy and reliability when compared to direct
wired sensors. Overall installation costs are lower than with direct wired sensors, since an inexpensive pair of
signal (4 to 20 mA) wires can be run over long distances.
PC programmable devices TMT180 and TMT181

PC programmable head transmitters offer you extreme flexibility and help control costs with the ability to stock
one device and program it for your needs. Regardless of your choice of output, all iTEMP® transmitters can be
configured quickly and easily with a PC. To help you with this task, Endress+Hauser offers free software
ReadWin® 2000 which can be downloaded from our website. Go to www.readwin2000.com to download
ReadWin® 2000 today. For details see Technical Information.
HART® TMT182 head transmitter

HART® communication is all about easy, reliable data access and getting better information more
inexpensively. iTEMP® transmitters integrate seamlessly into your existing control system and provide painless
access to preventative diagnostic information.
Configuration with a DXR275 or 375 hand-held or a PC with configuration program (FieldCare, ReadWin®
2000) or configure with AMS or PDM. For details, see Technical Information.
Type of transmitter Specification

®
iTEMP TMT18x
• Material: Housing (PC), Potting (PUR)

• Terminals: Cable up to max. max. ≤ 2.5 mm2 / 16 AWG (secure screws) or
with wire end ferrules
• Eyelets for easy connection of a HART®-handheld terminal with alligator
clips
• Degree of protection NEMA 4 (see also type of connection head)
Details see Technical Information (see ’Documentation’)
R09-TMT182ZZ-06-06-xx-en-001
8 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
PROFIBUS® PA TMT184 head transmitter

Universally programmable head transmitter with PROFIBUS®-PA fieldbus communication. Converting various
input signals into a digital output signal. High accuracy in the total ambient temperature range. Swift and easy
operation, visualization and maintenance using a PC direct from the control panel, e. g. using operating
software such as FieldCare, Simatic PDM or AMS. DIP switch for address setting, makes start up and
maintenance safe and reliable. For details, see Technical Information.

®
iTEMP PA TMT184 • Material: Housing (PC), Potting (PUR)
• Terminals: Cable up to max. max. ≤ 2.5 mm2 / 16 AWG (secure screws) or
with wire end ferrules
• Eyelets for easy connection of a HART®-handheld terminal with alligator
clips
T09-TMT184ZZ-06-06-xx-en-001
FOUNDATION Fieldbus™ TMT85 head transmitter

Universally programmable head transmitter with FOUNDATION fieldbus™ communication. Converting
various input signals into a digital output signal. High accuracy in the total ambient temperature range. Swift
and easy operation, visualization and maintenance using a PC direct from the control panel, e. g. using
operating software such as ControlCare from Endress+Hauser or the NI Configurator from National
Instruments.
Benefits are: dual sensor input, highest reliability in harsh industrial environments, mathematic functions,
thermometer drift monitoring, sensor back-up functionality, sensor diagnosis functions and sensor-transmitter
matching by accepting Callendar Van Dusen constants. For details, see Technical Information.

iTEMP® TMT85 • Spring range L ≥ 5 mm (0.2"), see Pos. A
• Fixing elements for detachable measured value display, see Pos. B
∅5 (0.2”) • Interface for contacting measured value display, see Pos. C
• Material (RoHS-compliant)
Housing: PC
∅7 (0.28”)
A Potting: PU
∅44 (1.73”)
C
33 (1.3”)
• Terminals:
B Screw terminals (cable up to max. ≤ 2.5 mm2 / 16 AWG)
24.1 (0.95”)
or spring terminals (e. g. from 0.25 mm2 to 0.75 mm2/ 24 AWG to 18 AWG
for flexible wires with wire-end ferrules with plastic ferrule)
a0007301-en
Endress+Hauser 9
TR44, TR45
Connection heads All available heads have internal geometry according to DIN 43729, form B and thermometer connection
M24x1.5.
All dimensions in mm (inch). All cable gland dimensions in the graphics are based on SKINTOP ST M20x1.5
TA20A Specification
• Degree of protection: IP66

• Tapped hole spacing: 33 mm (1.30") for the measuring insert
• Max. temperature: 100 °C (212 °F)
• Material: aluminum alloy, rubber seal under the cover
• Cable entry: G ½", NPT ½", M12x1 PA or M20x1.5
• Protection armature connection: M24x1.5, NPT ½" or G ½"
• Head color: blue RAL 5012, epoxy resin coating
• Cap color: grey RAL 7035, epoxy resin coating
• Weight: 180 g (6.35 oz)
a0008650
TA20B Specification

• Material: polyamide (PA)
• Cable entry: M20x1.5
• Head and cap color: black
• Weight: 80 g (2.82 oz)
a0008663
TA20D Specification

• Material: aluminum alloy, rubber seal under the cover
• Cable entry: NPT ½", M12x1 PA or M20x1.5
• Two head transmitters can be mounted
• Head and cap color: grey
• Weight: 465 g (16.4 oz)
a0008666
10 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
TA20J Specification
• Degree of protection: IP66/IP67

• Material: 316L (1.4404) stainless steel, rubber seal under the
cover (hygienic design)
• 4 digits 7-segments LC display (loop powered)
• Cable entry: NPT ½", M12x1 PA, HARTING HAN7D or
M20x1.5
• Protection armature connection: M24x1.5 or NPT ½"
• Head and cap color: stainless steel, polished
• Weight: 650 g (22.93 oz) with display
• Humidity: 25 to 95% not condensating
The programming is executed through 3 keys mounted on the
bottom of the display.
a0008866
* dimensions with optional display
TA20R Specification
• Degree of protection: IP66/67

• Material: SS 316L (1.4404) stainless steel
• Cable entry: NPT ½" , M20x1.5 or fieldbus device connector
• Head and cap color: stainless steel
• Weight: 550 g (19.4 oz)
a0008667
TA20W Specification

• Max. temperature: 130 °C (266 °F) (depends on the cable gland)
• Material: aluminum alloy, rubber seal under the cover with a
snap
• Cable entry: NPT ½" , M20x1.5
• Head and cap color: grey aluminum
• Weight: 70 g (2.47 oz)
a0008668
Endress+Hauser 11
TR44, TR45
TA21E Specification

• Max. temperature: 130 °C (266 °F) silicone, 100 °C (212 °F)
rubber (observe max. permitted temperature of the cable gland!)
• Material: aluminum alloy with polyester or epoxy coating; rubber
or silicone seal under the cover
• Cable entry: M20x1.5 or M12x1 PA plug
• Protection armature connection: M24x1.5, G ½" or NPT ½"
• Head color: blue
• Cap color: grey
• Weight: 300 g (10.58 oz)
a0008669
Protection tube All dimensions in mm (inches).
TR44 TR45
A B C
Ø 42 (1.65) Ø 44 (1.73)
Ø 33 (1.3) Ø 33 (1.3)
75 (3)
M4x1 M4x1 Ø 33 (1.3)
10 (0.4)
Ø6 Ø 42 (1.65)
26 (1.02)
(0.24)
E E
d d
IL
R= 3.2 R= 3.2
L
L
Ø ID Ø ID
ØX ØX
a0008961
Dimensions of the Omnigrad M TR44 and TR45
A Model with terminal block mounted ∅ ID Insert diameter

B Model with head mounted transmitter IL TR45 insertion length = E + L + 10 mm (0.4 in)
C Model with flying leads L Immersion length
d Neck tube diameter ∅X Protection tube diameter
E Neck tube length
12 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
Tip shape
TR44 TR45
S R R S T
Ø9x1 Ø9x1 Ø9x1
Ø6 (0.35) Ø8 (0.31) (0.35) (0.35) (0.35)
(0.8)
20
~3.5
20 (0.8)
20 (0.8)
(0.14)
3 (0.12)
3 (0.12)
1 (0.94)
40 (1.6)
(0.12)
3.2 3.2
3
(0.13) (0.13)
Ø5.3 (0.21) Ø5.3 (0.21) Ø7 (0.28) Ø6.6 (0.26)

a0009560
Available versions of protection tube tips (reduced, straight or tapered)
Pos. No. Tip shape, L = Immersion length Insert Diameter
TR44-S Straight for ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in) not available
TR44-R Reduced for ∅ 8 mm (0.32 in) not available
TR45-R Reduced, L ≥ 30 mm (1.2 in) ∅ 3 mm (0.12 in)
TR45-S Straight ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in)
TR45-T Tapered, L ≥ 65 mm (2.6 in) ∅ 6 mm (0.24 in)
Weight From 0.5 to 2.5 kg (1 to 5.5 lbs) for standard options.
Endress+Hauser 13
TR44, TR45
Process connection All dimensions are in mm. Surface finishing Ra ≤ 0.8 μm, ≤ 0.4 μm or ≤ 0.4 μm electropolished.
DIN 11851 (dairy connection)
B
(*) All dimensions are in mm (***)
DN D D D PN max
A B C d TR 44- TR 45-
DIN 11851 light normal strong (bar)
- - 30
25 30 44 26 - 29 - CD CD
C
28 - -
- - 36
32 36 50 10 32 - 35 - 40 CE CE
34 - -
A - - 42
40 42 56 38 CF CF
L
- 41 -
40 - -
- - 54
50 54 68 11 50 - 53 - 25 CG CG
D
d
52 - -
d
a0009561 (**) All dimensions are in mm (***)
DN D D PN max
A B C d TR 44- TR 45-
Inches normal light (bar)
35 -
1” 30 44 22,9 CD CD
- 25,4
41 -
1 ¼” 36 50 10 29,3 40 CE CE
- 31,8
48 -
1 ½” 42 56 35,1 CF CF
- 38,1
61 -
2” 54 68 11 47,8 25 CG CG
- 50,8
(*) Pipes according to DIN 11850

(**) Not included in DIN 11851 standard
(***) With a suitable gasket, up to 140°C.
DIN 11864-1 Form A (aseptic connection)
B
(*) (****)
DN D D PN max
B C d TR 44- TR 45-
DIN 11864-1 Normal strong (bar)
- 30
25 42,9 9 26 CH CH
C
29 -
40
- 42
40 54,9 10 38 CJ CJ
41 -
50 66,9 11 50 53 - 25 - -
L
(**) (****)
DN PN max
D
d
B C d D TR44- TR45-
ISO BS (bar)
d 25 21,8 25,0
42,9 9 CH CH
a0009562
25,4 22,2 25,4 40
38 54,9 10 34,8 38,0 CJ CJ
(***) (****)
DN PN max
B C d D TR44- TR45-
DIN EN ISO (bar)
26,9 42,9 9 23,7 26,9 CH CH
40
42,4 54,9 10 38,4 42,4 CJ CJ
(*) Pipes according to DIN 11850.
(**) Pipes according to ISO 2037 and BS 4825 Part 1.
(***) Pipes according to DIN EN ISO 1127.
(****) With a suitable gasket, up to 140°C.
14 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
Varivent® connection
Type B (DN10/DN15)
(*)
DN metric d D V PN (bar) TR44- TR45- Type
10 10 14
31 FC FC B
15 16 20
25 26 30 50 25 FB FB F
40 38 42
50 50 54
65 66 70
68 16 FA FA N
L
80 81 85
100 100 104
D
10
d
125 125 129
V
(**)
DN ISO d D V PN (bar) TR44- TR45- Type
25 29,7 33,7
32 38,4 42,4
68 25 FA FA N
40 44,3 48,3
50 56,3 60,3
a0009563
(***)
Type F (DN25, 1")
DN inches d D V PN (bar) TR44- TR45- Type
Type N (DN32...125, 1¼"...6") 1” 22,2 25,4 50 FB FB F
1 ½” 34,9 38,1 25
2” 47,6 50,8
2 ½” 60,3 63,5 68 FA FA N
16
3” 73,0 76,1
4” 97,6 101,6 10
(****)
DN IPS d D V PN (bar) TR44- TR45- Type
L
2” 57,1 60,3 25
D
d
3” 84,7 88,9 16
68 FA FA N
4” 110,1 114,4
10
6” 162,3 168,3
V
(*) Pipes according to DIN 11850.
a0009564 (**) Pipes according to DIN EN ISO 1127.
(***) Pipes according to ISO 2037 and BS 4825 Part 1.
(****) Pipes according to IPS Sch. 5.
ISO 2852 clamp connection
(*) (****)
D D
DN PN max
A B C d Expanded Welded TR44- TR45-
ISO 2852 (bar)
type type
8÷18(**) 20,0 25,0 3,6 (**) (**) (**) BM -
12(***) 12 16 -
12,7(***) 12,7 16,7 -
27,5 34,0 BA BA
17,2(***) 17,2 21,2 -
21,3(***) 21,3 25,3 -
25 29 -
25
22,6 - 25,6
33,7 38,1 - 16
33,7 43,5 50,5 2,85 BB BB
31,3 - 34,3
38 42,4 -
38
35,6 - 38,6
40 44,8 -
40
37,6 - 40,6
a0009565 56,5 64,0 BC BC
51 55,8 -
51
48,6 - 51,6
(*) Pipes according to ISO 2037 and BS 4825 Part1.
(**) MicroClamp (not included in std. ISO 2852); not standard pipes.
(***) MiniClamp.
(****) Depends on clamping ring type, at 121°C with suitable gasket.
Endress+Hauser 15
TR44, TR45
Tri-clamp® connection
B (*) (**)
D D PNmax
DN A B C d TR44- TR45-
std. strong (bar)
C
½”(***) 9,5 - 12,7 - -

20,0 25,0 3,6 BM
¾”(***) 15,8 - 19,0 - -
- 29,5 -
1” 22,2
25,4 - 9÷20,7
43,5 50,5 BF BF
- 42,6 -
1½” 2,85 34,9
38,1 - 9÷20,7
A
L
- 55,7 -
2” 56,5 64,0 47,6 BH BH
50,8 - 9÷17,2
(*) Pipes according to ISO 2037 and BS 4825 Part1.
D
(**) Depends on clamping ring type, at 121°C with suitable gasket.
d
d (***) MicroClamp.
B
C
L
d
A
MicroClamp
a0009566
SMS 1147/8 connection
L
a0009568
Weld-in cylindrical (30x40 mm) Weld-in spherical (30x40 mm) Conical connection metal-to-metal G½"
30 (1.18) 30 (1.18)
3 (0.12)
(0.55) (0.31)
8
40 (1.57)
37 (1.46)
40 (1.57)
20 (0.8) 14
G½”
3 (0.12)
(0 .15
)
R
L
.6
L
L
a0009569 a0009570 18
(0.71)
a0009571
Liquiphant M G1" Ingold (not 3A certified) Conical connection metal-to-metal M12x1.5

(0.2)
2 (0.08)
5
21 (0.83)
(0.43)
11
M12x1.5
7.6 (0.3)
L
L
L
a0009572 a0009573
7.5
(0.3)
25x50 mm 10 (0.4)
25x30 mm a0009574
Standard connections are available in several sizes. Others (i.e. Neumo, APV) are available on request. The
process connection is continuously welded on the probe or on the well so as to obtain a minimum welding
16 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
radius of 3.2 mm (0.13 in) between the lower surface of the connection and the sensor stem (according to
EHEDG and 3-A® standards).
Please refer to chapter ’Accessories’ for information regarding availability of welding adaptors. The Varivent®
connections must be used with dedicated Tuchenhagen® in-line components or tank adaptors. For Varivent®
flanges with small nominal diameter, maximum immersion lengths for usual applications are listed in the
following table (also refer to chapter ’Installation conditions’).
Thermometers TR44 TR45 (reduced tip)

(6 mm/0.24 in probe, straight tip)
Varivent® nominal diameter DN 10/15 DN 25 DN 10/15 DN 25
Suggested immersion length 30 to 50 mm (1.18 to 2 in) 17 mm 30 mm (1.18 in) 17 mm

(L) for low viscosity fluids (0.7 in) for low viscosity fluids (0.7 in)
17 mm (0.7 in) 17 mm (0.7 in)
for high viscosity fluids for high viscosity fluids
Spare parts • A thermowell for TR45 is available as spare part TW45 (see Technical Information in chapter
’Documentation’).
• The RTD insert is available as spare part TPR100 (see Technical Information in chapter ’Documentation’).
In TR45, the measuring probe is constituted by a mineral insulated insert positioned inside the thermowell. For
its replacement, the insert length (IL) must be chosen depending on the immersion length (L) of the
thermowell. If spare parts are required, refer to the following table:
Protection tube tip shape ID Neck tube length E Insertion length IL

Straight (version S) 6 mm (0.24 in)
IL = L + E + 10 mm
Reduced/tapered on Ø 9 mm 3 mm (0.12 in) Standard 82 mm (3.2 in) or as specified
(0.4 in)
(0.35 in), version R/T
Spare part Material-No.

Gasket set M24x1.5, aramid+NBR (10 pieces) 60001329
Wiring
Wiring diagrams Type of sensor connection
Head mounted transmitter TMT18x (single input)
T09-TH1112xx-04-xx-XX-ae-000
Endress+Hauser 17
TR44, TR45
Head mounted transmitter TMT85 (dual input)
a0008848-en
Terminal block mounted
a0008591-en
Installation conditions
Orientation No restrictions for installation orientation.
Installation instructions
a0008946
General installation solutions

A Insulation
18 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
Omnigrad M TR44 and TR45 can be mounted on the wall of pipes or vessels. The counterparts for the process
connections and the respective gaskets or sealing rings are generally not supplied with the sensors and are
considered to be the customer's responsibility (EHEDG and 3-A® requirements must be fulfilled). The G1"
connection is the only exception for which the sensor with the adaptor to be welded on the plant can be
supplied.
As a general rule, the sensors should be installed in such a way that does not adversely affect their
cleanability.With regard to ATEX-certified components (transmitter, insert), please refer to the specific
documentation (see chapter ’documentation’).The immersion length may affect the accuracy of the sensors. If
it is too low, an error might be generated in the measurement of the temperature, due to the lower
temperatures of the process fluid near the walls, and to the heat transfer which occurs through the sensor stem.
The incidence of such error could be not negligible if there is a big difference between the process and the
ambient temperature. To avoid this source of inaccuracy, probes with low diameter must be employed, and the
immersion length (L) should be, if possible, at least about 80 mm (3.15 in). In small pipes, the axis line of the
duct must be reached, and even slightly exceeded, by the tip of the probe. Insulation on the outer part of the
sensor reduces the effect of the low immersion. Another solution could be a tilted installation (see figure above).
In case of two-phase flows, attention should be paid in the choice of the measurement point, which may cause
fluctuations in the detected temperature value. Suitable solutions for the installation of the sensors in small
pipes (see figure below). In hygienic applications, a good, strict, installation rule consists in not to leave any
dead spaces along the flow of the process fluid. The required flush-mounting can be achieved by the connection
Varivent®, G1" Liquiphant M type (+ purpose built adaptor). The clamp flanges can also partly fulfil this
requirement, if the Tri-Clamp® components 7IMPS or TL7IWWMS (Instrument Tees) are used (see figure
below).
For other connection arrangements, the diagram in the installation figure should be followed [h <= d/2]. For
weld-in connections, care should be taken by the user in the execution of the welding on the process side
(suitable weld material, welding radius > 3 mm (0.12 in), absence of pits, folds, crevices, …).
The use of purely threaded, Ingold and metal-to-metal joints is not recommended by some hygienic design
standards (i.e. 3-A® Standard 74-03 and Document 8 from EHEDG).
Moreover often metal-to-metal couplings can only be used effectively once. Regarding corrosion, the basic
material of the wetted parts (SS 316L/1.4435) is capable to tolerate common corrosive media up to high
temperatures. When disassembling the sensors, new gaskets equivalent to the originals and specific torques
must be employed for the re-assembling procedure. This will ensure the stated IP (Ingress Protection) grade of
the enclosures. To avoid problems due to condensation when the ambient has a high humidity rate and the
process is at a low temperature, a plastic housing (i.e. model TA20B) can be an effective choice.
Neck tube length The neck tube is the part between the process connection and the housing. It is normally made of a tube with
dimensional and physical characteristics (diameter and material) which are the same of the tube under the
connection.
The connection situated in the upper part of the neck allows for orientation of the connection head.
• Standard tube diameter: 15 mm (0.6 in)
• Standard tube length:
– TR44: 82 mm (3.23 in)
– TR45: 85 mm (3.45 in)
a0008623-en
Heating of the connection head consequent to the process temperature
Endress+Hauser 19
TR44, TR45

CE Mark The device meets the legal requirements of the EC directives if applicable. Endress+Hauser confirms that the
device has been successfully tested by applying the CE mark.
Hazardous area approvals For further details on the available Ex versions (ATEX, CSA, FM, etc.), please contact your nearest
Endress+Hauser sales organisation. All relevant data for hazardous areas can be found in separate Ex
documentation. If required, please request copies from us or your Endress+Hauser sales organisation.
Sanitary compatibility Certifications from external bodies:

• EHEDG Type EL certification (TNO report n. V3912). EHEDG accepted process connections are: Varivent®,
IDF type ISO 2853, APV (acc. DIN 11864), APV Inline, DIN 11851 (only in combination with EHEDG
certified gasket from Siersema), Suedmo, Naue, Neumo
• 3-A® Authorization no. 1144 for the declaration of compliance with standard 74-03
• 3-A® accept all the mentioned process connections
Other standards and • IEC 60529:

guidelines Degrees of protection by housing (IP-Code).
• IEC 61010-1:
Safety requirements for electrical measurement, control and laboratory instrumentation.
• IEC 60751:
Industrial platinum resistance thermometer
• DIN43772:
Protection armature
• EN 50014/18, DIN 43729:
Connection heads
• IEC 61326-1:
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements)
PED approval The Pressure Equipment Directive (97/23/CE) is respected. As paragraph 2.1 of article 1 is not applicable to
these types of instruments, the CE mark is not requested for the TR10 destined for general use.
Material certification The material certificate 3.1 (according to standard EN 10204) can be directly selected from the sale structure
of the product and refers to the parts of the sensor in contact with the process fluid. Other types of certificates
related to materials can be requested separately. The "short form" certificate includes a semplified declaration
with no enclosures of documents related to the materials used in the construction of the single sensor and
guarantees the traceability of the materials through the identification number of the thermometer. The data
related to the origin of the materials can subsequently be requested by the client if necessary.
Test on protection tube The pressure tests are carried out at ambient temperature in order to verify the resistance of the protection tube
to the specifications indicated by the norm DIN 43772. With regards to the protection tubes that do not comply
with this norm (with a reduced tip, a tapered tip on a 9 mm (0.35") tube, special dimensions, ...), the pressure
of the corresponding straight tube with similar dimensions is verified. The sensors certified for use in Ex Zones,
are always tested to pressure according to the same criterions. Tests at different pressures can be carried out
upon request. The liquid penetrant test verifies the absence of crevices on the weldings of the protection tube.
Test report and calibration With regards to the tests and calibration, the "Inspection Report" consists of a compliance declaration for the
essential points of the standard IEC 60751.
The "Factory calibration" is carried out in an EA (European Accreditation) authorized laboratory of E+H
according to an internal procedure. A calibration may be requested separately according to an EA accredited
procedure (SIT calibration). Calibration is carried out on the thermometer insert.
20 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
Product structure TR44 RTD thermometer TR44 with sanitary process connection and neck. Designed for use in food and pharma industry. No replaceable insert,
in direct contact with process medium: fast response time. Wetted part built from same material.
Process connection:
BA DN12/21.3 minclamp ISO2852
BB DN25/38 ISO2852, clamp
BC DN40/51 ISO2852, clamp
BF 1+1½", ISO2852, Clamp
BH 2", ISO2852, Clamp
BM DN8/18 microclamp
CD DN25 DIN11851
CE DN32 DIN11851
CF DN40 DIN11851
CG DN50 DIN11851
CH DN25 Aseptic DIN11864-1-A
CJ DN40 Aseptic DIN11864-1-A
DA Cylindrical 30x40 mm
DB Spherical 30x40 mm
EA Liquiphant-M G1"
FA DN32/125 Varivent D=68 mm
FB DN25 Varivent D=50 mm
FC DN10/15 Varivent D=31 mm
JD DN25 SMS
NB Ingold 25x50 (not 3A certified)
NC Ingold 25x30 (not 3A certified)
ND G1/2" metal-to-metal
NE M12x1.5 metal-to-metal
Neck Length E; Diameter D:

5 82 mm; 15 mm
8 ... mm; 15 mm
9 ..... mm, as specified
Immersion Length L:
A 50 mm
B 90 mm
D 160 mm
E 220 mm
F 120 mm
G 30 mm
X ..... mm
Y ..... mm, as specified
Pipe Diameter; Material; Finishing:

A 6 mm; 316L; Ra ≤ 0.8 μm
B 6 mm; 316L; Ra ≤ 0.4 μm
D 6 mm; 316L; Ra ≤ 0.4 μm (electro-polished)
E 8 mm; 316L; Ra ≤ 0.8 μm
F 8 mm; 316L; Ra ≤ 0.4 μm
G 8 mm; 316L; Ra ≤ 0.4 μm (electro-polished)
Tip Shape:
R Reduced/stepped, D=8 mm
S Straight
Terminal type:
2 Flying leads
3 Terminal block
RTD Class; Wiring:

H 1x Pt100 A -50/200 °C; 3-wire
L 2x Pt100 A -50/200 °C; 3-wire
M 1x Pt100 A -50/200 °C; 4-wire
P 1x Pt100 1/3 DIN B -50/100 °C; 3-wire
Q 2x Pt100 1/3 DIN B -50/100 °C; 3-wire
R 1x Pt100 1/3 DIN B -50/100 °C; 4-wire
Endress+Hauser 21
TR44, TR45
Head; Cable Entry:

A TA20A Alu, IP66/IP67; M20
B TA20B PA white, IP55; M20 (x1.5)
E TA21E Alu, screw cap IP65; M20
J TA20J 316L, IP66/IP67; M20
K TA20J 316L, + display, IP66/IP67; M20
M TA20J 316L, IP66/IP67; M12 plug PA
R TA20R 316L screw cap IP66/IP67; M20
S TA20R 316L screw cap IP66; M12 plug
W TA20W Alu, round lid IP66; M20
2 TA20A Alu, IP66/IP67; NPT ½"
4 TA20A Alu, IP66; M12 plug PA
5 TA20D Alu, high lid IP66; M12 plug
6 TA20D Alu, high lid, IP66; M20
7 TA20B PA black, IP65; M20
Head Transmitter; Range:

D TMT85 FF
E TMT85 FF ATEX
P TMT181-A (PCP); temp. range to be specified
Q TMT181-B (PCP) ATEX; temp. range to be specified
R TMT182-A (HART); temp. range to be specified
S TMT184-A (Profibus PA)
T TMT182-B (HART) ATEX; temp. range to be specified
V TMT184-B (Profibus PA) ATEX
0 Not needed
2 TMT180-A21 fix; 0.2 K, temp. range to be specified, Span limit -200/650 °C
4 TMT180-A11 PCP; 0.2 K, temp. range to be specified, Span limit -200/650 °C
Material Certificate:
0 Not needed
C EN10204-3.1 Material, shortform
E EN10204-3.1 Material + roughness, shortform
G EN10204-3.1 Material
H EN10204-3.1 Material + roughness
J EN10204-3.1 Material + roughness + ferrit content ≤ 3 %
L EN10204-3.1 Material + + ferrit content ≤ 3 %
Test/Calibration:
A 0, 100 °C, RTD-Signal
B 0, 100 °C, 4-20 mA-Signal
C 0, 100 °C, RTD-Signal, 2 Sensors
0 Not needed
TR44- ← Order code (complete)
This ordering information can give an overview about the available order options. The Endress +Hauser sales
organization can provide detailed ordering information and information on the order code.
22 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
Product structure TR45 RTD thermometer TR45 with sanitary process connection, neck and thermowell. Designed for use in food and pharmaindustry. Replaceable
mineral insulated insert with Pt100.
Process connection:
BA DN12/21.3 minclamp ISO2852
BB DN25/38 ISO2852, clamp
BC DN40/51 ISO2852, clamp
BF 1+1½", ISO2852, Clamp
BH 2", ISO2852, Clamp
BM DN8/18 microclamp
CD DN25 DIN11851
CE DN32 DIN11851
CF DN40 DIN11851
CG DN50 DIN11851
CH DN25 Aseptic DIN11864-1-A
CJ DN40 Aseptic DIN11864-1-A
DA Cylindrical 30x40 mm
DB Spherical 30x40 mm
EA Liquiphant-M G1"
FA DN32/125 Varivent D=68 mm
FB DN25 Varivent D=50 mm
FC DN10/15 Varivent D=31 mm
JD DN25 SMS
NB Ingold 25x50 (not 3A certified)
NC Ingold 25x30 (not 3A certified)
ND G1/2" metal-to-metal
Neck Length E; Diameter D:

5 85 mm; 15 mm
8 ... mm; 15 mm
9 ..... mm, as specified
Immersion Length L:
A 50 mm
B 90 mm
D 160 mm
E 220 mm
F 120 mm
G 30 mm
X ..... mm
Y ..... mm, as specified
Pipe Diameter; Material; Finishing:

1 9 mm; 316L; Ra ≤ 0.8 μm
3 9 mm; 316L; Ra ≤ 0.4 μm
4 9 mm; 316L; Ra ≤ 0.4 μm (electro-polished)
Tip Shape:
P Straight + thermoconductive paste
Q Reduced L ≥ 30 mm + thermocond. Paste
R Reduced/stepped, L ≥ 30 mm
S Straight
T Tapered, L ≥ 65 mm
U Tapered, L ≥ 65 mm + thermocond. Paste
Terminal type:
2 Flying leads
3 Terminal block
4 HR fiber terminal block
RTD Class; Wiring:

H 1x Pt100 A -50/200 °C; 3-wire
L 2x Pt100 A -50/200 °C; 3-wire
M 1x Pt100 A -50/200 °C; 4-wire
P 1x Pt100 1/3 DIN B -50/100 °C; 3-wire
Q 2x Pt100 1/3 DIN B -50/100 °C; 3-wire
R 1x Pt100 1/3 DIN B -50/100 °C; 4-wire
Head; Cable Entry:

A TA20A Alu, IP66/IP67; M20
B TA20B PA white, IP55; M20 (x1.5)
E TA21E Alu, screw cap IP65; M20
Endress+Hauser 23
TR44, TR45
Head; Cable Entry:

J TA20J 316L, IP66/IP67; M20
K TA20J 316L, + display, IP66/IP67; M20
M TA20J 316L, IP66/IP67; M12 plug PA
R TA20R 316L screw cap IP66/IP67; M20
S TA20R 316L screw cap IP66; M12 plug
W TA20W Alu, round lid IP66; M20
2 TA20A Alu, IP66/IP67; NPT ½"
4 TA20A Alu, IP66; M12 plug PA
5 TA20D Alu, high lid IP66; M12 plug
6 TA20D Alu, high lid, IP66; M20
7 TA20B PA black, IP65; M20
Head Transmitter; Range:

D TMT85 FF
G TMT181 (PCP); temp. range to be specified
H TMT182 (HART); temp. range to be specified
I TMT184 (Profibus PA)
0 Not needed
Material Certificate:
0 Not needed
C EN10204-3.1 Material, shortform
E EN10204-3.1 Material + roughness, shortform
G EN10204-3.1 Material
H EN10204-3.1 Material + roughness
J EN10204-3.1 Material + roughness + ferrit content ≤ 3 %
L EN10204-3.1 Material + + ferrit content ≤ 3 %
Test/Calibration:
A 0, 100 °C, RTD-Signal
B 0, 100 °C, 4-20 mA-Signal
C 0, 100 °C, RTD-Signal, 2 Sensors
0 Not needed
Additional option:
A ATEX II 1 GD EEx ia IIC
E ATEX II 1/2 GD EEx ia IIC
G ATEX II 1 G EEx ia IIC
H ATEX II 3 GD EEx nA II
I ATEX II 1G EEx ia IIC T6, II3D
0 Not needed
TR45- ← Order code (complete)
This ordering information can give an overview about the available order options. The Endress +Hauser sales
organization can provide detailed ordering information and information on the order code.
24 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
Accessories
All dimensions in mm (inches).
Adapter for Ingold process Welding boss

connection Material of parts in contact with process: 316L/
1.4435; weight: 0.32 kg (0.7 lb)
Order no. 60017887
a0008956
O-ring sets Ingold process connection:

• Silicone O-ring as per FDA CFR 21
Order no. 60018911
G1" Liquiphant type M process connection
a0008954
• Silicone O-ring as per FDA CFR 21
Order no. 60018912
Adapter for Liquiphant G1" Liquiphant type M welding boss

process connection Material of parts in contact with process: 316L/
1.4435; weight: 0.13 kg (0.3 lb)
Order no. 60017886
a0008957
Welding boss with sealing Welding boss

taper (metal-metal) Seal, metal-metal,
Material of parts in contact with process: 316L
Max. process pressure 16 bar (232 PSI)
Order no. 60021387
a0006621
Blind plug Blind plug for G½” or M12x1 metal-to-metal weld-in

adapter
Material: SS 316L/1.4435
Order no.:
• 60022519 for G½” thread
• 60021194 for M12x1 thread
a0009213-en
Endress+Hauser 25
TR44, TR45
Documentation
• Technical information Omnigrad TA20, TA21 Temperature Measuring Technology connection heads for
mounting on thermowells of resistance thermometers and thermocouples (TI072t/02/en)
• Technical information Thermowell for temperature sensors omnigrad M TW 45 (TI252t/02/en)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® PCP TMT181 (TI070r/09/en)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® Pt TMT180 (TI088r/09/en)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® HART® TMT182 (TI078r/09/en)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® PA TMT184 (TI079r/09/en)
• Technical information Temperature head transmitter iTEMP® TMT85 FF (TI134r/09/en)
• Technical information E+H Thermolab - Calibration certificates for industrial thermometers RTD and
thermocouples (TI236T/02/en)
Application example: • Technical information Field display RIA261 (TI083r/09/en)

• Technical information Active barrier with power supply RN221N (TI073R/09/en)
26 Endress+Hauser
TR44, TR45
Endress+Hauser 27
TR44, TR45
Instruments International
Endress+Hauser
Instruments International AG
Kaegenstrasse 2
4153 Reinach
Switzerland
Tel. +41 61 715 81 00

Fax +41 61 715 25 00
www.endress.com
info@ii.endress.com
TI244T/02/en/04.08
71073141
FM+SGML 6.0 ProMoDo
Proline Promag 10H

Electromagnetic Flow Measuring System
Flow measurement of liquids in hygienic,
food or process applications
Application Your benefits

Electromagnetic flowmeter for bidirectional Promag measuring devices offer you cost-effective flow
measurement of liquids with a minimum conductivity of measurement with a high degree of accuracy for a wide
≥ 50 µS/cm: range of process conditions.
• Beverages, e.g. fruit juice, beer, wine The uniform Proline transmitter concept comprises:
• Dairy products, fruit mixes • High degree of reliability and measuring stability
• Saline solutions • Uniform operating concept
• Acids, alkalis, etc.
The tried-and-tested Promag sensors offer:
• Flow measurement up to 4,700 m³/h • No pressure loss
• Fluid temperature up to +150 °C • Not sensitive to vibrations
• Process pressures up to 40 bar • Simple installation and commissioning
• CIP-/SIP cleaning
Approvals in food sector/hygiene sector:
• 3A approval, EHEDG-tested, conform to FDA
Application-specific lining material:
• PFA
TI095D/06/en/06.05
50104876
Proline Promag 10 H
Table of contents
Function and system design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Mechanical construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Measuring principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Measuring tube specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Measuring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Design, dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Material load diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Measured variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Fitted electrodes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Measuring ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Process connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Operable flow range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Surface roughness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Human interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Signal on alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Low flow cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Galvanic isolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Certificates and approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
CE mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
C-tick mark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Electrical connection, measuring unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Ex approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Electrical connection, terminal assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Sanitary compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Electrical connection, remote version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Other standards and guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Supply voltage (power supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Pressure measuring device approval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Cable entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Remote version cable specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ordering information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Power supply failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Potential equalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Performance characteristics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Reference operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Maximum measured error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Repeatability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Registered trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Operating conditions: Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Installation instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Inlet and outlet run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Length of connecting cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Operating conditions: Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Ambient temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Storage temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Degree of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Shock and vibration resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
CIP cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
SIP cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Operating conditions: Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Medium temperature range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Medium pressure range (nominal pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Pressure tightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Limiting flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H

Measuring principle Following Faraday's law of magnetic induction, a voltage is induced in a conductor moving through a magnetic
field.
In the electromagnetic measuring principle, the flowing medium is the moving conductor.
The voltage induced is proportional to the flow velocity and is supplied to the amplifier by means of two
measuring electrodes. The flow volume is calculated by means of the pipe cross-sectional area. The DC
magnetic field is created through a switched direct current of alternating polarity.
Ue
V
B
I
L
a0003191
Ue = B · L · v
Q=A·v
Ue Induced voltage
B Magnetic induction (magnetic field)
L Electrode spacing
v Flow velocity
Q Volume flow
A Pipe cross-section
I Current strength
Measuring system The measuring system consists of a transmitter and a sensor.

Two versions are available:
• Compact version: Transmitter and sensor form a mechanical unit.
• Remote version: Sensor is mounted separate from the transmitter.
Transmitter:
• Promag 10 (key operation, two-line, unilluminated display)
Sensor:
• Promag H (DN 2…100)
Input
Measured variable Flow velocity (proportional to induced voltage)
Measuring ranges Measuring ranges for liquids

Typically v = 0.01...10 m/s with the specified accuracy
Operable flow range Over 1000 : 1
Endress + Hauser 3
Proline Promag 10 H
Output
Output signal Current output
• Galvanically isolated
• Active: 4...20 mA, RL < 700 Ω (for HART: RL ≥ 250 Ω)
• Full scale value adjustable
• Temperature coefficient: typ. 2 µA/°C, resolution: 1.5 µA
Pulse/status output
• Galvanically isolated
• Passive: 30 V DC / 250 mA
• Open collector
• Can be configured as:
– Pulse output: Pulse value and pulse polarity can be selected, max. pulse width adjustable (5...2000 ms),
pulse frequency max. 100 Hz
– Status output: for example, can be configured for error messages, empty pipe detection, flow recognition,
limit value
Signal on alarm • Current output → Failsafe mode can be selected

• Pulse output → Failsafe mode can be selected
• Status output → “Not conductive” in the event of fault or power supply failure
Load See “output signal”
Low flow cut off Low flow cut off →Switch-on point can be selected as required.
Galvanic isolation All circuits for inputs, outputs and power supply are galvanically isolated from each other.
Power supply
Electrical connection,
measuring unit
e b
e b e b
f c
a
g d
i
h 24 25 26 27 1 2
+ – + – L1 N
(L+) (L-)
a0003192
Connecting the transmitter (aluminum field housing), cable cross-section max. 2.5 mm2
a Electronics compartment cover
b Power supply cable
c Ground terminal for power supply cable
d Terminal connector for power supply cable
e Signal cable
f Ground terminal for signal cable
g Terminal connector for signal cable
h Service connector
i Ground terminal for potential equalization
4 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Electrical connection,
terminal assignment Order version Terminal No.
24 (+) 25 (–) 26 (+) 27 (–) 1 (L1/L+) 2 (N/L–)
10***-***********A Pulse/status output HART current output Power supply
Functional values See “output signal” See “Supply voltage”
Electrical connection, remote

version
GND
S1
E1
E2
S2
E
S
d
a
c 6 5 7 8 4 37 36 42 41
2 1
b
b
n.c. n.c. n.c.
5 7 4 37 42 41
E1
E2
GND
E
DN 2...25 DN 40...100
a0003458-de
Connecting the remote version

a Wall-mount housing connection compartment
b Sensor connection housing cover
c Signal cable
d Coil current cable
n.c. Not connected, insulated cable shields
Cable colors:
terminal numbers 5/6 = brown; 7/8 = white; 4 = green; 37/36 = yellow
Note!
Grounding the cable shielding in the sensor takes place by means of the strain relief terminal.
Supply voltage (power supply) • 85...250 V AC, 45...65 Hz

• 20...28 V AC, 45...65 Hz, 11...40 V DC
Cable entry Power supply and signal cables (inputs/outputs):

• Cable entry M20 x 1.5 (8...12 mm)
• Thread for cable entries, ½" NPT, G ½"
Connecting cable for remote version:
• Cable entry M20 x 1.5 (8...12 mm)
• Thread for cable entries, ½" NPT, G ½"
Endress + Hauser 5
Proline Promag 10 H
Remote version cable Coil cable

specifications • 2 x 0.75 mm2 PVC cable with common, braided copper shield (∅ ∼ 7 mm)
• Conductor resistance: ≤ 37 Ω/km
• Capacitance core/core, shield grounded: ≤ 120 pF/m
• Operating temperature: –20...+8o °C
• Cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm2
Signal cable
• 3 x 0.38 mm2 PVC cable with common, braided copper shield (∅ ∼ 7 mm)
and individual shielded cores
• With empty pipe detection (EPD): 4 x 0.38 mm2 PVC cable with common, braided copper shield
(∅ ∼ 7 mm) and individual shielded cores
• Conductor resistance: ≤ 50 Ω/km
• Capacitance core/shield: ≤ 420 pF/m
• Operating temperature: –20...+8o °C
• Cable cross-section: max. 2.5 mm2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
a b
a0003194
a Signal cable
b Coil current cable
1 Core
2 Core insulation
3 Core shield
4 Core jacket
5 Core reinforcement
6 Cable shield
7 Outer jacket
Operation in zones of severe electrical interference

The measuring device complies with the general safety requirements in accordance with EN 61010
and the EMC requirements of EN 61326/A1 (IEC 1326).
Caution!
Grounding is by means of the ground terminals provided for the purpose inside the connection housing.
Ensure that the stripped and twisted lengths of cable shield to the ground terminal are as short as possible.
Power consumption • 85...250 V AC: <12 VA (incl. sensor)

• 20...28 V AC: <8 VA (incl. sensor)
• 11...40 V DC: <6 W (incl. sensor)
Switch-on current:
• 250 V AC → max 16 A (< 5 ms)
• 28 V AC → max. 5.5 A (< 5 ms)
• 24 V DC → max. 3.3 A (< 5 ms)
Power supply failure Lasting min. ½ cycle frequency: EEPROM saves measuring system data
Potential equalization To guarantee perfect measurement, the sensor and the fluid have to be on the same electric potential. Potential
equalization can take place by means of the metal, process connections in contact with the medium which are
mounted directly on the sensors. As a result, further measures for potential equalization are generally not
required.
6 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Reference operating As per DIN EN 29104 and VDI/VDE 2641:
conditions • Fluid temperature: +28 C ±2 K
• Ambient temperature: +22 C ±2 K
• Warm-up period: 30 minutes
Installation:
• Inlet run >10 x DN
• Outlet run > 5 x DN
• Sensor and transmitter grounded.
• The sensor is centered in the pipe.
Maximum measured error • Current output: also typically ± 5 µA

• Pulse output: ± 0.5% o.r. ± 2 mm/s (o.r. = of reading)
Fluctuations in the supply voltage do not have any effect within the specified range.
[%]
2.5
2.0
0.5 %
1.5
1.0
0.5
0 v [m/s]
0 1 2 4 6 8 10
a0003200
Max. measured error in % of reading
Repeatability Max. ± 0.2% o.r. ± 2 mm/s (o.r. = of reading)
Operating conditions: Installation

Installation instructions Mounting location
Entrained air or gas bubble formation in the measuring tube can result in an increase in measuring errors.
Avoid the following installation locations in the pipe:
• Highest point of a pipeline. Risk of air accumulating!
• Directly upstream from a free pipe outlet in a vertical pipeline
h ³ 2 x DN
a0003202
Mounting location
Endress + Hauser 7
Proline Promag 10 H
Installation of pumps
Sensors may not be installed on the pump suction side. This precaution is to avoid low pressure and the
consequent risk of damage to the lining of the measuring tube.
Information on the pressure tightness of the measuring tube lining can be found in the “Pressure tightness”
section in the “Operating conditions: Process” chapter.
Pulsation dampers may be needed when using piston pumps, piston diaphragm pumps or hose pumps.
Information on the shock and vibration resistance of the measuring system can be found in the “Shock and
vibration resistance” section in the “Operating conditions: Environment” chapter.
a0003203
Installation of pumps
Partially filled pipes

Partially filled pipes with gradients necessitate a drain-type configuration.
The empty pipe detection function (EPD ) provides additional security in detecting empty or partially filled
pipes.
³ 2 x DN
³ 5 x DN
a0003204
Installation with partially filled pipes
Down pipes
Install a siphon or a vent valve downstream of the sensor in down pipes longer than 5 meters. This precaution
is to avoid low pressure and the consequent risk of damage to the lining of the measuring tube. This measure
also prevents the liquid current stopping in the pipe which could cause air locks. Information on the pressure
tightness of the measuring tube lining can be found in the “Pressure tightness” section in the “Operating
conditions: Process” chapter.
2
>5m
a0003205
Installation measures for vertical pipes

1 Vent valve
2 Pipe siphon
8 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Orientation
An optimum orientation helps avoid gas and air accumulations and deposits in the measuring tube. However,
the measuring device also offers the additional function of empty pipe detection (EPD) for detecting partially
filled measuring tubes or if outgassing fluids or fluctuating operating pressures are present.
Vertical orientation
This is the ideal orientation for self-emptying piping systems and for use in conjunction with empty pipe
detection.
a0003206
Vertical orientation
Horizontal orientation
The measuring electrode axis should be horizontal. This prevents brief insulation of the two measuring
electrodes by entrained air bubbles.
Caution!
Empty pipe detection only works correctly with horizontal orientation if the transmitter housing is facing
upwards. Otherwise there is no guarantee that empty pipe detection will respond if the measuring tube is only
partially filled or empty.
A
1
2 2
A
3
a0003207
Horizontal orientation
1 EPD electrode for empty pipe detection
2 Measuring electrodes for signal detection
3 Reference electrode for potential equalization
Vibrations
Secure the piping and the sensor if vibration is severe.
Caution!
If vibrations are too severe, we recommend the sensor and transmitter be mounted separately. Information on
the permitted shock and vibration resistance can be found in the
“Shock and vibration resistance” section in the “Operating conditions: Environment” chapter.
> 10 m
a0003208
Measures to prevent vibration of the measuring device
Endress + Hauser 9
Proline Promag 10 H
Foundation, supports
For nominal diameters DN ≥ 350, mount the sensor on a foundation of adequate load-bearing strength.
Caution!
Risk of damage!
Do not support the weight of the sensor at the metal casing. The casing would buckle and damage the internal
magnetic coils.
a0003209
Support for large nominal diameters (DN ≥ 350)
Inlet and outlet run If possible, install the sensor well clear of assemblies such as valves, T-pieces, elbows, etc.
Note the following inlet and outlet runs to comply with measuring accuracy specifications:
• Inlet run: ≥ 5 x DN
• Outlet run: ≥ 2 x DN
5 x DN 2 x DN
A0003210
Inlet and outlet run
Adapters Suitable adapters to DIN EN 545 (double-flange reducers) can be used to install the sensor in larger-diameter
pipes. The resultant increase in the rate of flow improves measuring accuracy with very slow-moving fluids.
The nomogram shown here can be used to calculate the pressure loss caused by reducers and expanders.
Note!
The nomogram only applies to liquids of viscosity similar to water.
1. Calculate the ratio of the diameters d/D.
2. From the nomogram read off the pressure loss as a function of flow velocity (downstream from the
reduction) and the d/D ratio.
10 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
[mbar]
100
8 m/s
7 m/s
6 m/s
10
5 m/s
4 m/s
max. 8°
3 m/s
d D
2 m/s
1
1 m/s
0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9

d/D
A0003213
Pressure loss due to adapters
Length of connecting cable When mounting the remote version, please note the following to achieve correct measuring results:
• Fix cable run or lay in armored conduit. Cable movements can falsify the measuring signal especially in the
case of low fluid conductivities.
• Route the cable well clear of electrical machines and switching elements.
• If necessary, ensure potential equalization between sensor and transmitter.
• The permitted cable length Lmax is determined by the fluid conductivity.
A minimum conductivity of 50 µS/cm is needed for all fluids.
• When the empty pipe detection function is switched on (EPD ), the maximum connecting cable length is 10
m.
[mS/cm]
200
L max
100
50
[m]
50 100 200
L max
a0003214
Permitted length of connecting cable for remote version

Area marked in gray = permitted range; Lmax = length of connecting cable in [m]; fluid conductivity in [µS/cm]
Endress + Hauser 11
Proline Promag 10 H
Operating conditions: Environment
Ambient temperature range • Sensor: -20...+60 °C

• Transmitter: -10...+60 °C
Caution!
The permitted temperature range of the measuring tube lining may not be undershot or overshot
(→ “Operating conditions: Process” → “Medium temperature range”).
Please note the following points:
• Install the device in a shady location. Avoid direct sunlight, particularly in warm climatic regions.
• The transmitter must be mounted separate from the sensor if both the ambient and fluid temperatures are
high.
Storage temperature • The temperature range for storing the device corresponds to the permitted ambient temperature range of the
transmitter and the sensor (see “Ambient temperature range”).
• The measuring device must be protected against direct sunlight during storage in order to avoid unacceptably
high surface temperatures.
• A storage location must be selected where moisture does not collect in the measuring device. This will help
prevent fungus and bacteria infestation which can damage the liner.
• If protecting caps or protective covers are mounted, these must not be removed before mounting the device.
Degree of protection Standard: IP 67 (NEMA 4X) for transmitter and sensor
Shock and vibration resistance Acceleration up to 2 g following IEC 600 68-2-6
CIP cleaning possible
SIP cleaning possible
Electromagnetic compatibility • As per EN 61326

(EMC) • Emission: to limit value for industry EN 55011
12 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Operating conditions: Process
Medium temperature range Sensor:

• DN 2...100: –20...+150 °C
Seal:
• EPDM: –20...+130 °C
• Viton: –20...+150 °C
• Kalrez: –20...+150 °C
Conductivity The minimum conductivity is: ≥ 50 µS/cm

Note!
In the remote version, the necessary minimum conductivity also depends on the cable length
(→ “Operating conditions: Installation” → “Length of connecting cable”).
Medium pressure range The permitted nominal pressure depends on the process connection and the seal:
(nominal pressure) • 40 bar → Flange, weld socket (with O-ring seal)
• 16 bar → All other process connections
Pressure tightness Diameter Measuring tube Pressure tightness, measuring tube lining
[mm] [inch] Material Limit values for the absolute pressure [mbar] at fluid temperatures:
Lining 25 °C 80 °C 100 °C 130 °C 150 °C 180 °C
2...100 1/ ...4" PFA 0 0 0 0 0 0
12
Limiting flow The diameter of the pipe and the flow rate determine the nominal diameter of the sensor.
The optimum flow velocity is between 2…3 m/s.
The velocity of flow (v), moreover, has to be matched to the physical properties of the fluid:
• v > 2 m/s: for fluids causing build-up such as high-fat milk, etc.
Flow characteristic values (SI units)

Diameter Recommended flow rate Factory settings
Min./max. full scale value Full scale value Pulse value Low flow cut off
Current output
[mm] [inch] (v ~ 0.3 or 10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s) (~ 2 pulses/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
1 3 3 3
2 /12" 0.06...1.8 dm /min 0.5 dm /min 0.005 dm 0.01 dm3/min
5
4 /32" 0.25...7 dm3/min 2 dm3/min 0.025 dm3 0.05 dm3/min
5 3 3 3
8 /16" 1 ...30 dm /min 8 dm /min 0.10 dm 0.1 dm3/min
1
15 /2" 4...100 dm3/min 25 dm3/min 0.20 dm3 0.5 dm3/min
25 1" 9...300 dm3/min 75 dm3/min 0.50 dm3 1 dm3/min
40 1 1/2" 25...700 dm3/min 200 dm3/min 1.50 dm3 3 dm3/min
3 3 3
50 2" 35...1100 dm /min 300 dm /min 2.50 dm 5 dm3/min
65 2 1/2" 60...2000 dm3/min 500 dm3/min 5.00 dm3 8 dm3/min
Endress + Hauser 13
Proline Promag 10 H
Flow characteristic values (US units)

Diameter Recommended flow rate Factory settings
Min./max. full scale value Full scale value Pulse value Low flow cut off
Current output
[inch] [mm] (v ~ 0.3 or 10 m/s) (v ~ 2.5 m/s) (~ 2 pulses/s) (v ~ 0.04 m/s)
1
/12" 2 0.015 ...0.5 gal/min 0.1 gal/min 0.001 gal 0.002 gal/min
5
/32" 4 0.07...2 gal/min 0.5 gal/min 0.005 gal 0.008 gal/min
5
/16" 8 0.25...8 gal/min 2 gal/min 0.02 gal 0.025 gal/min
1
/2" 15 1.0...27 gal/min 6 gal/min 0.05 gal 0.10 gal/min
1" 25 2.5...80 gal/min 18 gal/min 0.20 gal 0.25 gal/min
1 1/2" 40 7...190 gal/min 50 gal/min 0.50 gal 0.75 gal/min
2" 50 10...300 gal/min 75 gal/min 0.50 gal 1.25 gal/min
1
2 /2" 65 16...500 gal/min 130 gal/min 1 gal 2.0 gal/min
3" 80 24...800 gal/min 200 gal/min 2 gal 2.5 gal/min
4" 100 40...1250 gal/min 300 gal/min 2 gal 4.0 gal/min
Pressure loss • No pressure loss if the sensor is installed in a pipe with the same nominal diameter.
• Pressure losses for configurations incorporating adapters according to DIN EN 545
(→ “Operating conditions: Installation” → “Adapters”)
14 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Mechanical construction
Measuring tube specifications Diameter Pressure rating 1) Measuring pipe internal diameter 2)
EN (DIN) PFA
[mm] [inch] [bar] [mm]
2 1/12" PN 16 / PN 40 2.25
4 5/32" PN 16 / PN 40 4.5
8 5/16" PN 16 / PN 40 9.0
15 1/2" PN 16 / PN 40 16.0
– 1" PN 16 / PN 40 22.6
25 – PN 16 / PN 40 26.0
40 1 1/2" PN 16 35.3
50 2" PN 16 48.1
65 2 1/2" PN 16 59.9
80 3" PN 16 72.6
100 4" PN 16 97.5
1) The pressure rating depends on the process connection and the seals used.
2)
Internal diameter of process connections.
Design, dimensions Transmitter, remote version
161...181
178
20...30 121
150
Esc
- + E
327.5
177.5
Ø 8.6 (M8)
100
133
ANSCHLUSSKLEMMEN - FIELD TERMINALS
113 135 100

25
123
a0003215
Transmitter dimensions, remote version
A B
248 ±2 238
Esc
Esc - + E
- + E

a0003216
Transmitter mounting, remote version

A Direct wall mounting
B Pipe mounting
Endress + Hauser 15
Proline Promag 10 H
Compact version DN 2...25
161...181
178 20...30 121
150
Esc
- + E
242
307
M
65
DI
K L
F06-10Hxxxxx-06-00-xx-xx-001
DN PN 1) DI L K M
[mm] [inch] DIN [bar] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
2 - 16 / 40 2.25 86 43 M6x4
4 - 16 / 40 4.5 86 43 M6x4
8 - 16 / 40 9.0 86 43 M6x4
15 - 16 / 40 16.0 86 43 M6x4
- 1" 16 / 40 22.6 86 53 M6x4
25 - 16 / 40 26.0 86 53 M6x4
Total length depends on the process connections
1)
The permitted nominal pressure depends on the process connection and the seal:
• 40 bar: flange, weld socket for pipeline (with O-ring seal)
• 16 bar: all other process connections
16 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Remote version DN 2...25
125 70
75
B
M
A
C
DI
L K
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-05-xx-xx-001
DN PN 1) DI L A B C K M
[mm] [inch] DIN [bar] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
2 - 16 / 40 2.25 86 213 148 65 43 M6x4
4 - 16 / 40 4.5 86 213 148 65 43 M6x4
8 - 16 / 40 9.0 86 213 148 65 43 M6x4
15 - 16 / 40 16.0 86 213 148 65 43 M6x4
- 1" 16 / 40 22.6 86 213 148 65 53 M6x4
26 - 16 / 40 26.0 86 213 148 65 53 M6x4
1) The permitted nominal pressure depends on the process connection and the seal:
• 40 bar: flange, weld socket for pipeline (with O-ring seal)

• 16 bar: all other process connections
Endress + Hauser 17
Proline Promag 10 H
Front view DN 2...25 (without process connections)
DN 2...15 DN 25
A A-A B B-B
4
4
=±0.1 = ±0.1
±0.1
Ø 34-0.1
Ø 44-0.1
=
48.5
0
0
41.6
70
60
D
C
±0.1
=
M6
M6
±0.1 ±0.1
A = = 6 B = ±0.1 = ±0.1 6
24 8.5 28 8.5
42 52
43 53
F06-5xHxxxxx-06-05-08-xx-000
Front view dimensions for sensor DN 2...25
DN C D
[mm] [inch] [mm] DIN [mm] ANSI [mm]
2 – 9 – –
4 – 9 – –
8 – 9 – –
15 – 16 – –
– 1" – – 22.6
25 – – 26 –
Wall mounting kit DN 2...25
D
110
B
140
A C
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-07-06-xx-000
Wall mounting kit for DN 2...25

A 125 mm
B 88 mm
C 120 mm
D Ø 7 mm
18 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Process connections with O-ring seals (DN 2...25)

Flange Sensor Fits to di G L LK M HxB
PN 40/EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501), Form B
1.4404 / 316L DN Flange1)
1*H**-D*********** [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
2...8 DN 15 17.3 95 56.2 65 14 60 x 42
M
15 DN 15 17.3 95 56.2 65 14 60 x 42
LK
25 (DIN) DN 25 28.5 115 56.2 85 14 70 x 52
HxB
G
di
1)
EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501)
• Fitting length = (2 x L) + 86 mm
• Fitting length to DVGW (200 mm)
L
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-014

Cl 150/ ANSI B16.5 Flange
1.4404 / 316L DN ANSI B16.5
1*H**-E*********** [mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
2...8 ½" 15.7 89 66.0 60.5 15.7 60 x 42
M
15 ½" 16.0 89 66.0 60.5 15.7 60 x 42

LK
25 (1" ANSI) 1" 26.7 108 71.8 79.2 15.7 70 x 52

HxB
G
di
L
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-015

20K / JIS B2238; 1.4404 / 316L DN Flange
1*H**-F*********** [mm] B2238 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
2...8 ND 15 15 95 67 70 15 60 x 42
M
15 ND 15 16 95 67 70 15 60 x 42
LK
25 (DIN) ND 25 26 125 67 95 19 70 x 52
HxB
G
di
L
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-016
External pipe thread Sensor Fits to di G L S HxB

ISO 228/ DIN 2999 Internal
1.4404 / 316L DN thread
1*H**-K*********** [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm]
2...8 R 3/8" 10 3/8" 40 10.1 60 x 42
S
15 R 1/2" 16 1/2" 40 13.2 60 x 42
25 (1" ANSI) R 1" 25 1" 42 16.5 70 x 52
HxB
G
di
L
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-025
Endress + Hauser 19
Proline Promag 10 H
Process connections with aseptic gasket seal (DN 2...25)

Weld nipple for DIN Sensor Fits to di G L HxB
1.4404 / 316L DN Piping
1*H**-U*********** [mm] DIN 11850 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
2...8 14 x 2 9 14 23.3 60 x 42
15 20 x 2 16 20 23.3 60 x 42
25 (DIN) 30 x 2 26 30 23.3 70 x 52
HxB
G
di
• If pigs are used for cleaning, it is essential to take the inside diameters of
measuring tube and process connection (di) into account!
A0003870
Weld nipple for ODT/SMS Sensor Fits to di G L HxB

1.4404 / 316L DN Piping
1*H**-V*********** [mm] ODT/SMS [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
2...8 12.7 x 1.65 9.0 12.7 16.1 60 x 42
15 19.1 x 1.65 16.0 19.1 16.1 60 x 42
25 (1" ANSI) 24.5 x 1.65 22.6 25.4 16.1 70 x 52
HxB
G
di
L
A0003871
Tri-Clamp for L14 AM7 Sensor Fits to di G L HxB

1.4404 / 316L DN Piping
1*H**-1*********** [mm] OD [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
Tube 12.7 x 1.65
2...8 9.4 25.0 28.5 60 x 42
(OD ½")
Tube 19.1 x 1.65
15 15.8 25.0 28.5 60 x 42
HxB
(ODT ¾")
G
di
Tube 25.5 x 1.65

25 (1" ANSI) 22.1 50.4 28.5 70 x 52
(ODT 1")
L • If pigs are used for cleaning, it is essential to take the inside diameters of
A0003872
Coupling SC DIN 11851 Sensor Fits to di G L HxB

Threaded adapter
1.4404 / 316L DN Piping
1*H**-2*********** [mm] DIN 11850 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
Tube 12 x 1
2...8 10 Rd 28 x 1/8" 44 60 x 42
(DN 10)
Tube 18 x 1.5
15 16 Rd 34 x 1/8" 44 60 x 42
HxB
(DN 15)
G
di
Tube 28 x 1
25 (DIN) or 28 x 1.5 26 Rd 52 x 1/6" 52 70 x 52
(DN 25)
L • Fitting length = (2 x L) + 86 mm
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-017
20 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Coupling DIN 11864-1 Sensor Fits to di G L HxB

Aseptic threaded adapter, Form A
1.4404 / 316L DN Piping
1*H**-3*********** [mm] DIN 11850 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
Tube 13 x 1.5
2...8 10 Rd 28 x 1/8" 42 60 x 42
(DN 10)
Tube 19 x 1.5
15 16 Rd 34 x 1/8" 42 60 x 42
HxB
(DN 15)
G
di
Tube 29 x 1.5
25 (DIN) 26 Rd 52 x 1/6" 49 70 x 52
(DN 25)
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-021
Flange DIN 11864-2 Sensor Fits to di G L LK M HxB

Aseptic grooved flange, Form A
1.4404 / 316L DN Piping
1*H**-4*********** [mm] DIN 11850 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
Tube 13 x 1.5
M
2...8 10 54 48.5 37 9 60 x 42
(DN 10)
LK
Tube 19 x 1.5
15 16 59 48.5 42 9 60 x 42
HxB
(DN 15)
G
di
Tube 29 x 1.5
25 (DIN) 26 70 48.5 53 9 70 x 52
(DN 25)
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-022
Coupling SMS 1145 Sensor Fits to SMS 1145 di G L HxB

Threaded adapter
1.4404 / 316L DN Piping Diameter
1*H**-5*********** [mm] OD [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
25
1" 25 22.6 Rd 40 x 1/6" 30.8 70 x 52
(1" ANSI)
HxB
di
G
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-026
Endress + Hauser 21
Proline Promag 10 H
Process connections orderable only as accessories (with O-ring seal, DN 2...25)

Exernal pipe thread Sensor Fits to di G L S HxB
1.4404 / 316L DN NP
DKH**-GD** [mm] internal thread [mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm]
2...8 NPT 3/8" 10 3/8" 50 15.5 60 x 42
S
15 NPT 1/2" 16 1/2" 50 20.0 60 x 42
25 (1" ANSI) NPT 1" 25 1" 57 25.0 70 x 52
HxB
G
di • Fitting length = (2 x L) + 86 mm
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-025
Internal pipe thread Sensor Fits to di G D L S HxB

1.4404 / 316L DN NP
DKH**-GC** [mm] external thread [mm] [inch] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
S 2...8 NPT 3/8" 8.9 3/8" 22 45 13 60 x 42

15 NPT 1/2" 16.0 1/2" 27 45 14 60 x 42
25
HxB
G
NPT 1" 27.2 1" 40 51 17 70 x 52

D
di
(1" ANSI)
L
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-027
Process connections orderable only as accessories (with aseptic gasket seal)

Tri-Clamp L14 AM17 Sensor Fits to di G L HxB
1.4404 / 316L DN Piping
DKH**-HF** [mm] OD [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
Tube 25.4 x 1.65
15 22.1 50.4 28.5 60 x 42
(ODT 1")
HxB
G
di
L
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-018
22 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Front view DN 40...100 (without process connections)
K L Z-Z
Z
90° ±0.5°
D
C
E
B
A
.5°
±0
°
60
F
Z
G
H
F06-5xHxxxxx-06-05-08-xx-001
Front view dimensions for sensor DN 40...100
DN A B C D E F G H L K
[mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] Threaded holes
40 122.0 86 71.0 51.0 35.3 M8 15 18 – 4
50 147.0 99 83.5 63.5 48.1 M8 15 18 – 4
65 147.0 115 100.0 76.1 59.9 M8 15 18 6 –
80 197.0 141 121.0 88.9 72.6 M 12 15 20 – 4
100 197.0 162 141.5 114.3 97.5 M 12 15 20 6 –
Endress + Hauser 23
Proline Promag 10 H
Process connections with aseptic gasket seal (DN 40...100)

Weld nipple for DIN Sensor Fits to di G D L L1 LK
1.4404 / 316L DN Piping
1*H**-U*********** [mm] DIN 11850 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
40 42 x 2 38.0 43 92 42 19 71.0
50 54 x 2 50.0 55 105 42 19 83.5
LK
65 70 x 2 66.0 72 121 42 21 100.0
di
G
D
80 85 x 2 81.0 87 147 42 24 121.0
100 104 x 2 100.0 106 168 42 24 141.5
• – Fitting length for DN 40...65 = (2 x L) + 136 mm
L1 – Fitting length for DN 80...100 = (2 x L) + 196 mm
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-002
Weld nipple for ODT/SMS Sensor Fits to di G D L L1 LK

1.4404 / 316L DN Piping
1*H**-V*********** [mm] OD/SMS [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
40 38.1 x 1.65 35.3 40 92 42 19 71.0
50 50.8 x 1.65 48.1 55 105 42 19 83.5
LK
65 63.5 x 1.65 59.9 66 121 42 21 100.0

di
G
80 76.2 x 1.65 72.6 79 147 42 24 121.0

100 101.6 x 1.65 97.5 104 168 42 24 141.5
L1 – Fitting length for DN 80...100 = (2 x L) + 196 mm
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-002
Tri-Clamp L14 AM7 Sensor Fits to di G D L LK

1.4404 / 316L DN DN Piping
1*H**-1*********** [mm] [inch] OD [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
40 1½" 38.1 x 1.65 34.8 50.4 92 68.8 71.0
50 2" 50.8 x 1.65 47.5 63.9 105 68.8 83.5
LK
65 – 63.5 x 1.65 60.2 77.4 121 68.8 100.0

di
G
80 3" 76.2 x 1.65 72.9 90.9 147 68.8 121.0

100 4" 101.6 x 1.65 97.4 118.9 168 68.8 141.5
L – Fitting length for DN 80...100 = (2 x L) + 196 mm
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-004
Coupling SC DIN 11851 Sensor Fits to di G D L LK

1.4404 / 316L DN Piping
1*H**-2*********** [mm] DN 11850 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
40 42 x 2 38 Rd 65 x 1/6" 92 72 71.0
50 54 x 2 50 Rd 78 x 1/6" 105 74 83.5
LK
65 70 x 2 66 Rd 95 x 1/6" 121 78 100.0

di
D
G
80 85 x 2 81 Rd 110 x 1/6" 147 83 121.0

100 104 x 2 100 Rd 130 x 1/6" 168 92 141.5
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-001
24 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Coupling DIN 11864-1 Sensor Fits to di G D L LK

Aseptic threaded adapter, Form A DN Piping
1.4404 / 316L [mm] DN 11850 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
1*H**-3***********
40 42 x 2 38 Rd 65 x 1/6" 92 71 71.0
50 54 x 2 50 Rd 78 x 1/6" 105 71 83.5
LK
65 70 x 2 66 Rd 95 x 1/6" 121 76 100.0
di
D
G
80 85 x 2 81 Rd 110 x 1/6" 147 82 121.0
100 104 x 2 100 Rd 130 x 1/6" 168 90 141.5
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-006
Flange DIN 11864-2 Sensor Fits to di G D L LK 1 LK 2

Aseptic flat flange, Form A
1.4404 / 316L DN Piping
1*H**-4*********** [mm] DN 11850 [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
40 42 x 2 38 82 92 64 71.0 65
50 54 x 2 50 94 105 64 83.5 77
LK 1
LK 2
65 70 x 2 66 113 121 64 100.0 95

di
D
G
80 85 x 2 81 133 147 98 121.0 112

100 104 x 2 100 159 168 98 141.5 137
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-007
SMS
Coupling SMS 1145 Sensor Fits to di G D L LK
1145
Threaded adapter Dia-
1.4404 / 316L DN Piping meter
1*H**-5*********** [mm] OD [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm] [mm]
40 38.1 x 1.65 38.0 35.5 Rd 60 x 1/6" 92 63 71.0
50 50.8 x 1.65 51.0 48.5 Rd 70 x 1/6" 105 65 83.5
LK
65 63.5 x 1.65 63.5 60.5 Rd 85 x 1/6" 121 70 100.0

di
G
80 76.2 x 1.65 76.0 72.0 Rd 98 x 1/6" 147 75 121.0

100 101.6 x 1.65 101.6 97.6 Rd 132 x 1/6" 168 70 141.5
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-09-07-xx-000
Endress + Hauser 25
Proline Promag 10 H
Compact version DN 40...100
161...181
178 20...30 121
150
Esc
- + E
B
M
A
C
DI
K L
F06-10Hxxxxx-06-00-xx-xx-000
DN PN DI L A B C K M
40 1 ½" 16 35.3 140 309 245) 64 128 M8x4
50 2" 16 48.1 140 334 257 77 153 M8x4
65 2 ½" 16 59.9 140 334 257 77 153 M8x4
80 3" 16 72.6 200 384 282 102 203 M 12 x 4
100 4" 16 97.5 200 384 282 102 203 M 12 x 4
Remote version DN 40...100
125 70
75
M
B
A
C
DI
L K
F06-xxHxxxxx-06-05-xx-xx-000
DN PN DI L A B C K M
40 1 ½" 16 35.3 140 216 151.5 64.5 129 M8x4
50 2" 16 48.1 140 241 164.0 77.0 154 M8x4
65 2 ½" 16 59.9 140 241 164.0 77.0 154 M8x4
80 3" 16 72.6 200 290 188.5 101.5 203 M 12 x 4
100 4" 16 97.5 200 290 188.5 101.5 203 M 12 x 4
26 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Weight Weight data in kg

Diameter Compact version Remote version (without cable)
[mm] [inch] DIN Sensor Transmitter
2 1/12" 3.6 2.5 3.1
4 5/32" 3.6 2.5 3.1
8 5/16" 3.6 2.5 3.1
15 1/2" 3.7 2.6 3.1
25 1" 3.9 2.8 3.1
40 1 1/2" 4.9 4.5 3.1
50 2" 7.4 7.0 3.1
65 2 1/2" 7.9 7.5 3.1
80 3" 17.4 17.0 3.1
100 4" 18.5 16.5 6
• Promag transmitter (compact version): 1.8 kg
• Weight data valid for standard pressure ratings and without packaging material
Material • Transmitter housing: powder-coated die-cast aluminum

• Sensor housing: 1.4301/304
• Wall mounting kit: 1.4301 (AISI 304)
• Measuring pipe: 1.4301 (AISI 304) or 1.4306/316L
• Grounding rings: 1.4435/316L (optional: Alloy C-22)
• Electrodes: 1.4435 (AISI 316L) (optional: Alloy C-22)
• Seals
– DN 2...25: O-ring (EPDM, Viton, Kalrez), moulded seal (EPDM, Viton, silicone)
– DN 40...100: moulded seal (EPDM, Viton, silicone)
Material load diagram Caution!

The following diagrams contain material load diagrams (reference curves) for flange materials with regard to
the medium temperature. However, the maximum medium temperatures permitted always depend on the
lining material of the sensor and/or the sealing material.
Flange connection to EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501), threaded joint to ISO 228 / DIN 2999 / NPT
Material: 1.4404 / 316L (with O-ring)
[bar]
50
40
PN 40
35
30
25
0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
F06-10Hxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-000
Endress + Hauser 27
Proline Promag 10 H
Weld socket to DIN 11850, ODT / SMS; Clamp L 14 AM7;

threaded joint DIN 11851, DIN 11864-1, SMS 1145; flange DIN 11864-2
Material: 1.4404 / 316L (with moulded seal)
F06-xxHxxxxx-05-xx-xx-xx-001
Flange connection to ANSI B16.5

Material: 1.4404 / 316L
[bar]
30
25
20
15 Cl 150
10
0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
Flange connection to JIS B2238

Material: 1.4404 / 316L
[bar]
30
20K
20
10
0
-60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 [°C]
Fitted electrodes Measuring electrodes and empty pipe detection electrodes available as standard with:
• 1.4435,
• Alloy C-22
DN 2…4: without empty pipe detection electrode
28 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Process connections With O-ring:

• Flange EN (DIN), ANSI, JIS
• External thread
With gasket seals:
• Weld sockets DIN 11850, ODT/SMS
• TriClamp L14 AM7
• Threaded joint DIN 11851, DIN 11864-1, SMS 1145
• Flange DIN 11864-2
Surface roughness (All data refer to parts in contact with medium)

• Measuring tube lining with PFA: ≤ 0.4 µm
• Electrodes with 1.4435 (AISI 316L), Alloy C-22: ≤ 0.3...0.5 µm
Human interface
Display elements • Liquid crystal display: unilluminated, two-line, 16 characters per line
• Display (operating mode) preconfigured: volume flow and totalizer status
• 1 totalizer
Operating elements Local operation via three keys (S, O, F)
Remote operation Operation via HART protocol and ToF Tool - Fieldtool Package

CE mark The measuring system is in conformity with the statutory requirements of the EC Directives.
Endress+Hauser confirms successful testing of the device by affixing to it the CE mark.
C-tick mark The measuring system meets the EMC requirements of the Australian Communications Authority (ACA)
Ex approval Information about currently available Ex versions (ATEX, FM, CSA, etc.) can be supplied by your Endress
+Hauser Sales Center on request. All explosion protection data are given in a separate documentation which
is available upon request.
Sanitary compatibility • 3A approval and EHEDG-tested

• Seals → conform to FDA (apart from Kalrez seals)
Other standards and • EN 60529, Degrees of protection by housing (IP code)

guidelines
• EN 61010, Protection Measures for Electrical Equipment for Measurement, Control, Regulation and
Laboratory Procedures.
• EN 61326/A1 (IEC 1326), “Emission in accordance with Class A requirements”.
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC requirements)
• ANSI/ISA-S82.01
Safety Standard for Electrical and Electronic Test, Measuring, Controlling and related
Equipment - General Requirements. Pollution degree 2, Installation Category II.
• CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 1010.1-92
Safety requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement and Control and Laboratory Use.
Pollution degree 2, Installation Category II
Pressure measuring device Measuring devices with a nominal diameter smaller than or equal to DN 25 correspond to Article 3(3)
approval of the EC Directive 97/23/EC (Pressure Equipment Directive) and have been designed and manufactured
according to good engineering practice Where necessary (depending on the medium and process pressure),
there are additional optional approvals to Category II/III for larger nominal diameters.
Endress + Hauser 29
Proline Promag 10 H
Your Endress +Hauser service organization can provide detailed ordering information and information on the
order codes on request.
Accessories
Various accessories, which can be ordered separately from Endress+Hauser, are available for the transmitter
and the sensor. Your Endress+Hauser service organization can provide detailed information on the order codes
in question.
Documentation
• System Information Promag 10 (SI042D/06/en)
• Operating Instructions Promag 10 (BA082D/06/en)
Registered trademarks
KALREZ® and VITON®
Registered trademarks of E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, USA
TRI-CLAMP®
Registered trademark of Ladish & Co., Inc., Kenosha, USA
HART®
Registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation, Austin, USA
ToF Tool - Fieldtool® Package, Fieldcheck®, Applicator®
Registered or registration-pending trademarks of Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG, Reinach, CH
30 Endress + Hauser
Proline Promag 10 H
Endress + Hauser 31
Proline Promag 10 H
Deutschland Österreich Schweiz
Endress+Hauser Vertrieb Service Technische Büros Endress+Hauser Endress+Hauser

Messtechnik • Beratung • Help-Desk • Hamburg Ges.m.b.H. Metso AG
GmbH+Co. KG • Information • Feldservice • Hannover Lehnergasse 4 Sternenhofstraße 21
Colmarer Str. 6 • Auftrag • Ersatzteile/Reparatur • Ratingen 1230 Wien 4153 Reinach/BL 1
79576 Weil am Rhein • Bestellung • Kalibrierung • Frankfurt Tel. +43 1 88 05 60 Tel. +41 61 7 15 75 75
• Stuttgart Fax +43 1 88 05 63 35 Fax +41 61 7 11 16 50
Fax 0800 EHFAXEN Tel. 0800 EHVERTRIEB Tel. 0800 EHSERVICE
• München info@at.endress.com info@ch.endress.com
Fax 0800 3 43 29 36 Tel. 0800 3 48 37 87 Tel. 0800 3 47 37 84
• Berlin www.at.endress.com www.ch.endress.com
www.de.endress.com info@de.endress.com service@de.endress.com
TI095D/06/en/06.05
50104876
FM+SGML6.0 ProMoDo
1 LAY-OUT
HMI-MCC-SCS-513 SPEC. 2 CONTROL DIAGRAM
3 COMPONENT LIST
4 CABLE LIST
5 PLC LIST
10
LAY-OUT
J&E electric a/s
OUTLET
INDTAKE
M40 2 X FLANGE M40
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : LAY-OUT
J&E electric a/s Control Panel Alfa Laval Ordre no. J&E Electric Ordre no. Revision : 00
Next page : L2
Måløv Værkstedsby 54-60, DK-2760 Måløv HMI-MCC-SCS-513 SPEC.
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:29:04
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
Page titel COPENHAGEN Approved at Alfa by. Approved at J&E by. Page L1
LAYOUT 1 DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s
-T3
-T2 -V1
-T1
-F10
-F11
-K2
-K3
-K4
-F8
-F9
-K6
-K1
-K5
-T4
-F1
-F2
-F3
-F4
-F5
-F6
-F7
-Q1 -Q5 -B1
-Q4 -Q3 -Q2
X2 PE -Q6
-K7
-K8
-K9
-K10
-K11 -Q0
-K12
X3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : L1
Next page : CONTROL DIAGRAM
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:26:56
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
Page titel COPENHAGEN Approved at Alfa by. Approved at J&E by. Page L2
LAYOUT 2 DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
CONTROL DIAGRAM
J&E electric a/s
SERVICE
SWITCH
NOT SUPPLIED
BY ALFA LAVAL
MAIN MOTOR OPERATING WATER PUMP

30 kW / 60A 0.55kW / 1.0A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : CONTROL DIAGRAM
Next page : 2
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:32:00
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
Page titel COPENHAGEN Approved at Alfa by. Approved at J&E by. Page 1
POWER SUPPLY MOTORSTART DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s
NB!!! Check voltage

Spannung Kontrollieren
400V AC 230V AC
COOLING FAN POWER SUPPLY NOISE FILTER

PANEL 230VAC/24VDC
10A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 1
Next page : 3
Last rev. : 16-11-2009 17:22:08
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
POWER SUPPLY CONTROL DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s
POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY SAFETY RELAY MAIN MOTOR

CIP PANEL VIBRO ACTIVE
(OPTION) (OPTION)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 2
Next page : 4
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:30:44
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
CONTROL 230V DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s
POWER SUPPLY POWER SUPPLY SIGHT WINDOW LIGHT VIBRA CHECK COVER CHECK SAFETY RELAY
24VDC 24VDC 24VDC
CIP PANEL VALVE BOX
(OPTION)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 3
Next page : 5
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:29:58
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
CONTROL 24VDC DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s
WATER LEVEL RPM SEPARATOR
ELECTRODE NAMUR
SENSOR
PR 2255B2
4-20mA
ELECTRODE NAMUR SENSOR,

WATER LEVEL RPM SEPARATOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 4
Next page : 6
Last rev. : 22-12-2009 16:32:34
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
J&E electric a/s
HMI PANEL
CODE PIN COMBINATION FOR TERMINAL PLUGS
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
X10: X11:
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
X12: X13:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 5
Next page : 7
Last rev. : 22-12-2009 18:20:18
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
J&E electric a/s
VIBRO RPM FT 01 TT 01 TEMPERATURE

SENSOR MAIN MOTOR SENSOR
PT100
FEED
X13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 6
Next page : 8
Last rev. : 16-11-2009 18:10:32
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
CONTROL ANALOG INPUT DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s
X14
SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 7
Next page : 9
Last rev. : 16-11-2009 16:57:44
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
CONTROL ANALOG OUTPUT DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s
-VIBRA
SAFETY RELAY
ACTIVE
SPARE VIBRATION EQUIPMENT VIBRATION VIBRATION LEVEL CONTROL SPARE COVER EMERGENCY
CONTROL RELAY LEVEL 1 LEVEL 2 OPERATING WATER SWITCH SWITCH
TANK OK OK
X11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 8
Next page : 10
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:34:06
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
CONTROL DIGITAL INPUT DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s
MAIN
MOTOR
SPARE SPARE MAIN SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE

MOTOR
X11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 9
Next page : 11
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:34:38
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
J&E electric a/s
FEED BACK FEED BACK SLUDGE SENSOR TURBIDITY CHECK SPARE SPARE SPARE OPERATING WATER
FEED PUMP M12 SLUDGE PUMP M8 PUMP
(OPTION) (OPTION)
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 10
Next page : 12
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:27:32
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
J&E electric a/s
X10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 11
Next page : 13
Last rev. : 16-11-2009 15:37:06
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
PLC POWER SUPPLY DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s
X12
SPARE START/STOP START/STOP CIP ON ALARM FEED PUMP OPERATING WATER ALARM
FEED PUMP SLUDGE PUMP VALVE PUMP SAFETY RELAY
M12 M8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 12
Next page : 14
Last rev. : 22-12-2009 18:54:58
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
CONTROL DIGITAL OUTPUT DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s
X12
SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 13
Next page : 15
Last rev. : 16-11-2009 15:37:08
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
CONTROL DIGITAL OUTPUT DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s
EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL START/STOP START/STOP CIP ON ALARM FEED PUMP SPARE
COVER CHECK FEED PUMP SLUDGE PUMP SIGNAL FEED VALVE
M12 M8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
Previos page : 14
Next page : COMPONENT LIST
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:39:44
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
CONTROL DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
COMPONENT LIST
J&E electric a/s
LINE TAG NO : DESCRIPTION : TYPE : MANUFACTURE : PAGE POS :

1 -B1 Temperature controller 3110.000 Rittal 2/8
2 -F1 Miniature circuit breaker, 4A, 1P, C 5SY6 104-7 Siemens 2/6
9 -F8 Fuse terminal ASK 1/35 PA 4745.6 Weidmüller 6/2
13 -FILTER Filter SK3326.207 Rittal L1/6
14 -K1 Phase guard CM-PFS ABB 1/5
15 -K2 Aux. relay 10A, 1CO, 230VAC G2R-1-SN 230AC Omron 3/6
16 -K2 Base for G2R-1-S P2RF-05-E Omron
17 -K3 Base for G2R-2 P2RF-08-E Omron
18 -K3 Auxiliary relay 2P. 5A LED, 2CO G2R-2-SND 24DC Omron 4/8
19 -K4 Base for G2R-2 P2RF-08-E Omron
20 -K4 Auxiliary relay 2P. 5A LED, 2CO G2R-2-SND 24DC Omron 4/12
21 -K5 Safety relay 1SAR501020R0001 ABB 4/14
22 -K6 Base 11 pole for plug in relay MT78740 Tyco Electronics
Previos page : COMPONENT LIST

Next page : C02
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:28:30
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
COPENHAGEN Approved at Alfa by. Approved at J&E by. Page C01
DENMARK R.P M.H / P.M.H Last print : 03-02-2010 16:25:56 Total no of pages : 33
J&E electric a/s

23 -K6 Level relay 24VDC CLP2ET1CM24 Carlo Gavazzi 5/1
24 -K7 Aux. relay 6A, 1CO, 24VDC G2RV-SL700-24DC Omron 13/4
30 -KPLC Key pad C7-635 KEY 6AV7635-2EC02-OAE3 Siemens 6/2
31 -M3 Panel fan / filter set SK3326.107 + 207 Rittal 2/8
32 -Q0 Fuse DIN 00 63A 3NA3822-1 Siemens
33 -Q0 Switch Fuse 125A, 3pole OS125D03 ABB 1/2
34 -Q1 Motor circuit breaker 3RV1011-1AA10 Siemens 1/5
35 -Q2 Motor circuit breaker 3RV1341-4KC10 1/8
36 -Q3 Auxiliary switch block, 1 NO 3RH1921-1CA10 Siemens 4/6
37 -Q3 Auxiliary switch block, 1 NO 3RH1921-1CA10 Siemens 10/6
38 -Q3 Auxiliary switch block, 1 NC 3RH1921-1CA01 Siemens 4/17
39 -Q3 Contactor 3RT1045-1AL20 3/14
40 -Q4 Motor circuit breaker 3RV1011-1AA10 Siemens 1/14
41 -Q5 Motor circuit breaker 3RV1011-1DA10 Siemens 2/2
42 -Q6 SUPPRESSION DIODE, DC 12...250 V 3RT1916-1DG00 Siemens
43 -Q6 Contactor 7A, S00 24VDC, 1NO 3RT1015-1BB41 Siemens 1/14
44 -S1 Mushroom pushbutton Ø40 red, 1NC XB4BS542 Telemecanique 4/14
Previos page : C01

Next page : C03
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:30:46
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
J&E electric a/s

45 -S2.P1 Head f/pilot light pushb. blue flush, f/LED ZB4BW363 Telemecanique 4/17
46 -S2.P1 Illum. pushbutton body w/LED blue, 24V AC/DC, 1NO ZB4BW0B61 Telemecanique
47 -T1 Frequency converter 380/480V 37kW 806952 Altivar 71 Telemecanique 1/8
48 -T2 Transformer 0,63KVA 1x440-230 4AM5242-8DD40-0FA0 Siemens 2/4
49 -T3 Power supply 10A, 230V AC/24V DC 6EP1334-2AA01 Siemens 2/10
50 -T4 Base 11 pole for plug in relay MT78740 Tyco Electronics
51 -T4 Level Relay 24VDC PR 2255B2 PR-electronics 5/6
52 -V1 Noise filter 115/250V, 50/60Hz, 6A 213-7110 RS-Components 2/12
53 -X2 (64) Terminals 2,5mm² WDU 2,5 Weidmüller 3/2
54 -X3 (2) Fuse terminal ASK 1/35 PA 4745.6 Weidmüller 8/4
55 -X3 (2) Terminals 2,5mm² WDU 2,5 Weidmüller 8/15
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Previos page : C02

Next page : CABLE LIST
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:30:46
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
CABLE LIST
J&E electric a/s
LINE CABLE NO WIRE ID FROM TO TYPE PAGE POS

1 -W1 1 -T1:U -Q101:1 YSY-JZ 4 X 16mm2 1
2 2 -T1:V -Q101:3 YSY-JZ 4 X 16mm2 1
3 3 -T1:W -Q101:5 YSY-JZ 4 X 16mm2 1
4 G/G -T1:PE -Q101:PE YSY-JZ 4 X 16mm2 1
5 -W2 1 -Q101:2 -M1:U YSY-JZ 4 X 16mm2 1

6 2 -Q101:4 -M1:V YSY-JZ 4 X 16mm2 1
7 3 -Q101:6 -M1:W YSY-JZ 4 X 16mm2 1
8 G/G -Q101:PE -M1:PE YSY-JZ 4 X 16mm2 1
9 -W3 1 -X2:49 VALVE BOX:L230V Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 3

10 2 -X2:50 VALVE BOX:N230V Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 3
11 -W4 1 -X2:5 VALVE BOX:25 Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 3

12 2 -X2:6 VALVE BOX:22 Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 3
13 -W5 1 -X2:3 -S102: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 3

14 2 -X2:4 -S102: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 3
15 -W6 1 -X2:79 -Q101:7 Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 3

16 2 -X2:80 -Q101:8 Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 3
Previos page : CABLE LIST

Next page : CA2
Last rev. : 16-11-2009 17:56:08
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
COPENHAGEN Approved at Alfa by. Approved at J&E by. Page CA1
J&E electric a/s

17 -W7 1 -X2:51 VALVE BOX:24VDC Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 4
18 2 -X2:52 VALVE BOX:0VDC Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 4
19 -W8 1 -X2:12 VALVE BOX:1L+ Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 4

20 2 -X2:13 VALVE BOX:1M Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 4
21 -W9 1 -X2:14 -P6:X1 Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 4

22 2 -X2:15 -P6:X2 Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 4
23 -W10 1 -X2:7 -VIBRA:6 Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 4

24 2 -X2:8 -VIBRA:7 Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 4
25 -W11 1 -X2:19 -S 101:1 Y-JZ 3 X 1,5mm2 4

26 2 -X2:18 -S 101:2 Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 4
27 -W12 1 -X2:16 -S1:21 Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 4

28 2 -X2:17 -S1:22 Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 4
29 -W13 1 -X2:20 -B101: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 5

30 2 -X2:21 -B101: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 5
Previos page : CA1

Next page : CA3
Last rev. : 16-11-2009 17:52:26
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
J&E electric a/s

31 -W14 1 -X2:22 -B102: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 5
32 2 -X2:23 -B102: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 5
33 -W15 1 -X2:1 -B103: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 6

34 2 -X2:2 -B103: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 6
35 -W16 GREEN -KPLC:DP VALVEBOX:DP 1 X 2 X 0.64mm2 6

36 RED -KPLC:DP VALVEBOX:DP 1 X 2 X 0.64mm2 6
37 -W17 1 -X2:24 -PROMAG:26 CY-OJ 4 X 1mm2 7

38 2 -X2:25 -PROMAG:27 CY-OJ 4 X 1mm2 7
39 3 -X2:26 -PROMAG:24 CY-OJ 4 X 1mm2 7
40 4 -X2:27 -PROMAG:25 CY-OJ 4 X 1mm2 7
41 -W18 1 -X2:28 -PROMAG:2 Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 7

42 2 -X2:29 -PROMAG:1 Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 7
43 -W19 1 -X2:81 -B104: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 7

44 2 -X2:82 -B104: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 7
Previos page : CA2

Next page : CA4
Last rev. : 16-11-2009 18:50:16
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
J&E electric a/s

45 -W20 1 -X2:9 VIBRA:29-34 Y-JZ 4 X 1mm2 9
46 2 -X2:10 VIBRA:35 Y-JZ 4 X 1mm2 9
47 3 -X2:11 VIBRA:30 Y-JZ 4 X 1mm2 9
48 -W21 1 -X2:41 -S103: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 11

49 2 -X2:42 -S103: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 11
50 -W22 1 -X2:43 -S104: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 11

51 2 -X2:44 -S104: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 11
52 -W23 1 -X2:45 -S105: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 11

53 2 -X2:46 -S105: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 11
54 -W24 1 -X2:47 -S106: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 11

55 2 -X2:48 -S106: Y-JZ 3 X 1mm2 11
Previos page : CA3

Next page : PLC LIST
Last rev. : 16-11-2009 18:46:20
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
PLC LIST
J&E electric a/s
LINE NAME CONN. I/O FUNCTION PAGE POS :
1 -KPLC:2 2 AO0-I SPARE 8/4

2 -KPLC:1 1 AO0-U SPARE 8/2
3 -KPLC:5 5 AO1-I SPARE 8/14
4 -KPLC:4 4 AO1-U SPARE 8/12
5 -KPLC:1 1 I124.0 SPARE 9/2
6 -KPLC:2 2 I124.1 VIBRATION EQUIPMENT CONTROL RELAY 9/4
7 -KPLC:3 3 I124.2 VIBRATION LEVEL 1 9/6
8 -KPLC:4 4 I124.3 VIBRATION LEVEL 2 9/8
9 -KPLC:5 5 I124.4 LEVEL CONTROL OPERATING WATER TANK 9/10
10 -KPLC:6 6 I124.5 SPARE 9/12
11 -KPLC:7 7 I124.6 COVER SWITCH OK 9/14
12 -KPLC:8 8 I124.7 EMERGENCY SWITCH OK 9/16
13 -KPLC:9 9 I125.0 SPARE 10/2
14 -KPLC:10 10 I125.1 SPARE 10/4
15 -KPLC:11 11 I125.2 MAIN MOTOR 10/6
16 -KPLC:12 12 I125.3 SPARE 10/8
17 -KPLC:13 13 I125.4 SPARE 10/10
18 -KPLC:14 14 I125.5 SPARE 10/12
19 -KPLC:15 15 I125.6 SPARE 10/14
20 -KPLC:16 16 I125.7 SPARE 10/16
21 -KPLC:1 1 I126.0 FEED BACK FEED PUMP M12 (OPTION) 11/2
22 -KPLC:2 2 I126.1 FEED BACK SLUDGE PUMP M8 (OPTION) 11/4
Previos page : PLC LIST

Next page : PL2
Last rev. : 16-11-2009 16:57:50
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
COPENHAGEN Approved at Alfa by. Approved at J&E by. Page PL1
J&E electric a/s
23 -KPLC:3 3 I126.2 SLUDGE SENSOR 11/6

24 -KPLC:4 4 I126.3 TURBIDITY CHECK 11/8
25 -KPLC:5 5 I126.4 SPARE 11/10
26 -KPLC:6 6 I126.5 SPARE 11/12
27 -KPLC:7 7 I126.6 SPARE 11/14
28 -KPLC:8 8 I126.7 OPERATING WATER PUMP 11/16
29 -KPLC:6 6 MANA 8/16
30 -KPLC:3 3 MANA 8/6
31 -KPLC:1 1 O124.0 SPARE 13/2
32 -KPLC:2 2 O124.1 START/STOP FEED PUMP M12 13/4
33 -KPLC:3 3 O124.2 START/STOP SLUDGE PUMP M8 13/6
34 -KPLC:4 4 O124.3 CIP ON 13/8
35 -KPLC:5 5 O124.4 ALARM 13/10
36 -KPLC:6 6 O124.5 FEED PUMP VALVE 13/12
37 -KPLC:7 7 O124.6 OPERATING WATER PUMP 13/14
38 -KPLC:8 8 O124.7 ALARM SAFETY RELAY 13/16
39 -KPLC:9 9 O125.0 SPARE 14/2
40 -KPLC:10 10 O125.1 SPARE 14/4
41 -KPLC:11 11 O125.2 SPARE 14/6
42 -KPLC:12 12 O125.3 SPARE 14/8
43 -KPLC:13 13 O125.4 SPARE 14/10
44 -KPLC:14 14 O125.5 SPARE 14/12
Previos page : PL1

Next page : PL3
Last rev. : 25-01-2010 15:17:00
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk
J&E electric a/s
45 -KPLC:15 15 O125.6 SPARE 14/14

46 -KPLC:16 16 O125.7 SPARE 14/16
47 -KPLC:AI0-I AI0-I PEW:256 VIBRO SENSOR 7/2
48 -KPLC:AI0-C AI0-C PEW:256 7/4
49 -KPLC:AI1-C AI1-C PEW:258 7/7
50 -KPLC:AI1-I AI1-I PEW:258 RPM MAIN MOTOR 7/5
51 -KPLC:AI2-C AI2-C PEW:260 7/10
52 -KPLC:AI2-I AI2-I PEW:260 FT 01 7/8
53 -KPLC:AI3-I AI3-I PEW:262 TT 01 7/11
54 -KPLC:AI3-C AI3-C PEW:262 7/13
55 -KPLC:AIR-P AIR-P PEW:264 TEMPERATURE SENSOR PT100 FEED 7/14
56 -KPLC:AIR-N AIR-N PEW:264 7/16
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
Previos page : PL2

Next page :
Last rev. : 16-11-2009 17:29:22
Tel. +45 44 68 07 77 - Fax +45 44 68 29 99
www.je-el.dk

Technical Documentation 810

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Documentation 810

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Documentation

To navigate please use bookmarks.

MU order no. 36608 SC order no. stock Sales Company

Including: Motor power supply

EE1 VFD Starter Y/D Starter

EE7 Adapter for solids outlet Language of

Quantity Item no Description

Basic Separator S01, Type AFPX 810XGV-14CG Article number 881264-04-01

EE12 Pump unit for feed - on request

Quantity Item no Description

Item number * Name Description Qty Supplier Goods receiver

9680162061 EE5-P03 FAT PIPING -S01 TO B10 1 16936

Product No. 881264-04-01/3

© Alfa Laval Tumba AB 2010 July 01

1 Read This First .............................................................. .9

2 Safety Instructions .................................................. .11

3 Basic Principles Of Separation ....................... .19

4 Design ............................................................................... .21

5 Operating Instructions.......................................... .51

6 Service, Dismantling, Assembly ..................... .67

7 Fault Finding ...............................................................197

1 Read This First

If the separator has been delivered and

In addition to this Separator Manual a

The Separator Manual consists of:

Basic Principles of Separation

Design and function

Service, Dismantling, Assembly

A complete reading of this manual by personnel in

The centrifuge includes parts that rotate at

Manufacturing tolerances are extremely fine.

• Use only Alfa Laval genuine spare parts and

• When power cables are connected,

• Wear on the large lock ring thread must

• Welding or heating of parts that rotate

• Use correct lifting tools and follow lifting

Skin irritation hazards

• When using chemical cleaning agents,

• Sharp edges on bowl discs and threads

• Risk for accidental release of snap rings

• Make sure that rotating parts have come

• To avoid accidental start, switch off and

Assemble the machine completely

• Follow local regulations for electrical

• Use ear protection in noisy

• Lubrication oil and various machine

• Risk for unhealthy dust when handling

2.1 Warning signs in text

DANGER indicates an imminently

WARNING indicates a potentially

CAUTION indicates a potentially

NOTE indicates a potentially hazardous

2.2 Environmental issues

3 Basic Principles Of Separation

• free a liquid of solid particles,

3.1 Separation By Gravity

3.2 Centrifugal Separation

Separation and sedimentation is continuous

Viscosity Density difference

Low density difference

High density difference.

4.1 Overview An operating water module, abbreviated

4.1.1 Mechanical power

Frequency drive motor